EE Raceway Modeling

Reference Guide
Document Number DPDS3-PB-200005B DPDS3-PB-200005C DPDS3-PB-200005D DPDS3-PB-200005E Version PDS 7.2 PDS 7.2 PDS 7.3 PDS 8.0 SE Date February 2003 February 2003 October 2004 November 2005 Pages 1-594 595-643 644-679 Cover/Notice

Copyright
Copyright © 1984-2005 Intergraph Corporation. All Rights Reserved. Including software, file formats, and audiovisual displays; may be used pursuant to applicable software license agreement; contains confidential and proprietary information of Intergraph and/or third parties which is protected by copyright law, trade secret law, and international treaty, and may not be provided or otherwise made available without proper authorization.

Restricted Rights Legend
Use, duplication, or disclosure by the Government is subject to restrictions as set forth in subparagraph (c) of the Contractor Rights in Technical Data clause at DFARS 252.2277013, subparagraph (b) of the Rights in Computer Software or Computer Software Documentation clause at DFARS 252.227-7014, subparagraphs (b)(1) and (2) of the License clause at DFARS 252.227-7015, or subparagraphs (c) (1) and (2) of Commercial Computer Software---Restricted Rights at 48 CFR 52.227-19, as applicable. Unpublished---rights reserved under the copyright laws of the United States. Intergraph Corporation Huntsville, Alabama 35894-0001

Warranties and Liabilities
All warranties given by Intergraph Corporation about equipment or software are set forth in your purchase contract, and nothing stated in, or implied by, this document or its contents shall be considered or deemed a modification or amendment of such warranties. Intergraph believes the information in this publication is accurate as of its publication date. The information and the software discussed in this document are subject to change without notice and are subject to applicable technical product descriptions. Intergraph Corporation is not responsible for any error that may appear in this document. The software discussed in this document is furnished under a license and may be used or copied only in accordance with the terms of this license. No responsibility is assumed by Intergraph for the use or reliability of software on equipment that is not supplied by Intergraph or its affiliated companies. THE USER OF THE SOFTWARE IS EXPECTED TO MAKE THE FINAL EVALUATION AS TO THE USEFULNESS OF THE SOFTWARE IN HIS OWN ENVIRONMENT.

Trademarks
Intergraph, the Intergraph logo, SmartSketch, FrameWorks, SmartPlant, INtools, MARIAN, and PDS are registered trademarks of Intergraph Corporation. Microsoft and Windows are registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation. MicroStation is a registered trademark of Bentley Systems, Inc. ISOGEN is a registered trademark of Alias Limited. Other brands and product names are trademarks of their respective owners.

_ _______________
Table of Contents
If You Need Assistance ........................................................................................................ Intergraph Directory ............................................................................................................. Preface ................................................................................................................................................. Document Purpose ................................................................................................................ Document Prerequisites / Audience ...................................................................................... Related Documents/Products ................................................................................................ About this Document ............................................................................................................ Ordering Information ............................................................................................................ Additional Information ......................................................................................................... General Conventions .................................................................................................................... Keyboard Conventions ......................................................................................................... Terminology ......................................................................................................................... 1. Introduction .................................................................................................................................. About the Reference Guide .......................................................................................................... Basic Workstation Skills .............................................................................................................. 2. Installation Instructions ................................................................................................................ Assumptions ......................................................................................................................... Overview ............................................................................................................................... Upgrading the Workstation .......................................................................................................... Installation Procedure .................................................................................................................. Databases ..................................................................................................................................... 3. Electrical Engineer (EE) Environment ......................................................................................... Using the Electrical Engineer Menus ........................................................................................... Create ........................................................................................................................................... Enter ............................................................................................................................................. Product Menu ............................................................................................................................... Copy ............................................................................................................................................. Delete ........................................................................................................................................... Archive ......................................................................................................................................... Restore ......................................................................................................................................... Database Utilities ......................................................................................................................... RIS schema utilities .............................................................................................................. Update Project Schema .........................................................................................................

Table of Contents

17 17 19 19 19 19 19 20 20 21 22 23 25 25 26 27 27 27 28 29 33 35 36 39 40 42 43 44 46 48 50 51 52

3

_ _______________
Update Reference Schema .................................................................................................... 4. Electrical Engineer (EE) Raceway Environment ......................................................................... Create ........................................................................................................................................... Design .......................................................................................................................................... Process ......................................................................................................................................... Overview ............................................................................................................................... Operating Modes .................................................................................................................. EDEN ........................................................................................................................................... Operating Modes .................................................................................................................. Entering Time in Batch Mode .............................................................................................. Report ........................................................................................................................................... Overview ............................................................................................................................... A Special Note for Bill of Materials by Volume .................................................................. Rule Checks ................................................................................................................................. Overview ............................................................................................................................... Utilities ......................................................................................................................................... Copy ...................................................................................................................................... Delete .................................................................................................................................... Undelete ................................................................................................................................ Purge ..................................................................................................................................... Rename ................................................................................................................................. Send ...................................................................................................................................... Receive ................................................................................................................................. Archive ................................................................................................................................. Restore .................................................................................................................................. Output ................................................................................................................................... 5. EE Graphics Interface Elements .................................................................................................. Start-up Sequence ........................................................................................................................ Screen Display ............................................................................................................................. EERWAY Command Menu Bar .................................................................................................. Palettes in the EE Raceway Graphics Environment .................................................................... Identifying Elements .................................................................................................................... Working Units and Precision Key-ins ......................................................................................... Working Units in MU:SU:PU .............................................................................................. Precision Key-ins .................................................................................................................. 55 59 61 63 64 64 65 67 68 69 70 70 72 73 73 75 78 79 80 81 82 83 84 86 87 89 91 92 93 96 97 103 104 104 105

4

_ _______________
6. Workflow and Procedures ............................................................................................................ The Drawing Process ................................................................................................................... System Manager Setup ......................................................................................................... Drawing Setup ...................................................................................................................... Define Systems and Set Active Systems .............................................................................. Define One-Line Type and Set Active One-Line Type ........................................................ Set Symbology ...................................................................................................................... Set Active Parameters ........................................................................................................... Set Propagation Parameters .................................................................................................. Place One-Line ..................................................................................................................... Propagation ........................................................................................................................... Sketch and Eden Modes ........................................................................................................ Manual Fitting Placement ..................................................................................................... Seamless Tubing Representations ........................................................................................ Databases ..................................................................................................................................... Reference Database ............................................................................................................... Project Database ................................................................................................................... Reports ......................................................................................................................................... Interference Detection .................................................................................................................. 7. Precision Input Form .................................................................................................................... View ...................................................................................................................................... Maximize/Minimize ............................................................................................................. Cancel ................................................................................................................................... Reject .................................................................................................................................... Accept ................................................................................................................................... Move/Move To Toggle ......................................................................................................... Display Fields ....................................................................................................................... Active Point Coordinates Display ........................................................................................ Justification Point ................................................................................................................. Height and Width .................................................................................................................. Construct Point ............................................................................................................................ Midpoint/Any Point on Segment ................................................................................................. Extend/Reduce Run ..................................................................................................................... Distance and Direction ................................................................................................................. Runtime Setup .............................................................................................................................. 8. Design Commands ....................................................................................................................... Commands ............................................................................................................................ Using the Design Commands .......................................................................................................

Table of Contents

107 108 109 110 110 110 110 111 111 112 113 113 113 114 115 115 115 117 118 119 120 120 120 120 120 121 121 121 122 122 123 123 125 126 127 129 129 131

5

_ _______________
When to Use These Commands ............................................................................................ Before Using These Commands ........................................................................................... Group Workflow ................................................................................................................... Operating Information .......................................................................................................... Place One-Line ............................................................................................................................. Steps ...................................................................................................................................... Route Around Vessel ................................................................................................................... Steps ...................................................................................................................................... Insert RCP .................................................................................................................................... Steps ...................................................................................................................................... Rotate Cross Section .................................................................................................................... Steps ...................................................................................................................................... Place Drop Point .......................................................................................................................... Steps ...................................................................................................................................... Place Equipment Pointer .............................................................................................................. Steps ...................................................................................................................................... Define Active Point ...................................................................................................................... Steps ...................................................................................................................................... Set Active Parameters .................................................................................................................. Steps ...................................................................................................................................... Place Manual Fitting .................................................................................................................... Conduit Sizing ............................................................................................................................. Field Descriptions ........................................................................................... Insert One-Line Vertex ................................................................................................................ Place Field Routed Raceway ....................................................................................................... Define Duct Cross Section ........................................................................................................... Place Stub Up ............................................................................................................................... Steps ................................................................................................................ 131 131 131 131 132 134 135 136 138 138 140 140 142 142 144 144 145 145 146 146 147 155 156 160 161 164 167 169

6

_ _______________
9. Modify Commands ...................................................................................................................... Using the Modify Commands ...................................................................................................... When to Use These Commands ............................................................................................ Before Using These Commands ........................................................................................... Group Workflow ................................................................................................................... Operating Information .......................................................................................................... Modify Element Commands ........................................................................................................ Using the Modify Element Commands ................................................................................ When to Use These Commands ............................................................................................ Before Using These Commands ........................................................................................... Group Workflow ................................................................................................................... Operating Information .......................................................................................................... Annotate Element ................................................................................................................. Field Descriptions ................................................................................................................. Copy Element ....................................................................................................................... Steps ................................................................................................................ Move Element ....................................................................................................................... Steps ................................................................................................................ Clone Element ...................................................................................................................... Steps ................................................................................................................ Move One-Line Segment ...................................................................................................... Steps ................................................................................................................ Move One-Line Vertex ......................................................................................................... Propagate Element ................................................................................................................ Edit/Insert Manual Fitting ..................................................................................................... Modify One-Line .................................................................................................................. Place Fitting by Rule ............................................................................................................ Combine Coincident RCPs ................................................................................................... Delete Duplicate One-Lines .................................................................................................. Delete Element ...................................................................................................................... Remove RCP ........................................................................................................................ Delete Fitting ........................................................................................................................ Remove One-Line Vertex ..................................................................................................... Minimize Joints .................................................................................................................... Steps ................................................................................................................

Table of Contents

173 174 174 174 174 174 175 177 177 177 177 177 178 179 184 185 186 187 188 189 190 191 192 194 198 204 207 209 211 212 214 216 217 219 220

7

_ _______________
Change System Parameters ................................................................................................... Modify Group Commands ........................................................................................................... Topics ................................................................................................................................... Using the Modify Group Commands ................................................................................... When to Use These Commands ............................................................................................ Before Using These Commands ........................................................................................... Group Workflow ................................................................................................................... Operating Information .......................................................................................................... Define Group ........................................................................................................................ Steps ................................................................................................................ Copy Element by Group ....................................................................................................... Annotate Element by Group ................................................................................................. Clone Element by Group ...................................................................................................... Propagate by Group .............................................................................................................. Place Fitting by Rule by Group ............................................................................................ Steps ................................................................................................................ Add Systems Group .............................................................................................................. Replace Systems by Group ................................................................................................... Minimize Joints by Group .................................................................................................... Delete Element by Group ..................................................................................................... 10. Setup Commands ....................................................................................................................... Using the Setup Commands ......................................................................................................... When to Use These Commands ............................................................................................ Before Using These Commands ........................................................................................... Group Workflow ................................................................................................................... Operating Information .......................................................................................................... Set Raceway Defaults .................................................................................................................. Define System .............................................................................................................................. Define One-Line Type ................................................................................................................. Set Symbology Control ................................................................................................................ Steps ................................................................................................................ Symbology Control ...................................................................................................................... Set Text Defaults .......................................................................................................................... Set Conduit Sizing Attributes ...................................................................................................... Create Cell Commands ................................................................................................................ Using the Create Cell Commands ......................................................................................... When to Use These Commands ............................................................................................ 221 223 223 225 225 225 225 225 226 230 231 233 239 241 243 244 245 246 248 251 253 255 255 255 255 255 256 258 260 262 263 264 266 268 269 270 270

8

_ _______________
Before Using These Commands ........................................................................................... Group Workflow ................................................................................................................... Operating Information .......................................................................................................... Create Model Cell ................................................................................................................. Create Equipment Pointer Cell ............................................................................................. Create Drop Point Cell .......................................................................................................... Model Commands ........................................................................................................................ Using the Model Commands ................................................................................................ When to Use These Commands ............................................................................................ Before Using These Commands ........................................................................................... Group Workflow ................................................................................................................... Operating Information .......................................................................................................... Lock Model ........................................................................................................................... Move Model Annotation ....................................................................................................... Unlock Model ....................................................................................................................... Annotate Model .................................................................................................................... 11. Runtime Setup Commands ......................................................................................................... Using the Runtime Setup Commands .......................................................................................... When to Use These Commands ............................................................................................ Before Using These Commands ........................................................................................... Group Workflow ................................................................................................................... Operating Information .......................................................................................................... Set Active One-Line Type Parameters ......................................................................................... Set Active One-Line Type ........................................................................................................... Set Active System ........................................................................................................................ Propagation Setup ........................................................................................................................ Set Active Levels ......................................................................................................................... Display Element Information ....................................................................................................... 12. Utilities Commands .................................................................................................................... Using the Utilities Commands ..................................................................................................... When to Use These Commands ............................................................................................ Before Using These Commands ........................................................................................... Group Workflow ................................................................................................................... Operating Information .......................................................................................................... Toggle Construction Display On/Off ........................................................................................... Highlight Element by Sector/Word ............................................................................................. Highlight Sector/Word With Filename .................................................................................

Table of Contents

270 270 270 271 274 277 280 281 281 281 281 281 282 283 284 285 287 288 288 288 288 288 289 294 295 297 299 301 303 305 305 305 305 305 306 307 307

9

_ _______________
Highlight Element by ASID ID ................................................................................................... Highlight ASID ID With Filename ....................................................................................... Highlight Element by Link .......................................................................................................... Highlight Link With Filename .............................................................................................. Highlight Propagation Errors ....................................................................................................... Display Sector/Word Value ......................................................................................................... Display Element Type and ASID ID ........................................................................................... Display Link ................................................................................................................................. Display System and One-Line Type ............................................................................................ Active Coordinate System ........................................................................................................... 13. Database Commands .................................................................................................................. Using the Database Commands ................................................................................................... When to Use These Commands ............................................................................................ Before Using These Commands ........................................................................................... Group Workflow ................................................................................................................... Operating Information .......................................................................................................... Load Database .............................................................................................................................. Steps ................................................................................................................ Report ........................................................................................................................................... A Special Note for Bill of Materials by Volume .................................................................. Rule Checks ................................................................................................................................. 14. Raceway Processes ..................................................................................................................... Load Database .............................................................................................................................. Batch File Option ............................................................................................ Unload Design ............................................................................................................................. Unload Sheet ................................................................................................................................ Cleanup Database ......................................................................................................................... Create Interference Envelope (default name) .............................................................................. Create Interference Envelope (given name) ................................................................................. 15. Eden Processes ........................................................................................................................... Compile EDEN Symbol ............................................................................................................... Delete EDEN Symbol .................................................................................................................. 309 309 312 312 314 315 316 317 318 320 321 322 322 322 322 322 323 325 326 327 329 331 332 335 336 338 340 342 344 347 349 351

10

_ _______________
Steps ................................................................................................................ List EDEN Symbol Library ......................................................................................................... Steps ................................................................................................................ List EDEN User Functions .......................................................................................................... Merge EDEN Symbol Libraries ................................................................................................... Compress EDEN Symbol Library ............................................................................................... Extract EDEN Symbol From Library .......................................................................................... Steps ................................................................................................................ Extract EDEN User Function From Library ................................................................................ Edit EDEN Symbol File .............................................................................................................. Steps ................................................................................................................ 16. Integrated Commands ................................................................................................................ Using the Integrated Commands .................................................................................................. When to Use These Commands ............................................................................................ Before Using These Commands ........................................................................................... Group Workflow ................................................................................................................... Operating Information .......................................................................................................... 16.1 Review PDS Attributes ............................................................................................................ Parameters ............................................................................................................................. 16.2 Reference PDS Model .............................................................................................................. Parameters ............................................................................................................................. 16.3 Window to Named PDS Item ................................................................................................... Options .................................................................................................................................. 16.4 Review PDS Clash ................................................................................................................... Parameters ............................................................................................................................. Appendix A: Appendix B: Error Messages ........................................................................................................... System/Application Manager Information .................................................................

Table of Contents

352 353 354 355 357 359 361 362 363 366 367 369 370 370 370 370 370 371 371 372 372 374 374 375 375 377 415 417 422

Customizing ................................................................................................................................. EE Environment Variables ..........................................................................................................

11

_ _______________
Appendix C: EE Databases .............................................................................................................. 425 426 427 427 428 430 430 430 432 432 433 433 433 434 435 435 436 437 437 438 438 439 440 440 441 443 444 445 446 448 449 449 449 450 451 454 454 454 455 456 457 458 Relational Interface System (RIS) ............................................................................................... Database and RIS Procedures ...................................................................................................... For New Users ...................................................................................................................... Update Schema (create_db) Process ............................................................................................ Reference Schema - General Description .................................................................................... Default Attributes ................................................................................................................. Keys ...................................................................................................................................... Codelists ............................................................................................................................... Approval Status Codelist Table ............................................................................................ Cardinal Codelist Table ........................................................................................................ Drawing Type Codelist Table ............................................................................................... Manual Fitting Part Codelist Table ....................................................................................... One-Line Type Codelist Table ............................................................................................. RCP Type Codelist Table ..................................................................................................... System Codelist Table .......................................................................................................... Three-Line Type Codelist Table ........................................................................................... Three_Line Subtype Codelist Table ..................................................................................... Three-Line Qualifier Codelist Table ..................................................................................... Units Codelist Table ............................................................................................................. Vendor Codelist Table .......................................................................................................... Wire/Cable Code Codelist Table .......................................................................................... Wire/Cable Configuration Codelist Table ............................................................................ Wire/Cable Size Codelist Table ............................................................................................ Wire/Cable Color Codelist Table ......................................................................................... Wire/Cable Voltage Codelist Table ...................................................................................... Wire/Cable Insulation Type Codelist Table ......................................................................... Yes-No Codelist Table ......................................................................................................... Fitting Environment Rules .................................................................................................... Project Schema - General Description ......................................................................................... Updating Schemas ....................................................................................................................... Updating a Project Schema ................................................................................................... Updating Reference Schemas ............................................................................................... Schema Names ...................................................................................................................... Modifying the Reference Schema ................................................................................................ EE Raceway Reference Database Schema Description ............................................................... approv_status ........................................................................................................................ away_part .............................................................................................................................. away_spec ............................................................................................................................. cardinal ................................................................................................................................. cond_body ............................................................................................................................. cond_fill_calc .......................................................................................................................

12

_ _______________
cond_part .............................................................................................................................. cond_spec ............................................................................................................................. drawing ................................................................................................................................. drawing_type ........................................................................................................................ drop_point ............................................................................................................................. duct_spec .............................................................................................................................. ee_cond_x_area .................................................................................................................... ee_graphic_only .................................................................................................................... ee_pcbl_code ........................................................................................................................ ee_pcbl_color ........................................................................................................................ ee_pcbl_config ...................................................................................................................... ee_pcbl_insul ........................................................................................................................ ee_pcbl_size .......................................................................................................................... ee_pcbl_volt .......................................................................................................................... ee_pseudo_cable ................................................................................................................... ee_system .............................................................................................................................. ee_units ................................................................................................................................. ee_unique .............................................................................................................................. ee_yes_no ............................................................................................................................. envelope ................................................................................................................................ light_fixture .......................................................................................................................... manual_part .......................................................................................................................... mscatalog .............................................................................................................................. mscodelist ............................................................................................................................. mscolumns ............................................................................................................................ ol_type .................................................................................................................................. one_line ................................................................................................................................. panel ...................................................................................................................................... project ................................................................................................................................... pullbox .................................................................................................................................. rcp ......................................................................................................................................... rcp_type ................................................................................................................................ tl_fit_env ............................................................................................................................... tl_qual ................................................................................................................................... tl_subtype .............................................................................................................................. tl_type ................................................................................................................................... to_equip ................................................................................................................................ to_support ............................................................................................................................. tray_part ................................................................................................................................ tray_spec ............................................................................................................................... vendor ................................................................................................................................... wway_part ............................................................................................................................. wway_spec ............................................................................................................................ EE Raceway Project Database Schema Description .................................................................... cabsch_spec .......................................................................................................................... cndsch_spec .......................................................................................................................... drawing ................................................................................................................................. drop_point .............................................................................................................................

Table of Contents

459 460 461 461 462 462 463 463 464 464 464 465 465 465 466 466 467 467 467 468 469 471 471 472 473 474 475 475 476 477 478 478 479 480 480 480 481 481 482 483 484 484 485 487 487 489 491 491

13

..........................dat ..................................................... mscatalog ........................................................................................................................................................................................................ one_line .................................................................... manager............................ fit_to_sys ........................................................................ EE Raceway File Structure ..................................................................................... Appendix E: Eden Symbol Generation .................................................... Appendix G: Customizing Environment Files ..........................................dat ...................................................................................................... rcp ................................................................................................................................................................... EE Nucleus File Structure ............................................................................................. panel_to_drw ........................................................................................................................................................... Appendix D: Specification ......................................................................................dat ............................................................................................................................................... Appendix F: EE File Structure ................................................................................................................................................................................................................. envelope ................................................................ 492 492 493 493 494 495 496 497 498 498 500 500 501 501 502 502 503 504 505 505 507 507 509 510 512 513 513 519 520 524 531 531 533 534 535 536 537 Preparing the Specifications ..... eden............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. fitting .............................. rcp_to_drw ............................................................................................................ 14 ..................................................................................... panel ........... rule_chk.............................................................._ _______________ duct_fill ..................................................................................................................................................................................................................dat .................... ol_to_sys ................................................................................................................. rcp_to_sys ......................... Available Fittings . straight ........... process........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... print............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... mscolumns ............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Update Reference Schema ............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................dat ....................................................................................................................................................... project ............................................................. sys_to_drw ... ee_pseudo_cable .... str_to_sys ........................................................................................................................................................................................................... report..............................................................................................dat ..... ee_system .................................................................................. Sample ...........................unl Files .................................. Symbol Processor File ........... to_support .........................

.......................................................................................................................................................................................................... Alter Table Form ............................................ Raceway Bill of Materials Report (rway_bom) ...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Drop Schema Form ............. A Special Note for Bill of Materials by Volume ............................................................ Alter Schema Form ..................... Raceway Blank Part IDs (blank_ids) ............................................................................................................................................. 15 ..... RIS Report Processing ............ Schema File Form ................................................................................................................................................ Project Drawing List (drwlst) ................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................cmd file ............................... Table of Contents 539 543 545 545 547 547 547 547 548 548 548 549 549 549 550 550 551 551 552 552 552 553 554 555 556 556 557 557 558 559 559 560 560 Schema Information Form .............................. Information Output: .............................. Associated Software/Files ............... Create Schema Form ..................................................................................................................................................................................................... Information Output: ...................................................................................................................... Appendix J: Reports ................................._ _______________ Appendix H: alias.................. Material Takeoff Report (mto_rpt) ................................................................................. Associated Software/Files ....................................... Appendix I: rway............................................................................................................................................. Associated Software/Files ................................................................................................................ Data Definition Form ...................... Associated Software/Files ................................................................. Table Information Form ............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................ Create Table Form ..................... Raceway Bill of Materials by Volume Report (rway_bom_vol) ........................................................................................................................................................................................... Sorted by (Highest to lowest priority) .....................................................................................................................cmd .................................. Associated Software/Files ....................................................................................................................... Set Form .......................... Drop Table Form ........................................... Information Output: ................................................................................................. Appendix K: RIS Schema Manager .................................................................................................... Information Output: ...................................................................................................................................................................................... Information Output: ......................

................................................................................................................................. 561 565 566 567 571 573 581 In this Appendix .......................................................................................................... Glossary ................. Index ..................... Appendix N: EE Configure ........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................ 16 ..................................................................._ _______________ Appendix L: Appendix M: RIS Schema Definition File ....................................................................................................................... EE Manager .... Database Edit Functions ...................................................................................

asp. please call your local Intergraph office. use a World Wide Web browser to connect to http://www. up-to-the-minute information about Intergraph’s products.intergraph.intergraph.com. Power & Offshore 300 Intergraph Way Madison._ _______________ If You Need Assistance Intergraph Online Our web site brings you fast. please call your local Intergraph office. If you are outside of the United States. convenient.S.com.) Mailing Address Intergraph Process.S. 17 . If you are outside the United States.S.A.com/ppo/services/support. Only) 1-256-730-5400 (Outside the U. services. and direction. You can also reach us by electronic mail at info@intergraph.com.intergraph. Table of Contents Support For the lasest Support Services information. Alabama 35758 U. Intergraph General Information All countries — 1-256-730-2000 Training Registration 1-800-766-7701 (U. Intergraph Directory The following numbers are only valid in the United States unless otherwise indicated. Our web address is: http://www. The most upto-date list of international offices and distributors is available on the web at http://www.

let us know._ _______________ Documentation Contacts We are constantly working on updates and improvements to the documents and other educational media. AL 35758 18 . Power & Offshore Documentation Manager 300 Intergraph Way Madison. If you have any suggestions on where we can improve the documentation or where you think more information is needed. You can reach us by: Mail Intergraph Process.

It is recommended that you work through the EE Raceway Modeling Course Guide to learn the basic concepts of the product. Currently. modify. it is organized around the structure of the product rather than presenting a typical work flow. and Ingres. Knowledge of 3-D design systems is helpful but not necessary. along with a relational database management system (RDBMS) supported by RIS. such as vi or EMACS. and model electrical raceway systems in a three-dimensional environment. numbered sections. 19 . Information about MicroStation capabilities can be found in the following documents: MicroStation Reference Guide MicroStation User’s Guide Intergraph Corporation’s Relational Interface System (RIS)TM is required to operate EE Raceway. much of this document is devoted to a description of those commands. you should be familiar with a text editor. grouped according to function. Information about RIS capabilities can be found in the following documents: Relational Interface System (RIS) Reference Manual Relational Interface System (RIS) Operator Training Guide About this Document This document contains front matter. Use this guide when you need to look up a specific EE Raceway function. a glossary. and an index._ _______________ Preface Document Purpose Preface This document is a reference guide for Intergraph Corporation’s Electrical Engineer (EE) Raceway Modeling tm software package. This document is designed as a reference. Oracle. these include Informix. EE Raceway is a MicroStation graphics based software and lets you design. Because the design process is controlled by executing commands. appendices. Also. Related Documents/Products MicroStation  software is required to operate EE Raceway. Document Prerequisites / Audience This document is intended for designers who have a working knowledge of the standard interactive graphics system.

This includes information on the screen display. Lists the names and dates of the files in the current release.February 2003 Section 1 Section 2 Sections 3 & 4 Provides an overview of the product and the document. File Name readme._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . For a fixes release. For international locations. menus.txt Contents Describes changes and additions to the product since the last version. Describe the command groups and operating sequences of each command within the command groups. Describes the graphics environment for the product. 20 . Includes Comments and Trouble Report numbers which describe what problems have been fixed. and on-line Help. contact the Intergraph subsidiary or distributor from whom you purchased your workstation. Additional Information The following informational files are delivered with the EE Raceway software in the win32app\ingr\eerway directory. Lists any exceptions made to the certification. Section 5 Section 6 Sections 7-16 Ordering Information To order documents: Within the United States. Describes the typical workflow using EE Raceway. the files which have been modified are appended to the top of the initial file to provide a history of all changes to the product. Provides special notices to the customer. forms. Provides installation instructions. Describe the product environment. This includes information on accessing the product and creating and manipulating product files. contact your Customer Engineer or Sales Account Representative.

Sans serif Indicates a system prompt or message. which requires an action be taken by the user. Preface Typefaces Italic Indicates a system response. The text is placed in the viewing plane. The ASCII report is stored in the layout. Select first segment of alignment Bold Typewriter Indicates what you should literally type in. Key in original. The use of different fonts for different types of information allows you to scan the document for key concepts or commands. or dialog box title. For example. Command paths are shown using an arrow between command names. For example. For example. Normal Typewriter Indicates an actual file or directory name. 21 . For example. For example. Bold Indicates a command name. which is an explanation of what the software is doing. or groups of related information. parameter name._ _______________ General Conventions This document contains many visual cues to help you understand the meaning of certain words or phrases.rpt file. phrases. Symbols help abbreviate and identify commonly used words.dat to load the ASCII file. Choose File > Open to load a new file.

February 2003 Symbols This document uses the following symbols to represent mouse buttons and to identify special information: <C> <D> <R> <T> Command button Data button (usually the left mouse button) Reset/reject button (usually the right mouse button) Tentative button (usually the center mouse button) Note — Important supplemental information. ALT CTRL DEL ENTER ESC CTRL+z ESC. You can make some menu selections through the use of keyboard accelerators. provides a tip or hint for doing the exercises. More information — indicates there is additional or related information. Map or path — shows you how to get to a specific command or form. 22 . To press the Escape key. then K._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . which map menu selections to key combinations. Technical tip or information — provides information on what the software is doing or how it processes information. Need a hint — used with activities and labs.k Alternate key Control key Delete key Enter key Escape key To hold down the Control key and press Z. Keyboard Conventions The following list outlines the abbreviations this document uses for keyboard keys and describes how to use them in combination. Warning — Critical information that could cause the loss of data if not followed.

you click the action you want to affect the item. To select and execute a command by clicking the mouse or hand-held cursor button twice in rapid succession. pressing TAB after keying in data will enter the data and move the cursor to the next field._ _______________ Terminology Click To use a mouse or key combination to pick an item that begins an action. then click Delete to remove it from the directory. Tentative-select To place a tentative point on an existing graphic element in a design file. such as selecting toggle buttons. For example. Select the line string to define the graphic template. In a dialog box. Selecting does not initiate an action. For example. To key a character string into a text box. Drag To press and hold the data button (<D>) while moving the mouse or hand-held cursor. you tentative-select by pressing a left-button. In addition. This also applies to selecting graphic elements from the design file. Double-click on the file original. right-button chord. For example.dat from the list box. To type in data and press ENTER to enter the data and execute the default action.dat to load it into the new surface. For example. you would select items to define parameters. Click Apply to save the changes. Preface Double-click Type Key in 23 . If you are using the Windows NT operating system. Select To mark an item by highlighting it with key combinations or by picking it with your cursor. Select the file original. After selecting an item. This term implies that you are clicking the data button (<D>) as part of a menu or dialog box action.

_ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide .February 2003 24 .

Introduction EE Raceway allows you to design. modify. including: Model building – Uses either a centerline or a three-line component graphic to build a three-dimensional raceway model. You can also use EE Raceway models as background drawings for designs created in other PDS facility design disciplines._ _______________ 1. provides descriptions of EE Raceway commands and processes. Interference detection – Creates the raceway component interference envelope files for input to the PDS interference detection task. Material takeoff – Extracts a list of material required to construct a raceway model. Introduction 1. the EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide. Separate sections outline the preparation and responsibilities for the system and/or application manager. 25 . It describes the basic workflow for creating an electrical raceway model. Introduction About the Reference Guide This document. EE Raceway serves a variety of general purposes. and model electrical raceway systems in a threedimensional environment.

These and other skills can be learned in Microstation Training materials: Fit view Window area Zoom in & out File design Compress Update Toggle between virtual screens Turn views on & off 26 ._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide .February 2003 Basic Workstation Skills The following basic workstation drafting skills are necessary to use the EE Raceway Modeling product.

The software covered includes baseline and application software. Electrical Engineer (EE) Nucleus software. or Ingres. Download/Install Overview This chapter covers the following topics pertaining to installation/upgrading: Upgrading the Workstation Installation Procedure Databases 27 . Installation Instructions This section is an instruction sheet both for initial installation and for updating the workstation software. If you are updating. You must be familiar with the PDS Loader. or Notepad. all projects have been archived._ _______________ 2. and EE Raceway Modeling. EMACS. You will need to consult individual documentation for these products for detailed information. 2. On-line Informix. You must be familiar with a text editor. Products will be used with any one of the following databases: Standard Engine (SE) Informix. such as vi. Installation Instructions Assumptions The following assumptions have been made in the writing of this section. Oracle.

Additionally. the workstation as server. For the purposes of this installation. or remotely on a server. 28 . — Placing the project database locally on each workstation and the reference database remotely on a server._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . and the server-client workstation. — Placing both project and reference databases remotely on a server. The chapter also outlines the basic workflow for database setup and refers you to appropriate database documentation. it describes the applications software necessary for each of three possible configurations: the stand-alone workstation. A database can reside locally on each workstation. you must select the Relational Database Management System (RDBMS) you plan to use and decide where to locate it on your system. First. You must also know before beginning to download products that the order in which you load them is very important. you should load system nucleus software. followed by system application software (including EE Nucleus). you have three options: — Placing both project and reference databases locally on each workstation.February 2003 Upgrading the Workstation This section describes the loading procedure and details the software you will need to operate your system. There are several things you must do before loading any software to your workstation. followed by the EE application products. Based on these two setups.

2. Pressing Enter will have no effect until all fields have been entered. Once you know what application software you need. company. Select Continue to invoke the Intergraph Registration Data form. First. Download/Install 3. 1. Select Continue when the button is no longer inactive. Installation Procedure 2. based on your system configuration.exe to invoke the Intergraph PDS Component Loader. This may be a networked drive. including a valid serial number. The Continue button will remain inactive until a valid serial number has been keyed in. or it may be on your local system. connect to the drive on which the distribution software resides. the loader delivered to stand-alone EE Raceway sites may vary slightly. This form expects your user name. 4. and serial number (as delivered). Double-click on setup. 29 . follow these steps to download all of the desired products to a Windows NT/2000/XP system._ _______________ Installation Procedure This section’s examples assume that you are running the loader delivered with PDS. This will invoke the product selection form.

) If client is selected. and a local path to the icon associated with the software. (Note that the icon path changes as you edit the install path. (Note that the icon path changes as you edit the install path. 30 . or server).February 2003 5. If local is selected. select Load Components. you must key in the path to the location to which you want to install the software. as well as path to the software on the server. you must provide the installation path. Place an X next to the software you wish to install. This will invoke the installation data form for each selection. This will return control to the Intergraph PDS Component Loader. Among other installation options that vary according to product. If server is selected. you must provide the name of the server which will be hosting the session._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . When all software to be loaded has been selected. you will be asked to select the Installation Type (local. A message box will appear.) When all information has been provided. client. select OK.

you will modify this copied file. 6.) 7. A message box will display that tells you which products are being loaded. Use the browse command to locate and open the new ee. you must set the environment variables in your ee. the EENUC (Common) program group will be created.cfg file that you copied in the earlier step. Copy the ee. Double-click on the EE Configure icon to display the Configure EE Environment form. 2. and not to a previously-selected file. and EE Nucleus icons.cfg file. and it needs to be placed somewhere that it will not be over-written when you next update the software. The Reset command should always be used at this point to ensure that the environment variables in the display window are those that belong to the file you just selected. otherwise select No. Before you can enter the EE environment. Before executing the software._ _______________ Installation Procedure Select Yes to continue. EE Readme. EE Configure. EE Help. When the software has successfully loaded. This program group contains the EE Manager. 9. Download/Install 8. you will need to set at least the following variables: 31 .txt. Set your user environment variables.cfg file found in the win32app/ingr/eenuc directory into another directory not in the EE or PDS structure. (Your login directory will be fine.

32 . This displays the current value and description for that variable.cfg file. key the desired value into the Value field. To modify the value of that variable. This will close the EE Configure utility._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide .February 2003 PROJECT_LOCATION EE_SCHEMA EE_REFDB DB_TYPE Select the variable to be set. then select Set. and no more changes are needed. After all variables have been set properly for your environment. select OK to save the modifications to the ee.

— Decide where on the system to locate your databases. Select and install the RDBMS you will use. Also. and 202 for reference schema. — For information about accessing RIS Schema Manager. — For detailed information about creating and updating databases. 4. — You will do this through the EE Environment and the RIS Schema Manager product. In order for the EE Raceway project to integrate to PDS there must be two entries in pdtable_102 corresponding to type_of_rdb_data: 200 for project schema. see the appendix entitled RIS Schema Manager in this reference guide or refer to the Relational Interface System (RIS) Reference Manual. Create new databases/upgrade existing databases. see the Relational Interface System (RIS) Reference Manual. Download/Install 33 . 3. Create empty RIS schemas.* file in the /usr#/informix/release directory for details about creating databases in ANSI mode. see Appendix C of this reference guide or refer to your individual RDBMS documentation. Download your RDBMS product and the Relational Interface System (RIS) software. See the RIS Reference Manual for information about this process or look in the RISNOTES*._ _______________ Databases This section provides an overview of the workflow involved in creating a database and schemas. Only after these entries are in the table will the user be able to update the project and reference database for use with PDS. 2. 1. What follows is a very basic outline. Also. — See the section of this guide entitled Software Requirements for information about the RIS products. see your individual RDBMS documentation for installation instructions and general information about the product. and you should consult your individual RDBMS and RIS documentation for detailed instructions on database setup. — For information about using the RIS Schema Manager product. — Informix users must create all databases in ANSI mode with this release. see the section entitled Database Utilities in this reference guide. Databases 2. — Refer to the Software Requirements section for information on database location options.

February 2003 5. — You will use the Database Utilities option in the EE Environment to accomplish this._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . The Database Utilities section contains instructions for updating both project and reference schemas. — See the Database Utilities section in this reference guide. 34 . Update your project and reference schemas.

EE Environment A project is a group of related electrical drawings and their associated database which you create. 35 . Electrical Engineer (EE) Environment Electrical Engineer (EE) Environment Electrical Engineer (EE) products are accessed through the Electrical Engineer (EE) form. click Electrical Raceway Environment on the main PD_Shell form. the Project Menu displays: 3. When you key in EE. All EE drawings are organized by project. The Project Menu and other EE Environment menus provide easy access to all the product functions. To enter the Electrical Engineer form._ _______________ 3.

February 2003 Using the Electrical Engineer Menus The following areas make up the Electrical Engineer form: Menu Icons .a list of options which require additional input or other selections before you can continue. select another option. To turn off an active option. the necessary information in the input fields in the input/output area.displays messages from the software.lists available project and design files Input/Output Area . If you do not know the appropriate addresses. 36 . Message Area . The basic procedure for using EE menus is first to select an option from the options list. Listing Area ._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . For some options you will need to know net addresses for the input data boxes. Options List . These options can display additional forms or menus. and then to select. check with your system manager. use standard EMACS commands.control the EE form. To edit information you key in to input fields.for keying in or displaying data about a project. or key in.

When a particular option is active. When listings fill more than one page. You can monitor lengthy processes by reviewing the message area. Summary The best way to familiarize yourself with the environment form and their functions is simply to practice using the available features. Remember that the basic procedure for executing a given process is to select a form option. 3. If the bar fills the space above the arrows. operating or error messages will display in the message area at the bottom of the form._ _______________ Scrolling Through Listings The listing area in the EE form provides you access to the projects and design files you will manage using the available menu options. EE Environment Cancel (X) exits the EE application entirely. you are not allowed to print a design file from the Drawing Utility form. Message Area Once you have selected and confirmed a option. all of the available listings are currently displayed. The bar above the arrows indicates where you are in the listing. the item you select from the listing area will display in the appropriate input field. you can scroll up and down the list using the scroll bar. provide the necessary input. in any combination: Confirm (√) accepts the current form settings. For example. and then select Confirm (√). Using the Electrical Engineer Menus Icons There are three icons that can display on EE forms. and executes the active process. Reset returns you to the previous form and cancels the current form settings. The menus will not allow you to perform illegal operations. 37 .

Archive — Archives EE project files to a floppy disk or network nodes. Restore — Restores archived EE project files from a floppy disk or network nodes. — EE Product Menu — Displays (and allows you to select from) those EE applications that are loaded on the workstation. Enter — Accesses available EE applications and enters existing EE projects._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide .February 2003 Project Menu Options The individual Project Menu options are discussed in the following sections: Create — Creates new EE projects. Copy — Copies existing project files to new projects. Database Utilities — Accesses EE Update Schema utilities and RIS Schema Manager. if there are more than one. Delete — Deletes EE project files. 38 .

39 . The Project name field displays below the scrolling area. Select the Project name field. A . Steps 1. Your project name should have eight or fewer characters. so you are not required to key in this extension. page 553 ._ _______________ Create This option creates a project in which your design file(s) reside. Select Create from the Project Menu option list. — OR — Select another option to ignore your input and cancel the Create process.prj extension is automatically appended to the project file name when you select Confirm (√). For information about creating a project schema. though uppercase letters are automatically converted to lowercase. and key in the new project name. Select Confirm (√) to create the project. Create 3. EE Environment Field Descriptions Project name — This field allows you to enter the project name in uppercase or lowercase letters. 2. Multiple files can exist within a single project. which itself can span multiple products. see RIS Schema Manager. You may also want to create a new project schema when you create a project. 3.

This field may or may not display the password once it has been entered. Refer to the section about EE Environment Variables in Appendix B of this document for more information on environment variables._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . depending on the setting of the appropriate Password Echo toggle. 40 . if they exist. You will need to input the names of the project. This field may also be defined by the environment variable EE_SCHEMA. Refer to the section about EE Environment Variables in Appendix B of this document for more information on environment variables. and is the first step in entering the Electrical Engineer environment. the project and reference schemas. Project schema — This field is automatically updated with the project schema name associated with the selected project name.February 2003 Enter This option accesses a specified project. This field may also be defined by the environment variable EE_REFDB. You can override the default selection by keying in another schema name. Field Descriptions Project name — This field reflects the project name that is selected in the project listing area. if one has been defined. Schema password — This field accepts a password for entering the respective schema. You can override the default selection by keying in the desired schema name. You may also key project names into this field. and the schema passwords. Reference schema — This field is automatically updated with the reference schema name associated with the selected project name.

For information about schema passwords. Identify the appropriate Schema password field. Enter Password Echo — This toggle controls whether or not the password is displayed in the respective password fields. EE Environment 41 . the environment bypasses the Product Menu and goes directly into the Drawing Menu. 3. and key in the password. Enter schema passwords if they were created for either schema. if needed. If no password was defined for the schemas. page 553 . 2. You can make modifications to these fields. The EE Product Menu displays. and key in a project name. 4. Select a project from the listing area. 3. — OR — Select the Project name field. Select Confirm (√). If only one EE product exists on your workstation. The project schema (defaults to project name) and the current reference schema display automatically. leave these fields blank._ _______________ Steps 1. Select Enter from the Project Menu option list. see RIS Schema Manager. The project listing displays.

_ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide .) 42 . Select the desired EE application from the Product Menu form. available for use. only the EE Raceway product is on menu. (See the chapter entitled EE Raceway Environment for more information about the Design Menu. Steps 1.February 2003 Product Menu The Product Menu form displays all of the available EE products on your workstation. then the environment bypasses the Product Menu and goes directly into the selected product’s Design Menu. The Design Menu displays. If only one EE product exists on your workstation. Only the EE products you actually have installed on your workstation will be displayed on this menu. In this example.

EE Environment Steps 1. Copy Field Descriptions Copy project from — Key in the source project name (or select it from the list). — OR — Select the Copy project from input field. and key in a project to be copied. Select Confirm (√) to copy the project. Copy project to — Key in the destination project name. — OR — Select another option to ignore your input and cancel the Copy process. Select a project to be copied from the listing area._ _______________ Copy This option copies all the files within an existing project to a new project. 4. and key in the new project name. Select the Copy project to input field. Select Copy from the Project Menu option list. 43 . this cannot be the name of a project that already exists. 2. 3. 3. You cannot key in the name of an existing project in the Copy project to field.

Select Confirm (√). Field Descriptions Project name — Key in (or select from the list) the project to be deleted.February 2003 Delete This option completely deletes all the files and databases within an existing project. 44 ._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . Steps 1. Select Delete from the Project Menu option list. Select the project name from the listing area. 2. a warning displays indicating that you should drop the schema corresponding to the database contained within the project. 3. and key in the project name. — OR — Select the Project name field. If a database exists in the project directory.

45 . a warning displays indicating that you are about to delete an entire project. page 553 . — OR — Select another option to ignore your input and cancel the Delete process. see RIS Schema Manager._ _______________ Delete Selecting Accept on the warning form deletes the project and its database. If a database does not exist in the project directory. 3. For information about dropping a schema. while selecting Cancel cancels the Delete function. EE Environment Selecting Accept on the warning form deletes the project. while selecting Cancel cancels the Delete function.

46 .February 2003 Archive This option stores an entire project and associated database on a network host or on a floppy disk. TCP/XNS — This toggle allows you to choose between TCP and XNS network protocols. The path must exist on the remote node. Field Descriptions Remote node name/address — This field accepts the node name or address of the system to receive the project. Remote path/directory — This field accepts a key-in for the destination node of the project. Password — This field accepts the password (if one exists) for the destination node. A password is required if you are using the TCP option._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . The project name is appended to this path. A password is required if you are using the TCP option. Username on remote node — This field accepts the user name for the destination node. Password Echo — This toggle allows you to display the user password you enter in the Password field.

) When archiving using a floppy disk. 2. and key in a project name. Select Confirm (√) to begin archiving. and remote directory may be assigned in the user’s .EErc file. 3. using the global symbols EE_NODENAME. Select the storage facility for your project files. EE_USERNAME. user name. Toggling to Floppy changes the displayed form information. (If you need more information about the ._ _______________ Steps 1. and EE_REMDIR. Network is the default setting on the Network/Floppy toggle. Default values for the remote node name. Select Archive from the Project Menu option list. you must have a formatted floppy disk placed in the disk drive. contact your system administrator.EErc file. 4. — OR — Select the Project name field. — OR — Select another option to ignore your input and cancel the Archive process. Select the Project name from the scrolling area. EE Environment 47 . Archive 3.

When restoring from a network. When restoring from a floppy. TCP/XNS — This toggle allows you to choose between TCP and XNS network protocols. Field Descriptions Remote node name/address — This field accepts the node name or address of the system from which to receive the project. Be sure to verify that archived project will not overwrite existing projects with the same name. The project on the floppy will overwrite the project in your directory. Remote path/directory — This field accepts a key-in for the project’s node of origin. you can restore a project that is currently listed in your listing area. A password is required if you use the TCP option. A password is required if you are using the TCP option. you cannot restore a project that is currently listed in the listing area. Username on remote node — This field accepts the user name for the node of origin. 48 . Password — This field accepts the password (if one exists) for the node of origin._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . You must delete or rename the current project to complete the restore process.February 2003 Restore This option retrieves an entire project and any associated database from a network or a floppy disk.) Password Echo — This toggle allows you to display the user password you enter in the Password field.

When restoring from a floppy disk. — OR — Select another option to ignore your input and cancel the Restore process. you must have the disk in the disk drive._ _______________ Steps 1. Select Restore from the Project Menu. Network is the default setting on the Network/Floppy toggle. Restore 3. Toggling to Floppy changes the displayed form information. Select the Project name field. 4. Indicate the storage location for your project. EE Environment 49 . 2. and key in a project name. 3. Select Confirm (√) to begin restoring.

The Database Utilities options are described in detail in the following sections. RIS schema utilities Update Project Schema Update Reference Schema 50 ._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide .February 2003 Database Utilities This option accesses the RIS Schema Manager environment and the EE schema updating processes.

drop. select the RIS schema utilities option from the Database Utilities menu. RIS Schema Manager. Proceed through the necessary RIS Schema Manager processes. 2. To access the RIS Schema Manager form. you must have an existing database and user name. 51 . Consult your relational database management system (RDBMS) documentation for specific information about database installation. Steps 1. page 553 . Before using this utility. EE Environment Normally this is a procedure for a system or application manager. RIS schema utilities 3. With this utility you can create. page 553 supplies examples of Create Schema input for several RDBMSs. and maintain project and reference database schemas. see RIS Schema Manager. For more information._ _______________ RIS schema utilities This option accesses the RIS Schema Manager form.

Field Descriptions Output file — Defines the processing message file name. select the field and key in the name of an existing project schema.February 2003 Update Project Schema This option allows you to modify the structure and data of an existing project schema. select the field and key in the name of the password corresponding to the schema name you entered. Schema name — Defines the project database’s schema name. You can use individual or multiple EE applications to update the schema. set the toggle to Echo. 52 . Only those products loaded on your workstation will display as options. For additional information about updating schemas. To enter the schema name. page 425 . if one exists._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . see EE Databases. though doing so will slow processing time. To display the schema password input. To enter the password. Application checkboxes – These boxes allow you to select the EE application(s) with which you are updating the schema. You can update the schema with multiple products. Error file — Defines the error processing message file name. Password Echo/No echo — This toggle defines if you want to display the schema password input. Schema password — Defines the schema password.

You can redefine the defaults by editing this ._ _______________ You can also update the schema with your own data by selecting the User Defined checkbox. The delivered default files are defined in the win32app\eenuc\bin\. To specify command and SQL files for usr-defined data. the system displays a processing message file (create_db. select the fields next to the User Defined checkbox. Set up the form to meet your specifications.EErc file. or export EE_CUSTOM_SQL and EE_CUSTOM_CMD for the customized SQL and command files. Return to step 1.. To change the displayed default files. Select the Update project schema option from the Database Utilities form. select the field. Select Confirm (√) to update the project schema. and key in the desired filenames. page 64 .EErc file or by redefining the variables in your $HOME\. Sql and Cmd file — These fields display the command and SQL files associated with each application. or Batch. see Process.. it will display one of two message files to the screen: — If the schema is updated without errors. When Update project schema finishes processing. 53 . Processing toggle — This toggle indicates the operating mode for the update process. The update process displays the message Processing . You can set the toggle to Foreground (default). 4.msg). 3. Background. and key in the full pathname for those files. Update Project Schema Steps 3. EE Environment 1. For more information about operating modes. — OR — Select Reset to return to the Database Utilities form without retaining your input. The Update project schema form displays: 2.EErc file.

Select Reset again to exit the process and return to the Database Utilities form. located in the current project’s /tmp directory. 54 . page 89 . 6. see Output.February 2003 — OR — — If errors occur during the update process. You can also access these message files. the system displays an error message file (create_db._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . 5. using the Output option on the Utilities form. For more information. Select Reset on the message file form to return to the Update project schema form.err).

Password Echo/No echo — This toggles define if you want to display the schema password.EErc file or by redefining the variables in your $HOME\. EE Environment 55 . or Batch. You can redefine the defaults by editing this . select the field._ _______________ Update Reference Schema This option allows you to modify the structure and data of an existing reference schema. Sql and Cmd File — These fields display the command and SQL files associated with each application. For additional information about updating schemas. see EE Databases. set the toggle to Echo. To change the displayed default files.EErc file. see Process. You can use individual or multiple EE applications to update the schema. Processing mode — This toggle indicates the operating mode for the update process. To enter information. page 425 . if one exists. Schema name — Defines the reference database’s schema name. Schema password — Define the schema password. To enter information. Error file — Defines the error processing message file name. To display the schema password input. For more information about operating modes. The delivered default files are defined in the win32app\eenuc\bin\. and key in the name of an existing reference schema. and key in the full pathname for those files. and key in the desired filenames. or export EE_CUSTOM_REFSQL and EE_CUSTOM_REFCMD for the customized SQL and command files. To specify command and SQL files for usr-defined data. page 64 . and key in the name of the password corresponding to the schema name you entered. Only those products loaded on your workstation will display as options. select the fields next to the User Defined checkbox. select the field. Application checkboxes — These boxes allow you to select the EE application(s) with which you are updating the schema. Update Reference Schema Field Descriptions Output file — Defines the processing message file name. You can also update the schema with your own data by selecting the User Defined checkbox.EErc file. select the field. You can set the toggle to Foreground (default). though doing so will slow processing time. You can update the schema with multiple products. Background. 3.

The Update reference schema form displays.err)._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . 56 . Select the Update reference schema option from the Database Utilities form. the system displays a processing message file (create_db. — OR — — If errors occur during the update process. Return to step 1.. 3. — OR — Select Reset to return to the Database Utilities form without retaining the form parameters. When Update reference schema finishes processing. Select Confirm (√) to update the reference schema. it will display one of two message files. 4..msg). — If the schema is updated without errors.February 2003 Steps 1. 2. the system displays an error message file (create_db. The update process displays the message Processing . Set up the form to meet your specifications.

5. page 89 . using the Output option on the Utilities form._ _______________ Update Reference Schema You can also access these message files. EE Environment 57 . For more information. 6. Select Reset on the message file form to return to the Update reference schema form. Select Reset again to exit the process and return to the Database Utilities form. located in the current project’s /tmp directory. see Output. 3.

_ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide .February 2003 58 .

one of two menus display: The EE Environment Product Menu. Commands The following sections describe each option in detail and show the menu as it displays when each option is selected. If you are a new user. if you have multiple EE products installed on the workstation (see Product Menu. EERWAY Environment The rest of this chapter describes all the options on this menu. — OR — Electrical Engineer (EE) Raceway Environment The EE Raceway Design Menu._ _______________ 4. 4. Electrical Engineer (EE) Raceway Environment When you select the Enter option from the Project Menu. you may want to skip all but the Create and Design options. 59 . page 42 for more information). Create — Allows you to create a design file.

_ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . rule. Report — Displays the information in an EE Raceway database. Rule — Displays the design rule errors occurring in the design process. 60 . report. It also processes work on design files and/or databases. Utilities — Allows you to access functions needed to manipulate EE Raceway design. EDEN — Allows you to design your own symbols for raceway elements. and message files.February 2003 Design — Allows you to enter a design file and attaches the EE menus. Process — Allows you to list and select EE Raceway processes.

If there is more than one seed file available. A seed file can also contain customized information like company borders and logos. EE Raceway is delivered with both a metric (mseed. EERWAY Environment Steps 1. the seed file subdirectory is win32app\ingr\eerway\dgn\seed. If there is only one seed file. it is displayed as the default. You can also use seed files that were generated in a Plant Design (PDS) environment. optionally. 4. the listing area displays all these files. a file extension. Select the seed file. EE Raceway will convert PDS seed files to raceway design files the first time you enter the EE Raceway graphics environment. You can change this directory by redefining the EERWAY_SEED symbol in the directory or in your login directory. Select the drawing name input box and key in a drawing name and. you are actually copying a seed file (a template). Choose a seed file either by accepting the default (this happens automatically when you select Confirm (√)) or by selecting a seed file from the scrolling area. based on a specified seed file. By default. 3. Select Create from the Design Menu._ _______________ Create This option creates design files.dgn). Create When you create a drawing. 61 .dgn) and English seed file (seed. The seed file contains basic information that EE Raceway uses. 2.

4. — OR — Select another option from the Design Menu to ignore your input and cancel the Create process. 62 ._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . The drawing is added to the active project. The drawing name and its file extension become the filename of the drawing. Select Confirm (√).dgn is automatically appended to the drawing name if you do not enter your own file extension.February 2003 A file extension of .

taking you into a specified existing design file. Select the drawing name from the listing area. — OR — Select another option from the Design Menu to ignore your input and cancel the Design process. 3. 4._ _______________ Design This option accesses the graphics environment. The system invokes the graphics environment. 2. EERWAY Environment 63 . Select Confirm (√). Design Steps 1. Select Design from the Design Menu.

_ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . 64 . page 331 for more information about individual processes. The screen above lists the processes currently delivered with the product. See Raceway Processes. The system manager can add or delete processes from the list by modifying the process.dat file in win32app\eerway\data. Overview This section provides general information about running all processes. These processes allow you to manipulate drawings and the project database.February 2003 Process This option accesses all available EERWAY processes.

An asterisk (*). You must key in a time and/or date when you want the process to start. you regain control immediately. when placed in the Enter Drawing Name input field. but you can toggle between that option and the Background and Batch options. The ? character can also be used as a wild card for a single character. Process You must key in any information not already shown as defaults. and you do not regain control until the process is finished. an input screen displays. if you enter a*. is a wild card character which can be used to list a subset of your drawings. The default mode is Foreground. you cannot perform other functions within the same window in which you are running the process. After providing this information. A process in Batch does not run until the time you specify. A process in Background runs immediately. A process in Foreground runs immediately. All drawings are displayed on the screen scrolling area. Operating Modes The Processing toggle allows you to select the operating mode for a process. all drawings beginning with the letter "a" will be displayed. and you regain control immediately. select Confirm (√) to execute the process. EERWAY Environment 65 . 4. You can override default values by keying in your own information. Once you have entered all necessary information._ _______________ When you enter a specific process. For example. In other words.

NOW and NEXT. One. Legitimate commands include: 0815am Jan 24 8:15am Jan 24 Now + 1 day 5pm Friday Steps 1. allowing you to enter the time and date when you want the process to run.and two-digit numbers are taken to be hours. 2. 3.February 2003 Entering Time in Batch Mode If you select Batch mode. you can specify a date using either a month name followed by a day number or a day of the week (fully spelled or abbreviated to three characters). The time can also be specified as two numbers separated by a colon (hour:minute). Select Confirm to invoke the input form for the specified process. If you input no date. The system recognizes the words TODAY and TOMORROW. The time can be entered as 1. MIDNIGHT. a 24-hour clock (military time) is understood. and TOMORROW if the specified hour is less than the current hour. The suffix AM or PM may be appended. — OR — Select another option from the Design Menu to ignore your input and cancel the Process option. Select Process from the Design Menu. four digits to be hours and minutes._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . 66 . otherwise. Optionally. 2 or 4 digits. the system assumes it should run the job TODAY if the specified hour is greater than the current hour. an input box displays. Select a process from the listing area. The system also recognizes the names NOON.

page 347 . This section provides general information about running all Eden program options.dat file. 4. and special parts. For detailed information about individual Eden options. The system manager can add or delete displayed options by modifying the eden._ _______________ EDEN The following screen displays the Eden options delivered with this version of EE Raceway. see Eden Processes. EDEN Eden is a high-level symbol definition language (modeled after the FORTRAN programming language) that allows you to design your own symbols for straights. fittings. EERWAY Environment 67 .

In other words. An option in foreground mode runs immediately. and you cannot regain control until the process is finished._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . If necessary. An option in background mode runs immediately. and key in your own information. and batch. Operating Modes A box on the right side of the menu allows you to select the operating mode for the selected option. an input screen displays. You must key in a time and/or date when you want the process to start. The default mode is foreground. After providing this information. These selections are the three methods of running an option: foreground. The circular arrow on the right indicates that this box leads to other selections. you cannot perform other functions within the window in which the option is running. you can override the default values that already display. 68 . you regain control immediately. A process in batch does not run until the time you specify. Once you have entered all necessary information. and you regain control immediately.February 2003 When you select an option from the Eden menu (and confirm the selection using Confirm (√)). You must key in all information not displayed as defaults. background. select Confirm (√) to begin the option process.

a 24-hour clock (military time) is understood. and if the specified hour is less than the current hour. an input box displays. MIDNIGHT. NOW and NEXT are also recognized. it will run the job TODAY. otherwise. One. the system assumes that if the specified hour is greater than the current hour.and two-digit numbers are taken to be hours. Legitimate commands include: 0815am Jan 24 8:15am Jan 24 Now + 1 day 5pm Friday 4._ _______________ Entering Time in Batch Mode If you select batch mode. The time can also be specified as two numbers separated by a colon (hour:minute). The special names NOON. four digits to be hours and minutes. EDEN The time can be entered as 1. EERWAY Environment 69 . allowing you to enter the time and date when you want the option to begin processing. 2 or 4 digits. The suffix AM or PM may be appended. If you input no date. You can specify an optional date in the form of either a month name followed by a day number or a day of the week (spelled in its entirety or abbreviated to three characters). The system accepts the words TODAY and TOMORROW. it will run the job TOMORROW.

These reports report on the project and reference databases. The system manager can change the names of the reports that display in the listing area and can add additional reports by editing the report._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide .February 2003 Report This option accesses the standard EERWAY reports.dat file (win32app\eerway\data). page 545 for more detailed information about individual reports. 70 . Overview This section contains general information about running all EE Raceway reports. See Reports. You must load the project database before running any reports.

You should give each report you want to save a unique name. Select Confirm (√) to invoke the input form for the specified process. an input screen displays. 2. the new file will overwrite that file. select the output file box and key in a new name. 3.) If you want to save reports throughout a project. Report Key in any information that is not supplied by default. (No file extension is automatically appended to the name you key in. To change the output filename. Select Report from the Design Menu. You can change the name of the output file or error file. EERWAY Environment 71 . Select a report from the listing area. If a new output file has the same name as an existing file. you should name the output files yourself. Steps 1. — OR — Select another option from the Design Menu to ignore your input and cancel the Report option._ _______________ When you process a report. 4. allowing you to enter all input necessary to run the report.

You can find the coordinates you want to use by using the active point coordinate display on the precision input form.February 2003 A Special Note for Bill of Materials by Volume When running a Bill of Materials by Volume report. you are required to define a low and high range in PDS coordinates. The coordinate values need to be in subunits and entered in the form field with a space between the coordinates: easting northing elevation For example._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . Any Raceway component extending outside the clipping volume defined by the High and Low Range Coordinates will not be included in the report output. 234 532 34 It should be understood that westing and southing coordinates must be the negative of their opposite directional coordinate. and a southing coordinate of 3000 should be keyed in as a value of -3000 in the northing direction. These low and high ranges define a cubic volume from which the report is pulled. a westing coordinate of 100 should be keyed in as a value of -100 in the easting direction. 72 . For instance.

These rule checks are reports that identify violations of certain design rules by working on the project database.dat file in win32app\eerway\data. Overview This section contains general information about running all EERWAY rule checks._ _______________ Rule Checks Rule Checks This option accesses the standard EERWAY Rule Checks. page 545 . see Reports. The system manager can change the names of the reports or add new reports to the listing area by editing the rule_chk. For more detailed information about each rule check. 4. EERWAY Environment 73 . You must load the project database before running any rule checks.

3. 2. Select a rule check report from the listing area. an input screen displays. — OR — Select another option from the Design Menu to ignore your input and cancel the Rule option. Select Rule from the Design Menu. The name of the rule check report displays at the top. you should name the output files yourself. If you want to save reports throughout a project. the new file will destroy the previously created file. Steps 1. Select Confirm (√) to invoke the input form for the specified process. 74 . If a new output file has the same name as another file created previously. You should give each report that you want to save a unique name.February 2003 When you process a rule check. Accept the default information that displays in the input fields._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . or change that information according to your specifications.

All manipulations are performed on those files residing in the current project’s directories. When you select Utilities from the Design Menu. EERWAY Environment Files in the current project sub-directories will be listed in four columns._ _______________ Utilities Utilities This option manipulates files within a project. 75 . 4. the Drawing Utility Menu displays. Each column will list a different subdirectory.

2.rpt) . (<project_name>/eerway/dgn) Report (. Archive — Archives a file to a network node or floppy disk. screen. Select the desired option from the Drawing Utility Menu._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . 3. Delete — Deletes a file (mark for purging). (<project_name>/eerway/rpt) Rule (.tmp) . Output — Outputs a file to a printer.All report files generated by standard reports. Send — Sends a file to a network node.chk) . and error files generated by standard reports and rule check reports. (<project_name>/eerway/tmp) Utilities options will operate on all of the above file types. Enter necessary form information for the active option. Rename — Renames a file. Copy — Copies a file. Select Utilities from the Design Menu.All report files generated by rule checks reports.All drawings. Purge — Purges (permanently deletes) a file. Undelete — Undeletes a file (unmark for purging).dgn) . Receive — Receives a file from a network node.February 2003 Drawing (.All files output by Raceway processes. 76 . and then select the file(s) on which to perform that option. or plotter. Steps 1. Restore — Restores an archived file from a network node or floppy disk. Commands The commands on the Drawing Utility Menu are described in their respective sections later in this chapter. (<project_name>/eerway/chk) Message (.

Select Confirm (√) to accept the settings and execute the active option. EERWAY Environment 77 . Utilities 4. — OR — Select another option to ignore your input and cancel the active option._ _______________ 4.

_ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . . 78 . key in a unique destination file name into this field. Copy DOES NOT automatically append a file extension (. Field Descriptions Copy file from — This field displays the name of the file to be copied.February 2003 Copy This option copies an existing file to another file.dgn. You must specify a unique filename for the destination file. or key in the name of the file to be copied.rpt. elect a file from the list. Copy file to — This field displays the name that the copy (destination) file will be called. and so forth) to the new file.

but can be undeleted (that is._ _______________ Delete Delete This option removes your access to a specified file. have access returned to them) until you actively Purge them. you must select the Purge option. EERWAY Environment 79 . To physically remove the file from the workstation. Note that files you delete with this option take up storage space. 4.

Once you have removed files using Purge.February 2003 Undelete This option returns your access to a file that you removed using Delete. you cannot undelete them with this option._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . 80 .

you cannot recover it. 4. EERWAY Environment 81 . you can select specific files from the list by placing a data point on them. Once you Purge a file. Purge Field Descriptions Purge Files toggle — This toggle allows you to choose between purging ALL files that have been deleted. place a data point on it. To de-select a selected file. selected files that have been deleted._ _______________ Purge This option permanently removes all the files you marked for deletion using the Delete option. or no files at all. When the toggle is set to Select files to purge.

Rename file to — Key in the name that you desire to rename the current file.rpt. You can select the file from the list. Field Descriptions Rename file from — This field displays the current filename.February 2003 Rename This option changes the name of an existing file. . It does not automatically append a file extension (. 82 . or key the name into this field. and so forth) to the new filename._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide .dgn.

Username on remote node — This field expects the username on the receiving machine. EERWAY Environment 83 . Otherwise. Remote node name/address — This field expects the node name or address of the machine to which you want to send the file. test1. or key in the appropriate name. depending on the setting of the Password Echo toggle. TCP/XNS Protocol toggle — The setting of this toggle determines whether the transfer uses the TCP or XNS protocol to communicate between machines. IGDS/No IGDS toggle — This toggle should be set to the IGDS setting when sending to a VAX system. 4. Be sure to include the entire filename including the extension (for example. Remote path directory — This field expects the path on the remote machine to which you want to send the file. Password — This field expects the password that corresponds with given username on the receiving machine. The password may or may not be visible in the field. File name — This field reflects the name of the file to be sent.dgn). Doing so will store the file in contiguous blocks on the VAX. Send Field Descriptions Password Echo toggle — The setting of this toggle determines whether the password of the remote machine is visible or hidden upon keyin to the password field. If you are sending a design file to a VAX. You can either select the desired file from the list. turn on the IGDS toggle. the setting should be No IGDS._ _______________ Send This option copies a file to a network node.

Remote path directory — This field expects the path on the remote machine from which you want to receive the file. otherwise the file will be placed in the <project_name>/eerway directory. You can either select the desired file from the list. The password may or may not be visible in the field. Username on remote node — This field expects the username on the sending machine. depending on the setting of the Password Echo toggle. or key in the appropriate name._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . TCP/XNS Protocol toggle — The setting of this toggle determines whether the transfer uses the TCP or XNS protocol to communicate between machines. specify the local path to the file. Password — This field expects the password that corresponds with given username on the sending machine. Receive will overwrite any file having the same name as the file you are receiving. including its extension. Be sure to specify the complete filename. Also. File name — This field reflects the name of the file to be received.February 2003 Receive This option copies a file from a network node. Remote node name/address — This field expects the node name or address of the machine from which you want to receive the file. 84 . Field Descriptions Password Echo toggle — The setting of this toggle determines whether the password of the sending machine is visible or hidden upon keyin to the password field.

Receive 4. chk. rpt._ _______________ Local path (dgn. EERWAY Environment 85 . tmp) — This field expects the path to the desired location of the file being received.

Archive file name — This field expects you to key in the desired name of the archive file. page 46 . Password — This field expects the password that corresponds with given username on the remote machine. The password may or may not be visible in the field. Network/Floppy toggle — The setting of this toggle determines if the file will be archived over a network or to a floppy disk. For more information about the fields that display on the form when Network is active.February 2003 Archive This option creates a backup copy of a file to a network node or to a floppy disk. TCP/XNS Protocol toggle — The setting of this toggle determines whether the communication between machines uses the TCP or XNS protocol. Remote path directory — This field expects the path on the remote machine to which you want to archive the file. depending on the setting of the Password Echo toggle._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . 86 . Username on remote node — This field expects the username on the receiving machine. Remote node name/address — This field expects the node name or address of the machine to which you want to archive the file. Toggle between Network and Floppy by selecting the toggle button. see the description of Archive in Archive. Field Descriptions Password Echo toggle — The setting of this toggle determines whether the password of the archiving machine is visible or hidden upon keyin to the password field.

Use the Network/Floppy toggle to select between the two options. Remote node name/address — This field expects the node name or address of the machine from which you want to restore the archive file. page 48 . Remote path directory — This field expects the path on the remote machine from which you want to restore the archive file. EERWAY Environment Password Echo toggle — The setting of this toggle determines whether the password of the archiving machine is visible or hidden upon keyin to the password field. Archive file name — This field expects you to key in the name of the archive file to be restored. TCP/XNS Protocol toggle — The setting of this toggle determines whether the communication between machines uses the TCP or XNS protocol. 87 . Restore Field Descriptions 4. Network/Floppy toggle — The setting of this toggle determines if the file will be archived over a network or to a floppy disk. For more information about the fields that display on the form when Network is active._ _______________ Restore This option copies a backup file from a network node or floppy disk. see the description of Restore in Restore. This option will overwrite any file having the same name as the file you are restoring.

depending on the setting of the Password Echo toggle._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . The password may or may not be visible in the field. 88 .February 2003 Username on remote node — This field expects the username on the remote machine. Password — This field expects the password that corresponds with given username on the remote machine.

or laser printer. the selection displayed at the top of the list is the default selection. screen. EERWAY Environment File name — Key in the name of the file to be submitted to the output process. Output Destination List — Select the appropriate output device. Field Descriptions 4. or select it from the list. Invalid operations – sending a drawing to the printer._ _______________ Output This option sends files to the printer. NQS options. The system manager may modify this file to add desired options. If you do not specify an output destination. plotter. Local commands. for example – are not allowed. 89 . or user programs may be added to support specific output requirements. Output An external data file delivered with the environment (win32app\eenuc\data\print.dat) controls the available output options. IPLOT commands.

February 2003 90 ._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide .

the panel menu is located on the right side of your screen and the bar menu is at the top. data button <D>. This chapter contains more detailed information about using menus. EE Graphics Interface Elements EE Graphics Interface Elements This chapter describes the graphics environment you will encounter while working in a design file. This chapter contains the following sections: Start-Up Sequence Screen Display EERWAY Command Menu Bar Palettes in the EERWAY Graphics Environment Identifying Elements Working Units and Precision Key-ins All of the EERWAY graphics commands are menu-driven. EERWAY Graphics 91 . If you are not familiar with the following terms: command button <C>. or reset button <R> in reference to the cursor or mouse._ _______________ 5. By default. see Document Conventions in the Preface to this document. You can also invoke commands by keying in the command name and pressing <Return>. You will use the panel menus and the bar menu to select the commands. It also documents the on-line Help system and provides other general information needed to work in a design file. 5.

_ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . the system goes through the following processes: Displays all active design file views. Initializes RIS with the reference schema. Displays a command window at the bottom of the screen.February 2003 Start-up Sequence When you enter an EERWAY design file (see Design. page 63 ). 92 .

Only the Lower and Sink actions are available from the command window. EERWAY Graphics — Window Menu Button .cmds file. release the data button. (Check with your system manager if you have a customized rway. as described in the previous section. Screen Display If you have modified the default application menu configuration file. 93 .displays a list of window actions. press and hold the data button and move the cursor through the list.contains the following six fields that display system messages and your inputs from the keyboard: 5. your screen display may be different. To select an action. MicroStation Command Window ._ _______________ Screen Display The screen display you will see when you enter a design file is described below.) 1. When the correct item highlights.

94 . Working Area . 2.moves the command window below views and other windows of its own type.displays elements as you place them. All your design work occurs in the screen working area.displays a system prompt that directs you through a command.contains the primary types of commands used in the EERWAY graphic environment. 3.displays startup file information and product name. — Current Command Field . Select the type of command you want to use with a data point to see the pull-down menu of available commands or command palettes. 4. The number and name of each view appears in the window title area.provide ways for you to change the way you look at your design.February 2003 — Sink Box . Windows .displays alphanumeric values you enter from the keyboard._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide .displays the name of the current active command. — Command Status Field . Command Menu Bar . — System Prompt Field . — Key-In Field .

collapses a window. Window Menu Button . EERWAY Graphics 95 . Restore . Maximize . Diagonal Arrows . When the correct item highlights. Move Arrows .restores a minimized or maximized window to the previous size and location. Horizontal Arrows . Minimize Button . the window is restored to its previous size and location. If you select the maximize button on a window that is already at its maximum size.appear when the cursor is placed over the window border._ _______________ Window Manipulation Buttons . Maximize Button . Size . Press and hold the data button to change the width of the window as you move the cursor. press and hold the data button and move the cursor through the list. Move . If you select this entry on a window that is already at its maximum size.provide ways to move and resize windows. To select an action from the menu. Minimize .displays a list of window actions.enlarges a window to its maximum size.appear when the cursor is placed at the left or right border. Screen Display 5. Double-clicking on this button deletes the window.appear when the cursor is placed at the border corners. Press and hold the data button to change the height of the window as you move the cursor. Vertical Arrows . release the data button.appear when the cursor is placed at the top or bottom border. Close .collapses a window. Resize Borders . Press and hold the data button to move the window.provide ways to manipulate windows. Lower .enlarges a window to its maximum size. the window is restored to its previous size and location.moves a window around the workspace.deletes a window. Press and hold the data button to change both the height and width of the window without changing the position of the opposite corner.changes the height and width of the window in the direction indicated by the pointer.moves a window to the bottom of the window hierarchy.

Each keyword leads to a pull-down menu that contains commands for various EERWAY tasks.February 2003 EERWAY Command Menu Bar The EERWAY command menu bar appears near the top of the MicroStation command window. For instance.Invokes the Integrated Commands menu. To select a keyword. Exit .Executes the File Design command. and exits the graphics environment to return control to the EE Raceway menu interface. 96 . selecting File initializes the File pull-down menu. Integrated Commands . Remove Palettes . Each keyword on the command menu bar allows access to a menu of options relating to that keyword.Invokes MicroStation’s Compress Design command. Using the Command Menu Bar The command menu bar is a logical menu. when applicable.Removes all palettes that have been invoked. which allows access to the most frequently-used MicroStation commands._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . you can also access command palettes from these pull-down menus. place the cursor over the button and press <D>.Invokes the EERWAY command palette. Compress Design . Bar Commands . which allows access to the following commands: EERWAY Palette .Invokes the Bar Commands palette.

Integrated Commands This palette is activated by selecting File from the MicroStation command window. Next to each icon is the name of the form or command it represents. This section presents the palettes in the order that they are accessible if you look at each menu going from left to right across the EERWAY command menu bar on the MicroStation command window. You should become familiar with the name and functionality of each command on each palette. Palettes in the EE Raceway Graphics Environment EERWAY This palette is activated by selecting File from the MicroStation command window. Each command is described in full in later sections of this text. Palettes are groups of commands that are accessible from the EERWAY command menu bar on the MicroStation command window. then selecting Integrated Commands > Palette from the resulting menu._ _______________ Palettes in the EE Raceway Graphics Environment This section presents the palettes that are used in the EE Raceway graphics environment. then selecting EERWAY from the resulting menu. EERWAY Graphics 97 . 5.

This palette can also be activated by selecting Modify from the MicroStation command window. then selecting Bar Commands from the resulting menu. or it can be activated by selecting Modify Element from the Modify palette as shown later in this section. This palette contains the MicroStation commands as discussed in the MicroStation documentation.February 2003 Bar Commands This palette is activated by selecting File from the MicroStation command window. then selecting Palette._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . 98 . Modify Element This palette is activated by selecting Modify Element from the EERWAY palette. then selecting Modify Element Commands from Modify menu.

5. Palettes in the EE Raceway Graphics Environment Modify This palette is activated by selecting Design from the MicroStation command window. EERWAY Graphics 99 ._ _______________ Design This palette is activated by selecting Design from the MicroStation command window. then selecting Modify from the resulting menu. then selecting Palette from the resulting menu.

then selecting Modify Group Commands. Setup Commands This palette is activated by selecting Setup from the MicroStation command window. 100 .February 2003 Modify Group This palette is activated by selecting Modify Group from the Modify Palette. You can also activate this palette by selecting Modify from the MicroStation command window. then selecting Palette._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . then selecting Palette.

_ _______________ Model Commands This palette is activated by selecting Model Commands from the Setup Commands palette. 5. Palettes in the EE Raceway Graphics Environment Runtime Setup This palette is activated by selecting Runtime from the MicroStation command window. then selecting Palette. EERWAY Graphics 101 .

_ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . Database This palette is activated by selecting Database from the MicroStation command window. 102 . then selecting Palette.February 2003 Utilities This palette is activated by selecting Utilities from the MicroStation command window. then selecting Palette.

The system then highlights another element. To identify an element. If the correct element highlights. you must identify an element to perform certain manipulations. the wrong element may highlight. Identifying Elements 5. EERWAY Graphics 103 . For example. place a data point on it. The system highlights the element. line. one data point can serve more than one function in the same command. press <D> again to accept the element. the point you place to accept the element becomes the point from which the element is moved. press <R> to reject that element. When you are moving an element. In many commands. or shape you place is called an element. Several of the command descriptions include steps where the accepting data point also serves as the placement point. If there is more than one element in the location you want to identify._ _______________ Identifying Elements Any structure. If the wrong element highlights.

MU — Master (main) Unit of measurement (for example. we recommend that you use these default settings: Unit 1 Master Unit 1 Subunit 1 Positional Unit Imperial 1 foot = 12 subunits 1 inch = 8000 positional units 1/8000 inch Metric 1 meter = 1000 subunits 1 millimeter = 10 positional units 1/10 millimeter While these are the suggested working units for delivered cell libraries._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . are established based on the project type (metric or English). Precision key-ins let you accurately place elements by using a working units system based on Master Units. Working Units in MU:SU:PU For Intergraph electrical designs. Subunits. The working unit dictates the degree of accuracy for placement of elements in a drawing and determines the scale relationship of elements in the design. you are not limited to using only them. the working units of measurement. predetermined values for working units in imperial and metric projects were used to create the delivered cell library. also known as MU:SU:PU. you can often use data points. if a user-created cell library is being used. (See your system manager for more information about the working units settings used at your location. the smallest degree of accuracy that is possible in the design file (a fraction of an inch) In EERWAY. called MU:SU:PU. a division of a master unit (1 inch) PU — Positional Unit. Working units are coordinate units corresponding to the position and definition of a point in the design file. but placing data points does not always provide the accuracy you need. You must understand the MU:SU:PU system before you can use precision key-ins.February 2003 Working Units and Precision Key-ins When you place elements or manipulate them. The following explains the format of MU:SU:PU. Therefore. and Positional Units. You may set your working units to any desired value. EERWAY lets you key in values (called precision key-ins) as well as place data points. 1 foot) SU — Subunit.) 104 . If using this cell library.

key in DX=1:6. EERWAY Graphics XY= (absolute coordinates) To place a precision point. 105 . The new point is placed relative to the previous point. key in the distance in MU:SU:PU working units and the direction in degrees that you want the point to be placed. For example. direction) To place a precision point.1:6.0. You specify a distance and an angle from the last point placed.5 (1/2 subunit) = :1/2 (1/2 subunit) = :0:4000 (4000 positional units) 18 inches = 1. For example. if you want to place a point 18 inches over and 18 inches up. key in its absolute x and y coordinates. key in the delta x and delta y in MU:SU:PU that you want the point to be placed. if you want to place a point 10 inches directly to the right. 5. There are several ways to key in precision points. The new point is placed relative to the previous point. key in DI=0:10. as described below: DI=(distance. DL= (delta coordinates) To place a precision point. or you can specify the delta values in X and Y to place another point._ _______________ Below are some examples of values and how to key them in: 1/2 foot = :6 (6 subunits) = . Key-ins are entered through the alphanumeric keyboard.5 (1-1/2 master units) = 1:6 (1 master unit and 6 subunits) Working Units and Precision Key-ins Precision Key-ins Precision key-ins let you place points accurately to create elements and shapes with exact lengths and areas.5 (1/2 master unit) 1/2 inch = :.

_ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide .February 2003 106 .

and running reports and processes on the file. as an operator would typically use it. Preparation for the application or system manager is described in System/Application Manager Information. this section will refer you to other documentation wherever possible. 107 . This section covers the following topics: The drawing process EE Databases Reports Interference detection Because the steps of the workflow are covered in detail elsewhere in the document. Workflow and Procedures Workflow and Procedures 6. Workflow This section describes the overall workflow of EE Raceway Modeling software._ _______________ 6. This includes setting up the design file. creating a raceway model. page 415 .

February 2003 The Drawing Process Before outlining a typical workflow for drawing a raceway. Typically you begin drawing raceways with one-line elements (one-lines). In general. you should perform these steps in the order in which they are described. EE Raceway Modeling software allows you to place one-lines and then propagate them into three-lines or raceways. it is important to describe basic raceway concepts. On the right are the same elements after propagation._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . This section is divided into individual descriptions of the steps involved in the drawing process. The following steps comprise the drawing process and this section: System manager setup Drawing setup Place one-lines Propagation 108 . These one-line drawings are the centerlines of raceways and through propagation become the threedimensional shapes (three-lines) that occupy the volume of the raceways. The figure below displays one-line elements on the left.

and vendor names) and the desired systems and one-line types to the reference database (see Specification. page 507 for information about adding specifications to the database). using the Set Raceway Defaults command (see the section entitled Setup Commands for information about this command)._ _______________ System Manager Setup System Manager Setup 6. You can review the default and parameters settings while in the design file. Your system manager should also tell you the project name and design filename. specifications. Workflow Before you begin an individual drawing. for example). The system manager must also add vendor catalogs (parts. see the appendix entitled System/Application Manager Information and the section entitled Installation Instructions. the system/application manager should determine the defaults and parameters that will affect your project and drawing (tray sizes. 109 . For additional system manager information.

If you need one-line types that are not available to you. ask the system manager to add them to reference database. You must have at least one raceway system defined and active in the design file. See Set Active System.February 2003 Drawing Setup Define Systems and Set Active Systems Every one-line type is part of a system that reflects the purpose of the raceway. page 260 for more information. The command displays all systems available in the reference database. See Set Active One-Line Type._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . See Symbology Control. Doing so involves two commands: Set Symbology Control and Symbology Control. Use the Define System command to define your system(s) for the design file from the reference database. You can also review and modify the default symbology settings with this command. Define One-Line Type and Set Active One-Line Type Just as you must define systems from the reference database in the design file and set an active system. Use the Set Symbology Control command to define the matrix of systems and one-line types for the design’s symbology control. page 262 for more information. you must have at least one one-line type defined and active in order to draw raceways. you can change the default symbology settings for them. See Define System. You can change the active one-line type throughout your drawing session. page 264 for more information. The command displays all one-line types available in the reference database. See Define One-Line Type. page 294 for more information. Then. Use the Symbology Control command to review and modify the symbology settings for those systems and one-line types you selected with the Set Symbology Control command. If you need systems not available to you. use the Set Active System command to specify the system you want active as you are drawing raceways. See Set Symbology Control. Set Symbology Once you have defined your systems and one-line types. Use the Define One-Line Type command to define one-line types for the design file from the reference database. 110 . You can change the active system throughout the design session. ask the system manager to add them to the reference database. use the Set Active One-Line Type command to specify the one-line type you want active as you are drawing raceways. page 258 for more information. page 295 for more information. Then.

Workflow Each one-line type has its own set of parameters or catalogs. As you place one-line segments. To review and modify these parameters you will use the Propagation Setup command. See Set Active One-Line Type Parameters. page 297 for more information. you should review the active propagation parameters. what one-lines will be propagated. See Propagation Setup._ _______________ Set Active Parameters Drawing Setup 6. you are also placing the data associated with that one-line type in the reference database into the design file for loading later into the project database. Set Propagation Parameters Before you propagate one-lines in your model. These parameters determine how the system defines fittings. To review and modify this data you will use the Set Active One-Line Parameters command. and whether or not certain commands will automatically propagate one-lines. page 289 for more information. 111 .

To draw a raceway. a phantom run disappears._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . 112 . it becomes a permanent part of the design file (unless you later choose to delete it). Place Manual Fitting. placing tentative segments. page 132 . using the Place One-Line or Place Manual Fitting commands. until you accept them with the Accept option on the Precision Input form. and Precision Input Form. The following figure displays the parts of a run. page 129 for a description of the Place One-Line command. first place one-line segments (centerlines) in connected groups called runs. See Design Commands. you can continue placing one-lines. page 147 . See Place One-Line.February 2003 Place One-Line You will place all one-lines. An accepted run has a Raceway Connect Point (RCP) attached to each end of the run. Each run has a cross section on each end depicting the type of raceway and its orientation (for trays and wireways). Once you place and accept a run. When you accept the run. page 119 for more information on these commands. and the Precision Input form. initially in phantom mode. A run is a group of connected segments that do not branch or change specification. If not accepted. regardless of type.

Sketch is the quicker mode of propagation for two reasons. and the width and height (or diameter) of a segment are determined by the active parameters when you placed the one-line. If you require mitred elbows for production. see Place Manual Fitting. When you propagate a one-line segment into a three-line element. For example. one-lines are propagated into three-lines based on the cross section and the radius. To convert this onedimensional view of the raceway to a three-dimensional view. Once found. The default fitting radius determines the radius of any bends between raceway segments. you may need to place fittings manually when dealing with tight spaces. For example. page 194 for more information. You can use manual placement in situations where placing a sparse model will not be sufficient or is not possible. While this mode of propagation is considerably slower than sketch. Propagation 6. propagation will automatically sketch a 90 degree elbow. Workflow Sketch and Eden Modes There are two modes of propagation in EE Raceway: Sketch and Eden. and light fixtures) must be placed manually. use the Propagate command. Sketch: In sketch mode. the specification dimensions and part information are sent to the Eden symbol library where the symbol is generated. Sketch propagation places the sketched fittings based on the environment in which the onelines come together. the three-dimensional elements are drawn in-line without accessing the Eden symbol library. Manual Fitting Placement You can place fittings manually in the design file using the Place Manual Fitting command. it allows you to define the shape of your fittings. all information necessary for sketching the three-line is stored in the design file. unusual angles. For example. 113 . The system analyzes the environment in which the one-lines meet when determining the type of fitting to place. so reference database access is not required. This radius is used to propagate fittings between straight segments. Second. pullboxes. or fitting-to-fitting placement. First. This may be particularly useful for later interference detection. Eden: In Eden mode. one-lines are propagated into three-lines based on the specification information. you can define the fitting through Eden. for example). where two tray sections come together at a 90 degree angle. It then searches the database for the appropriate part for the proper specification. the three-line element’s shape is determined by the one-line type (tray. and transition information stored for the one-lines and RCPs._ _______________ Propagation A one-dimensional raceway is composed of one-line segments. see Propagate Element. Eden propagation allows you greater detail and accuracy in three-dimensional fitting design. All special fittings (conduit bodies. extension. page 147 for more information. EE Raceway provides rounded tray elbows. The length of each three-line segment is determined by the length of the one-line.

In order for the circles to be placed on level 63. To highlight errors that occur during propagation. Seamless Tubing Representations In the following three-line representation of a bent conduit. You have the option of hiding these circles by turning off level 63._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . thus displaying a more realistic graphical representation of seamless tubing. the corners that do not have an RCP display circles that make the bent conduit look like an elbow. 114 . definition. You can turn off the one-line levels for display and plotting purposes. Any repropagation of such fittings will yield the same Eden symbols as well. After propagation (whether performed in sketch or Eden mode). page 314 . For a detailed description of these error messages. the one-line elements remain in the design file. see Error Messages. select the Highlight Propagation Errors command. and specification.February 2003 Fittings placed through the manual placement command are Eden symbols. This ensures that fittings will always be repropagated with the same orientation. see Highlight Propagation Errors. page 377 . the propagation mode must be set to sketch. regardless of the active propagation mode.

can now be overridden by specifying another valid database key. supplied by the reference database.) It will contain information about a particular drawing only after the Load Database process has been run on that drawing. title blocks) in each drawing in a project. The form that displays with this command contains the reference database key value in a separate field below the annotation input area (see Annotate Element. one-lines. (The system manager may customize these values. you can report on this information using the reports available through the EE Raceway Drawing Menu. There are two databases that can be associated with your drawing: the reference database and the project database. Project Database The project database contains information about all the particular elements (RCPs. and title blocks. Much of this annotation is repetitious and not unique to any element in the drawing. The reference database automatically supplies default annotation values for the project database. The override key gives you the ability to add to and/or modify default database information for RCPs. three-lines. one-lines. The Raceway parameter information is supplied from the vendor catalog in the reference database. Workflow Reference Database A large amount of annotation is used in raceway models. Databases 6. For title blocks. (The project database can be created any time before the Load Database process is run. three-lines. one-lines. the default can be unique for each title block cell. You can both key in override values and display different annotation information. Override Keys EE Raceway supports EE reference database override keys. and title blocks. page 178 ). For the purposes of this discussion. The project database is normally created when the project is created. using the annotation forms. 115 . Once the project database is loaded. The override key acts as a pointer to a row of data in the EE reference database. a database is a collection of information about raceway models._ _______________ Databases A basic understanding of EE Raceway databases is necessary for efficient use of the software. The default annotation information. three-lines.) You can also add this information to this drawing using the Annotate Element command. The default annotation can be associated with RCPs. The EE Raceway reference database provides a simple method for generating this repetitious annotation. The Annotate Element command is used to place and modify the override key linkages.

etc. three-lines. and also identifies which users will be allowed to use the database. A schema is a RIS-specific file that contains a description of the columns and tables of the database. a distinction is now made between schema and database.February 2003 With the addition of RIS to the EE Raceway product._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide .) are stored. The database is the file where the non-graphic drawing data (onelines. 116 .

Workflow Currently. These reports run on the project and reference databases. See Electrical Engineer (EE) Raceway Environment._ _______________ Reports Reports 6. For more detailed information about the individual reports. see Reports. 117 . page 59 for general information about running reports. You can access these reports from the EE Raceway Drawing Menu by selecting the Report option. page 545 . there are several reports delivered with the EE Raceway Modeling software: four standard reports and a rule check report.

See Create Interference Envelope (default name). You will use the Interference Detection Envelope File Creation process to create the envelope file needed for interference detection. This process reads the design file and then creates a data file that contains envelopes (spaces in which valid raceway shapes reside). the EE Raceway Modeling product creates an envelope file for input to the Plant Design interference detection task. page 342 for more information about the Interference Detection process._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . 118 .February 2003 Interference Detection Interference detection is processed through Plant Design software. However.

Since you will use the form with a number of commands. For each command. Several designs of the precision input form are delivered with EE Raceway. This section describes each button and field available on the precision input form. Precision Input Identify an absolute point Specify a delta coordinate to move. page 415 for instructions about changing the form design. See System/Application Manager Information. refer to the individual command sections for a description of operating sequences._ _______________ 7. a precision input form displays and remains in view as long as you are working in the command. When you select a command from the menu. the form displays the active command name as its title. Precision Input Form This chapter describes all the options available on the precision input form and how to use them. Specify a series of coordinate changes to move. Precision Input Form 7. The precision input form is used to: Accept/reject/cancel in response to the active prompt. 119 . Specify an absolute coordinate to move.

Accept Enters an affirmative response to an active prompt. select the field._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . Cancel Terminates the active command. The displayed view determines the orientation of the elements you are placing in the design. In most cases. while collapsing the precision input form. 120 . You can exit a command at any point by selecting Cancel. It can also reset a current command action by one step. Reject performs the same actions as pressing <R>. and prompts the system to continue to the next step. To change the displayed working view.February 2003 View This field displays the active working view. Maximize/Minimize Enlarges the form to its maximum size or reduces the form to its normal size. and scroll through the available views until the appropriate view displays. The orientation of elements is most visible when placing annotation. It also accepts any information you have entered through the form. Pressing <D> in a view for the placement of points simultaneously overrides the active view setting. Accept performs the same actions as pressing <D>. Reject Enters a negative response to an active prompt. In most cases.

The coordinates display in the following order: East/West North/South Elevation The following two options are only available when placing ductbanks. The middle field displays the active one-line type specification description. by selecting North and keying in 20. by selecting North and keying in 20. The top field displays the active system and one-line type. you move to a point that is 20 master units north of the original active point. Display Fields Displays some of your active parameters and general messages. Using Move To. Using Move. The bottom field displays various precision input messages. and direction. 121 ._ _______________ Move/Move To Toggle Used to specify a delta distance or absolute coordinates. 7. you move to a point that is at coordinate 20 (in master units) in the north direction. Active Point Coordinates Display The Active Point Coordinates display shows the coordinates of the active segment point. you will select a directional button and key in a distance to place a point. For example. Both options accept key-in for distance. you will select a directional button and key in an absolute coordinate. while only Move To accepts a data point for input. A set of directional buttons accompanies each option. For example. Precision Input Form The Move (delta move) toggle allows you to specify the distance and direction to place an active point. Precision Input The Move To (absolute move) toggle allows you to place an active point at an exact coordinate.

February 2003 Justification Point The justification point defines the location of the three-line duct bank graphic in relation to the one-line graphic. By using the justification point and the height and width option described below. Height and Width These fields are used to define a ductbank element’s dimensions during placement. Three justification points are available: lower left. lower center. 122 . and lower right._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . you can build duct bank elements similar to the one shown below.

The Any Point option allows you to identify either end of a segment and then specify a distance along that segment at which to place a point. Precision Input 123 . — OR — Press <R> to reject the segment. but they are only tentative until you select the Accept button. When you identify a one-line. 7. and return to the previous step to identify another one-line. and set the toggle to Any Point if it is not already active. the option calculates and then enters its midpoint. you can route segments nonorthogonally. The operating sequence for the Any Point option is: 1. You may place as many points as you want in this mode. Activate the Any Point option. 2. If you do select Accept._ _______________ Construct Point This command specifies a series of movement options before accepting the shortest distance to the displayed location. Identify Raceway One-Line Segment Identify the one-line segment on which you intend to place a point. only the coordinates of the last point you placed are accepted by the command. The command highlights one of the segment’s endpoints. In Construct Point mode. Raceway one line Accept/reject Press <D> to accept the one-line segment. a toggle displays with the following options: The Midpoint option finds the midpoint of a specified one-line. 3. The command highlights the identified segment. Selecting the Reject button discontinues the command and returns you to the last point you placed before entering Construct Point mode. When you select the command. Select the Midpoint/Any Point command on the precision input form. Construct Point Midpoint/Any Point on Segment This command identifies a midpoint or any point on a segment at which to place an active point.

February 2003 4. 124 ._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . 5. Accept/reject end point Press <D> to accept the highlighted endpoint as your reference point. — OR — Select Accept to enter the active endpoint. If the specified distance exceeds the length of the one-line. moving in the direction of the segment. Specify Distance Key in the distance from the reference point to the point you want to enter. and select Accept. — OR — Press <R> to highlight the other segment endpoint. — OR — Press <R> to return to Step 2. the command still calculates the point from the endpoint. and then press <D> to accept it as the reference point. The command calculates the distance from the endpoint and then enters the point on the segment.

you can enter the full height/width of the active one-line type. The Reduce Run toggle allows you to reduce the length of an upcoming segment by the value you specify. When you select the Distance button. Only after you select Accept will the system extend the run by the displayed distance. Using the toggle. the Full/Half toggle displays. or half the height/width of the active one-line type as the distance by which to extend the run. 7. Only after you select Accept will the system extend the upcoming run by the displayed distance. Using the toggle. When you select the Height or Width buttons. you must key in a value by which to reduce the run. You must already have defined an active point to establish the active direction before using Extend/Reduce Run. You cannot use this command to place a first point. you can enter the full height/width of the active one-line type. The distance displays at the bottom of the form. When you select the Height or Width buttons. or any distance you key in. When you select the command. or half the height/width of the active one-line type as the distance by which to reduce the run. The command accepts as values the height and width of the active one-line type (as defined in its specification)._ _______________ Extend/Reduce Run Extend/Reduce Run The Extend/Reduce Run command allows you to extend or reduce the length of an upcoming run by the value you specify. Only after you select Accept will the system reduce the upcoming run by the displayed distance. Precision Input 125 . you must key in a value by which to extend the run. The distance you key in displays at the bottom of the form. the following toggles display: The Extend Run toggle allows you to increase the length of an upcoming run by the value you specify. The distance displays at the bottom of the form. the Full/Half toggle displays. Only after you select Accept will the system reduce the run by the displayed distance. The distance you key in displays in master units at the bottom of the form. When you select the Distance button.

February 2003 Distance and Direction The Distance and Direction command specifies the distance and direction from an active point to place a point or vertex. 3. You can define distance with this command using the Move To and Move toggles or by specifying the true length from an active point.These options define the change in the selected coordinate for the point in the direction entered. Angles .Key in the horizontal angle and the vertical angle in decimal degrees.Define the true length from the active point in the direction to be defined. Steps 1. You can define direction by keying in values for horizontal and vertical angles. You can define the direction from the active point one of two ways: Active Direction . 2.The direction is defined by the active horizontal and vertical angles initially displayed. Select the direction and key in the absolute coordinate or snap to an element to retrieve its corresponding coordinate. Select the Distance and Direction command from the main precision input form. 126 . Negative values are acceptable. Move . Move to ._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . The Distance and Direction form displays. The coordinates of the active point and the angles of the active direction are displayed on the form. Specify Distance/Direction You can define the distance in one of three ways: Distance .These options define the absolute coordinate for the point in the direction to be defined.

See Runtime Setup Commands. and review the active drawing parameters in your design file. This option is set in the PDS product. 4. — OR — Select the Cancel button to terminate the active command. The default setting is clockwise. Accept/Reject Distance and Direction Select the Process button to accept the displayed distance and direction and return to the main Precision Input form. the horizontal angle starts at the North coordinate (zero degrees). The horizontal angle can be measured clockwise or counterclockwise. — OR — Select the Reset button or press <R> to reject the distance and direction option and return to the main Precision Input form. If clockwise._ _______________ Distance and Direction The direction is always determined by both the horizontal and the vertical angles. the horizontal angle starts at the east coordinate (zero degrees). 7. If counterclockwise. The vertical angle is measured up or down from the horizontal plane of the active point. page 287 for more information on the available commands. 127 . Precision Input Runtime Setup The Runtime Setup command is used to define. modify.

February 2003 128 ._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide .

circle. You can also use these commands to enter an active point. 8. Place Equipment Pointer — Places an equipment pointer symbol in the design file._ _______________ 8. rotate cross sections. Route Around Vessel — Routes elements parallel to an arc. Insert RCP — Places a raceway connect point (RCP) in your raceway model. There are also commands available for routing one-lines around vessels and for inserting vertices in an existing one-line. drop points. then selecting Palette from the resulting pull-down menu. Rotate Cross Section — Rotates a cross section at the current cross section angle. Place Drop Point — Places a drop point symbol in the design file. manual fittings. Place Manual Fitting — Places a manual fitting in the design file at the specified orientation and location. and equipment pointer symbols – in the design file. and size conduit and duct banks. Commands Place One-Line — Places the centerlines of raceway elements. Define Active Point — Places an active point in the design file. Design Commands Design Commands The Design palette is activated by selecting Design from the EERWAY Command Menu Bar. Design 129 . Set Active Parameters — Sets the active parameters in the design file based on an identified one-line or RCP. change the active design parameters. and right cylinder. raceway connect points (RCPs). The commands on this palette place raceway elements – one-lines.

Define Duct Cross Section — Defines the cross section configuration of the contained conduit for an underground conduit duct bank. 130 ._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . Place Stub Up — Places conduit stub ups from an underground ductbank. Place Field Routed Raceway — Places short raceway sections from the raceway model to equipment.February 2003 Conduit Sizing — Sizes conduit by "placing" cables in the conduit to determine the percent fill. Insert One-Line Vertex — Places a vertex in an existing one-line. These sections represent raceway components that are field routed by the installer.

For detailed information about precision input. see Precision Input Form. you can exit the command session by pressing <Esc> or by selecting Cancel (X) on the precision input form._ _______________ Using the Design Commands When to Use These Commands Once you have performed the necessary setups. you can use these commands throughout the design session. page 287 for instructions about setting up your systems and oneline types. 131 . 8. Likewise. because it is through the Precision Input form that you will enter values for the placement of points and for the location of raceway elements. You must have conduit one-lines placed in the design file before you can use the Conduit Sizing command. Pressing <R> or selecting Reject on the precision input form will either reset the active command by one step or reject a highlighted element in the design file. page 253 and Runtime Setup Commands. Design You must be familiar with precision input and its functions before using any of the Design commands. Using the Design Commands Before Using These Commands These commands require that you have an active system and one-line type defined in the design file. page 119 . See Setup Commands. Operating Information During the operating sequence for any of these commands. you must have ductbank one-lines placed before you can use the Define Duct Cross Section command. Group Workflow There is no required or suggested sequence for using the commands in this group.

The active one-line type determines the type of one-line you place (tray. is new. Any one-line segment you are placing in space. you can connect to an existing one-line. or when you place a fitting. unattached to another element._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . while the active system determines the system to which the one-line belongs. Valid connections to one-lines are determined by the priority level assigned to each one-line type in the database. RCPs are required when you are changing the system. you will have at least one of five possible routing options. or specifications of a one-line. One-line routes begin and terminate with a raceway connect point (RCP). Attach to RCP — If you identify an RCP for the beginning and/or termination point. One-line types with lower priority can only connect to one-line types with higher priority. conduit. If the priority levels are equal between one-line types. raceway parameters. Connect to One-Line — If you identify either a one-line or an RCP for the beginning and/or termination point. and annotation of the original one-line. the system places a new RCP and breaks the existing one-line into two one-line segments. Drop points establish connectivity between one-lines and RCPs where they are of different one-line types. Whenever you begin or terminate a one-line segment. Connect will place a drop point cell on the identified one-line at the point of identification. the system places a new RCP and routes the one-line from/to the RCP. then connect will not be an option. one-line type. Break One-Line — If you identify a one-line for the beginning and/or termination point. you can resume routing an existing one-line. you can attach to an existing RCP.February 2003 Place One-Line This command places the centerlines of raceway elements based on points you give it. 132 . Continue One-Line — If you identify an RCP for the beginning and/or termination point. based on every possible combination of routing options. The values are defined by the ee_priority_level column in the ol_type table. This allows you to use the existing RCP as a beginning and/or termination point. one-line type. Active raceway parameters supply the default data associated with each one-line segment as you sketch. and so forth). The following list describes each routing option in detail: New RCP — If you do not identify a one-line or RCP for the beginning and/or termination point. These two segments will retain the systems. The chart below illustrates the parameters that are assigned to one-lines as you place or modify them. You can also combine two existing one-line segments using Continue.

attach. then the identified one-line or RCP must have at least one system in common with the active systems. or continue. If the beginning or termination action is break. Design 133 . First — Indicates that the one-line you are placing is assigned the parameters of the first one-line you identified. the command will not allow the continue option. Last — Indicates that the one-line you are placing is assigned the parameters of the last one-line you identified. then the command places a new RCP by default. attach. If you reject all routing options for the beginning and/or termination points of a oneline. then the two identified one-lines must have all systems in common. You can attach to or continue manually placed straights. 8._ _______________ Place One-Line In the above chart: Active — Indicates that the one-line you are placing is assigned the active raceway parameters. then the identified one-line must be of the same one-line type as the active one-line type. If the beginning and termination actions are continue. though it is not a recommended practice. This allows RCPs to be placed on top of one another without establishing connectivity. You should keep the following points in mind when using the Place One-Line command: If an RCP on the end of a one-line belongs to a manual fitting. If the beginning or termination action is break. or continue.

and exit a command. Data Point Accepts. you can exit the command session either by pressing <Esc> or by selecting Cancel (X) on the precision input form. Refer to the description of routing options at the beginning of this section to determine proper routing. The system rotates the cross section and prompts you again to accept or continue rotating it. see Precision Input Form. You must be familiar with precision input and its functions before using this command. 4. The Place One-Line precision input form displays. The system saves the rotation and returns to the beginning of the command.February 2003 Before Using This Command You can enter all values for the placement of points through a precision input form. page 256 ). prompting you to Enter first data point. You must set an active one-line type and system in the design file. 2. accept input. The system places cross sections and RCPs (if they do not already exist) on the ends of the one-line. Steps 1._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . Reset Rotates Press <D> to accept the cross section rotation. — OR — Press <R> to rotate the cross section by the rotation angle defined in Raceway Defaults. Complete the routing. In addition. See Set Active One-Line Type and Set Active System in Runtime Setup Commands. page 119. and return to step 2. 3. route one-lines. 134 . page 287 . Using the form. you should be familiar with the Set Raceway Defaults command (see Set Raceway Defaults. Select the Place One-Line command. press <R> or select Reject on the precision input form. For detailed information about precision input. To reset a command action by one step or to reject a highlighted element. Begin entering points to sketch the one-lines. At any point during this operating sequence. reset a command action. you can locate elements. reject input.

or right cylinder element can be a single MicroStation element. To reset a command action by one step or to reject a highlighted element. or part of a cell. You must be familiar with precision input and its functions before using this command. If the RCP has a fitting on it. If the RCP does not have a fitting. the route will come off the RCP at a 90 degree angle to the one-line. The route is attached to two terminating RCPs which may or may not have a fitting on them. 8. reject input. Design Before Using This Command You can enter all values for the placement of points through a precision input form. At any point during this operating sequence. or right cylinder) selected in either the active or reference design file. Wye and tee fittings cannot be used. you can exit the command session either by pressing <Esc> or by selecting Cancel (X) on the precision input form. you can locate elements. For detailed information about precision input. The arc. circle. page 119. route one-lines. 135 . Using the form. A fitting on the RCP can only have two attach points. reset a command action. such as an elbow. press <R> or select Reject on the precision input form. the fitting angle will be used when routing off the RCP and around the vessel._ _______________ Route Around Vessel Route Around Vessel This command routes the active one-line type around a vessel (represented by an arc. and exit a command. circle. accept input. see Precision Input Form.

4. or right cylinder element) between the RCPs. 3. the route can be placed to the vessel. The minimum distance key-in defines the closest the route can come to the vessel. Identify vessel to route around Select the vessel (the arc. You cannot key in a negative value. Identify second RCP Select the RCP on the other side of the vessel where you want the route to end and press <D> to accept it. Select the Route Around Vessel command. be sure that the distance from the RCPs to the vessel is the same as the minimum distance you key in. — OR — Press <R> to back up one step and respecify the vessel to route around. — OR — Press <R> to back up one step and respecify the second RCP. which you want to route around and press <D> to accept it. Identify first RCP Select the RCP where you want the route to begin and press <D> to accept it. circle.February 2003 Steps 1. Key in minimum distance from vessel Key in the minimum distance. — OR — Press <R> to exit the command. The precision input form displays. the closest. — OR — Press <R> to back up one step and respecify the first RCP. 2. The route is not placed at the minimum distance from the vessel all the way around. If you want the route to maintain the minimum distance all the way around the vessel. 136 . 5._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide .

— OR — Press <R> to back up one step and key in a new minimum distance from vessel value. — OR — Press <R> twice to back up one step and key in a new number of one-line segments. The number of segments must be greater than one (two segments or more). The route is calculated and the elements display on one side of the vessel._ _______________ 6. — OR — Press <R> to place the elements on the other side of the vessel. Key in the number of one-line segments Key in the number of one-line segments to use when routing around the vessel. Design 137 . 7. Accept/reject Press <D> to accept that the elements should be placed on that side of the vessel. Route Around Vessel 8.

_ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . Using the form. Steps 1. If you do not locate an acceptable one-line element. page 119. You must be familiar with precision input and its functions before using this command. reject input. see Precision Input Form. 138 . The Insert RCP precision input form displays. At any point during this operating sequence. you can exit the command session either by pressing <Esc> or by selecting Cancel (X) on the precision input form. Identify Raceway One-Line Identify a one-line in the design file. The message disappears when you identify a valid element. route one-lines. reset a command action. For detailed information about precision input. Select the Insert RCP command from the menu. and exit a command.February 2003 Insert RCP This command breaks an identified one-line in the design file and inserts a raceway connect point (RCP). you can locate elements. Before Using This Command You can enter all values for the placement of points through a precision input form. To reset a command action by one step or to reject a highlighted element. 2. The system highlights a valid one-line. accept input. press <R> or select Reject on the precision input form. the system displays the message Element not found.

Insert RCP 8. — OR — If you reject the one-line. Raceway one line Accept/reject Accept or reject the highlighted one-line. — OR — Exit the command. If you accept the one-line. 4. Go to Step 2. the command inserts the RCP as specified. Design 139 . Continue inserting RCPs._ _______________ 3. Go to Step 2. the system prompts you to identify another.

accept input. For duct bank cross sections. Select the Rotate Cross Section command. but changes the duct bank justification location. page 256 for more information. For detailed information about precision input. To reset a command action by one step or to reject a highlighted element._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . you can exit the command session either by pressing <Esc> or by selecting Cancel (X) on the precision input form. page 119. reset a command action. Identify Cross Section Identify a cross section and accept it with a <D>. You must be familiar with precision input and its functions before using this command. The Rotate Cross Section precision input form displays. Otherwise continue to step 3. see Set Raceway Defaults. At any point during this operating sequence. Steps 1. reject input. Using the form. If you identified a duct bank cross section. route one-lines. 140 . see Precision Input Form. Before Using This Command You can enter all values for the placement of points through a precision input form. 2. press <R> or select Reject on the precision input form. and exit a command. this command does not rotate duct bank’s cross section. you can locate elements. You can change the rotation angle in the EE Raceway Defaults form.February 2003 Rotate Cross Section This command rotates a cross section using the current cross section rotation angle. go to step 4.

If you do not locate an acceptable element. page 256 for information about changing the angle of rotation. The message disappears when you identify a valid cross section. See Set Raceway Defaults. If Automatic Propagation is on. Reset Rotates Press <D> to accept the current cross section orientation and exit the command. The duct bank justification changes and the command exits. Repeat this step. — OR — Press <R> to rotate the cross section. Rotate Cross Section The system highlights a valid cross section. Design 141 . the elements will repropagate at the new orientation angle. the system displays the message Element not found. 3. Select New Cross Section Justification Select a new justification point from the precision input form and accept it. The system rotates the cross section by the defined rotation angle. Data Point Accepts._ _______________ — OR — Exit the command. 4. 8.

reject input. The message disappears when you identify a valid RCP. and exit a command. You can also establish connectivity between two one-lines where graphic coincidence does not occur. The Place Drop Point precision input form displays. At any point during this operating sequence. Steps 1. If you do not locate an acceptable element. you can locate elements. the drop-out point will be calculated by determining the closest point on the one-line to the drop point symbol. establish connectivity between a piece of conduit and a tray at the point where the cables drop out of the tray into the conduit. 142 . see Precision Input Form. To reset a command action by one step or to reject a highlighted element. press <R> or select Reject on the precision input form._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . If the drop point symbol is not on the one-line. 2. route one-lines. Select the Place Drop Point command. page 119. a higher number indicates a lesser priority. Identify Raceway RCP Identify an RCP in the design file. The point on the one-line where you place the drop point symbol defines the drop-out point. You can place drop points between RCPs and one-lines of the same and/or different one-line type. For example. you can exit the command session either by pressing <Esc> or by selecting Cancel (X) on the precision input form. reset a command action. Before Using This Command You can enter all values for the placement of points through a precision input form. for instance. The system highlights a valid RCP. accept input.February 2003 Place Drop Point This command places a drop point symbol in the design file. Drop points establish connectivity between a RCP and a one-line. 10 is of lesser priority than 5. Using the form. You can. Valid connections to one-lines are determined by the priority level assigned to each one-line type in the database. For detailed information about precision input. You must be familiar with precision input and its functions before using this command. The values which determine priority status are defined in the ee_priority_level column in the ol_type table. the system displays the message Element not found.

4. Place Drop Point 8. Design 143 . Go to step 4._ _______________ 3. The system prompts you to identify another one-line. Go to step 2. and returns you to the previous prompt. The system prompts you to identify another RCP. — OR — Reject the highlighted RCP. Go to step 2. — OR — Reject the one-line. The system places the drop point as specified. Raceway connect point Accept/reject Accept the highlighted RCP. — OR — Press <R> or Reject to identify a different RCP. The identification point is the point at which the system will place the drop point. Identify Raceway One-Line Identify a one-line in the design file. Raceway one line Accept/reject Accept the one-line. 5. The system highlights the identified one-line.

An equipment pointer symbol serves as a tag that identifies a particular piece of equipment. — OR — Press <R> to select another RCP. Using the form. The system places the equipment pointer symbol as specified. Before Using This Command You can enter all values for the placement of points through a precision input form. The system highlights a valid RCP. The message disappears when you identify a valid RCP. and exit a command. — OR — Press <R> to exit the command. Enter data point to place Place a data point at the desired location for the equipment pointer symbol. Select the Place Equipment Pointer command. route one-lines. To reset a command action by one step or to reject a highlighted element. At any point during this operating sequence. the system displays the message Element not found. If you do not locate an acceptable element. reset a command action._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . Steps 1. you can exit the command session either by pressing <Esc> or by selecting Cancel (X) on the precision input form. 2. you can locate elements. For detailed information about precision input. Identify Raceway RCP Identify an RCP in the design file and accept it. The equipment pointer should match the corresponding symbol in the PDS Equipment Modeling product. You must be familiar with precision input and its functions before using this command. see Precision Input Form. page 119. press <R> or select Reject on the precision input form.February 2003 Place Equipment Pointer This command places an equipment pointer symbol in the design file. 144 . 3. accept input. reject input. Continue placing equipment pointer symbols in the design.

You must be familiar with precision input and its functions before using this command. accept input. Design 1. 145 . route one-lines. Steps 8. reset a command action. reject input. page 119. Define Active Point Before Using This Command You can enter all values for the placement of points through a precision input form. see Precision Input Form. At any point during this operating sequence. The Enter Active Point precision input form displays. and exits the command. Using the form. Enter active point Specify a data point in the design file where you want the active point to be. and exit a command. To reset a command action by one step or to reject a highlighted element. 2. press <R> or select Reject on the precision input form. Select the Define Active Point command. you can exit the command session either by pressing <Esc> or by selecting Cancel (X) on the precision input form. The command makes the specified data point the active point._ _______________ Define Active Point This command defines a new active point in your design file. you can locate elements. For detailed information about precision input.

You must be familiar with precision input and its functions before using this command. you can locate elements. you can exit the command session either by pressing <Esc> or by selecting Cancel (X) on the precision input form. For detailed information about precision input. — OR — Press <R> to reject the highlighted element. accept input. 3. 146 . page 119. see Precision Input Form. press <R> or select Reject on the precision input form. To reset a command action by one step or to reject a highlighted element. Before Using This Command You can enter all values for the placement of points through a precision input form. one-line type. and exit a command. system. The command exits automatically. The system sets the active one-line type. 2. The Set Active Parameters precision input form displays. Select the Set Active Parameters command. reject input. to those of a one-line or RCP you identify. Using the form. Identify Raceway One-Line or RCP Select a one-line or RCP to use to set the active parameters. reset a command action. and raceway parameters. Return to step 2. route one-lines. Steps 1. Accept/reject Press <D> to accept the element as the one to use. At any point during this operating sequence. — OR — Press <R> to exit the command. The system highlights the identified element. active systems._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . and one-line type parameters based on the highlighted element.February 2003 Set Active Parameters This command sets the active parameters.

If the active point lies in the vicinity of a fitting. or placing a fitting on the end of a straight section. the system extends the one-line for that straight to terminate on the RCP of the fitting. and so forth) using this command. Design 147 . If the new fitting and the existing one do not share the same system and one-line type. the system locates the closest attachment point on that fitting. vertical tees. When attaching a manual fitting to the placement point of another fitting (or a straight). you may need to place fittings manually when dealing with tight spaces. For example. You can place special fittings (conduit bodies. When placing a straight section. unusual angles. You will use manual placement in situations where placing a sparse model will not be sufficient or is not possible. Otherwise. Place Manual Fitting 8. pullboxes._ _______________ Place Manual Fitting This command identifies a unique part from the reference database and places it in the design file at whatever orientation and location you specify. the new fitting is attached to the existing fitting and a one-line is automatically placed. the system derives the default orientation for placing the new fitting from the placement point. During placement. or fitting-to-fitting placement. then the system places the new fitting by itself. and light fixtures) as well as spec driven fittings (horizontal elbows. the location of a manual fitting is determined by the location of the active point. Such a fitting is placed with its own RCP.

See Set Active Parameters. See Set Active System. Set Active System — Displays the current active system and allows you to select a new active system. Modifying the value for Type also may change the active and available subtypes. To change the displayed three-line type. Field Descriptions Type — Displays the active three-line type for the current specification. Set Active Parameters — Defines the active system. Selecting a new active one-line type updates the part information elsewhere on the form. wye. one-line type.) for that specification. Otherwise. Subtype — Displays the active subtype for the displayed Type value.) for the active type and subtype in the current specification. select a value from the list. the previous orientation will be retained. inside vertical. select a value from the list. etc. The list contains all available subtypes (vertical. page 294 . etc. and active one-line type parameters in the design. 148 . page 145 .) for the active type and subtype in the current specification. To change the displayed subtype. See Define Active Point. To change the displayed qualifier. page 146 . If manual placement cannot locate a fitting. Modifying Type or Subtype values may change the available qualifiers. Changing the active parameters updates the part information elsewhere on the form.February 2003 Commands Define Active Point — Defines the active point in the design file for the placement of fittings. the command derives the orientation from the place point. rigid. Modifying the value in the Part field may also change the active and available Type values._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . The list contains all available three-line types (elbow. etc. horizontal. page 295 . straight. The list contains all available qualifiers (adjustable. select a value from the list. Qualifier — Displays the active qualifier for the displayed Type and Subtype. Set Active One-Line Type — Displays the current active one-line type and allows you to select a new active one-line type. See Set Active One-Line Type.

Part — Displays the active part. Subtype. and Qualifier for the current specification. Design 149 . (if applicable) Spec2. You can only review the values in this field. the Length field does not display on the form. Subtype. Doing so displays a specification form. select an angle from the list or select the field. The list contains available angles. (-90 degrees) to shift the RCPs and placepoints to the correct location. Place Manual Fitting Length — Displays the length by which to project a straight. Spec1 — Displays the active specification for the displayed Type. if the placepoints and RCPs do not line up correctly. Qualifier. Angle — Displays the active angle associated with the Type. To change the displayed part. 8. and Qualifier. To display the specification itself. The list contains all available specifications. and key in the new value._ _______________ Symbol — Displays the name of the Eden symbol you are placing. To change the displayed angle. The list contains all available parts for the current specification. If straight is not your active Type. select the field. To change the displayed length. and key in the new value. To change the displayed specification. select a value from the list. Spec1. select a value from the list. — OR — Change any of the values for Type. Subtype. select the corresponding Display button. When placing a fitting (such as a vertical tee). key in a negative angle. or Angle (if applicable).

If more than one row matches the criteria. To change the active placepoint. then the Column values fill in with the matching row’s values. You can activate the Override button by selecting it directly or by selecting the Clear button. If Cutback Mode is on. Secondary specifications are generally used with reducers. the RCP will be moved accordingly. If Cutback Mode is off. Type.February 2003 Column name . Subtype. Overrides from the secondary specification are not passed to the Eden symbol. if any. To display the codelist. select the *. which automatically activates it. The list contains all available secondary specifications for the current settings. page 178 .Displays the aliases of those columns in the database that are associated with the specified type.Clears the Column values from the lower portion of the form. You can only review the information in this column. For a list of valid operators. Cutback Mode — Defines whether a straight section is to be cutback when placing a manual fitting. displays. If an * displays in the List column. If only one row matches this criteria. select the Override button. See Spec1 for a description of the form. Placepoint — Defines the point of attachment for the fitting you are currently placing. Clear . 150 . then the column value has an associated codelist. You can use certain relational operators as search criteria.Retrieves the row(s) from the specification table that meet the select criteria defined in the form. You can review and modify the values in this column. then a second form.Indicates whether or not a column value has an associated codelist. Column value . Select ._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . You can display the current specification itself by selecting the Display button. for the given Spec1. Doing so displays a specification form. and then automatically depresses the Override button so that you can select a different row(s) from the specification. and Qualifier. List . and drag it along the scale until it reaches the appropriate value. To change a value. Spec2 — Displays the active secondary specification.Allows you to override those columns whose access is Read Only (R). containing all matching rows. see Annotate Element. Then select the field. and key in a new value.Displays the column name values currently associated with the specified type. select the slide bar. the existing RCP location is fixed. Override .

Place Manual Fitting The fitting size is determined by comparing the spec table nominal size of all one-lines at the RCP and selecting the largest nominal size among them. Design 151 . then the largest fitting available is used. select the field. That nominal size is then compared to the fitting table nominal sizes. and key in a new value. 8. To change the displayed angle. — OR — Identify the appropriate axis name (text) on the orientation matrix diagram (to the right of the Angle and About fields._ _______________ Automatic Size — Automatically selects the correct size fitting. then the first fitting that is of greater nominal size than the one-line nominal size is used. You must specify the manual fitting type before using the button. then that fitting is used. Automatic Fit — Re-orients the fitting in reference to the one-line it is associated with.) I Button — Reorients the orientation tee along the identity matrix. Secondary. Angle . Normal) until the appropriate axis displays. About . the Secondary axis with the positive Y axis. To change the displayed axis. If there is no fitting of that nominal size. If you set the Driven By Spec/Table toggle to Table. and toggle between the three axes (Primary. Rotate Orientation — Defines the active orientation matrix. It realigns the Primary axis with the positive X axis. If in the fitting table there is a nominal size the same as the largest one-line nominal size. the Place Manual Fitting form displays.Defines the axis about which to rotate the orientation tee. and the Normal axis with the positive Z axis. If there is no nominal size fitting larger than the one-line nominal size.Defines the angle by which to rotate the orientation tee. select the field.

152 . To change the active special part table. you set the active Table to cond_body. then only those types that are 1/2 inch in size from vendor 3 and made of feraloy will be displayed in the types list. and vendor to 3. For example. see the descriptions earlier in this section. size.February 2003 Field Descriptions Table — Displays the active special part table from the database. Modifying the Table value also changes the active and available Part values. then only the sizes the form 7c comes in. type. material. The attribute display lists are used to interactively query the database for the desired Part Key. When set to All. regardless of the other attribute settings._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . Similarly. vendor to 3. Select/All toggles — Overrides the interactive queries of the attribute fields. made of feraloy from vendor 3. Part Key — Displays the current part for the displayed Table that matches the attribute values. will be displayed in the size list. and vendor display as the active attributes. For information about the Placepoint and Rotate Orientation fields as well as the form commands. You can display the current table information for the part by selecting the Display button. select a table name from the list. if you set material to feraloy. and size to 1/2 inch. Attribute — The next four display lists on the form are the first four Part Key attributes from the active table and will change depending on which Table is active. In other words. Each attribute displays only those values that have corresponding matching values for the other three attributes in the database. These fields and the commands operate identically in either Driven By Spec or Driven By Table modes. if you set type to form 7c. material to feraloy. all available values for that attribute are displayed in the list. The list contains the available special part tables from the database. See the description of the Spec1 field earlier in this section for detailed information about the form parameters.

see Precision Input Form. and location. Change fitting descriptions. you should first consider a few points. height. All parts of a given specification will inherit the attributes of that specification. and location until the desired fitting is seen in dynamics (phantom mode) in the design file. 3. set the toggle to Driven By Table. etc. orientations.) to construct the three-line symbols. 4. Specification-driven fittings rely on the specification information (width. radius._ _______________ Before Using This Command You should be familiar with precision input and its functions. orientation. Place Manual Fitting When deciding whether your fitting information will come from a specification or from a table in the database. set the toggle to Driven By Spec. To derive fitting attributes from a specification in the database. Design Steps 1. On the other hand. Go to step 4. The Place Manual Fitting form displays. For more information. page 119 . Set the Driven By Spec/Table toggle to meet your requirements. Select the Place Manual Fitting command. 2. Such fittings are called special parts. — OR — To derive fitting attributes from a special part table in the database. Select Accept to accept the fitting with the current settings. some fittings derive their information from their own database tables because they are not so easily classified into a common group of parts. The system accepts the fitting at the specified location and orientation. 153 . The following table indicates fittings that are specification-driven and those that are special parts: Specification-Driven Fittings straight elbow wye cross dropout Special Parts pullbox conduit body light fixture 8.

154 . — OR — Exit the command.February 2003 5. Continue placing manual fittings._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide .

_ _______________ Conduit Sizing This command places cables (wires) in a conduit to determine the correct conduit size based on the conduit’s percent fill calculation. Design 155 . Conduit Sizing 8.

This operator indicates that the queried values should be greater than the given value. The queried values must have every character aside from the underline in common with the given value. The queried values must have every character aside from the % in common with the given value. This operator indicates that the queried values should be less than the given value. select the *. Value — Select and key in values to use as search criteria to find corresponding cables in the database. representing zero or more characters. If an * displays in the column. You should be familiar with the following operators: Symbol Name Data Type numeric Description = equal to This is the default operator. the system assumes =. representing a single character.February 2003 Field Descriptions Column Alias — Displays the column aliases for each column in the database table. To display the code list. If you do not enter another operator. This operator indicates that the queried values should be less than or equal to the given value. This operator indicates that the queried values should NOT be equal to the given value. 156 . then the Value has an associated code list. This operator is a wild card. A code list is a list of valid database values for that Column Alias. > greater than numeric < less than numeric >= greater than or equal to less than or equal to not equal to numeric <= numeric != numeric % wild card CHAR _ underline CHAR Code List — Indicates whether a Value has an associated code list. This command also accepts certain relational operators as search criteria. This operator indicates that the queried values should be greater than or equal to the given value. This operator is a wild card._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide .

The smallest conduit available in the spec that meets the percent fill criteria is used. There are two methods to choose from: — Increase Size ONLY . Copy Contents — Copies cables from a selected conduit into the active conduit. — Increase/Decrease size . Any cables in the active conduit before the copy are removed. If more than one cable matches the search criteria. Using this form you can select another conduit in which to route cables without having to exit the command. from which you can select a cable or cables to route in the conduit. Conduit Size — Displays the size of the conduit in spec units.When a conduit is calculated to be full. The field displays in red and the message Warning: Percent Fill exceeds maximum allowed displays when the conduit has reached its capacity as defined by the electrical code you are using. Select Conduit — Displays the Conduit Sizing precision input form. If only one cable is found that matches the criteria. the PseudoCable form displays. 8. the next size larger conduit in the spec table is used until an adequately sized conduit is found. Append Contents — Adds cables from a selected conduit into the active conduit leaving any cables in the active conduit there. Process Query — Queries the database to find cables matching the search criteria defined in the Value fields. Design 157 . Add Cable — Mode for adding cables to a conduit. Percent Fill — Displays how full the conduit is as a percentage._ _______________ Initialize Query — Clears all entries in the Value fields. Selected Cables — Displays information on all cables that have been selected to go in the active conduit. Field Descriptions Increase Size ONLY / Increase/Decrease size — Defines how the conduit should be sized. it is added to the conduit. The Percent Fill calculation is based on the conduit’s cross-sectional area divided by the summation of all of that conduit’s cables’ cross-sectional areas.

you can locate elements. You can query the database and select them from the form or copy them from a conduit that has "cable" in it. page 119. At any point during this operating sequence. reject input. To reset a command action by one step or to reject a highlighted element. Select the Conduit Sizing command. see Precision Input Form. 3. 4. Steps 1._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . Delete All Cables — Deletes all cables in the active conduit. The Conduit Sizing precision input form displays. This option is available only when Remove Cable is selected. accept input. press <R> or select Reject on the precision input form. For detailed information about precision input.February 2003 Remove Cable — Mode for removing cables from a conduit. See Set Conduit Sizing Attributes. Define the cables for the conduit. 2. You must be familiar with precision input and its functions before using this command. Quantity — Defines the number of cables of that type. 158 . Set the Increase size ONLY / Increase/Decrease size toggle to the sizing method you want. You must use the Set Conduit Sizing Attributes command to define how the conduit sizes will be selected. you can exit the command session either by pressing <Esc> or by selecting Cancel (X) on the precision input form. and exit a command. Identify CONDUIT Identify the conduit to size and accept it with <D> The Conduit Sizing form displays. reset a command action. Using the form. route one-lines. Before Using This Command You can enter all values for the placement of points through a precision input form. This field can be edited to take positive integers other than zero (zero and blank are invalid entries). page 268 for more information.

Design 159 . Select Accept to calculate and size the conduit. Field Descriptions 8. If the largest size conduit available does not satisfy the percent fill calculation. — OR — Select Cancel to exit the command and ignore any changes you have made. a warning message displays._ _______________ 5.

You must be familiar with precision input and its functions before using this command. Identify Raceway One-line Select the one-line to which to add the vertex. 160 . Steps 1. route one-lines. page 119. page 192 for more information. you can locate elements. The point that identifies the one-line in this step is the point where the vertex is inserted. Before Using This Command You can enter all values for the placement of points through a precision input form. Using the form. 2. 3. press <R> or select Reject on the precision input form. the one-line will repropagate and the vertex will display with its cross-section. reset a command action. — OR — Press <R> to reject the one-line. reject input. If Automatic Propagation is on.February 2003 Insert One-Line Vertex This command places a vertex in an existing one-line. At any point during this operating sequence. Select the Insert One-Line Vertex command. accept input. To reset a command action by one step or to reject a highlighted element. To move an inserted vertex. Accept/reject Press <D> to accept the one-line. The selected one-line highlights._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . see Move One-Line Vertex. and exit a command. For detailed information about precision input. use the Move One-Line Vertex command. you can exit the command session either by pressing <Esc> or by selecting Cancel (X) on the precision input form. see Precision Input Form. The vertex is inserted. The Insert One-line Vertex precision input form displays.

You are prompted to position the annotation after the equipment pointer is placed in the design. Similarly.) When set to Keyin. The column names reside in the ee_unique table in the reference schema. but can also be used for other raceway types that are field routed. 161 . select the field and key in the new value. there are instances where the raceway does not terminate at equipment and cables must be routed through airways (space) by the installer from the raceway to the equipment. Column value — Defines a value for the corresponding equipment identifying attribute in the Column name field. When on._ _______________ Place Field Routed Raceway The Place Field Routed Raceway command places short raceway sections from the raceway model to equipment. field route length. conduit less than a particular size is typically not modeled in the plant model but is installed in the field by the installer. Field routed raceway sections are needed to get appropriate material takeoff (MTO) reports and to facilitate cable routing. To change the value. you must key in the length in the Distance to equipment field. Design Field Descriptions Column name — Displays the aliases for the columns (attributes) in the reference schema that unique identify equipment. the value is displayed in the design. This length represents the estimated length of raceway to the equipment from the beginning point of the placed one-line. These sections represent raceway components that are field routed by the installer. Place Field Routed Raceway 8. Keyin/Calculate — Defines the method for entering the distance from the beginning of the placed one-line to the equipment (that is. To change the displayed length. This command is intended primarily to support field routed conduit and airways. select the field and key in a new length. Display — Enables or disables the annotation of the Column value. For example. The Distance to equipment specifies the field routed length (in subunits) of the placed one-line. This field is informational only.

To change the displayed axis.) I Button — Reorients the orientation tee along the identity matrix. the Secondary axis with the positive Y axis. see Precision Input Form. For detailed information about precision input. To change the displayed length. The software calculates the orthogonal distance (that is. 162 . reject input. and toggle between the three axis (Primary. and the Normal axis with the positive Z axis. To reset a command action by one step or to reject a highlighted element. and key in a new value. press <R> or select Reject on the precision input form. page 119. The calculated distance is stored with the one-line as field routed length. and exit a command. route one-lines. you are prompted to identify the location of the equipment. reset a command action. Length of Placed Raceway Field — Displays the length by which to project the oneline along the orientation tee from the first point. you can locate elements. select the field.February 2003 When the Keyin/Calculate toggle is set to Calculate. accept input. y. Or you can identify the appropriate axis name (text) on the orientation matrix diagram (to the right of the Angle and About fields. you can exit the command session either by pressing <Esc> or by selecting Cancel (X) on the precision input form. sum of the x. To change the displayed angle. Using the form. Angle — Defines the angle by which to rotate the orientation tee. select the field. When placing the one-line element using the First Point & Orientation method the Rotate Orientation gadgets display._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . Secondary. and key in a new value. select the field. Normal) until the appropriate axis displays. It realigns the Primary axis with the positive X axis. z deltas) from the beginning of the placed one-line to the identified equipment location. Before Using This Command You can enter all values for the placement of points through a precision input form. placement point) of the one-line element. At any point during this operating sequence. you are prompted for the first point (that is. You must be familiar with precision input and its functions before using this command. After specifying the orientation and the length of the one-line. When placing the one-line element using the Beginning & Ending Point method. First Point & Orientation/Beginning & Ending Point — Defines the method for entering the plant coordinates of the one-line element. you are prompted for the beginning and ending plant coordinates of the one-line. About — Defines the axis about which to rotate the orientation tee.

The Place Field Routed Raceway form displays. Select the Place Field Routed Raceway command. Identify Raceway One-Line Identify a one-line element to which you want to connect the field routed raceway section and accept it when it highlights. Define the form parameters to meet your specifications. — OR — Exit the command. Design 163 . 2. 3._ _______________ Operator Sequence 1. The precision input form displays. Place Field Routed Raceway 8.

Field Descriptions Button Matrix — Each button represents an area in the duct bank’s cross section that extends the size of the duct bank. 164 . By assigning a conduit. Copy section layout from — Copies an existing duct cross section layout from a specified duct into the active duct.February 2003 Define Duct Cross Section This command defines the cross section configuration of the contained conduit or cable for underground duct banks._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . you assign that area in the duct bank. cable or gap to a button. All assigned buttons (areas) are then used to calculate the duct bank’s cross section. Unassigned or unused buttons in the matrix are not used in calculating the ductbank’s cross sectional size unless they are in the middle of assigned buttons. The duct bank will automatically resize after configuration to accommodate the defined conduit or cable.

A form displays all available conduit/cables in the project database for the defined control number. The cable schedule is not the same table as the cable table in the EE Wiring Diagram and Panel Design software. this information is retrieved from the drawing_numb column of the cndsch_spec table. Define Duct Cross Section Delete — Removes a conduit/cable or gap from a matrix button. The gap distance will appear on the button after assignment. Control Number — Displays the control number to use for retrieving the conduit/cable information from the project database. 8. Horizontal spacing — Defines the horizontal spacing between each button (area). You define whether you are routing conduit or cables by setting the Duct toggle in the EE Raceway Defaults form. Modify — Removes an existing button assignment and replaces it with new assignment. The gap is measured from the center of the left conduit/cable to the center of the right conduit/cable and can only be defined on the top row of buttons. If cable routing is selected. If conduit routing is selected. Design 165 . Gap Distance — Defines a gap between two conduit/cables in the matrix. page 256 for more information. These tables are the cable/conduit schedule listings used for this project. Vertical spacing — Defines the vertical spacing between each button (area). this information is retrieved from the drawing_numb column of the cabsch_spec table._ _______________ Add — Assigns a conduit. The conduit/cable identification will appear on the button after assignment. Move — Moves a conduit/cable or gap from one matrix button to another. cable or gap to a matrix button. See Set Raceway Defaults. You can define any control number that is loaded to the project database.

you can locate elements. and exit a command. See Set Raceway Defaults. Steps 1. page 119. reset a command action. If Automatic Propagation is on. You must be familiar with precision input and its functions before using this command. To reset a command action by one step or to reject a highlighted element. The duct bank section layout. you can define a margin width. the duct bank will automatically repropagate. At any point during this operating sequence. page 256 for more information._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . Define cross section layout using the various commands. 2. For detailed information about precision input. Likewise. press <R> or select Reject on the precision input form. all conduit/cable information. any changes you made will be ignored. Define whether you are placing conduit or cables in the duct bank by setting the Duct toggle in the EE Raceway Defaults form. The Duct Cross Section Layout form displays. 166 . is assigned to the duct one-line. you can exit the command session either by pressing <Esc> or by selecting Cancel (X) on the precision input form. If you select Cancel after having modified the ductbank’s layout. 4. you cancel your "exit without saving" and are returned to the command. a space between the button matrix and the outside of the ductbank in the EE Raceway Defaults form.February 2003 Before Using This Command You can enter all values for the placement of points through a precision input form. both width and height. Identify duct element Select the duct bank element for which to define the cross section layout and accept it with <D>. If you select Cancel on the warning form. Select the Define Duct Cross Section command. 3. a warning form displays confirming that you want to exit without saving changes. The duct bank size is checked and resized as necessary. Select Confirm (√) to exit the form and save your changes. see Precision Input Form. reject input. The precision input form displays. If you select Confirm (√) on the warning form. — OR — Select Cancel to exit the form without saving any changes. accept input. route one-lines. Using the form.

The stub up is connected to the corresponding underground duct bank section by means of a drop point. vendor. page 268 . You must define the duct cross section layout using the Define Duct Cross Section command. You must define conduit as the active one-line type using the Set Active One-Line Type command. See Define Duct Cross Section. You must define the conduit sizing attributes using the Set Conduit Sizing Attributes command. 167 . page 289 . See Set Active One-Line Type Parameters. You must select the a conduit specification using the Set Active One-Line Type Parameters command. material) are used to determine the conduit stub up sizes available. See Define One-Line Type. The conduit specification and the conduit sizing attributes (for example. Stub ups are pieces of conduit associated with a conduit or cable contained in an underground duct bank and are placed in the raceway model for making above ground conduit connections. page 260 . See Set Active One-Line Type. units. page 294 . page 164 . Design Before Using this Command You must define conduit as an available one-line type using the Define One-Line Type command._ _______________ Place Stub Up Place Stub Up This command manipulates conduit stub ups. 8. See Set Conduit Sizing Attributes.

Delete Stub Up — Deletes a conduit stub up. You can optionly override the displyed value by selecting a conduit stub up size from the available sizes as determined by matching the conduit sizing attributes to the active conduit specification. meters) The user can optionally override the displayed value. This matrix is used in the Change Association and Place Stub Up options to identify which cross section (that is. Select Duct Segment — Selects an existing duct segment in the raceway model as the active duct segment. If underground cable routing is selected for this model or the conduit size is not defined for the conduit number. conduit/cable) to manipulate. The displayed value is simply the value from the previous place stub up selection._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . this field displays the associated conduit stub up size. the size of stub up will be retrieved from the conduit schedule table in project schema based upon conduit number that user selected from matrix.February 2003 Field Descriptions Button Matrix — Each button represents an area in the duct bank’s cross section that has or has not been assigned during the Define Duct Cross Section command. Stub Up Size — After selecting the Place Stub Up button and selecting a conduit/cable from the active duct segment. Place Stub Up — Places a conduit stub up in the raceway model associated with a conduit/cable in the active duct segment. If underground conduit routing is selected for this model. 168 . Stub Up Length — Displays the conduit stub up length as measured in the model master units (feet. Change Association — Changes the association of a conduit stub up from the currently associated conduit/cable to another conduit/cable in the active duct segment. you are required to select the desired size from the available sizes.

2. — OR — Select the Place Stub Up option. 4. — OR — Exit the option. Go to Step 14. — OR — Reject the highlighted element. Select the Place Stub Up command. — OR — Select the Change Association option. Go to Step 4. Raceway one line Accept/reject Accept the highlighted element. Go to Step 2. — OR — Select the Delete Stub Up option. 169 . 3. Go to Step 2. The identified duct one-line’s cross section layout displays in the Button Matrix. Steps 8. The Place Stub Up form displays. The identified element highlights. Go to Step 9. 5. Identify duct element Identify a duct one-line in the design file. The precision input form displays. Select the Select Duct Segment option. Select Option Select the Select Duct Segment option. Design — OR — Select Cancel (X) to exit the command._ _______________ Steps 1. Go to Step 6.

Go to Step 7. Select the Change Association option. propagated elements. Go to Step 10. The precision input form displays. 10. Select the Delete Stub Up option. Select stub up for modification. 7. — OR — Reject the highlighted element. Go to Step 2. Identify stub up element Identify a stub up one-line in the design file. It also deletes all cross sections. — OR — Exit the option.February 2003 6. — OR — Reject the highlighted element. and RCP’s that are associated with the selected one-line. Raceway one line Accept/reject Accept the highlighted element. Conduit/Cable Number = [conduit/cable number] Select another cable/conduit to modify existing stub up. — OR — Exit the option. The precision input form displays. 12. Raceway one line Accept/reject Accept the highlighted element. The identified element highlights. 9. is displays in the form message field. 170 ._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . Go to Step 7. Identify stub up element Identify a stub up one-line in the design file. 8. Go to Step 2. 11. annotation. The identified element highlights.

14. Go to Step 17._ _______________ Select a button from the Button Matrix. Steps 8. — OR — Select a option button. displays in the message field. Go to Step 2. 15. Select the Place Stub Up option. Select location to place stub up. — OR — Override the stub up size or length. displays in the message field. The precision input form displays. 13. Select a button from the Button Matrix. 16. 171 . — OR — Exit the placement of the selected conduit/cable. Stub up spec. Select cable/conduit to connect stub up. has been changed. The stub up is placed down from the given data point. Go to Step 2. Select location to place stub up. Place a data point at the desired location for the top of the conduit stub up. Select cable/conduit to connect stub up. 17. The system places the stub up and connects it to the duct bank by means of a drop point located on the duct bank one-line closest to the bottom of the conduit stub up. Design Go to Step 14. Go to Step 2. Select a button from the Button Matrix.

February 2003 172 ._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide .

moving. The Modify palette is activated by selecting Modify from the EERWAY Command Menu Bar. and so forth). within the design file. Commands The commands on the Modify palette both activate other command palettes. annotation. annotating. 9. Modify Commands The Modify commands manipulate elements. Available element manipulations include copying. three-lines. Modify Commands Do not use MicroStation commands to manipulate or modify EE Raceway elements (one-line. then selecting Palette._ _______________ 9. and three-lines. Modify Modify Group Commands — Define elements for inclusion in a group and manipulate elements belonging to the active group. 173 . Use only these EE Raceway modify commands to manipulate EE Raceway elements. Doing so will cause serious problems and/or destroy the EE Raceway model. Modify Element Commands — Manipulate single elements within the design file. one-lines. and propagation. You can elect to manipulate either single elements or those elements belonging to an active group. such as RCPs. These palettes and their commands will be described in this chapter. deleting.

page 253 and Runtime Setup Commands. you can exit the command session by pressing <Esc> or by selecting Cancel (X) on the precision input form. not MicroStation manipulation commands. See Setup Commands. 174 . You must be familiar with precision input and its functions before using any of the Modify commands. For reliable results. you should use these commands. Group Workflow There is no required or suggested sequence for the commands in this group. For detailed information about precision input. page 119 ._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . page 129 for information about placing elements in the model). Before Using These Commands These commands require that you have existing raceway elements in your design file (see the Design Commands. you can use these commands throughout the design session. page 287 for instructions about setting up your systems and one-line types. Operating Information During the operating sequence for any of these commands. You must also have an active system and one-line type defined in the design file. any time you are modifying raceway elements. Pressing <R> or selecting Reject on the precision input form will either reset the active command by one step or reject a highlighted element in the design file. because it is through the Precision Input form that you will enter values for the placement of points and for the location of raceway elements. see Precision Input Form.February 2003 Using the Modify Commands When to Use These Commands Once you have performed the necessary setups.

or by selecting Modify from the EERWAY Command Menu Bar. Modify Element commands also allow you to propagate onelines in your raceway model. and to check for duplicate one-lines and coincident RCPs in the design file. and three-lines. Clone Element — Copies an element multiple times in the same direction. within the design file. then selecting Modify Element Commands. Commands Annotate Element — Places. and delete specified elements. Move One-Line Segment — Moves a one-line segment while maintaining connectivity to existing elements. Propagate Element — Expands one-line elements into three-dimensional elements. Move One-Line Vertex — Moves an internal one-line vertex. copy. Doing so will cause serious problems and/or destroy the EE Raceway model. Use only these EE Raceway modify commands to manipulate EE Raceway elements. Move Element — Moves an element to a specified location in the design file. 175 . annotation. including RCPs. and so forth). Do not use MicroStation commands to manipulate or modify EE Raceway elements (oneline. reviews. then selecting Palette. Modify Copy Element — Copies an element as specified within the design file. three-lines. one-lines. to review or edit element annotation. Modify Element Commands The Modify Element commands manipulate individual elements. You can use individual commands to move. and edits intelligent annotation for raceway elements._ _______________ Modify Element Commands The Modify Element palette is activated by selecting the Modify Element command from the Modify palette. 9.

from the design file. Remove One-Line Vertex — Deletes an internal vertex from an existing one-line. Remove RCP — Deletes a specified RCP (raceway connect point) from the design file. 176 . Modify One-Line — Modifies the route of an existing one-line element. Place Fitting by Rule — Places a non-standard fitting at an RCP using a set of rules defined in the reference database. Minimize Joints — Reduces the number of vertices in an identified one-line to a minimum. Delete Element — Removes a valid raceway element. Check Duplicate One-lines — Checks for duplicate or overlapping one-lines in the design file.February 2003 Edit/Insert Manual Fitting — Modifies fittings that were manually placed in the model. Change System Parameters — Changes the system percentage and the project rule for a selected element._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . Delete Fitting — Removes fittings from the design file. and elements associated with it. Check Coincident RCPs — Checks for coincident RCPs in the design file.

page 129 for information about placing elements in the model). because it is through the Precision Input form that you will enter values for the placement of points and for the location of raceway elements. three-lines. Modify Operating Information During the operating sequence for any of these commands. page 253 and Runtime Setup Commands. Using the Modify Element Commands Before Using These Commands These commands require that you have existing raceway elements in your design file (see Design Commands. Use only these EE Raceway modify commands to manipulate EE Raceway elements. Pressing <R> or selecting Reject on the precision input form will either reset the active command by one step or reject a highlighted element in the design file. you can use these commands throughout the design session. You must be familiar with precision input and its functions before using any of the Modify Element commands. annotation. see Precision Input Form. any time you are modifying raceway elements. Do not use MicroStation commands to manipulate or modify EE Raceway elements (one-line. 9. not MicroStation manipulation commands. See Setup Commands. For detailed information about precision input. Group Workflow There is no required or suggested sequence for using the commands in this group. You must also have an active system and one-line type defined in the design file. you can exit the command session by pressing <Esc> or by selecting Cancel (X) on the precision input form. For reliable results. Doing so will cause serious problems and/or destroy the EE Raceway model._ _______________ Using the Modify Element Commands When to Use These Commands Once you have performed the necessary setups. and so forth). page 119 . you should use these commands. page 287 for instructions about setting up your systems and oneline types. 177 .

you are allowed only to review the annotation. By definition. For straights and fittings. straights. you can change the specifications or sizes of raceway components. Using this command. and edits intelligent annotation for individual raceway elements.February 2003 Annotate Element This command places. and fittings. 178 ._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . Raceway Connect Points (RCP). You can also add cosmetic text to a raceway model for display purposes. intelligent annotation is recognized by the EE Raceway product and can be added to an EE database. The following graphic shows the Annotate Element form for a one-line. The Annotate Element command recognizes one-lines. three-lines. though the product does not recognize such annotation nor can the product add it to an EE database. The following graphic shows the Annotate Element form for an RCP. reviews.

Column value — Displays the current value for the column whose alias displays in the Column name field. the Source column will display either Ref or Dgn. If an * displays in the List column. the column displays New until you select Confirm (√) to save your changes. Where UD displays in the column. The displayed columns reside in the mscolumns table in the database. where New had displayed. List — Indicates whether or not a column value has an associated codelist. If Dgn displays in the column. then the value derives from the design file. To display the codelist. enter nothing into the design. Entering a space or a text value for an attribute will override that value in the reference database. select the field. Where the toggle is On. 9. an error message displays and the annotation form returns to the previous values. the Access column displays a R/W. a value will display in the field only if the value can be retrieved from the reference database. When modified. the corresponding column value comes from user data. If you change a column value. and corresponding database values are retrieved and displayed on the annotation form. If the specified key does not exist in the reference database. then the column value has a corresponding codelist. Access — Indicates whether or not you can manipulate a particular column value. using your keyboard space bar. Modify 179 . Reference Database Key — This field allows you to insert an override key into the reference database. Empty <Return>s. If you can only view (read) the column value. If you can view and modify (read and write) the column value. To change the values associated with the element. the value is saved back to user data. If Ref displays in the column. Display On/Off — Enables or disables the graphic display for each column value. the value will display in the design where you place it. Any annotation you placed in the drawing will override the reference database defaults on the form. select the *. You will be prompted to place displayed values when placing one-lines in the drawing. the cursor will jump to the end of the blanks when the field is tagged beyond value. then the value derives from the reference database. You can enter blank spaces into the design. select the Column value field and delete the blank character. To delete an override on a reference database attribute. Once you have deleted the override. The key field is updated. Field Descriptions Source — Displays the source of the corresponding column value. and key in the new value. You can only review the information in this column._ _______________ Field Descriptions Column name — Displays the aliases for those columns in the database that are associated with the specified element. The next time you enter the annotation form. Otherwise. it becomes an override key to the reference database. the field remains null. however. then it will display an R. When you enter a new value in the EE Reference Database Key field. You can only review the Column name column information. If blanks exist for a field. You can review and modify the values in this field.

The EE spec key field on the upper portion of the form is used as the key for the Column name values on the lower portion of the form. Clear — Clears the Column values from the lower portion of the form. If an override linkage is not present on a device or a title block. then a second form containing all matching rows displays. You can only review the information in this field. Key Description — Displays the description from the reference database of the current EE Reference Database Key. and then select Confirm (√). which automatically activates it. If the linkage is not present on a connect point or one-line. Once you place an override key on an element. The lower portion of the Active [One_Line Type] Parameters form displays a specification table. Otherwise. Select — Retrieves the row(s) from the specification table that meet the select criteria defined in the form. and then automatically depresses the Override button to select a different row(s) from the specification table. but cannot delete it. You can use relational operators when keying in your own select criteria. Clearing the column values allows you to key in new select criteria. Available operators are described later in this section. If only one row matches the select criteria you provide. If more than one row matches the criteria. If you select Cancel (X). the Default key is used. To add values from the displayed specification table rows. select the field. a value will automatically redisplay if it can be retrieved from the reference database.February 2003 If you delete the value in this field. the system cancels the form and retrieves the values from the EE spec key field on the original form. and key in a new value. 180 ._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . You can activate the Override button by selecting it directly or by selecting the Clear button. From this form you can select the row(s) containing the desired values. then the cell name or the Default key will be used to locate default data. the field remains null. select the row you want. Override — This button allows you to override those columns whose access is Read Only (R). then the Column values fill in with the matching row’s values. The select criteria are those values that display in the Column value column on the lower portion of the annotation form. the key specified in the user element is used. you can modify it. To change the displayed value. If no key exists in the user element.

The queried values must have every character aside from the underline in common with the given value. This operator indicates that the queried values should be greater than the given value. press <R> or select Reject on the precision input form. accept input. This operator indicates that the queried values should NOT be equal to the given value. the system assumes =. see Precision Input Form. representing zero or more characters. Field Descriptions > greater than numeric < less than numeric >= greater than or equal to less than or equal to not equal to numeric <= numeric != numeric % wild card CHAR _ underline CHAR 9. Using the form. reset a command action._ _______________ This command accepts certain relational operators as search criteria. This operator is a wild card. 181 . The queried values must have every character aside from the % in common with the given value. route one-lines. you can locate elements. representing a single character. If you do not enter another operator. To reset a command action by one step or to reject a highlighted element. This operator indicates that the queried values should be greater than or equal to the given value. For detailed information about precision input. Modify Before Using This Command You can enter all values for the placement of points through a precision input form. This operator indicates that the queried values should be less than or equal to the given value. This operator indicates that the queried values should be less than the given value. and exit a command. You must be familiar with precision input and its functions before using this command. You should be familiar with the following operators: Symbol Name Data Type numeric Description = equal to This is the default operator. reject input. you can exit the command session either by pressing <Esc> or by selecting Cancel (X) on the precision input form. page 119. At any point during this operating sequence. This operator is a wild card.

Identify Raceway element Identify the element to annotate (one-line. — OR — Select Cancel (X) to exit the annotation form without saving your changes. Select Confirm (√) to save your changes and exit the annotation form. The system highlights the specified element. drop point. Set up the form parameters to meet your specifications. Placing [column alias] Data point <D> to place. the system displays the message Element not found. 3. This step repeats for each new value. equipment pointer. 2. Return to Step 2. If you do not locate an acceptable element.February 2003 Steps 1. Return to step 2. The new value displays in the design file. Position the column value. It also identifies all the possible values (column values) associated with this element. 4. Select the Annotate Element command. 5. — OR — Press <R> to reject the highlighted element. 182 . reset <R> to skip. Accept/Reject Press <D> to accept the highlighted element. and place a data point. When there are no more values to place. The Annotate Element precision input form displays. The message disappears when you identify a valid element. The annotation form displays when you accept the element. The prompt indicates the column alias being placed. or RCP). — OR — Exit the command. The form displays all the current values associated with the element. return to Step 2._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . The column value displays in drag mode attached to the cursor. three-line. 6.

When you load the project database. displayed. Modify 183 . When you annotate any raceway element._ _______________ Any value placed with the Annotate Element command will be entered into the drawing and. optionally. repropagate all of the connected raceway elements. Field Descriptions 9. if you see graphics extending into the next raceway element. these values are loaded into the project database.

Using the form. you can exit the command session either by pressing <Esc> or by selecting Cancel (X) on the precision input form. To reset a command action by one step or to reject a highlighted element. page 119. reset a command action.February 2003 Copy Element This command copies raceway elements to specified locations within the design file. Before Using This Command You can enter all values for the placement of points through a precision input form. You can use this command to copy one-lines and their associated elements. see Precision Input Form. At any point during this operating sequence. You must be familiar with precision input and its functions before using this command. accept input. Equipment pointers and drop points cannot be copied using this command._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . and exit a command. press <R> or select Reject on the precision input form. you can locate elements. reject input. route one-lines. 184 . This command will copy a single RCP provided that no one-lines are attached. For detailed information about precision input.

3. 9. Steps The system highlights the specified element. 2. Select the Copy Element command. — OR — Press <R> to select another element to copy. Repeat this step. The Copy Element precision input form displays. The system copies the element to the specified location in the design file._ _______________ Steps 1. Identify Raceway One-Line or RCP Identify the one-line or RCP element you intend to copy and accept it with <D>. Return to Step 2. If you do not locate an acceptable element. The message disappears when you identify a valid element. Modify 185 . Enter placement point Specify a location for the copied element. the system displays the message Element not found.

all attached RCPs will be moved and all attached one-lines will be rerouted to the new one-line position. accept input. At any point during this operating sequence. and annotation. equipment pointers. and equipment pointers will also be moved. and exit a command. drop points. All associated annotation. You can use this command to move one-lines. all attached one-lines will be rerouted to the new position of the RCP. three-line fittings. you can exit the command session either by pressing <Esc> or by selecting Cancel (X) on the precision input form. If a one-line is moved. RCPs. you can locate elements.February 2003 Move Element This command moves individual raceway elements as specified within the design file. press <R> or select Reject on the precision input form. and equipment pointers will also be moved. Using the form. page 119. route one-lines. If an RCP is moved. You must be familiar with precision input and its functions before using this command. reject input._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . three-line fittings. reset a command action. For detailed information about precision input. To reset a command action by one step or to reject a highlighted element. Before Using This Command You can enter all values for the placement of points through a precision input form. All associated annotation. see Precision Input Form. 186 .

The Move Element precision input form displays. 2. — OR — Press <R> to exit the command. The system moves the element to the specified location. Return to Step 2._ _______________ Steps 1. If you do not locate an acceptable element. The message disappears when you identify a valid element. the system displays the message Element not found. Repeat this step. Select the Move Element command. Enter placement point Specify the new location for the element. Identify Raceway element Identify the element you intend to move and accept it with <D>. — OR — Press <R> to select another element to move. Steps The system highlights the specified element. 9. Modify 187 . 3.

reset a command action. 188 . you can locate elements. You can use this command to copy one-lines and their associated elements. route one-lines. This command will copy a single RCP provided that no one-lines are attached. Equipment pointers and drop points cannot be copied using this command. and exit a command. At any point during this operating sequence. accept input.February 2003 Clone Element This command copies raceway elements multiple times to specified locations within the design file. Before Using This Command You can enter all values for the placement of points through a precision input form. For detailed information about precision input._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . Using the form. you can exit the command session either by pressing <Esc> or by selecting Cancel (X) on the precision input form. You must be familiar with precision input and its functions before using this command. page 119. press <R> or select Reject on the precision input form. see Precision Input Form. To reset a command action by one step or to reject a highlighted element. reject input.

Select the Clone Element command. Modify 189 . each successive clone is placed the same distance and direction from the previous clone as the first clone is from the original element. 2. Confirm (√) the number of times to clone the element. Return to step 2. — OR — Press <R> to exit the command. Enter placement point Identify the location of the first copy. The clone elements are placed in the design file. — OR — Cancel the form and reenter the number of clones. If you are placing more than one clone. Identify Raceway One-Line or RCP Identify the element you want to clone (copy) and accept it with <D>. The point you identify the element with becomes the origin of the copy. 5. 4._ _______________ Steps 1. Key in number of clones Key in the number of times to clone the identified element. The element highlights. Steps 9. 3. A warning box displays verifying the number of times you want to clone the identified element.

Also. the attached RCP will also move. page 119. route one-lines. For detailed information about precision input. press <R> or select Reject on the precision input form. To reset a command action by one step or to reject a highlighted element. Any one-lines attached to the RCP will stretch or shrink to maintain connections with the moved one-line segment. see Precision Input Form. you can exit the command session either by pressing <Esc> or by selecting Cancel (X) on the precision input form._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . reject input. accept input. Using the form. and exit a command. At any point during this operating sequence. Segments attached to the moved one-line segment will stretch or shrink to maintain connections with the moved one-line segment. You must be familiar with precision input and its functions before using this command. 190 . reset a command action. If the first or last segment of a one-line is moved.February 2003 Move One-Line Segment This command moves one-line segments. Before Using This Command You can enter all values for the placement of points through a precision input form. you can locate elements. any RCPs that are associated with a segment by a drop point will move only if the RCP and the drop point are coincident.

the one-line will automatically repropagate after the move._ _______________ Steps 1. The selected one-line segment highlights. Enter data point to place Identify the new location of the one-line segment. See Propagation Setup. Identify Raceway One-Line Segment Select the one-line segment you want to move and accept it with <D>. — OR — Press <R> to exit the command. page 297 for more information on this toggle. Steps 9. Select the Move One-Line Segment command. The system moves the segment to the specified location. Repeat this step. Modify 191 . — OR — Press <R> to select another one-line segment to move. 3. 2. The point that identifies the one-line segment in this step will be reference point used when placing the one-line segment at the new location. If you have the Automatic Propagation toggle set to on.

Any segments attached to a moved vertex will stretch or shrink to maintain connection. route one-lines. and exit a command. you can locate elements. You must be familiar with precision input and its functions before using this command. 192 . reset a command action. For detailed information about precision input._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . The selected vertex highlights. If a one-line end vertex is moved. see Precision Input Form. also move with the vertex. 2. Before Using This Command You can enter all values for the placement of points through a precision input form. equipment pointers. Using the form. reject input. and equipment pointer annotation that is associated with the RCP. The one-line vertex closest to the point where you identify the one-line is automatically selected. accept input. the attached RCP. Select the Move One-Line Vertex command. along with any annotation. Steps 1. press <R> or select Reject on the precision input form. At any point during this operating sequence. you can exit the command session either by pressing <Esc> or by selecting Cancel (X) on the precision input form. — OR — Press <R> to exit the command. To reset a command action by one step or to reject a highlighted element. page 119.February 2003 Move One-Line Vertex This command moves a one-line vertex. Identify Raceway One-Line Vertex Select the vertex of the one-line you want to move and accept it with <D>.

If you have the Automatic Propagation toggle set to on. Repeat this step. Enter data point to place Identify the new location of the vertex. Move One-Line Vertex 9. Modify 193 . — OR — Press <R> to select another one-line vertex. the one-line will automatically repropagate after the move. page 297 for more information on this toggle._ _______________ 3. See Propagation Setup.

accept input. page 119. Before Using This Command You can enter all values for the placement of points through a precision input form. For information about the form. All other element will propagate depending on the specific situation of the element. route one-lines. The Propagate Element command automatically adds propagated (three-dimensional) fittings between non-straight raceway segments with a common RCP. For detailed information about precision input. You must be familiar with precision input and its functions before using this command. which resides in the <current_project>/rway/tmp directory. you can exit the command session either by pressing <Esc> or by selecting Cancel (X) on the precision input form. To reset a command action by one step or to reject a highlighted element. 194 . page 297 .err file.February 2003 Propagate Element This command expands one-line segments and RCPs into three-dimensional elements (a process called propagation). and exit a command. reject input. see Precision Input Form. To view errors that occur during propagation. reset a command action. see Highlight Propagation Errors. page 314 . This command displays to the screen the pro. select the Highlight Propagation Errors command. A description of some of the delivered fittings follows the operating sequence in this section. Using the form. press <R> or select Reject on the precision input form._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . At any point during this operating sequence. you can locate elements. see Propagation Setup. You can set active parameters for propagation through the Propagation Setup form. Manually placed or edited fittings will propagate exactly as placed.

Crosses: fittings produced by propagating four intersecting one-line segments. the system displays the message Element not found. Elbows: fittings produced by propagating two intersecting one-line segments. see Specification. The Project Run precision input form displays. Wyes: fittings produced by propagating three intersecting one-line segments. Identify Raceway element Identify a raceway one-line or RCP. The attributes associated with each fitting are contained in the tray_part table in the reference database. Modify This section describes some of the fittings available with the delivered raceway one-line types. — OR — Exit the command. For information about this table. 2. If you do not locate an acceptable one-line or RCP. page 507 . Fittings are produced through propagation and can be divided into the following categories: Straights: fittings produced by propagating a one-line segment. Accept/reject Accept the highlighted element._ _______________ Steps 1. Select the Propagate Element command. 3. Go to step 1. Propagate Element The system highlights the specified element. Reducers: fittings produced by propagating two or three intersecting one-line segments which have different raceway parameters. Go to step 2. The message disappears when you identify a valid element. The system propagates the identified one-line and returns you to step 2 to continue identifying elements for propagation. Fittings 9. 195 . — OR — Reject the highlighted element.

February 2003 The following illustrations detail some of the fittings available for each raceway one-line type: Tray Fittings Wireway Fittings 196 ._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide .

_ _______________ Conduit Fittings Propagate Element 9. Modify 197 .

February 2003 Edit/Insert Manual Fitting This command is used to edit fittings that have been manually placed in the design file. select an angle from the list or select the field. select a value from the list. etc. and Qualifier for the current specification. The list contains all available qualifiers (adjustable. etc. page 214 . To change the displayed subtype. To change the displayed qualifier.) for that specification. You can only review the values in this field. horizontal. Options Remove RCP — Deletes an RCP from the design file. 198 .) for the active type and subtype in the current specification. wye. Modifying the value in the Part field may also change the active and available Type values. To change the displayed three-line type. Modifying the value for Type also changes the active and available subtypes. See Remove RCP. The list contains available angles. etc. Qualifier — Displays the active qualifier for the displayed Type and Subtype. The list contains all available subtypes (vertical. To change the displayed angle. straight. Field Descriptions Type — Displays the active three-line type for the current specification.) for the active type and subtype in the current specification. Symbol — Displays the name of the Eden symbol you are placing. The list contains all available three-line types (elbow._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . inside vertical. rigid. Angle — Displays the active angle associated with the Type. and key in the new value. Modifying Type or Subtype values may change the available qualifiers. Subtype — Displays the active subtype for the displayed Type value. select a value from the list. Subtype. select a value from the list.

The list contains all available specifications. You can also change any of the values for Type. and Qualifier. To display the specification itself. the Length field does not display on the form. Then select the field.Displays the column name values currently associated with the specified type. You can only review the information in this column. Subtype._ _______________ When placing a fitting (such as a vertical tee). select a value from the list. You can review and modify the values in this column. and key in the new value. To change the displayed length. (-90 degrees) to shift the RCPs and placepoints to the correct location. select a value from the list. 9. — Column value . Qualifier. Subtype. and (if applicable) Spec2. and key in a new value. Spec1 — Displays the active specification for the displayed Type. key in a negative angle. select the corresponding Display button. To change a value. Spec1. The list contains all available parts for the current specification.Displays the aliases of those columns in the database that are associated with the specified type. 199 . Edit/Insert Manual Fitting Length — Displays the length by which to project a straight. To change the displayed specification. If straight is not your active Type. if the placepoints and RCPs do not line up correctly. select the field. select the Override button. Modify The specification form has these parameters: — Column name . To change the displayed part. Part — Displays the active part.

February 2003 — List . for the given Spec1. and Qualifier. — Override . Secondary specifications are generally used with reducers.Retrieves the row(s) from the specification table that meet the select criteria defined in the form.Allows you to override those columns whose access is Read Only (R).Clears the Column values from the lower portion of the form. The fitting size is determined by comparing the spec table nominal size of all one-lines at the RCP and selecting the largest nominal size among them. — Select . If an * displays in the List column. If in the fitting table there is a nominal size the same as the largest one-line nominal size. Type. Overrides from the secondary specification are not passed to the Eden symbol. select the slide bar. Automatic Size — Automatically selects the appropriate size fitting base on the onelines connected to the fitting. see Annotate Element. then the column value has an associated codelist. You can display the current specification itself by selecting the Display button. You can use certain relational operators as search criteria. Placepoint — Defines the point of attachment for the fitting you are currently placing. then a second form containing all matching rows displays. Rotate Orientation — These fields define the orientation matrix: 200 . To change the active placepoint. That nominal size is then compared to the fitting table nominal sizes. and drag it along the scale until it reaches the appropriate value. select the *. If more than one row matches the criteria. If there is no nominal size fitting larger than the one-line nominal size. Spec2 — Displays the active secondary specification. then the largest fitting available is used.Indicates whether or not a column value has an associated codelist. Doing so displays a specification form. which automatically activates it. For a list of valid operators. then that fitting is used._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . See Spec1 for a description of the form. The list contains all available secondary specifications for the current settings. Subtype. then the Column values fill in with the matching row’s values. — Clear . if any. Automatic Fit — Correctly orients the fitting to the one-lines. To display the codelist. If only one row matches this criteria. page 178 . and then automatically depresses the Override button so that you can select a different row(s) from the specification. You can activate the Override button by selecting it directly or by selecting the Clear button. If there is no fitting of that nominal size. then the first fitting that is of greater nominal size than the one-line nominal size is used.

Defines the angle by which to rotate the orientation tee._ _______________ — Angle . material to feraloy. If you set the Driven By Spec/Table toggle to Table. To change the displayed axis. and toggle between the three axes (Primary. and size to 1/2 inch. type. select the field. then only the sizes the form 7c comes in.Defines the axis about which to rotate the orientation tee. and the Normal axis with the positive Z axis. Each attribute displays only those values that have corresponding matching values for the other three attributes in the database. and vendor display as the active attributes. Similarly. OR Identify the appropriate axis name (text) on the orientation matrix diagram (to the right of the Angle and About fields. vendor to 3. Normal) until the appropriate axis displays. The attribute display lists are used to interactively query the database for the desired Part Key. To change the active special part table. you set the active Table to cond_body. Field Descriptions Table — Displays the active special part table from the database. then only those types that are 1/2 inch in size from vendor 3 and made of feraloy will be displayed in the types list. To change the displayed angle. size. In other words. and key in a new value. Modify 201 . and vendor to 3. the form changes. if you set type to form 7c. will be displayed in the size list. the Secondary axis with the positive Y axis. if you set material to feraloy. 9. Attribute — The next four display lists on the form are the first four Part Key attributes from the active table and will change depending on which Table is active. It realigns the Primary axis with the positive X axis. For example. select the field. Secondary.) Edit/Insert Manual Fitting I Button — Reorients the orientation tee along the identity matrix. — About . made of feraloy from vendor 3. material. The list contains the available special part tables from the database. select a table name from the list.

Before Using This Command You should be familiar with precision input and its functions.) to construct the three-line symbols. etc. Specification-Driven Fittings straight elbow wye cross dropout Special Parts pullbox conduit body light fixture 202 . You can display the current table information for the part by selecting the Display button.February 2003 Select/All toggles — Overrides the interactive queries of the attribute fields. all available values for that attribute are displayed in the list. see the descriptions earlier in this section. Specification-driven fittings rely on the specification information (width._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . See the description of the Spec1 field earlier in this section for detailed information about the form parameters. To change the active part. For information about the Placepoint and Rotate Orientation fields as well as the form commands. When set to All. Part Key — Displays the current part for the displayed Table. The following table indicates fittings that are specification-driven and those that are special parts. All parts of a given specification will inherit the attributes of that specification. you should first consider a few points. some fittings derive their information from their own database tables because they are not so easily classified into a common group of parts. When deciding whether your fitting information will come from a specification or from a table in the database. see Precision Input Form. select a part from the list. radius. These fields and the commands operate identically in either Driven By Spec or Driven By Table modes. For more information. Modifying the Table value also changes the active and available Part values. regardless of the other attribute settings. page 119 . height. Such fittings are called special parts. On the other hand. The list contains all available parts from the table.

Edit/Insert Manual Fitting 9. set the toggle to Driven By Table. Go to step 4. — OR — To derive fitting attributes from a special part table in the database. — OR — Select Cancel to exit the form without editing the fitting or RCP. 3. Edit the fitting as needed. Set the Driven By Spec/Table toggle to meet your requirements. Select Confirm when finished. The Edit/Insert Manual Fitting form displays. 4. To derive fitting attributes from a specification in the database. Identify Raceway Fitting or RCP Select the fitting or RCP you want to edit and accept it with <D>._ _______________ Steps 1. set the toggle to Driven By Spec. 2. Select the Edit/Insert Manual Fitting command. Modify 203 . — OR — Press <R> to exit the command.

The message will disappear when you identify a valid element. page 119.February 2003 Modify One-Line This command modifies the route of an existing one-line. At any point during this operating sequence. you can exit the command session either by pressing <Esc> or by selecting Cancel (X) on the precision input form. accept input. You can reverse the segment to be modified by pressing <R>. and exit a command. route one-lines. You cannot modify the termination points of a one-line. one segment of the one-line will display as a solid line with increased line weight. the system displays the message Element not found. You will identify the one-line to be modified at the point where modification should begin. 204 . 2. The system highlights a valid one-line. Identify Raceway One-Line Identify a one-line in the design. The dashed segment will then be modified. If you do not locate an acceptable element. reset a command action. Select the Modify One-Line command. To reset a command action by one step or to reject a highlighted element. see Precision Input Form. When identified. Steps 1. the other segment appears as a dashed line. press <R> or select Reject on the precision input form. For detailed information about precision input. Using the form. You must be familiar with precision input and its functions before using this command. you can locate elements. reject input._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . The Modify One-Line precision input form displays. Before Using This Command You can enter all values for the placement of points through a precision input form.

— Pressing <R> (or Reject) a second time rejects the one-line. The one-line highlights. place a data point on the original one-line. You can press <R> (or Reject) to reject the last segment drawn. Modify 205 . Modify One-Line 9. — Pressing <R> (or Reject) once reverses the segments to be modified. The system saves the rotation and returns to the beginning of the command. prompting you to Identify Raceway One-Line. or at the RCP containing the end of the one-line you are modifying. — OR — Reject the element. Data Point Accepts. 4. Repeat this step. 6. — OR — Reject the one-line element as displayed. — OR — Reset to return to the previous step. Go to step 2. Accepting the element identifies the one-line for modification. Accept/reject Accept the one-line element as displayed. Part of the one-line displays with an increased line weight. The command reroutes the one-line according to your specifications._ _______________ 3. Enter next point Enter points to draw new one-line routes. and return to step 2. The command prompts you to identify another one-line. Reset Rotates Accept the cross section. 5. Go to step 2. — OR — Rotate the cross section by the rotation angle defined in Raceway Defaults. Raceway one-line Accept/reject Accept the highlighted element. while the part to be modified displays as a dashed line. To terminate the new routes.

7._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . — OR — Continue rotating the cross section. 206 .February 2003 The system rotates the cross section and prompts you again to accept or continue rotating it. Accept the rotation and return to step 2.

Place Fitting by Rule 9. reset a command action. you can exit the command session either by pressing <Esc> or by selecting Cancel (X) on the precision input form. a LB fitting be placed. and exit a command. press <R> or select Reject on the precision input form. See EE Databases. The spec table and the fitting table are defined in the rule. Modify Before Using This Command You can enter all values for the placement of points through a precision input form. page 119. If there is no nominal size fitting larger than the one-line nominal size. If in the fitting table there is a nominal size the same as the largest one-line nominal size. You must define the rules in the reference database. Using the form. reject input. route one-lines. then the first fitting that is of greater nominal size than the one-line nominal size is used. see Precision Input Form. If there is no fitting of that nominal size. one rule might define that at a 90 degree intersection of two conduits. For example. then that fitting is used. At any point during this operating sequence. To reset a command action by one step or to reject a highlighted element. You can add to or replace the delivered rule set by editing the tl_fit_env table in the database. You must be familiar with precision input and its functions before using this command. That nominal size is then compared to the fitting table nominal sizes. The fitting size is determined by comparing the spec table nominal size of all one-lines at the RCP and selecting the largest nominal size among them._ _______________ Place Fitting by Rule This command places a non-standard fitting at an RCP using a set of rules defined in the reference database. 207 . accept input. you can locate elements. For detailed information about precision input. then the largest fitting available is used. page 425 for a list of the delivered default rules.

Otherwise the correct fitting as defined by the rule is placed on the RCP. 208 ._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . 2. If no rule is defined for the selected RCP’s situation. Select the Place Fitting by Rule command. Identify Raceway Fitting or RCP Select the RCP on which you want to place the fitting. — OR — Press <R> to exit the command. displays.February 2003 Steps 1. then the message Unable to find a rule that applies.

One-Line Type — Displays which one-line type each RCP belongs to._ _______________ Combine Coincident RCPs Combine Coincident RCPs This command is used to check for coincident RCPs in the design file. 209 . — OR — If coincident RCPs are found. you are given a choice of which RCP to keep. Connectivity is re-established for the attached one-lines after RCPs have been combined. Status — Defines if the RCPs can be merged. the Combine Coincident RCPs form displays listing the coincident RCP information. Steps 1. Select the Combine Coincident RCPs command. RCPs can be combined if the following criteria are true: No more than four (4) RCPs are coincident. If Combinable. If coincident RCPs are found and can be combined. the message No coincident RCPs found displays and the command exits. Combine — Merges the coincident RCPs into one RCP. All RCPs must have a system in common. then you need to fix the coincident RCPs in your model. If no coincident RCPs are found. If Invalid. Modify Each set of coincident RCPs is listed in the form separated by the horizontal dotted line. then the RCPs can be merged. All coincident RCPs must be of the same one-line type. 9. Systems — Displays which system each RCP belongs to.

3. changes to Kept. The RCPs are combined. 210 . and the Status of the remaining RCP. Choose which RCP in the set of RCPs you want to keep and leave that line highlighted. For each set of coincident RCPs._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . You can not combine RCPs that have an Invalid status. 4. select the RCP information on the form to highlight the associated elements in the model. Select the Combine button to merge that set of coincident RCPs. The status of the removed RCP changes to Combined. the one you selected.February 2003 2.

4. Choose which one-line out of each set you want to keep. Select the Delete Duplicate One-Lines command. select the one-line information on the form to highlight that one-line in the model. Select the Delete button to delete the other one-line(s). — OR — If duplicate one-lines are found._ _______________ Delete Duplicate One-Lines This command is used to check for and correct duplicate one-lines (having only two vertices) that occupy the same geographical space and terminate on the same RCPs. The one-line is deleted and its Status changes to Deleted. Delete Duplicate One-Lines Steps 1. For each set of duplicate one-lines in the form. Select Cancel when finished. 211 . Each set of duplicate one-lines is listed in the form separated by a dotted horizontal line. The Status of the one-line you wanted to keep changes to Kept. If no duplicate one-lines are found. 9. 5. then the message No duplicate one-lines found displays and the command exits. 2. Continue to select the one-line to keep and deleting the other. The Status of the one-line you chose changes to Save. Modify 3. then the Delete Duplicate One-Lines form displays.

Select the Delete Element command from the menu. You can use this command to delete one-lines. If you do not locate an acceptable element. cosmetic graphics. reset a command action.February 2003 Delete Element This command removes elements from the design file. reject input. The message disappears when you identify a valid element. equipment pointers. the system displays the message Element not found. page 119. accept input._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . you can locate elements. 2. you can exit the command session either by pressing <Esc> or by selecting Cancel (X) on the precision input form. and exit a command. RCPs (only if no one-lines are attached). At any point during this operating sequence. route one-lines. You must be familiar with precision input and its functions before using this command. 212 . The system highlights the specified element. The Delete Element precision input form displays. Steps 1. To reset a command action by one step or to reject a highlighted element. press <R> or select Reject on the precision input form. For detailed information about precision input. Using the form. Before Using This Command You can enter all values for the placement of points through a precision input form. drop points. Identify Raceway element Identify an element for deletion. see Precision Input Form. and annotation.

Return to step 2. It also deletes all cross sections. Raceway [element] Accept/reject Press <D> to accept the element for deletion. the system deletes it. 9. Return to Step 2. — OR — Press <R> to reject the highlighted element. Modify 213 . annotation. Delete Element If you accept the highlighted element. 3. and RCPs (unless shared by another one-line) that are associated with the selected element._ _______________ — OR — Press <R> to exit the command. propagated fittings.

and exit a command. press <R> or select Reject on the precision input form. page 119. the annotation for the second one-line is deleted. Using the form. To reset a command action by one step or to reject a highlighted element. unless the RCP has no one-lines attached. You must be familiar with precision input and its functions before using this command. If both onelines are annotated. reject input. you can locate elements. You cannot use the Delete Element commands to remove an RCP. At any point during this operating sequence. For detailed information about precision input._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . you can exit the command session either by pressing <Esc> or by selecting Cancel (X) on the precision input form. reset a command action. The command will remove an identified RCP only if all of the following conditions are true: — Two one-lines are attached to the RCP. — The two attached one-lines belong to identical systems. route one-lines.February 2003 Remove RCP This command removes a raceway connect point (RCP) from the design file. the two one-lines form a single one-line element. 214 . accept input. Once such an RCP is removed. see Precision Input Form. — The two attached one-lines are of the same one-line type. Before Using This Command You can enter all values for the placement of points through a precision input form.

The message disappears when you identify a valid RCP. the system displays the message Element not found. If you do not locate an acceptable RCP. 3. The system highlights the specified element. Select the Remove RCP command. If you reject the RCP. Raceway connect point Accept/reject Press <D> to accept the highlighted RCP for deletion. Return to step 2. — OR — Press <R> to exit the command. Modify 215 . 2. the command deletes it or displays an error message to the screen. Go to Step 2. the system prompts you to identify another. Remove RCP 9. The Remove RCP precision input form displays._ _______________ Steps 1. If you accept the RCP. — OR — Press <R> to reject the highlighted RCP for deletion. Identify Raceway RCP Identify an RCP to remove.

useful for removing manually placed special fittings (like pullboxes and conduit bodies) and replacing them with bends. to delete._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . 2. — OR — Press <R> to reject the highlighted fitting and return to step 2. 3. Identify Raceway Fitting or RCP Select the fitting. Accept/Reject Press <D> to accept the highlighted fitting and delete it.February 2003 Delete Fitting This command deletes the raceway fitting from a selected RCP. or the fitting’s RCP. Select the Delete Fitting command. 216 . Steps 1. This command does not remove the RCP. Return to step 2. — OR — Press <R> to exit the command.

2. — OR — Press <R> to exit the command. page 119. Identify Raceway One-Line Vertex Select the vertex of the one-line you want to remove. reset a command action. Remove One-Line Vertex Before Using This Command You can enter all values for the placement of points through a precision input form. press <R> or select Reject on the precision input form. For detailed information about precision input._ _______________ Remove One-Line Vertex This command deletes an internal one-line vertex. route one-lines. You must be familiar with precision input and its functions before using this command. The one-line vertex closest to the point where you identify the one-line is automatically selected. You can not delete the end points of the one-line using this command. Modify Steps 1. Select the Remove One-Line Vertex command. accept input. The selected vertex highlights. and exit a command. 217 . Using the form. To reset a command action by one step or to reject a highlighted element. reject input. At any point during this operating sequence. see Precision Input Form. you can exit the command session either by pressing <Esc> or by selecting Cancel (X) on the precision input form. you can locate elements. 9.

February 2003 3. Return to step 2. Return to step 2. If Automatic Propagation is on._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . the one-line repropagates. Accept/reject Press <D> to accept the highlighted vertex as the one to remove. 218 . — OR — Press <R> to reject the highlighted vertex and choose another one. The vertex is removed.

the command will repropagate the one-line. Before Using This Command You can enter all values for the placement of points through a precision input form.) Minimize Joints Automatic propagation must be toggled on in order for the results of this command to be visible. reset a command action. page 297 for information about the Automatic Propagation toggle. while retaining the original geometry of the one-line. Modify 219 . press <R> or select Reject on the precision input form. At any point during this operating sequence. page 119. Using the form. 9. (See Propagation Setup. see Precision Input Form. and exit a command. You must be familiar with precision input and its functions before using this command.) The following example demonstrates the effect of the Minimize Joints command on a oneline. accept input. If automatic propagation is toggled on. To reset a command action by one step or to reject a highlighted element. For detailed information about precision input. (Automatic propagation is on to show the resulting seamless representation. you can locate elements._ _______________ Minimize Joints This command reduces to a minimum the number of vertices in an identified one-line. you can exit the command session either by pressing <Esc> or by selecting Cancel (X) on the precision input form. reject input. route one-lines.

the system displays the message Element not found. 2. The command prompts you to identify another one-line. 3. The system highlights a valid one-line. Identify Raceway one line Identify a one-line in the design. — OR — Reject the element. Go to step 2. If you do not locate an acceptable element._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . The message will disappear when you identify a valid element. The Minimize Joints precision input form displays. Go to step 2. 220 . Select the Minimize Joints command from the menu. The command reduces the number of vertices comprising the one-line to a minimum (while retaining the original geometry).February 2003 Steps 1. Raceway one line Accept/reject Accept the highlighted one-line to minimize the number of its vertices.

Change System Parameters Field Descriptions Primary System — Displays the primary system. Systems — Displays all the systems associated with the selected element. a list of available rules for the Project Rule Set defined with the EE CMS Project Definition process is displayed for review and selection. To clear the Project Rule. The total of the system Percents is displayed in the field at the bottom of the Percent column. The Project Rule Set determines which rules can be assigned to the active systems. List — Indicates whether or not a Project Rule can be assigned. The total Percent space allocation cannot exceed 100 percent. 221 . The primary system determines the symbology of the elements. the system Percent and the Project Rule. select the *. Project Rules cannot be assigned. To display a list of available rules for the Project Rule Set defined with the EE CMS Project Definition process. 9. Modify Percent — Specifies the current Percent space allocation assigned to each of the selected systems. Project Rule — Displays the Project Rule assigned to each of the selected systems for calculating raceway fill. If the Project Rule Set is not defined. then the Project Rule can be assigned. This is defined in EEmgr with the EE CMS Project Definition process. select the row and select the Cancel (X) on the list of Rules. Project Rule Set — Displays the Project Electrical Code from the your project schema’s project table._ _______________ Change System Parameters This command changes the system parameters. All the selected systems percentages are summed to calculate the total percentage. This Percent is used when calculating the cable fill of the raceway section in the EECMS product. If an * displays in the List column. for the systems associated with a single raceway element. When a row is selected. The Percent represents the portion of the raceway’s width assigned to that system.

Set up the form parameters to meet your specifications. Select the Change System Parameters command. 2. Steps 1. To reset a command action by one step or to reject a highlighted element. 4. accept input. The precision input form displays. reset a command action._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . — OR — Exit the command. 222 . reject input. see Precision Input Form. Select Confirm (√) to save your changes and exit the command. Identify Raceway element Identify an element in the design file. and exit a command. you can exit the command session either by pressing <Esc> or by selecting Cancel (X) on the precision input form. 3. 5. Using the form. — OR — Select Cancel (X) to exit the command without making any changes to the selected element. press <R> or select Reject on the precision input form. For detailed information about precision input. The identified element highlights. route one-lines. you can locate elements. You must be familiar with precision input and its functions before using this command. page 119. At any point during this operating sequence.February 2003 Before Using This Command You can enter all values for the placement of points through a precision input form. Raceway [element] Accept/reject Accept the highlighted element. The selected element is changed to reflect you selections.

Copy Element by Group — Copies within the design file some or all elements of a specified group. and so forth). annotation. Modify Group Commands You can use individual Modify Group commands to move. Annotate Element by Group — Places._ _______________ Modify Group Commands The Modify Group commands define and manipulate groups within a design file. The Modify Group commands allow you first to define a group of elements and then to manipulate the group in part or as a whole. then selecting Palette. then selecting Modify Group Commands. Clone Group — Copies a group multiple times in the same direction. Use only these EE Raceway modify commands to manipulate EE Raceway elements. Do not use MicroStation commands to manipulate or modify EE Raceway elements (one-line. Doing so will cause serious problems and/or destroy the EE Raceway model. or by selecting Modify from the EERWAY Command Menu Bar. Propagate Element by Group — Expands some or all one-line elements of a specified group into three-dimensional elements. copy. Modify Define Group — Identifies raceway elements for inclusion in a particular group. 223 . Topics 9. Groups are temporary associations of Raceway and other elements in your model. reviews. You can also propagate one-lines in a particular group using these commands. The Modify Group palette is activated by selecting the Modify Group command from the Modify palette. and edits intelligent annotation for raceway elements within a specified group. and delete elements of specified groups. three-lines. and to review or edit element annotation.

Minimize Joints by Group — Reduces to a minimum the number of vertices of some or all one-lines in a specified group. Add Systems Group — Defines multiple systems for a single one-line._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . Delete Element by Group — Removes from the design file some or all elements of a specified group.February 2003 Place Fitting by Rule Group — Places non-standard fittings using a set of rules defined in the reference database. Replace Systems Group — Changes the defined active system type of a one-line. 224 .

not MicroStation manipulation commands._ _______________ Using the Modify Group Commands When to Use These Commands Once you have performed the necessary setups. page 287 for instructions about setting up your systems and oneline types. annotation. page 253 and Runtime Setup Commands. 9. Group Workflow You must use the Define Group command to create and activate an element group before using other Modify Group commands. Doing so will cause serious problems and/or destroy the EE Raceway model. For reliable results. because it is through the Precision Input form that you will enter values for the placement of points and for the location of raceway elements. page 129 for information about placing elements in the model). 225 . Modify Operating Information During the operating sequence for any of these commands. Do not use MicroStation commands to manipulate or modify EE Raceway elements (one-line. Using the Modify Group Commands Before Using These Commands These commands require that you have existing raceway elements in your design file (see Design Commands. see Precision Input Form. three-lines. you can use these commands throughout the design session. any time you are modifying raceway elements. and so forth). You must be familiar with precision input and its functions before using any of the Modify Group commands. Use only these EE Raceway modify commands to manipulate EE Raceway elements. you should use these commands. You must also have an active system and one-line type defined in the design file. page 119 . For detailed information about precision input. you can exit the command session by pressing <Esc> or by selecting Cancel (X) on the precision input form. Pressing <R> or selecting Reject on the precision input form will either reset the active command by one step or reject a highlighted element in the design file. See Setup Commands.

In general. The system prompts you just once to accept/reject a group for manipulation. The key-in field above the list accepts input for group name when you are defining a new group. Create — Creates a group containing the elements you specify in the EE Element Types list. then a command will prompt you once to accept/reject the specified group as a whole before performing the command action. Identifying the contents of an existing group can be done graphically. A group is a temporary association of Raceway elements in your model. The system adds the elements using the selection method you specified in the Graphic Method list._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide .February 2003 Define Group This command compiles a group from elements you specify. Available Groups — Lists the groups you have already created. you can manipulate the group as a whole or in part. select a group from the list. select the group name key-in field. Use caution when you are manipulating groups in Entire Group mode. then a command will prompt you to accept/reject every element within a specified group before performing the command action. To change the active group. Once you have defined a group of Raceway elements using this command. The active group is highlighted in the list. you should assign your groups meaningful names that reflect their contents. 226 . If the toggle is set to Entire Group. If the toggle is set to Single Element. however. and key in a name. To enter a group name. All groups you create using this command are dropped when you exit the EE Raceway design session. using the Hilite option. Single Element/Entire Group — Determines how Modify Group commands will act upon existing groups.

_ _______________
To initiate the Create operation, select the button, key in a group name, and select Accept. The system then compiles a group according to your specifications. When processing is complete, review the form Message Area for information about the number of elements the new group contains. Drop — Removes the active group (the highlighted group in the Available Groups list). To initiate the Drop operation, select a group from the Available Groups list, select Drop, and then select Accept. Copy — Copies the specified contents of one group to a new group. To initiate the Copy action, select an existing group from the Available Groups list, select Copy, and key in a new group name. Add to — Adds elements you specify from the EE Element Types list to an existing group. The system compiles the elements using the selection method you specified in the Graphic Method list.

Define Group

To initiate the Add to operation, select an existing group from the Available Groups list, select Add to, and then select Accept. The system compiles the elements using the selection method you specified in the Graphic Method list. When processing is complete, review the form Message Area for information about the number of elements added to the group. Drop from — Removes elements you specify in the EE Element Types list from an existing group. If you remove all elements from a group, the system automatically drops the entire group. To initiate the Drop from action, select an existing group from the Available Groups list, select Drop from, and then select Accept. The system drops the elements using the selection method you specified in the Graphic Method list. When processing is complete, review the form message display for information about the number of elements dropped from the group. Hilite — Highlights in the design file the entire contents of an existing group. To initiate the Hilite action, select an existing group from the Available Groups list, and select Hilite. It is not necessary to select Accept. The system automatically highlights the group contents in the drawing. Clear Hilite — Clears all highlighting placed in the design when you use the Hilite command. EE Element Types — Displays all available element types available for inclusion in or deletion from a group. Types include one-lines, three-lines, RCPs, drop points, to equipment, and all annotation. You must choose at least one element type when creating, adding elements to, or dropping elements from a group.

9. Modify

227

_ _______________
EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide - February 2003 Select All — Selects every element type from the EE Element Types list. Clear All — Clears all selected element types from the EE Element Types list. EE Method — This list displays optional restrictions for the items selected in the EE Element Types list. You can use the three options in this list to restrict the elements in your group to those belonging to particular one-line types or systems. – One-Line Type - Displays a list of available one-line types.

When you select a one-line type from this list, only those element types (RCPs, onelines, three-lines, and so forth) belonging to that one-line type will be included in your group. You can select individual one-line types from this list, or you can select all displayed one-line types (using Select All). Clear All cancels the selections you have made from the list. Once you have displayed the One-Line Type list, you must Cancel (X) or Confirm (√) your selections before selecting the Accept button on the main form. – System - Displays a list of available systems.

When you select a system from this list, only those element types (RCPs, one-lines, three-lines, and so forth) belonging to that system will be included in your group. You can select individual systems from this list, or you can select all displayed systems (using Select All). Clear All cancels the selections you have made from the list. Once you have displayed the System list, you must Cancel (X) or Confirm (√) your selections before you can select the Accept button on the main form. – Attributes - Displays a list of available element types from which you can define selection attributes.

228

_ _______________
When you select an element type from this list, an attribute list form displays for that element type in which you can specify the attributes to include in the group identification. Once you have defined the attributes, select the Accept button on the main form. To reset out of the attribute list form and disregard the attributes, select the Cancel (X) button on the attribute form.

Define Group

Graphic Method — Displays the available methods for selecting group elements. You will use these methods to identify elements for group creation, insertion into groups, or deletion from groups. These methods can serve to further restrict the element types you are including in your group. For example, if you identified one-line trays for insertion into a group, and select Fence Block from this list, the system inserts into the group only those one-line trays contained within the fence you place. – Selection - Prompts you to identify specified element types in the design file to drop from or include in a group. – Fence Block - Drops from or includes in a group those specified element types contained within a fence block you place in the design. – Fence Shape - Drops from or includes in a group those specified element types contained within a fence shape you place in the design. – View - Drops from or includes in a group those specified elements types contained in a view you identify. – All Elements - Drops from or includes in a group all specified element types in the design.

9. Modify

229

_ _______________
EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide - February 2003

Steps
1. Select the Define Group command. The Groups form displays. 2. Create a group of elements: — Key in a name for the group in the field provided. — Select the Create button under Group Operations. — Use the EE Element Types, EE Method, and Graphic Method lists to define which elements to place in the group and how you want to select them in the design file. — Select the Process button at the top of the form. — Using the Graphic Method you defined, select your elements for the group. The group is created. The number of elements added to the group displays at the bottom of the form.

— OR — Select one of the available group from the list 3. Set the Entire Group/Single Element and Hilite On/Hilite Off toggles the way you want. Select one of the group modification commands.

4.

230

_ _______________
Copy Element by Group
This command copies all or selected valid elements in the active group. Equipment pointers and drop points are not copied even if they are part of the defined group.

Copy Element by Group

Before Using This Command
You can enter all values for the placement of points through a precision input form. Using the form, you can locate elements, route one-lines, accept input, reject input, reset a command action, and exit a command. You must be familiar with precision input and its functions before using this command. For detailed information about precision input, see Precision Input Form, page 119. At any point during this operating sequence, you can exit the command session either by pressing <Esc> or by selecting Cancel (X) on the precision input form. To reset a command action by one step or to reject a highlighted element, press <R> or select Reject on the precision input form. You must define a temporary group of elements, using the Define Group command, see Define Group, page 226. Placing a fence around elements in the design also constitutes a group for the purposes of this command. A fence group overrides the active group.

Steps
1. Select the Copy Element by Group command from the menu.

9. Modify

The Copy by Group precision input form displays. If you have not defined a group, the message No active group defined displays. — If you have a fence in the design, go to step 2. — If Single Element is the active toggle on the Define Group form, go to step 3. — If Entire Group is the active toggle on the Define Group form, go to step 4. 2. Accept/reject fence contents Accept the contents of the fence to define them as a group. Go on to step 3 if Single Element is the active toggle on the Define Group form. Go to step 5 if Entire Group is the active toggle on the Define Group form.

231

_ _______________
EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide - February 2003 3. Raceway [element] Accept/reject Accept the highlighted element. — OR — Reject the highlighted element. The system highlights another group element if any elements remain uncopied. Repeat this step. Otherwise, the command exits automatically. 4. Accept/reject Group [group name] Accept the active group. — OR — Reject the active group. The command exits automatically. 5. Define origin Enter a point to use as a base for the group copy. Elements within the active group highlight. 6. Enter placement point Enter a point for the location of the element you are copying. The system copies the element as specified. If there are group elements that remain uncopied, you are returned to step 3. Otherwise, the command exits automatically. — OR — Reject the element you are copying. The system returns you to step 3 if there are group elements that remain uncopied. Otherwise, the command exits automatically.

232

_ _______________
Annotate Element by Group
This command places, reviews, and edits intelligent annotation for some or all raceway elements associated with a specified group. Intelligent annotation is recognized by the EE Raceway product and can be added to an EE database. You can also add cosmetic text to a raceway model for display purposes, though the product does not recognize such annotation nor can the product add it to an EE database. The Annotate Element command recognizes one-lines, three-lines, Raceway Connect Points (RCP), straights, and fittings. For straights and fittings, you are allowed only to review the annotation (read only access). Using this command, you can change the specifications or sizes of raceway components.

Annotate Element by Group

9. Modify

Field Descriptions
Column name — Displays the aliases for those columns in the database that are associated with the specified element. The displayed columns reside in the mscolumns table in the database. You can only review the Column name column information. Column value — Displays the current value for the column whose alias displays in the Column name field. You can review and modify the values in this field. To change the values associated with the element, select the field, and key in the new value. You can enter blank spaces into the design, using your keyboard space bar. Empty <Return>s, however, enter nothing into the design. Entering a space or a text value for an attribute will override that value in the reference database. To delete an override on a reference database attribute, select the column value field and delete the blank character. Once you have deleted the override, a value will display in the field only if the value can be retrieved from the reference database. Otherwise, the field remains null.

233

_ _______________
EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide - February 2003 If blanks exist for a field, the cursor will jump to the end of the blanks when the field is tagged beyond value. Source — Dislays the source of the corresponding column value. If Ref displays in the column, then the value derives from the reference database. If Dgn displays in the column, then the value has been defined from the design file. If you change a column value, the column displays New until you select Confirm (√) to save your changes. The next time you enter the annotation form, the Source column will display either Ref or Dgn, where New had displayed. Where UD displays in the column, the corresponding column value comes from user data. When modified, the value is saved back to user data. List column — Indicates whether or not a column value has an associated codelist. If an * displays in the List column, then the column value has a corresponding codelist. To display the codelist, select the *. Access column — Indicates whether or not you can manipulate a particular column value. If you can view and modify (read and write) the column value, the Access column displays a R/W. If you can only view (read) the column value, then it will display an R. You can only review the information in this column. Display On/Off — This toggle enables or disables the design display for each column value. Where the toggle is On, the value will display in the design where you place it. You will be prompted to place displayed values when placing one-lines in the drawing. Reference Database Key — This field allows you to insert an override key into the reference database. When you enter a new value in the EE Reference Database Key field, it becomes an override key to the reference database. The key field is updated, and corresponding database values are retrieved and displayed on the annotation form. If the specified key does not exist in the reference database, an error message displays and the annotation form returns to the previous values. Any annotation you placed in the drawing will override the reference database defaults on the form. If you delete the value in this field, a value will automatically redisplay if it can be retrieved from the reference database. Otherwise, the field remains null. If an override linkage is not present on a device or a title block, then the cell name or the Default key will be used to locate default data. If the linkage is not present on a connect point or one-line, the key specified in the user element is used. If no key exists in the user element, the Default key is used. Once you place an override key on an element, you can modify it, but cannot delete it. To change the displayed value, select the field, and key in a new value. Key Description — Displays the description from the reference database of the current EE Reference Database Key. You can only review the information in this field.

234

_ _______________
Global/Single — Determines whether or not the annotation modifications you are making to the specified element will be applied to all identical element types within the group. For example, setting the toggle to Global while annotating an RCP will change the annotation for all RCPs within the group when you select Confirm (√). If the toggle is set to Single for the same RCP annotation, the system will modify annotation only for that RCP when you select Confirm (√). The lower portion of the Active [One_Line Type] Parameters form displays a specification table. The EE spec key field on the upper portion of the form is used as the key for the Column name values on the lower portion of the form. Select — Retrieves the row(s) from the specification table that meet the select criteria defined in the form. The select criteria are those values that display in the Column value column on the lower portion of the annotation form. You can use relational operators when keying in your own select criteria. Available operators are described later in this section. If only one row matches the select criteria you provide, then the Column values fill in with the matching row’s values. If more than one row matches the criteria, then a second form containing all matching rows displays.

Annotate Element by Group

From this form you will select the row(s) containing the desired values. To add values from the displayed specification table rows, select the row you want, and then select Confirm (√). If you select Cancel (X), the system cancels the form and retrieves the values from the EE spec key field on the original form. Clear — Clears the Column values from the lower portion of the form, and then automatically depresses the Override button to select a different row(s) from the specification table. Clearing the column values allows you to key in new select criteria. Override — This button allows you to override those columns whose access is Read Only (R). You can activate the Override button by selecting it directly or by selecting the Clear button, which automatically activates it.

9. Modify

235

_ _______________
EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide - February 2003 This command accepts certain relational operators as search criteria. You should be familiar with the following operators: Symbol Name Data Types numeric Description = equal to This is the default operator. If you do not enter another operator, the system assumes =. This operator indicates that the queried values should be greater than the given value. This operator indicates that the queried values should be less than the given value. This operator indicates that the queried values should be greater than or equal to the given value. This operator indicates that the queried values should be less than or equal to the given value. This operator indicates that the queried values should NOT be equal to the given value. This operator is a wild card, representing zero or more characters. The queried values must have every character aside from the % in common with the given value. This operator is a wild card, representing a single character. The queried values must have every character aside from the underline in common with the given value.

>

greater than

numeric

<

less than

numeric

>=

greater than or equal to less than or equal to not equal to

numeric

<=

numeric

!=

numeric

%

wild card

CHAR

_

underline

CHAR

Before Using This Command
You can enter all values for the placement of points through a precision input form. Using the form, you can locate elements, route one-lines, accept input, reject input, reset a command action, and exit a command. You must be familiar with precision input and its functions before using this command. For detailed information about precision input, see Precision Input Form, page 119. At any point during this operating sequence, you can exit the command session either by pressing <Esc> or by selecting Cancel (X) on the precision input form. To reset a command action by one step or to reject a highlighted element, press <R> or select Reject on the precision input form. You must define a temporary group of elements, using the Define Group command. (For information about the command, see Define Group, page 226 .) Placing a fence around elements in the design also constitutes a group for the purposes of this command. A fence group overrides the active group.

236

_ _______________
Steps
1. Select the Annotate Element by Group command from the menu. The Annotate by Group precision input form displays. — If you have a fence in the design, go to step 2. — If there is not a fence in the design, go to step 3. 2. Accept/reject fence contents Accept the contents of the fence to define them as a group. The system highlights the group contents. — OR — Reject the contents of the fence. The command exits automatically. Go to step 1. 3. Raceway [element] Accept/reject Accept the highlighted group element. The system displays the Annotate Element form for the identified element. — OR —

Annotate Element by Group

9. Modify

Reject the highlighted group element. The system highlights another group element. Repeat this step. If no group elements remain, the command exits. 4. 5. Set up the form parameters to meet your specifications. Select Confirm (√) to save your changes and exit the annotation form. — OR — Select Cancel (X) to exit the annotation form without saving your changes. Go to Step 3. 6. Placing [column alias] Data point <D> to place, reset <R> to skip. The prompt indicates the column alias you are placing. The column value displays in drag mode attached to the cursor.

237

_ _______________
EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide - February 2003 Position the column value, and place a data point. The new value displays in the design file. The system places all new displayed annotation for the specified element. If you set the toggle to Global, the system places the same annotation for all identical element types in the group. When there are no more values to place for the element type, the system prompts you to annotate other element types within the group. Go to step 3. — OR — If you set the toggle to Single, the system returns you to step 3 to annotate other elements within the group. Go to step 3. Any value placed with the Annotate Element by Group command will be entered into the drawing and, optionally, displayed. When you load the project database, these values are loaded into the project database.

238

_ _______________
Clone Element by Group
This command copies the active group multiple times, useful when the same elements are to be placed at regular intervals. Equipment pointers and drop points are not copied even if they are part of the defined group.

Clone Element by Group

Before Using This Command
You can enter all values for the placement of points through a precision input form. Using the form, you can locate elements, route one-lines, accept input, reject input, reset a command action, and exit a command. You must be familiar with precision input and its functions before using this command. For detailed information about precision input, see Precision Input Form, page 119. At any point during this operating sequence, you can exit the command session either by pressing <Esc> or by selecting Cancel (X) on the precision input form. To reset a command action by one step or to reject a highlighted element, press <R> or select Reject on the precision input form. You must define a temporary group of elements, using the Define Group command, see Define Group, page 226. Placing a fence around elements in the design also constitutes a group for the purposes of this command. A fence group overrides the active group.

Steps
1. Select the Clone Group command.

9. Modify

The Clone Group precision input form displays. If you have not defined a group, the message No active group defined displays. — If you have a fence in the design, go to step 2. — If Single Element is the active toggle on the Define Group form, go to step 3. — If Entire Group is the active toggle on the Define Group form, go to step 4. 2. Accept/reject fence contents Accept the contents of the fence to define them as a group. Go on to step 3 if Single Element is the active toggle on the Define Group form. Go to step 5 if Entire Group is the active toggle on the Define Group form.

239

Return to step 2. If you are placing more than one clone. The clone elements are placed in the design file. 7. The command exits automatically. the command exits automatically. Define origin Identify a point in the group to use as the origin for the copies. Enter placement point Identify the location of the first copy. Key in number of clones Key in the number of times to clone the identified group. 5. — OR — Cancel the form and reenter the number of clones. The system highlights another group element if any elements remain uncopied. 8. Repeat this step. Accept/reject Group [group name] Accept the active group. Go to step 6. 6. Raceway [element] Accept/reject Accept the highlighted element. Confirm (√) the number of time to clone the group. Otherwise. — OR — Reject the highlighted element. each successive clone is placed the same distance and direction from the previous clone as the first clone is from the original group. A warning box displays verifying the number of times you want to clone the identified group._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide .February 2003 3. — OR — Reject the active group. 240 . 4.

reject input. Using the form. To reset a command action by one step or to reject a highlighted element. accept input. go to step 2. You must be familiar with precision input and its functions before using this command. — If Single Element is the active toggle on the Define Group form. see Propagate Element. Placing a fence around elements in the design also constitutes a group for the purposes of this command. which resides in the <current_project>/rway/tmp directory). For information about the form. To view errors that occur during propagation. and exit a command. using the Define Group command. Propagate by Group Before Using This Command You can enter all values for the placement of points through a precision input form. press <R> or select Reject on the precision input form. For information about using this command. For detailed information about precision input. page 314 ._ _______________ Propagate by Group This command expands into three-dimensional elements all or selected valid one-line segments and RCPs from the active group. you can exit the command session either by pressing <Esc> or by selecting Cancel (X) on the precision input form. you can locate elements. — If Entire Group is the active toggle on the Define Group form.err file. page 226. A fence group overrides the active group. see Precision Input Form. go to step 4. 9. Select the Propagate by Group command from the menu. select the Highlight Propagation Errors command. The Project by Group precision input form displays. reset a command action. go to step 3. This command displays to the screen the pro. page 194 . see Define Group. Modify Steps 1. For a description of some of the delivered fittings. see Highlight Propagation Errors. route one-lines. You can set active parameters for propagation through the Propagation Setup form. 241 . — If you have a fence in the design. see Propagation Setup. page 297 . The Propagate by Group command automatically adds propagated (three-dimensional) fittings between non-straight raceway segments with a common RCP. page 119. You must define a temporary group of elements. At any point during this operating sequence.

_ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . — If Single Element is the active toggle on the Define Group form. or until you exit the command. the command propagates all valid elements within the fence. — OR — Reject the active group. 3. 242 . Go to step 1. The command exits automatically. Repeat this step until you have processed all elements within the group. — OR — Reject the contents of the fence. — If Entire Group is the active toggle on the Define Group form. and exits automatically. the command exits automatically. — OR — Reject the highlighted element.February 2003 2. Accept/reject Group [group name] Accept the active group. Repeat this step until you have processed all elements within the group. The system propagates every element belonging to the group. If no group elements remain for propagation. If no group elements remain. or until you exit the command. Raceway [element] Accept/reject Accept the highlighted element. Accept/reject fence contents Accept the contents of the fence to manipulate them as a group. The system highlights another group element for propagation. the command exits automatically. The system propagates the element. go to step 3. 4. and then highlights another group element for propagation.

then the first fitting that is of greater nominal size than the one-line nominal size is used. 9. you can exit the command session either by pressing <Esc> or by selecting Cancel (X) on the precision input form. see Define Group. reject input. page 119. using the Define Group command. 243 . You can add to or replace the delivered rule set by editing the tl_fit_env table in the database. one rule might define that a CLB fitting be placed at a 90 degree intersection of two conduits. If there is no fitting of that nominal size. page 425 for a list of the delivered default rules. The fitting size is determined by comparing the spec table nominal size of all one-lines at the RCP and selecting the largest nominal size among them. Using the form. and exit a command. See EE Databases. you can locate elements. If there is no nominal size fitting larger than the one-line nominal size. You must define the rules in the reference database. If in the fitting table there is a nominal size the same as the largest one-line nominal size. That nominal size is then compared to the fitting table nominal sizes. press <R> or select Reject on the precision input form. For detailed information about precision input. then the largest fitting available is used. For example. Place Fitting by Rule by Group Before Using This Command You can enter all values for the placement of points through a precision input form. At any point during this operating sequence._ _______________ Place Fitting by Rule by Group This command places a non-standard fitting at an RCP using a set of rules defined in the reference database. page 226. reset a command action. see Precision Input Form. route one-lines. Modify You must define a temporary group of elements. You must be familiar with precision input and its functions before using this command. The spec table and the fitting table are defined in the rule. To reset a command action by one step or to reject a highlighted element. then that fitting is used. Placing a fence around elements in the design also constitutes a group for the purposes of this command. accept input. A fence group overrides the active group.

The Group Place Fitting by Rule precision input form displays. Otherwise the correct fitting as defined by the rule is placed on the RCP. Repeat this step. Raceway [element] Accept/reject Accept the highlighted element. Accept/reject Group [group name] Accept the active group. the message No active group defined displays. If no rule is defined for the selected RCP’s situation. — OR — Reject the active group. go to step 4. Go on to step 3 if Single Element is the active toggle on the Define Group form. 2. Otherwise. The system highlights another group element if any elements remain uncopied. — If Entire Group is the active toggle on the Define Group form. then the message Unable to find a rule that applies. 244 . the command exits automatically. displays. — If Single Element is the active toggle on the Define Group form. go to step 3. Accept/reject fence contents Accept the contents of the fence to define them as a group. 4. Select the Place Fitting by Rule by Group command._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . — OR — Reject the highlighted element.February 2003 Steps 1. go to step 2. The command exits automatically. — If you have a fence in the design. If you have not defined a group. 3. Go to step 5 if Entire Group is the active toggle on the Define Group form.

the system defined at placement. The Add Systems form displays. 9. This command will not change the master system. A fenced group will override the active temporary group. Press <D> to accept the group as the one to add systems to. If you try to add a system that already exists on the element. — OR — Press <R> to reject the group and exit the command. — OR — Select Cancel to exit the form and command. 3. Select the Add Systems Group command. it will not be duplicated. Placing a fence around elements in the design also constitutes a group for this command. page 226 . For example. 2. The system(s) is added. Add Systems Group Before Using this Command You must define a temporary group of elements using the Define Group command and the group mode must be set to Entire Group. Select the system or systems you want to add and select Confirm (√). Modify 245 . see Define Group. The group that the systems will be added to highlights. It will only append systems to the element. Steps 1. using this command you can add an alarm and control system to an existing element with a communication system._ _______________ Add Systems Group This command defines multiple systems for a single one-line.

Selecting a row in this field defines the Active System or Subsystems. Project Rule Set — Displays the Project Electrical Code from the your project schema’s "project" table. that is. Percent — Displays the current Percent space allocation assigned to each of the selected systems. The active system determines the symbology of the raceway. The active system is automatically included as a subsystem. all defined systems for the group are removed and replaced by the new systems. Changing the active system will cause the graphic symbology to change to the symbology define for the new system.February 2003 Replace Systems by Group This command changes the defined active system(s) for a group. When a new active system is selected. This command performs a total replacement of all systems. The total Percent space allocation cannot exceed 100 percent._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . The total of the system Percents is displayed in the field at the bottom of the Percent column. For example. Systems — Displays all the available systems. Subsystem — This button allows the selection of subsystems. 246 . If the Project Rule Set is not defined. the Percent and Project Rule can be defined for each subsystem. This Percent is used when calculating the cable fill of the raceway section in the EECMS product. While this button is depressed. The Project Rule Set determines which rules can be assigned to the active systems. The Percent represents the portion of the raceway’s width assigned to that system. the subsystem are all unselected. Field Descriptions Systems — This button allows the selection of the active system. All the selected systems percentages are summed to calculate the total percentage. This is defined in EEmgr with the EE CMS Project Definition process. use this command when you want to change an existing high voltage tray to a low voltage tray. Project Rules cannot be assigned.

drop points. When a row is selected. Steps 1. A network may be thought of as all RCPs. 9. Select the new system type from the form and select Confirm (√). The active group is changed to the new system type. When defining the group for this command. page 226 ._ _______________ List — Indicates whether or not a Project Rule can be assigned. 3. Placing a fence around elements in the design also constitutes a group for this command. see Define Group. You can not replace a system on just one element in a network of elements that have connectivity. a list of available rules for the Project Rule Set defined with the EE CMS Project Definition process is displayed for review and selection. A fenced group will override the active temporary group. Press <D> to accept the group. If an * displays in the List column. The Replace Systems form displays. Modify 2. Replace Systems by Group Project Rule — Displays the Project Rule assigned to each of the selected systems for calculating raceway fill. and so forth that are associated through a series of graphically connected one-lines. To clear the Project Rule. 247 . then the Project Rule can be assigned. To display a list of available rules for the Project Rule Set defined with the EE CMS Project Definition process. one-lines. — OR — Press <R> to reject the group and exit the command. Before Using this Command You must define a temporary group of elements using the Define Group command and the group mode must be set to Entire Group. Select the Replace Systems by Group command. select the row and select the Cancel (X) on the list of Rules. — OR — Select Cancel to exit the form and the command. The active group to be changed highlights. you must define a group that contains all elements that have connectivity. select the *.

see Define Group. A fence group overrides the active group. If automatic propagation is toggled on. the command will repropagate each affected one-line. page 297 for information about the Automatic Propagation toggle. route one-lines. You must define a temporary group of elements. Using the form._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . you can exit the command session either by pressing <Esc> or by selecting Cancel (X) on the precision input form. you can locate elements. press <R> or select Reject on the precision input form. page 226. At any point during this operating sequence. Before Using This Command You can enter all values for the placement of points through a precision input form. while retaining the original geometry of the one-line(s). see Precision Input Form.February 2003 Minimize Joints by Group This command reduces to a minimum the number of vertices in valid one-line(s) within the active group. and exit a command. reject input. (Automatic propagation is on to show the resulting seamless representation. For detailed information about precision input. page 119. To reset a command action by one step or to reject a highlighted element. You must be familiar with precision input and its functions before using this command. reset a command action. Placing a fence around elements in the design also constitutes a group for the purposes of this command. 248 .) The following example demonstrates the effect of the Minimize Joints command on a oneline. accept input. using the Define Group command. (See Propagation Setup.) Automatic propagation must be toggled on in order for the results of this command to be visible.

If there are no valid one-lines remaining in the group. Raceway one line Accept/reject Accept the highlighted one-line. The system minimizes the number of vertices comprising the one-line. the command exits automatically. The system then identifies another valid one-line in the group. 2. — If Single Element is the active toggle on the Define Group form. — If you have a fence in the design. and then identifies another valid one-line within the group (if any remain)._ _______________ Steps 1. go to step 3. — OR — Reject the highlighted one-line. the system prompts you to minimize the number of vertices for each one-line within the fence. go to step 2. the vertices of all one-lines within the fence are reduced to a minimum number. Accept/reject Group ([group name]) 249 . 9. Repeat this step. Select the Minimize Joints by Group command from the menu. if any remain. — If Entire Group is the active toggle on the Define Group form. Modify 3. the command exits automatically. Go to step 3. The command exits automatically. Repeat this step. If there are no valid one-lines remaining in the group. Accept/reject fence contents Accept the contents of the fence to define them as a group. and the command exits automatically. — If Single Element is the active toggle on the Define Group form. go to step 4. The Minimize Joints Group precision input form displays. 4. — If Entire Group is the active toggle on the Define Group form. Minimize Joints by Group — OR — Reject the contents of the fence.

February 2003 Accept the active group. The command exits automatically._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . — OR — Reject the active group. The system minimizes the number of vertices for all valid one-line elements within the group. 250 . The command exits automatically.

The Delete by Group precision input form displays. accept input. reset a command action. reject input. — If Entire Group is the active toggle on the Define Group form. 251 . using the Define Group command. and exit a command. You must be familiar with precision input and its functions before using this command. — If Single Element is the active toggle on the Define Group form. Placing a fence around elements in the design also constitutes a group for the purposes of this command. go to step 3. page 226. see Precision Input Form. Accept/reject fence contents Accept the contents of the fence to define them as a group. Go to step 3. you can exit the command session either by pressing <Esc> or by selecting Cancel (X) on the precision input form. For detailed information about precision input. the system prompts you to delete each element within the fence. page 119._ _______________ Delete Element by Group This command deletes all or selected valid elements in an active group from the design file. you can locate elements. Using the form. — OR — Reject the contents of the fence. press <R> or select Reject on the precision input form. To reset a command action by one step or to reject a highlighted element. go to step 2. see Define Group. Select the Delete Element by Group command from the menu. — If Single Element is the active toggle on the Define Group form. You must define a temporary group of elements. 2. Modify — If you have a fence in the design. go to step 4. route one-lines. 9. At any point during this operating sequence. A fence group overrides the active group. Steps 1. If you have not defined a group. and the command exits automatically. the contents of the group are deleted. the message No active group defined displays. — If Entire Group is the active toggle on the Define Group form. Delete Element by Group Before Using This Command You can enter all values for the placement of points through a precision input form.

The command exits automatically._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . 252 . the command exits automatically. the command exits automatically. The system prompts you to delete another group element if any remain for deletion. 3. If there are no remaining group elements for deletion. The command exits automatically. Accept/reject Group [group name] Accept the active group. The system deletes all valid elements within the group. — OR — Reject the highlighted element. Repeat this step. Raceway [element] Accept/reject Accept the highlighted element. and prompts you to delete another group element. The system deletes the element.February 2003 The command exits automatically. If there are no remaining group elements for deletion. 4. — OR — Reject the active group.

reviews. working view. model annotation. Define System — Selects any or all systems from those available in the reference database for use in the design file. and modifies the raceway default parameters for symbols. systems. Setup 253 . The Setup palette is activated by selecting Setup from the EERWAY Command Menu Bar. reviews. and cross sections. Your system/application manager should ensure that the reference database contains the necessary systems and one-line types before you use these commands._ _______________ 10. and engineering units. and modifies the default parameters for text. Define One-Line Type — Selects any or all available one-line types from those available in the reference database for use in the design file. Setup Commands The Setup commands allow you to define. Setup Commands In a new design file. 10. and modifies the graphic symbology control for those one-line types you specified using the Set Symbology Control command. one-line types. RCPs. you must use the Setup commands before using any other command group. Set Text Defaults — Defines. Symbology Control — Defines. and symbology settings for your design file. Set Conduit Sizing Attributes — Defines which conduit attributes will be used selecting the correct size conduit in the Conduit Sizing command. reviews. report IDs. text nodes. then selecting Palette from the resulting pulldown menu. Commands Set Raceway Defaults — Defines. Cell Creation Commands — Create various types of raceway cells necessary for creating EE Raceway models. Set Symbology Control — Selects the standard graphic symbology control for all systems and one-line types in a design file. review. and modify the default parameters.

254 .February 2003 Model Commands — Place and manipulate a model information in the design file._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide .

For individual command prerequisites. 10. Operating Information See individual command descriptions for specific operating information. Setup 255 . see the appropriate command descriptions. Some of the setups performed by this group of commands are required for later design work and database operations. Group Workflow Before using the symbology commands in this group (Set Symbology Control and Symbology Control). Using the Setup Commands Before Using These Commands You must have a valid reference database attached to your design file before using the Setup commands. you must have defined at least one system and one-line type from the database using the Define System and Define One-Line Type commands._ _______________ Using the Setup Commands When to Use These Commands You will typically use Setup commands when you enter a design file for the first time.

page 164 for more information. see Define Duct Cross Section. To change a displayed value. Parameters — Displays the EE Raceway default digitizing parameters. Use the Set Symbology Control to make changes to individual. in sub-units. select the field. define. between the routed cable/conduit. and modifies raceway defaults. and key in a new value. Cross Section — Displays the default Scale Factor and Rotation Angle for cross sections. select the field. You can review. reviews.February 2003 Set Raceway Defaults This command defines. To change a displayed value. symbol defaults. existing systems. see Define Duct Cross Section. define. and the shell of the duct bank when using the Define Duct Cross Section command. Changes in these fields do not affect existing systems. Use these fields to set the default symbology for different systems in a design file. page 164 for more information. define. and key in a new value. and/or modify the values in these fields. You can review. 256 . Default settings are applied to new systems created in or added to a design file. including cross section parameters. and key in a new value._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . The system uses these settings when annotating the model either during cell creation or after you have placed one in the design file. You will enter all raceway default values through the EE Raceway Defaults form. Global Symbology — Displays the default symbology settings for Model Annotation. Margin Width — Defines the distance. It also allows you to view the reference database contents for RCP. and/or modify the settings. and Raceway Connect Point (RCP) parameters. and/or modify any of the values in these fields. You can review. such as Color or Active Angle. select the field. To change a displayed value. Duct — Specifies whether to use conduit or cable when using the Define Duct Cross Section command. represented by the matrix buttons.

Setup 257 . Set up the form parameters to meet your requirements. select the field. define. The working view determines the orientation of text and cells you place through precision input. and drag it along the scale until the desired view number displays. Select the Set Raceway Defaults command. define. precision input uses the working view to place and locates points in the design. select first the key field and then the Display button. and key in a new value. To change the displayed value._ _______________ Working view — Displays the current working view for the design file. The scale includes views 1 through 8. equipment pointer. and drop point annotation. Default Key — Displays the current default keys for RCP (raceway connect point). and/or modify this key. and/or modify the value in this field. This value will also become the default RCP weight on the Symbology Control form. To display the current default data from the database for a particular element (RCP. Set Raceway Defaults Steps 1. 3. The information will display in the scrollable list in the lower right corner of the form. Symbols — Displays the names of the cells that represent equipment pointers and drop points. equipment pointer. You can review. and key in a new value. Select Confirm (√) to save your changes and exit the command. To change a displayed value. The EE Raceway Defaults form displays. select the field. RCP — Displays the Default Weight for RCPs. To change the current working view. You can review. or drop point). You can only view this data. 10. select the slide bar. Additionally. — OR — Select Cancel (X) to exit without saving your changes. 2.

select the Select All button. If you need systems not available to you. In order to place one-lines. 258 . — OR — Select those systems listed in the To Design column that you no longer want defined for the design file. you must have at least one system defined in the design file. so as to avoid duplication of elements. as well as those already selected for the current design file. To remove ALL systems from definition in the design file. Select the Define System command._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . To define ALL systems from the reference database in the present design file. Steps 1. The System Definition form displays. Select the systems in the From Database column that you want to define in the present design file. The System Definition form displays those systems available for selection from the reference database. you should ask the system/application manager to add them to the reference database. select the Clear All button. Caution should be used when adding these to the database.February 2003 Define System This command allows you to select any or all available systems from the reference database for use in the design file. The systems you select display in the To Design column and will be defined in the design file once you select the Confirm button (√). 2.

_ _______________ The systems you select are deleted from the To Design column and will no longer be defined in the design file. 3. Select Confirm (√) to save your changes and exit the command. — OR — Select Cancel (X) to exit the command without saving your changes. Define System 10. Setup 259 .

_ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . If you need one-line types not available to you. Steps 1. select the Clear All button. To define ALL one-line types from the reference database in the design file. To remove ALL one-line types from definition in the design file. — OR — Select those one-line types listed in the To Design column that you no longer want defined for the design file. The one-line types you select display in the To Design column and will be defined in the design file once you select the Confirm button (√). such as Set Active One-Line Type and Place One-Line Type.February 2003 Define One-Line Type This command allows you to select any or all available one-line types from the reference database for use in the design file. you should ask the system/application manager to add them to the reference database. Caution should be used when adding these to the database. You must define one-line types for the design file before you can use related commands. Select the one-line types in the From Database column that you want to define in the present design file. as well as those already selected for the current design file. The One Line Type Definition form displays those oneline types available in the database. The One Line Type Definition form displays. 260 . select the Select All button. 2. so as to avoid duplication of elements. Select the Define One-Line Type command.

10. Define One-Line Type The one-line types you select are deleted from the To Design column and will no longer be defined in the design file. Select Confirm (√) to save your changes and exit the command. Setup 261 . — OR — Select Cancel (X) to exit the command without saving your changes._ _______________ 3.

page 264 . In cases where you do not specify overrides for the one-line types within a system. page 258 and Define One-Line Type._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . The Symbology Control command allows you to set up the symbology details for all the override cases within a system. those oneline types will use a system default. you must first use the Set Symbology Control command to specify the systems and one-line types that can be changed. For more information. see Symbology Control. 262 . all symbology is taken from the system defaults. The Set Graphic Symbology Control form displays a matrix of systems and one-line types and the standard graphic symbology assigned to each system (all one-line types within a system are originally assigned the same symbology). When you enter a new design file.February 2003 Set Symbology Control This command defines the standard graphic symbology for all systems and one-line types in a design file. You can specify the one-line types for which to change the standard symbology by setting them to override mode. see Define System. For more information. Therefore. to make any changes in symbology. You can also modify the system default symbology details if necessary. Before Using This Command You must have defined at least one system and one-line type in the design file. page 260 .

The Override settings you selected are deleted from the Override field and the default settings restored. To turn off ALL selected Override settings. Each one-line type within the system will then have its own symbology defined. The Override setting displays in the appropriate field(s). 3. — OR — Select a one-line type from the list to "turn on" the override for that type in all systems. 10. Select the Set Symbology Control command. select the No Overrides button. Select Confirm (√) to save your changes and exit the command. — OR — Select Cancel (X) to exit the command without saving your changes. The Set Graphic Symbology Control form displays. Using your cursor. so default symbology is not necessary for that system. 2. — OR — Select the individual Override settings you wish to "turn off" (return to default status). select the individual area that matches a system and one-line type to "turn on" an override for that case. Setup 263 ._ _______________ Steps 1. — OR — Steps Toggle the Available button in each field to None to change the defaults symbology for all one-line types within a system.

System — Displays the system for which you can currently change the symbology settings. The display list contains a list of available systems. You must have at least one system and one-line type defined for the design file in order to use this command. To change a value in the list. You can review and edit these settings._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . reviews. page 262 for more information about this command). and key in a system name. The Symbology Control form displays the current symbology settings for all systems and corresponding one-line types. or select the field.February 2003 Symbology Control This command defines. The display list contains a list of available one-line types within the currently displayed system. select another system from the list. One Line Type Overrides — Displays the one-line type within the displayed system for which you can change the symbology settings. System Default will display in the One-Line Type display list. select the field. Symbology — Displays the symbology settings for the selected system and one-line type. If you have not set overrides for all one-line types within a system. and modifies the graphic symbology for those one-line types you specified using the Set Symbology Control command (see Set Symbology Control. or select the field. and key in the new value. To change the displayed one-line type (or system default). select another one-line type from the list. and key in a new value. To change the displayed system. 264 .

Symbology Control 10. The Symbology Control form displays._ _______________ Steps 1. Set up the form parameters to meet your requirements. Setup 265 . Select Confirm (√) to save your changes and exit the command. Select the Symbology Control command. 2. 3. — OR — Select Cancel (X) to exit the command without saving your changes.

To change the current text node justification. or select a value from the list. reviews. select the button that graphically represents the desired justification. You can modify the justification using either the buttons or the list. and engineering units. text nodes._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . Line length — Displays the default length for lines of text in a ratio of master units to sub units (#:#). Line spacing — Displays the default vertical spacing between lines of text in a ratio of master units to sub units (#:#). or select a value from the list. select the button that graphically represents the desired justification. Height — Displays the default text height in a ratio of master units to sub units (#:#). Text String — These buttons and the associated display list display the current justification for text strings in the design file. 266 . To change the current text string justification.February 2003 Set Text Defaults This command defines. You will enter all values using the Text form. Field Descriptions Font — Displays the default font style number. Width — Displays the default text width in a ratio of master units to sub units (#:#). Text Nodes — These buttons and the associated display list display the current justification for text nodes in the design file. You can modify the justification using either the buttons or the list. and modifies the MicroStation default parameters for text.

3. Select Confirm (√) to save your changes and exit the command._ _______________ Engineering Units — These fields (Master units. You can only review the displayed settings. Setup 267 . Select the Set Text Defaults command. Sub units. Set up the form parameters to meet your requirements. The Text form displays. 2. — OR — Select Cancel (X) to exit the command without saving your changes. 10. Set Text Defaults Steps 1. and Positional units) display the current PDS engineering units.

— THEN — Select Confirm (√) to save your changes and exit the form. Steps 1.February 2003 Set Conduit Sizing Attributes This command defines which conduit attributes will be used in selecting the correct size conduit in the Conduit Sizing command._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . 268 . 2. Define which attributes to use. The Set Conduit Sizing Attributes form displays. Select the Set Conduit Sizing Attributes command. — OR — Select Cancel (X) to exit the form without saving any changes.

along with all existing cells. copy it to a nonproduction directory. If you want to modify the delivered library. in your cell library. Create Equipment Pointer Cell — Creates an equipment pointer symbol for later placement in the design file. You must have a cell library attached to the design file in order to activate the Create Cell commands. Create Drop Point Cell — Creates a drop point symbol for later placement in the design file. which resides in win32app\eerway\dgn. The cells you create using this command are stored._ _______________ Create Cell Commands The Create Cell commands create various types of raceway cells necessary for creating EE Raceway models. rway. Create Cell Commands 10. Setup 269 . EE Raceway is delivered with a sample cell library. and modify the copied version.cel. You must have write access to the library before modifying it. This section contains detailed descriptions of the following commands: Create Model Cell — Creates or recreates a model cell to carry the sheet name of a drawing.

Operating Information See individual command descriptions for specific operating information. key in rc= in the MicroStation Command Window. To display a list of available cell libraries. Before Using These Commands You must have a cell library with read/write privileges attached to the design file. 270 . Group Workflow There is no required or suggested sequence for using the Create Cell commands. page 119 . you can use these commands throughout the design session._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . because it is through the Precision Input form that you will enter values for the placement of points and for the location of raceway elements. see Precision Input Form. You should be familiar with precision input and its functions before using any of the Create Cell commands.February 2003 Using the Create Cell Commands When to Use These Commands Once you have performed the necessary setups. For detailed information about precision input.

3. The Select cell type form displays.) Press <D> to Accept the fence. place the first data point of a fence block diagonal. key in rc=. — OR — Press <R> to reject the fence._ _______________ Create Model Cell Make sure you have a cell library attached to the design file before using this command and be sure the library is not read only. 2. Include all the graphic elements of the component. Accept/reject fence (This is the first prompt if a fence is already established when you start the command. Do not include any elements within the fence that you do not want as part of the cell. Create Model Cell This command allows you to create a model cell and to store that cell permanently in your cell library. Select the Create Cell command. Go to step 2. Be sure to include any existing annotation that you want as part of the cell. Setup 5. Be sure to make room to include any text elements within the fence. Enter first fence point If no fence is defined. Select the Model button from the form. — OR — Press <R> to exit the command. 10. Enter second fence point Place the second data point of a fence block diagonal. 271 . Make enough room within the fence to include all text elements within the fence. 4. Include all the graphic elements of the component. To display a list of available cell libraries. Steps 1.

and press <Return>. key in the value. Turn the Display toggle on for any text attribute you want displayed in the cell.February 2003 6. For detailed information about the annotation form. go to step 7. page 178 . Underlines (for empty enter data fields) will not be displayed on the screen cursor like other new values. 7. select the Column value field. Data point <D> to place. To enter a value. When you accept the fence. Placing sheet. etc. allowing you to add annotation to the cell and displaying those values already in the cell. select the field again and key in the new value. 8. you are prompted to place any new values. see Annotate Element. Any values (including empty enter data fields) already present in the cell are edited automatically. go to step 10. If you select Close. The Annotate Element form displays. To make a change or correction. — OR — Select Cancel (X) to exit the command without saving the changes. 9. they will be placed in the cell (and visible) when you press <D>. 272 . save your modifications by selecting Confirm (√). When complete. The prompt tells you which value you are placing. a form displays prompting you to Close or Annotate. reset <R> to skip For all new displayed text attributes._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . If you select Annotate. However. Return to step 7.

Create Model Cell 11. This point must be within the graphic extent of the fenced elements. key in the value. When complete. the Close cell parameters form displays. The description is optional. You must enter a cell name._ _______________ Move the text to the desired position in the drawing and press <D>. 10. select the input box again and key in the new value. The message Accept/reject Successful Completion displays as long as the fence is still active. This step repeats for each enter data field. To enter a value. To make a change or correction. you are returned to step 7. Refer to Error Messages. various error messages will display. Setup 273 . Return to step 11. The value is placed in the cell as you indicated. confirm your entries by selecting Confirm (√). and press <Return>. If you try to close with the fence around invalid elements. — OR — Press <R> to reject the cell. When complete. 10. select the input box. Identify cell origin Place a data point to define the cell origin. When you select Close. page 377 for descriptions of these messages. The cell is created and placed into the attached cell library. 12. All new non-displayed text attributes are placed at the center of the active fence.

3. place the first data point of a fence block diagonal.) Press <D> to accept the fence._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . — OR — Press <R> to reject the fence. Go to step 2. Steps 1. To display a list of available cell libraries. 4. Enter second fence point Place the second data point of a fence block diagonal. — OR — Press <R> to exit the command. Make sure you have a cell library attached to the design file before using this command and be sure the library is not read only. Select the To Equipment button from the form. The Select cell type form displays. Include all the graphic elements of the component. 2.February 2003 Create Equipment Pointer Cell This command allows you to create a equipment pointer symbol and to store that cell permanently in your cell library. Enter first fence point If no fence is defined. Select the Create Cell command from the command menu. 274 . Make enough room within the fence to include all text elements within the fence. 5. Do not include any elements within the fence that you do not want as part of the cell. Be sure to include any existing annotation that you want as part of the cell. Accept/reject fence (This is the first prompt if a fence is already established when you start the command. Include all the graphic elements of the component. Be sure to make room to include any text elements within the fence. key in rc=.

However. The Annotate Element form displays. key in the value. select the Column value field. see Annotate Element. Return to step 7. and press <Return>. reset <R> to skip 10. When complete. For detailed information about the annotation form. go to step 11. 7. Setup For all new displayed text attributes. Create Equipment Pointer Cell If you select Annotate. Underlines (for empty enter data fields) will not be displayed on the screen cursor like other new values. a form displays prompting you to Close or Annotate. 9. allowing you to add annotation to the cell and displaying those values already in the cell. they will be placed in the cell (and visible) when you press <D>. When you accept the fence._ _______________ 6. 275 . — OR — Select Cancel (X) to exit the command without saving the changes. Turn the Display toggle on for any text attribute you want displayed in the cell. etc. To enter a value. Data point <D> to place. save your modifications by selecting Confirm (√). 8. The prompt tells you which value you are placing. page 178 . To make a change or correction. Placing equipment tag. Any values (including empty enter data fields) already present in the cell are edited automatically. If you select Close. you are prompted to place any new values. select the field again and key in the new value. go to step 7.

page 377 for descriptions of these messages. 276 . you are returned to step 7. The description is optional. This step repeats for each enter data field. the Close cell parameters form displays._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . key in the value. select the input box. This point must be within the graphic extent of the fenced elements. The value is placed in the cell as you indicated. 10. To enter a value. When complete. confirm your entries by selecting Confirm (√). various error messages will display. 11. When complete. and press <Return>. You must enter a cell name. — OR — Press <R> to reject the cell. Refer to Error Messages.February 2003 Move the text to the desired position in the drawing and press <D>. Return to step 11. The cell is created and placed into the attached cell library. Identify cell origin Place a data point to define the cell origin. If you try to close with the fence around invalid elements. When you select Close. 12. All new non-displayed text attributes are placed at the center of the active fence. To make a change or correction. The message Accept/reject Successful Completion displays as long as the fence is still active. select the input box again and key in the new value.

Select the Create Cell command from the command menu. 2. place the first data point of a fence block diagonal. Go to step 2. Setup Place the second data point of a fence block diagonal. 5. Make sure you have a cell library attached to the design file before using this command and be sure the library is not read only. To display a list of available cell libraries. Enter second fence point 10. The Select cell type form displays. Accept/reject fence (This is the first prompt if a fence is already established when you start the command. Include all the graphic elements of the component. Steps 1. Do not include any elements within the fence that you do not want as part of the cell. Be sure to make room to include any text elements within the fence. Your cell library must contain a drop point cell for the placement of onelines in the design file (the drop point establishes connectivity between an RCP and a one-line where the two are of a different one-line type). — OR — Press <R> to reject the fence. Enter first fence point If no fence is defined. 277 . 4. 3. Be sure to include any existing annotation that you want as part of the cell. Make enough room within the fence to include all text elements within the fence. Select the Drop Point button from the form. Include all the graphic elements of the component. — OR — Press <R> to exit the command. key in rc=.) Press <D> to accept the fence._ _______________ Create Drop Point Cell Create Drop Point Cell This command allows you to create a drop point symbol and to store that cell permanently in your cell library.

key in the value. To make a change or correction. Turn the Display toggle on for any text attribute you want displayed in the cell. select the Column value field. The Annotate Element form displays. reset <R> to skip For all new displayed text attributes.February 2003 6. page 178 . go to step 7. they will be placed in the cell (and visible) when you press <D>. Placing drop point tag. save your modifications by selecting Confirm (√). 278 . allowing you to add annotation to the cell and displaying those values already in the cell. 7. see Annotate Element. Data point <D> to place. a form displays prompting you to Close or Annotate. 8. and press <Return>. To enter a value. — OR — Select Cancel (X) to exit the command without saving the changes. you are prompted to place any new values. Underlines (for empty enter data fields) will not be displayed on the screen cursor like other new values. However._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . Any values (including empty enter data fields) already present in the cell are edited automatically. If you select Close. The prompt tells you which value you are placing. When complete. go to step 11. 9. select the field again and key in the new value. When you accept the fence. If you select Annotate. etc. Return to step 7. For detailed information about the annotation form.

page 377 for descriptions of these messages. you are returned to step 7. This step repeats for each enter data field. Create Drop Point Cell 11. Identify cell origin Place a data point to define the cell origin. If you try to close with the fence around invalid elements. This point must be within the graphic extent of the fenced elements. The cell is created and placed into the attached cell library. The value is placed in the cell as you indicated. 10. 12. The description is optional. the Close cell parameters form displays. When complete._ _______________ Move the text to the desired position in the drawing and press <D>. To enter a value. All new non-displayed text attributes are placed at the center of the active fence. confirm your entries by selecting Confirm (√). — OR — Press <R> to reject the cell. When complete. and press <Return>. Setup 279 . 10. various error messages will display. You must enter a cell name. select the input box again and key in the new value. Return to step 11. The message Accept/reject Successful Completion displays as long as the fence is still active. select the input box. Refer to Error Messages. key in the value. When you select Close. To make a change or correction.

the defined systems.February 2003 Model Commands These commands are used to place and manipulate model information in your design file. and the defined one-line types. Move Model Annotation — Moves the model annotation within the design file. Annotate Model — Adds._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . changes. Unlock Model — Unlocks the model. Commands Lock Model — Locks the symbology control parameters. 280 . or reviews the sheet name in a model.

You should be familiar with precision input and its functions before using any of the Model commands. you must have locked the model using the Lock Model command. you can exit the command session by pressing <Esc> or by selecting Cancel (X) on the precision input form. Pressing <R> or selecting Reject on the precision input form will either reset the active command by one step or reject a highlighted element in the design file. 10. page 119 . you can use these commands throughout the design session. because it is through the Precision Input form that you will enter values for the placement of points and for the location of raceway elements. see Precision Input Form. Operating Information During the operating sequence for any of these commands. You must lock the model in order to load the drawing into the project database. Setup 281 . Group Workflow Before you can annotate or move annotation in the model._ _______________ Using the Model Commands When to Use These Commands You may want to use the Lock Model command after performing basic design setups to lock the symbology control parameters and the defined systems and one-line types. However. Using the Model Commands Before Using These Commands You should complete the symbology and basic design file setups before locking the model. For detailed information about precision input.

If the model was locked when you selected this command. The model is locked. You must lock the model in order to load the drawing into the project database. the message Model is already locked displays. 282 . you should lock your model after setup. but before placing graphics in a file in order to protect your parameters.February 2003 Lock Model This command locks the model._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . Select the Lock Model command. Steps 1. Therefore. The locking of the model locks the symbology control parameters and the defined systems and one-line types.

see Precision Input Form. Select the Move Model Annotation command. and place it. you can locate elements. — OR — Exit the command. You must be familiar with precision input and its functions before using this command. To reset a command action by one step or to reject a highlighted element. you can exit the command session either by pressing <Esc> or by selecting Cancel (X) on the precision input form. Move Model Annotation Before Using This Command You can enter all values for the placement of points through a precision input form. page 119._ _______________ Move Model Annotation This command moves the model annotation within a design. Setup 283 . press <R> or select Reject on the precision input form. Using the form. and exit a command. reset a command action. At any point during this operating sequence. reject input. 10. route one-lines. 2. accept input. Enter placement point Move the annotation to the desired location. The command checks the design file for the existing model annotation and places it in drag mode. Steps 1. The Move Model Annotation precision input form displays. For detailed information about precision input.

Select the Unlock Model command. If you want to change the symbology control or add new systems and one-line types to a model that has been locked. Steps 1. 2._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . 284 . 3. Select Confirm (√) to unlock the model.February 2003 Unlock Model This command unlocks the model. you must first unlock the model using this command. A warning form displays. — OR — Select Cancel (X) to exit the command without unlocking the model.

4. however. The sheet number should be unique for each drawing. 2. Select the Annotate Model command. Setup 285 . toggle the Display fields in the form to On. If you want to display the annotation in the model. Select Confirm (√) to accept the new annotation. — OR — Select Cancel (X) to exit the command without saving your changes. Select the Column value field for sheet on the form and key in a new sheet number. The Load Database process. This command cannot prevent the duplication of sheet numbers within a project. Steps 1. 10. will prevent such duplication. If you toggled Display to On. 3._ _______________ Annotate Model Annotate Model This command adds or changes the annotation for the model. The Annotate Element form displays. you are prompted to place the annotation in the model.

_ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide .February 2003 286 .

Runtime Commands Set Active One-Line Parameters — Displays the active one-line parameters. and allows you to set new active parameters. based on the current active one-line type._ _______________ 11. Runtime Setup Commands 11. then selecting Palette from the resulting pull-down menu. 287 . Runtime Setup Commands The Runtime Setup commands allow you to define. Set Active One-Line Type — Displays the current active one-line type and allows you to select a new active one-line type. modify. and review the active drawing parameters in your design file. The Runtime Setup palette is activated by selecting Setup from the EE Raceway Command Menu Bar. Display Element Information — Displays characteristics of selected elements. Set Active System — Displays the current active system and allows you to set a new active system. Set Active Levels — Displays the current active level(s) and allows you to turn Off displayed levels and to turn On new level displays. Propagation Setup — Sets the active parameters for propagation in the design file.

February 2003 Using the Runtime Setup Commands When to Use These Commands Once you have performed the necessary setups. See Setup Commands. Operating Information See individual command descriptions for specific operating information. 288 . Before Using These Commands You must have at least one system and one-line type defined in the design file in order to use these commands. you can use these commands throughout the design session. page 253 for more information about defining systems and one-line types. Group Workflow There is no required or suggested sequence for using the commands in this group._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide .

For example. Save to Memory (M) — Temporarily saves your overrides and specification changes. You can enter blank spaces into the design. To delete an override on a reference database attribute. To change the values associated with a one-line type. select the column value field and delete the blank character. When you change the active one-line type or end your design session. a value will display in the field only if the value can be retrieved from the reference database. Set Active One-Line Type Parameters 11. if you defined tray as your active one-line type. and key in the new value. Entering a space or a text value for an attribute will override that value in the reference database. You can review and modify the values in this field. The previous set of specifications becomes active again. 289 . then the Active TRAY Parameters form will display when you use this command. the field remains null. If blanks exist for a field. which is based on the current active one-line type. page 294 ). Column name — Displays the aliases for those columns in the database that are associated with the specified one-line type. but empty <Return>s enter nothing into the design. Column value — Displays the current value for the column whose alias displays in the Column name field. Runtime The Set Active One-Line Type Parameters command allows you to enter values through the appropriate form. the cursor will jump to the end of the blanks when the field is tagged beyond value. Once you have deleted the override. select this field. you lose the overrides and specifications you saved to memory._ _______________ Set Active One-Line Type Parameters This command displays the active one-line parameters based on the current active one-line type you set using the Set Active One-Line Type command (see Set Active One-Line Type. You can only review the information in this field. Otherwise.

If you can view and modify (read and write) the column value. Any annotation you placed in the drawing will override the reference database defaults on the form. then the cell name or the Default key will be used to locate default data. 290 . The lower portion of the Active [One_Line Type] Parameters form displays a specification table. the field remains null. select the *. You can only review the information in this column. The EE spec key field on the upper portion of the form is used as the key for the Column name values on the lower portion of the form. Where the toggle is On. Display On/Off — Enables or disables the design display for each column value.February 2003 List — Indicates whether or not a column value has an associated codelist. Key Description — This field displays the description from the reference database of the current EE Reference Database Key. select the field. You will be prompted to place displayed values when placing one-lines in the drawing. Otherwise. The select criteria are those values that display in the Column value column on the lower portion of the annotation form. To change the displayed value. it becomes an override key to the reference database. To display the codelist. Access — Indicates whether or not you can manipulate a particular column value. the Access column displays a R/W. Once you place an override key on an element. If you delete the value in this field. You can only review the information in this field. If you can only view (read) the column value. EE Reference Database Key — This field allows you to insert an override key in the reference database. you can modify it. You can use relational operators when keying in your own select criteria. then it will display an R. If the specified key does not exist in the reference database. and corresponding database values are retrieved and displayed on the annotation form. and key in a new value. If an override linkage is not present on a device or a title block. the value will display in the design where you place it. the key specified in the user element is used. When you enter a new value in the EE Reference Database Key field. If no key exists in the user element. the Default key is used. then the column value has a corresponding codelist. If the linkage is not present on a connect point or one-line. If an * displays in the List column. The key field is updated. an error message displays and the annotation form returns to the previous values. Select — Retrieves the row(s) from the specification table that meet the select criteria defined in the form._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . but cannot delete it. a value will automatically redisplay if it can be retrieved from the reference database.

Override button — This button allows you to override those columns whose access is Read Only (R). Set Active One-Line Type Parameters 11. then a second form containing all matching rows displays. which automatically activates it. If more than one row matches the criteria._ _______________ If only one row matches the select criteria you provide. 291 . Clear button — This button clears the Column values from the lower portion of the form. select the row you want. then the Column values fill in with the matching row’s values. If you select Cancel (X). and then select Confirm (√). You can activate the Override button by selecting it directly or by selecting the Clear button. Runtime From this form you will select the row(s) containing the desired values. and then automatically depresses the Override button to select a different row(s) from the specification table. To add values from the displayed specification table rows. the system cancels the form and retrieves the values from the EE spec key field on the original form.

You should be familiar with the following operators: Symbol Name Data Type numeric Description = equal to This is the default operator. the system assumes =. This operator indicates that the queried values should NOT be equal to the given value. Select Confirm (√) to save your changes and exit the command. 292 . This operator indicates that the queried values should be greater than or equal to the given value. Select the Set Active One-Line Type Parameters command. This operator indicates that the queried values should be less than or equal to the given value. This operator indicates that the queried values should be less than the given value. An Active One-Line Type Parameters form displays. — OR — Select Cancel (X) to exit the command without saving your changes. This operator indicates that the queried values should be greater than the given value. This operator is a wild card. > greater than numeric < less than numeric >= greater than or equal to less than or equal to not equal to numeric <= numeric != numeric % wild card CHAR _ underline CHAR Steps 1.February 2003 This command accepts certain relational operators as search criteria. If you do not enter another operator._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . The queried values must have every character aside from the % in common with the given value. representing zero or more characters. 3. 2. The queried values must have every character aside from the underline in common with the given value. representing a single character. This operator is a wild card. Set up the form parameters to meet your requirements.

Set Active One-Line Type Parameters 11. When you load the project database. Runtime 293 ._ _______________ Any value you place with the Set Active One-line Parameters command will be entered into the drawing and. displayed. optionally. these values are loaded into the project database.

Select Confirm (√) to save your changes and exit the command. — OR — Select Cancel (X) to exit the command without saving your changes. You must set an active one-line type in order to use the Place One-Line Type command. From the list. page 260 ). based on your selections from the reference database using the Define One-Line Type command (see Define One-Line Type. Steps 1. 3. 294 . 2. The one-line type you selected highlights. The command also highlights the current active one-line type and allows you to select a new one from the set of those available._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . Select the Set Active One-Line Type command. The Active One Line Type form displays.February 2003 Set Active One-Line Type This command displays all one-line types available in the design file. select the one-line type you want to make active.

The active system is automatically included as a subsystem. When a new active system is selected. 295 . Project Rules cannot be assigned. The Project Rule Set determines which rules can be assigned to the active systems. You can have multiple systems defined for a single one-line type as a way of defining split trays or elements. The active system determines the symbology of the one-line type. Project Rule Set — Displays the Project Electrical Code from the your project schema’s project table. page 258 ). Subsystem — Selects the subsystems. the Percent and Project Rule can be defined for each subsystem. While this button is depressed. you can select a new active system from the set of those available. This is done by specifying a system and one or more subsystems. whereas subsystems do not. Selecting a row in this field defines the Active System or Subsystems. The active system is automatically included as a subsystem. Set Active System 11. Active System — Displays the active system which determines the symbology of the raceway. based on those you selected from the reference database using the Define System command (see Define System. You can have no more than six systems active for each one-line type. Systems Column — Displays all the available systems. the subsystems are all unselected. Using the Set Active System form. The active system determines the symbology of the raceway. This is defined in EEmgr with the EE CMS Project Definition process. If the Project Rule Set is not defined. Runtime Field Descriptions Systems — Selects the active system._ _______________ Set Active System This command displays the current active system and all available systems.

To access the list of subsystems. Project Rule — Displays the Project Rule assigned to each of the selected systems for calculating raceway fill. When a row is selected. The Active System form displays. 3. To display a list of available rules for the Project Rule Set defined with the EE CMS Project Definition process. a list of available rules for the Project Rule Set defined with the EE CMS Project Definition process is displayed for review and selection. select the *. List — Indicates whether or not a Project Rule can be assigned. 4. The total of the system percents is displayed in the field at the bottom of the Percent column.February 2003 Percent — Displays the current percent space allocation assigned to each of the selected systems. This Percent is used when calculating the cable fill of the raceway section in the EECMS product. If an * displays. — OR — Select Cancel (X) to exit the command without saving your changes. Define the percentages and the project rules you want to use. The Percent represents the portion of the raceway’s width assigned to that system. Select Confirm (√) to save your changes and exit the command. Select the Set Active System command. All the selected systems percentages are summed to calculate the total percentage._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . 296 . The total space allocation cannot exceed 100 percent. press the Subsystem button. Select the system and subsystem(s) you want to make active. 2. then a Project Rule can be assigned. To clear the Project Rule. Steps 1. select the row and select the Cancel (X) on the list of Rules.

Propagation Mode — Defines the active propagation mode. page 108 . Rough . For additional information about propagation. All fittings you place manually are propagated with Eden. Set the toggle to On to verify that an element exists in the database before you propagate it.Propagates straight sections and fittings. but lacks the detail that Eden propagation provides.Propagates straight sections. Part Verification — Enables or disables part verification. radius. regardless of the settings on this form. Sketch .Retrieves one-line type and RCP dimensions from specifications in the database and from overrides. Smooth ._ _______________ Propagation Setup This command sets the active parameters for propagating one-line elements in the design file. 297 . Propagation sends these dimensions to the Eden symbol. see The Drawing Process. Set the toggle to Off to skip part verification before propagation. Runtime Field Descriptions Propagation Style — Defines the active style of propagation. Eden . cutting them back to leave room for fittings. Sketch propagation is considerably faster than Eden propagation.Propagates straight sections only.Sketches standard straights and fittings. using the dimensions of the cross sections and the transition. Cutback . Propagation Setup 11. and extension on the one-lines and RCPs.

Select Confirm (√) to save your changes and to exit the command. Define the form parameters to meet your specifications.February 2003 If Eden is the active propagation mode. will cause the propagation to be deleted and redrawn to reflect the change. part verification will be performed. If you set the toggle to On. Automatic Propagation — Enables or disables the automatic propagation of elements. Select the Propagation Setup command. any changes you make to an element. 3. The Propagation Setup form displays. like editing the size._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . — OR — Select Cancel (X) to exit the command without saving any changes to the form. Also. regardless of the status of this toggle. When the toggle is set to Off. Steps 1. elements are automatically propagated when placed. automatic propagation is disabled. 298 . that affect the graphical display of the propagation. 2.

1 . All On — Turns on the display of all levels in the design. their corresponding one-line types.63 indicate whether or not each available level displays in the design. 299 . and key in a new value. All Off — Turns off the display of all levels in the design. the button appears to be depressed. but can select the level numbers (in combination with the Turn Levels On/Off toggle). or select the field. Levels — Indicate what levels display in the design. When a level has its display turned on. They also allow you to turn off or on the display of some or all available levels. select the appropriate level number. To turn on or off the display of a particular level. To turn on or off the display of a particular level. Set Active Levels 11. select a value from the list. and then select the desired level number displayed in the Systems/One Line list. Restore — Returns the display of levels in the selected view to its state prior to entering the Set Active Levels command. Turn Levels On/Off — This toggle enables or disables the display for the levels associated with the one-line types in your design file. You can only review the system and oneline information in these fields._ _______________ Set Active Levels This command displays the current active level(s) and allows you both to turn off any active levels and to activate new levels. To change the active view. Systems/One Line — Displays the available systems. All level display settings on the form are valid for whatever view is active. Runtime View — Displays the active view. select the Turn Levels On/Off toggle. and the levels on which they display.

Select the Set Active Levels command. 2. 3._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . The Levels form displays. Set up the form parameters to meet your requirements. — OR — Select Cancel (X) to exit the command without saving your changes. Select Confirm (√) to save your changes and to exit the command. 300 .February 2003 Graphics — Displays the level display for title block annotation in the design file. Steps 1.

Return to step 2. Return to step 2. or an RCP within a run is selected. Display Element Information 11._ _______________ Display Element Information This command displays raceway element characteristics. Select the Display Element Information command. Accept/reject Press <D> to accept the element and display that element’s information. — OR — Press <R> to exit the command. then run information is displayed. a fitting within a run. then the four key attributes associated with the fitting are displayed. a straight section. and coordinate location of ends and bends. 3. If either a one-line. Steps 1. This information includes: segment lengths. location and radius of each bend in the run. Identify Raceway element Select the element you want to review. — OR — Press <R> to reject the highlighted element and select another element. 2. Runtime If a fitting or an RCP that is at the termination of a run is selected. 301 .

February 2003 302 ._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide .

303 . Display Link — Displays the entity and mslink values of an identified element. you can highlight propagation errors in the design file. Utilities Commands Toggle Construction Display On/Off — Turns the display of construction class elements on or off._ _______________ 12. In addition. Highlight Propagation Errors — Identifies existing propagation errors in a design file. You can also use the commands to display the identification criteria of specified elements and the system and one-line type of an identified element. Highlight Element by ASID ID — Highlights an element with a given ASID ID. Utilities Commands 12. sector/word position) you provide. Display System and One-Line Type — Displays the associated system and one-line type of an identified element. Highlight Element by Sector/Word — Highlights elements with a given sector/word position. Display Element Type and ASID ID — Displays the element type and ASID ID of an identified element. Highlight Element by Link — Highlights an element with given entity and mslink values. Utilities Commands The Utilities commands highlight elements within your design file based on the identification criteria (ASID ID. Display Sector/Word Value — Displays the sector/word position of an identified element.

_ _______________
EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide - February 2003 Coordinate System — Activates the Design Volume Coordinate System or Plant Coordinate System associated with the design file, or shows the coordinate system currently active.

304

_ _______________
Using the Utilities Commands
When to Use These Commands
Once you have performed the necessary setups, you can use these commands throughout the design session.

Using the Utilities Commands

Before Using These Commands
12. Utilities
You must be familiar with precision input and its functions before using any of the Modify commands, because it is through the Precision Input form that you will enter values for the placement of points and for the location of raceway elements. For detailed information about precision input, see Precision Input Form, page 119 .

Group Workflow
In general, you will use those commands that display the attribute information of an element (Display ASID ID, for example) before the commands that highlight elements based on the attribute information you specify (Highlight Element by ASID ID, for example).

Operating Information
During the operating sequence for any of these commands, you can exit the command session by pressing <Esc> or by selecting Cancel (X) on the precision input form. Pressing <R> or selecting Reject on the precision input form will either reset the active command by one step or reject a highlighted element in the design file.

305

_ _______________
EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide - February 2003

Toggle Construction Display On/Off
This command turns On and Off the display for construction elements within each individual view in the design file. All non-displayed EE text elements are automatically placed in construction class. Therefore, this command allows you to view all the non-displayed EE elements as well as any other construction class elements.

Steps
1. Select the Toggle Construction Display On/Off command from the menu. The top of the prompt area displays all views in which the Toggle Construction Display On/Off command is toggled to On. 2. Select view Place a data point in the view in which you want the annotation display toggled On or Off. When construction display is On, the view number displays in a prompt. 3. Press <R> to exit the command. Once you have exited the command, select the Update View command to see the results of the display toggle.

306

_ _______________
Highlight Element by Sector/Word
This command highlights elements by a sector/word position that you specify. The position of the sector and word are compatible with EDG, and both are relative to 1. If the position is valid, the element highlights, but is not added to a working set. If the element is part of a complex element, the entire complex element highlights. The sector/word position must be the location of an element type 2 (cell), 3 (line), 4 (line string), 6 (shape), 7 (text node), or 17 (text).

Highlight Element by Sector/Word

Highlight Sector/Word With Filename
12. Utilities
You can specify a filename instead of the sector/word position to highlight an element. The file must contain the sector/word position of the element(s) you want to highlight. The file will display in a form on the screen, allowing you to select the sector/word value from the displayed file. If you do not specify a pathname for the file, the command searches for it in the <current_project>/rway/tmp directory.

Steps
1. 2. Select the Highlight Element By Sector/Word command. Key in sector and word value or file name Key in the sector and word value separated by a space. — OR — Key in the name of a file containing the sector and word values. Go to Step 4. 3. Point to view for window Identify the view in which you want the element to highlight. 4. Element highlighted The element with the specified sector and word highlights in the view you identified. Key in another sector/word combination to continue highlighting elements by sector and word. Press <Esc> to exit.

307

_ _______________
EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide - February 2003 5. Select sector and word value from form A File Display form displays after you enter the filename. Identify a line that contains a sector and word value. After you select a line, select Confirm (√) to accept the sector and word value in the line. Go to Step 6. — OR — Select the Return button to cancel the file display form. Return to Step 1. — OR — Select Cancel (X) to exit the command. 6. Point to view for window Identify the view where you want the element highlighted. 7. Element highlighted Point to continue/Reset to exit the file The element with the specified sector and word highlights in the view you identified. Press <D> to select another sector/word value from the File Display form. (When you press <D> the form redisplays.) Go to Step 4. — OR — Press <R> to exit the file you identified in Step 1. Return to Step 1.

308

_ _______________
Highlight Element by ASID ID

Highlight Element by ASID ID

This command highlights elements by an ASID identification (ID) that you specify. If the ASID ID you specify is valid, the raceway element highlights, but is not added to the working set.

Highlight ASID ID With Filename
You can specify a filename instead of the ASID ID to highlight an element. The file must contain the ASID ID of the element(s) you want to highlight. For example, to see where propagation errors exist in your design file, you can specify the file pro.err. The file will display in a form on the screen, allowing you to select the ASID ID from the displayed file. If you do not specify a pathname for a file, the command searches for it in the <current_project>/rway/tmp directory.

12. Utilities

Steps
1. Select the Highlight Element By Asid Id command. The Select hilite asid mode form displays.

2.

Select the appropriate Highlight by ASID ID button. The All Elements button highlights all raceway elements associated with the element having the given ASID ID: the element itself and all of its children. The Parent of Elements button highlights the raceway elements that are the parents of the element having the given ASID ID. The Children of Elements button highlights the raceway elements that are the children of the element having the given ASID ID. The Only the Element button highlights only the raceway element having the given ASID ID. — OR — Select Cancel to exit the command.

309

_ _______________
EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide - February 2003 3. Key in asid id or file name Key in the ASID ID. — OR — Key-in the filename of a file containing the ASID IDs. Go to step 6. — OR — Press <R> to select a different Highlight by ASID ID mode. Return to step 2. — OR — Press <Esc> to exit the command. Return to step 1. 4. Point to view for window Identify the view in which you want the elements highlighted. 5. Element highlighted The raceway element(s) associated with the specified ASID ID highlight in the view you identified. Key in another ASID ID to continue highlighting raceway elements. Continue highlighting the elements according to the specified Highlight by ASID ID mode. — OR — Press <Esc> to exit. — OR — Press <R> to select a different Highlight by ASID ID mode. Return to step 2. 6. Select asid id from form After you enter the filename, a file display form displays.

310

_ _______________
Select a line that contains an ASID ID. 7. — OR — Select the Return button to cancel the File Display form. Return to step 2. — OR — Select Cancel (X) to modify the highlight by asid mode. Return to step 1.

Highlight Element by ASID ID

After you select a line, select Confirm (√) to accept the ASID ID in the line. Go to step 8.

12. Utilities

8.

Point to view for window Identify the view in which you want the element(s) highlighted.

9.

Point to continue/Reset to exit the file The element(s) associated with the specified ASID ID highlight in the view you identified. Press <D> to select another ASID ID from the file display form. (When you press <D> the form redisplays.) Go to step 5. — OR — Press <R> to exit the file you identified in step 3. Return to step 3.

311

_ _______________
EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide - February 2003

Highlight Element by Link
This command highlights elements by given entity (table) and mslink values that you specify. If the entity and mslink are valid, the element highlights, but is not added to a working set. If the element is part of a complex element, the entire complex element highlights. The entity and mslink values must correspond with an element type 2 (cell), 3 (line), 4 (line string), 6 (shape), 7 (text node), or 17 (text).

Highlight Link With Filename
You can specify a filename instead of the entity and mslink combination to highlight an element. The file must contain the entity and mslink of the element(s) you want to highlight. The file will display in a form on the screen, allowing you to select the mslink from the displayed file. If you do not specify a pathname for the file, the command searches for it in the <current project>/rway/tmp directory.

Steps
1. 2. Select the Highlight Element By Link command. Key in entity and mslink (###:###) or filename Key in the entity and mslink values separated by a :. — OR — Key in the name of a file containing the entity and mslink values. Go to Step 4. 3. Point to view for window Identify the view in which you want the element to highlight. 4. Element highlighted The element with the specified entity and mslink values highlights in the view you identified. Key in another entity/mslink combination to continue highlighting elements by mslink. Press <Esc> or <R> to exit. 5. Select entity/mslink value from form A File Display form displays after you enter the filename. Identify a line that contains the entity and mslink values.

312

_ _______________
After you select a line, select Confirm (√) to accept the entity and mslink values in the line. Go to Step 6. — OR — Select the Return button to cancel the File Display form. Return to Step 1. — OR — Select Cancel (X) to exit the command. 6. Point to view for window

Highlight Element by Link

12. Utilities

Point to the view where you want the element highlighted. 7. Element highlighted Point to continue/Reset to exit the file The element with the specified entity and mslink values highlights in the view you identified. Press <D> to select more entity and mslink values from the file display form. (When you press <D> the form redisplays.) Go to Step 4. — OR — Press <R> to exit the file you identified in Step 1. Return to Step 1.

313

_ _______________
EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide - February 2003

Highlight Propagation Errors
This command highlights propagation errors in the design file.

Steps
1. Select the Highlight Propagation Errors command. The pro.err file displays.

2.

Review the errors listed on the form. To highlight a particular error(s) in the design file, select the error(s) from the list, and select Confirm (√). The propagation error(s) highlights in the design file, and the pro.err form redisplays. — OR — Exit the form without highlighting any propagation errors.

3.

Continue highlighting propagation errors. Go to step 2. — OR — Select Reset or Cancel (X) to exit the command.

314

_ _______________
Display Sector/Word Value
This command displays the sector and word position, in the MicroStation command window, of an identified element.

Display Sector/Word Value

Steps
1. 2. Select the Display Sector/Word command. Identify element Select the element to display the sector/word for, and accept it with a <D>. The sector and word for the selected element displays in the MicroStation command window. — OR — Press <R> to exit the command.

12. Utilities

315

_ _______________
EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide - February 2003

Display Element Type and ASID ID
This command displays the element type and the ASID identification (ID), in the MicroStation command window, of an identified element.

Steps
1. 2. Select the Display Element Type and ASID ID command. Identify element Select the element for which to display the ASID ID and accept it with <D>. The element type and ASID ID display in the MicroStation command window. — OR — Press <R> or <Esc> to exit the command.

316

mslink = <value> — OR — Press <R> or <Esc> to exit the command. 12. Display Link Steps 1. in the MicroStation command window. Utilities 317 . of an identified element. The entity and mslink values display in the MicroStation command window in the following format: Entity (table number) = <value>. 2. Select the Display Link command._ _______________ Display Link This command displays the entity (table) and mslink. Identify element Select the element you want to display the link for and accept it with <D>.

accept input. Before Using This Command You can enter all values for the placement of points through a precision input form. Using the form. 318 .February 2003 Display System and One-Line Type This command displays the system and one-line type associated with an element you identify. reset a command action. press <R> or select Reject on the precision input form. you can locate elements. To reset a command action by one step or to reject a highlighted element. see Precision Input Form. route one-lines. page 119. Steps 1. 2. At any point during this operating sequence. The identified element highlights. you can exit the command session either by pressing <Esc> or by selecting Cancel (X) on the precision input form. Identify Raceway element Identify an element in the design file. Select the Display System and One-Line Type command from the menu. For detailed information about precision input. — OR — Exit the command. along with the Print System and One-Line Type form. and exit a command._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . The precision input form displays. reject input. You must be familiar with precision input and its functions before using this command.

Go to step 2. and subsystems (if applicable). — OR — Exit the command. Raceway [element] Accept/reject Accept the highlighted element. Continue identifying elements in the design file. Utilities — OR — Reject the highlighted element. system. The system prompts you to identify another element. Go to step 2. Display System and One-Line Type 12. 4. 319 . The system prompts you to identify another element. The fields on the form fill with information about the element’s one-line type._ _______________ 3.

Activate Plant Coordinate System. Commands Activate Design Volume Coordinate System — Activates the Design Volume Coordinate System (DVCS) allowing you to define a local coordinate system for a particular model. you can select either the Activate Design Volume Coordinate System or Activate Plant Coordinate System commands. This becomes important when attaching reference models to the active model. Show Active Coordinate System — Displays the active coordinate system in the status field. Instead. Activate Plant Coordinate System — Activates the Plant Coordinate System (PCS). The Plant Coordinate System is common to all models and drawings in a project. 320 . When the coordinate system is switched between the PCS and DVCS. Activate Plant Coordinate System The Activate Plant Coordinate System command allows you to work in the Plant Coordinate System.February 2003 Active Coordinate System This palette provides the Active Design Volume Coordinate System. model graphics do not rotate to reflect the active coordinate system. If you desire to change the coordinate system. and Show Active Coordinate System commands. The Plant Coordinate System uses this global coordinate system to maintain the relationships among the various models._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . the coordinate system rotates when the active coordinate system is changed. Show Active Coordinate System The Show Active Coordinate System command displays the active coordinate system in the status field. Activate Design Volume Coordinate System The Activate Design Volume Coordinate System command allows you to work in the Design Volume Coordinate System. The Plant Coordinate System is common to all models and drawings in a project.

Database Commands Topics Load Database — Loads the project database with information generated from the EE Raceway drawing. 13. Database Commands The Database commands are used to load and run reports from the database. Database Rulecheck — Displays the design rule errors occurring in the design process. then selecting Palette from the resulting pull-down menu. 321 . The Database palette is activated by selecting Database from the EERWAY Command Menu Bar. Reports — Displays the information in an EE Raceway database._ _______________ 13.

Before Using These Commands Refer to the individual command descriptions for any requirements which may be necessary before using each command. Group Workflow You must load the database before you can run a report or rulecheck.February 2003 Using the Database Commands When to Use These Commands Use these command to run limited database commands while still in the graphic design session. Operating Information Because the operating sequence. instructions for using these commands are described in each individual command section. command key-ins. 322 ._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . and screen prompts vary for each command.

Database rcp_to_drw pds_north* rcp_to_drw pds_elev* rcp_to_sys ee_percent*** drop_point ee_dist_down_ol** drop_point ee_dist_to_rcp** one_line ee_ol_length** ol_to_sys ee_percent*** 323 . The orthogonal distance from the drop point origin to the RCP’s origin. Indicates what portion of the corresponding one-line is set aside for the corresponding system. The PDS elevation coordinate of the corresponding RCP’s origin. Load Database When you run the Load Database command on a design file that has been loaded previously into the database. 13. The total graphical length of the one-line in master units. using the Database Utilities option from the EE Project Menu Both a project and a reference schema must exist before running the Load Database process. Indicates what portion of the corresponding RCP is set aside for the corresponding system. This process calculates the following values: Table Name rcp_to_drw Column Name pds_east* Comments The PDS east coordinate of the corresponding RCP’s origin. and the orthogonal distance from the drop point origin to the closest point on the oneline. You must create a RIS schema on an existing relational database before loading. the command removes the occurrences of the previous load and completely reloads the design file._ _______________ Load Database This command loads a relational database with information generated by the EE Raceway design file. The PDS north coordinate of the corresponding RCP’s origin. All RCP’s and segments must have a tag number before using this command. The distance down the one-line to the point on the one-line closest to the drop point origin. Information in the design file is merged with information from the reference schema and loaded into the project schema.

** You can override the value for these columns by annotating the appropriate elements in the design file. The PDS east coordinate of the center point of the straight’s range. 324 . Indicates what portion of the corresponding straight is set aside for the corresponding system._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . The PDS east coordinate of the center point of the fitting’s range. The PDS north coordinate of the center point of the straight’s range. *** These values indicate the portion of a split raceway dedicated to each system within the split raceway. straight pds_north* straight pds_elev* str_to_sys ee_percent*** fitting pds_east* fitting pds_north* fitting pds_elev* fit_to_sys ee_percent*** * The Raceway bill of material by volume report relies on these columns to be in the fitting and straight tables.February 2003 straight straight ee_tl_length pds_east* The graphical length of the straight in master units. The columns are optional for Load Database. The PDS elevation coordinate of the center point of the fitting’s range. The PDS elevation coordinate of the center point of the straight’s range. Indicates what portion of the corresponding fitting is set aside for the corresponding system. The PDS north coordinate of the center point of the fitting’s range.

Messages Error occurred during process If any errors occur. and the process begins. The error file lists all the errors that occurred during processing. It lists everything that was loaded into the database. the message above displays. select Confirm (√). This file will be displayed automatically to the screen._ _______________ Steps 1. 325 . Process successfully completed If no errors occurred. When complete. the message above displays. The Load database screen displays. Database 3. Accept will load database. Steps 2. and is displayed automatically to the screen. The message file is created on every run of the process. Key in unique filenames in the Error file and Output file fields. Select Load database command. the process will return one of two messages (described below) to the screen. Enter error and output filenames. You must specify unique filenames to save the default files. When you are finished completing the input information. The default error and message files will be overwritten every time the process runs. or accept the displayed defaults. where you may review the errors. 13.

These reports report on the project and reference databases. allowing you to enter all input necessary to run the report.February 2003 Report This command accesses the standard EE Raceway reports. (No file extension is automatically appended to the name you key in. select the output file box and key in a new name. To change the output filename. Overview This section contains general information about running all EE Raceway reports. You can change the name of the output file or error file. an input screen displays. When you process a report. You must load the project database before running any reports.) 326 . See Reports. see Create Project for the directory structure.dat file (win32app\eerway\data)._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . The system manager can change the names of the reports that display in the listing area and can add additional reports by editing the report. page 545 for more detailed information about individual reports. All reports are kept in the /reports directory. Key in any information that is not supplied by default.

234 532 34 It should be understood that westing and southing coordinates must be the negative of their opposite directional coordinate. you are required to define a low and high range in PDS coordinates. These low and high ranges define a cubic volume from which the report is pulled. Select Confirm (√) to invoke the input form for the specified process._ _______________ If you want to save reports throughout a project. 3. If a new output file has the same name as an existing file. a westing coordinate of 100 should be keyed in as a value of -100 in the easting 327 . Select the report you want to run from the list. 13. A Special Note for Bill of Materials by Volume When running a Bill of Materials by Volume report. Any Raceway component extending outside the clipping volume defined by the High and Low Range Coordinates will not be included in the report output. For instance. Report Steps 1. You should give each report you want to save a unique name. the new file will overwrite that file. The coordinate values need to be in subunits and entered in the form field with a space between the coordinates: easting northing elevation For example. Select the Report command. Define the report input form as needed and select Confirm (√) to process the report. Database You can find the coordinates you want to use by using the active point coordinate display on the precision input form. 2. you should name the output files yourself. 4.

328 .February 2003 direction. and a southing coordinate of 3000 should be keyed in as a value of -3000 in the northing direction._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide .

or change that information according to your specifications. When you process a rule check. The name of the rule check report displays at the top. see Reports. For more detailed information about each rule check. You must load the project database before running any rule checks. Accept the default information that displays in the input fields. page 545 . The system manager can change the names of the reports or add new reports to the listing area by editing the rule_chk. an input screen displays. Database This section contains general information about running all EE Raceway rule checks._ _______________ Rule Checks Rule Checks This command accesses the standard EE Raceway Rule Checks. These rule checks are reports that identify violations of certain design rules by working on the project database. 329 .dat file in win32app\eerway\data. Overview 13.

Select the Rule command. You should give each report that you want to save a unique name. If a new output file has the same name as another file created previously. you should name the output files yourself. 330 .February 2003 If you want to save reports throughout a project. 2._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . 4. the new file will destroy the previously created file. 3. Steps 1. Define the input form as needed and select Confirm (√) to process the rule check report. Select Confirm (√) to invoke the input form for the specified process. Select the rule check report you want to run from the listing area.

based on the design filename you specify. (See Process in the section entitled EE Raceway Environment for information about running all processes.. Create Interference Envelope (default name) — Reads the design file and creates a data file that contains envelopes for input to Plant Design interference detection tasks./rway/dgn directory. Unload Design — Removes all the information associated with a particular drawing from the project database. Create Interference Envelope (given name) — Reads the design file and creates a data file. that contains envelopes for input to Plant Design interference detection tasks.) The individual EE Raceway processes are described in the following sections: Raceway Processes Load Database — Loads the project database with information generated from the EE Raceway drawing. You will run all EE Raceway processes from the Process menu found on the EE Raceway Drawing menu. with the name you specify. EERWAY Processes 331 . Unload Sheet — Removes all the information associated with a particular drawing from the project database._ _______________ 14. based on the internal sheet name you specify. 14. Cleanup Database — Removes any data from a project database that is not currently associated with a design in the project’s . Raceway Processes This chapter provides detailed descriptions of EE Raceway processes.

The distance down the one-line to the point on the one-line closest to the drop point origin. The PDS elevation coordinate of the corresponding RCP’s origin. 2. The PDS north coordinate of the corresponding RCP’s origin. This process calculates the following values: Table Name rcp_to_drw rcp_to_drw rcp_to_drw rcp_to_sys drop_point drop_point Column Name pds_east* pds_north* pds_elev* ee_percent*** ee_dist_down_ol** ee_dist_to_rcp** Comments The PDS east coordinate of the corresponding RCP’s origin. Indicates what portion of the corresponding RCP is set aside for the corresponding system. The orthogonal distance from the drop point origin to the RCP’s origin. Thus.February 2003 Load Database This process loads a relational database with information generated by an EERWAY design file. The PDS east coordinate of the center point of the straight’s range. You must create a RIS schema on an existing relational database before loading. 1. The PDS elevation coordinate of the center point of the straight’s range. you must annotate the drawing or model and enter the unique "SHEET" information. Both a project and a reference schema must exist before running the Load Database process. one_line ol_to_sys straight straight straight straight ee_ol_length** ee_percent*** ee_tl_length pds_east* pds_north* pds_elev* 332 . The total graphical length of the one-line in master units. Indicates what portion of the corresponding one-line is set aside for the corresponding system. The PDS north coordinate of the center point of the straight’s range. and the orthogonal distance from the drop point origin to the closest point on the oneline. Load database tracks drawing information based on the "Drawing" table of the project database. The graphical length of the straight in master units. using the Database Utilities option from the EE Project Menu. Information in the design file is merged with information from the reference schema and loaded into the project schema._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . using the Lock Model and the Annotate Model commands respectively.

The PDS north coordinate of the center point of the fitting’s range. and select Confirm (√). EERWAY Processes 2. ** You can override the value for these columns by annotating the appropriate elements in the design file. *** These values indicate the portion of a split raceway dedicated to each system within the split raceway. Select Load database from the Process menu. Indicates what portion of the corresponding fitting is set aside for the corresponding system. 333 . The PDS elevation coordinate of the center point of the fitting’s range. The columns are optional for Load Database. * The Raceway bill of material by volume report relies on these columns to be in the fitting and straight tables. 14._ _______________ str_to_sys fitting fitting fitting fit_to_sys ee_percent*** pds_east* pds_north* pds_elev* ee_percent*** Load Database Indicates what portion of the corresponding straight is set aside for the corresponding system. The Load database screen displays. Steps 1. The PDS east coordinate of the center point of the fitting’s range. Select a design file from the Drawing List or key in a design filename (you may specify multiple design files). Enter drawing name.

the message above displays. Background. Confirm your selections. When complete. This file will be displayed automatically to the screen. The current operating mode is displayed in a box at the lower right of the screen. or accept the displayed defaults. and the process begins. You may choose between Foreground.February 2003 3. 4. 5._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . Messages Error occurred during process If any errors occur. select Confirm (√). 334 . the message above displays. where you may review the errors. It lists everything that was loaded into the database. You can view both files using the Output option on the Utilities page. page 64 ). the process will return one of two messages (described below) to the screen. The error file lists all the errors that occurred during processing. Key in unique filenames in the Error file and Output file fields. Process successfully completed If no errors occurred. and is displayed automatically to the screen. Enter error and output filenames. When you are finished completing the input information. The default error and message files will be overwritten every time the process runs. Select the desired operating mode. You must specify unique filenames to save the default files. The message file is created on every run of the process. and Batch operating modes for most processes (see Process.

EERWAY Processes 335 ._ _______________ Batch File Option The load database process can be executed from a batch file.bat: Batch File Option SET SET SET SET SET SET MS=D:\WIN32APP\USTATION MS_EXE=D:\WIN32APP\USTATION EES_REFDB=CERT60_REF EE_SCHEMA=CERT60_PRJ EERD_MSGS=D:\WIN32APP\INGR\EERWAY\MSG\ EERD_TBLS=D:\WIN32APP\INGR\EERWAY\MSG\ 14.bat file to export the necessary Microstation and EERWAY environment variables to execute the load database process. Include the following EERWAY environment variables: EES_REFDB — RIS Schema name for reference database EE_SCHEMA — RIS Schema name for project database EERD_MSGS — Directory path for EERWAY message files EERD_TBLS — Directory path for EERWAY database table files Example of rway. Setup an rway.

Enter design name. You may change the defaults by selecting the fields and keying in new names. and select Confirm (√). unless you specify unique filenames in these fields. The default error and message filenames are displayed in appropriate fields. 336 . one-lines. The default error and message files will be overwritten every time the process is run. You must have loaded the database using the Load Database process before unloading._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . The Unload Design database screen displays. Key in unique filenames for the error and message files (or accept the default filenames). based on the design filename you specify. Select a design file from the Drawing List or key in a design filename (you may specify multiple design files). 3. The process will not modify anything in the reference database. Select Unload from the Process menu. Steps 1. nor will it delete information from user-defined tables. 2.February 2003 Unload Design This process unloads a design from a relational database. The Unload Design process deletes all records of raceway connect points (RCP). and three-lines that are part of the specified drawing.

Select the desired operating mode. 14. an ASCII file located in the current working directory. 5._ _______________ 4. an ASCII file located in the current working directory. You can view both files using the Output option on the Utilities page. The . background.msg file. You may choose between foreground. is created on every run of the process. Process successfully completed If no errors occurred. the message above displays. The current operating mode is displayed in a box at the lower right of the screen. and batch operating modes for most processes (see Process. When complete. EERWAY Processes 337 . The . lists all the errors that occurred during processing. Messages Error occurred during process If any errors occur. The file is automatically displayed to the screen for your review. page 64 ). and lists everything that was loaded into the database. and the process begins. the message above displays. the process will return one of two messages (described below) to the screen. The file is automatically displayed to the screen for your review. select Confirm (√). Confirm your selections.err file. Unload Design When you are finished completing the input information.

The process will not modify anything in the reference database. The drawing you are unloading must have a title block. 338 . and three-lines that are part of the specified drawing. The Unload Sheet database screen displays. If the sheet name contains blanks. You must have loaded the database using the Load Database process before unloading.February 2003 Unload Sheet This process unloads an EE Raceway drawing from a relational database._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . The Unload Sheet process deletes all records of raceway connect points (RCP). since the process keys off the sheet name in the title block. Steps 1. 3. Select Unload Sheet from the Process menu. Key in unique filenames for the error and message files (or accept the default filenames). it must be specified in single quotes. and the sheet name in the title block must match the database entry for that drawing. one-lines. based on the internal sheet name you specify. Key in a sheet name. and select Confirm (√). The default error and message filenames are displayed in appropriate fields. You may change the defaults by selecting the fields and keying in new names. 2.

4. the message above displays.msg file. Process successfully completed If no errors occurred. and batch operating modes for most processes (see Process. page 64 ). Confirm your selections. an ASCII file located in the current working directory. You may choose between foreground. lists all the errors that occurred during processing. Unload Sheet When you are finished completing the input information. EERWAY Processes You can view both files using the Output option on the Utilities page. When complete. and the process begins. Select the desired operating mode. 14. select Confirm (√). 339 . 5. and lists everything that was loaded into the database. background. The . The file is automatically displayed to the screen for your review. the message above displays. The . Messages Error occurred during process If any errors occur. The file is automatically displayed to the screen for your review. is created on every run of the process. the process will return one of two messages (described below) to the screen. The current operating mode is displayed in a box at the lower right of the screen. an ASCII file located in the current working directory.err file. unless you specify unique filenames in these fields._ _______________ The default error and message files will be overwritten every time the process is run.

and deletes anything from the database which is not connected to one of these drawings. This process will not unload records of customized tables in the database. Select Cleanup Database from the Process Menu. onelines. 340 . information may have been added through the Relational Database Management System (RDBMS) to test for a special case or to create customized tables. It then makes a list of all valid drawings. and three-lines that are part of the project database but which are not part of any raceway design file. Key in unique filenames in the Error file and Output file fields.February 2003 Cleanup Database This process removes information from the database that is not in any drawing currently loaded in the database. Enter error and output filenames. The process uses the filenames in the drawing table of all current drawings. The Cleanup Database process deletes all records of raceway connect points (RCP). For example. 2. but for some reason was not removed from the database. Steps 1. and select Confirm (√)._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . The Cleanup Database screen displays. It will delete from the database only that information which is not in any current drawing. This process also removes information on any EE Raceway drawing which has been deleted. This process will not delete drawings. or accept the displayed defaults.

341 . 4. 14. and Batch operating modes for most processes (see Process. Process successfully completed If no errors occurred. the process will return one of two messages (described below) to the screen. You may choose between Foreground.err file. The . the message above displays. lists all the errors that occurred during processing. Select the desired operating mode. and it includes a log of what was unloaded during processing._ _______________ The default error and message files will be overwritten every time the process runs. It will display mostly zeroes. The process begins. 3.msg file. Messages Error occurred during process If any errors occur. an ASCII file located in the current working directory. is created. select Confirm (√). The current operating mode is displayed in a box at the lower right of the screen. the message above displays. You must specify unique filenames to save the default files. page 64 ). an ASCII file located in the current working directory. Cleanup Database When you are finished completing the input information. When complete. Confirm your selections. Background. EERWAY Processes You can view either file using the Output option on the Utilities screen. The .

you may send the file to Plant Design software and run it against PDS interference detection.February 2003 Create Interference Envelope (default name) This process reads a design file and creates from that design a data file containing envelopes (spaces in which valid raceway shapes reside). the process writes the file to <current_project>. 2. Select Interference Detection from the Process menu and select the Confirm button (√). The Create Interference Detection Envelope form displays. The purpose of the entire process is to ensure that each raceway does not occupy the same space as other raceways. — OR — Select a design file from the Drawing List (use the Select All button to select all files from the list) or key in a design filename. Upon completion. 342 . Enter design name. After running the Interference Detection process in EE Raceway._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . Steps 1. 3.env>. Key in unique filenames for the error and output files (or accept the displayed default filenames).prj/rway/dgn/<filename. The default error and output files will be overwritten every time you run the process unless you specify unique filenames in the fields.

Messages Error occurred during process If any errors occur. lists all errors that occurred during the process. Otherwise. The process begins. background. Select the desired operating mode. Otherwise. The current operating mode displays in a box at the lower right of the screen. and batch operating modes (see the section entitled EE Raceway Environment for information about operating modes). The .prj/rway/tmp directory. You may choose between foreground. select the Confirm button (√). an ASCII file located in the <current_project>. EERWAY Processes 343 . you can view the file through the Output option on the Utilities screen. Create Interference Envelope (default name) When you finish completing the input information. 14. the process returns one of the two messages (described below) to the screen. an ASCII file located in the <current_project>._ _______________ 4.err file. the above message displays. This file displays immediately to the screen for your review. Confirm your selections. displays all processing information.msg file. The . the above message displays.prj/rway/tmp directory. This file displays immediately to the screen for your review. you can view the file through the Output option on the Utilities screen. Process successfully completed If no errors occurred. 5. When complete.

3. The Create Interference Detection Envelope form displays: 2. Key in a name for the envelope file. Select Interference Detection from the Process menu and select the Confirm button (√). Key in unique filenames for the error and output files (or accept the displayed default filenames). The purpose of the entire process is to ensure that each raceway does not occupy the same space as other raceways. — OR — Select a design file from the Drawing List (use the Select All button to select all files from the list) or key in a design filename. 344 . 4. The default error and output files will be overwritten every time you run the process unless you specify unique filenames in the fields.prj/rway/dgn/<filename.env>._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . Upon completion. Enter design name. you may send the file to Plant Design software and run it against PDS interference detection. the process writes the file to <current_project>. After running the Interference Detection process in EE Raceway.February 2003 Create Interference Envelope (given name) This process reads a design file and creates from that design a data file containing envelopes (spaces in which valid raceway shapes reside). Steps 1.

EERWAY Processes 345 ._ _______________ 5. You may choose between foreground.prj/rway/tmp directory. lists all errors that occurred during the process. Confirm your selections.prj/rway/tmp directory. background. an ASCII file located in the <current_project>. the process returns one of the two messages (described below) to the screen. This file displays immediately to the screen for your review. 6. an ASCII file located in the <current_project>. The current operating mode displays in a box at the lower right of the screen. Otherwise. Otherwise. you can view the file through the Output option on the Utilities screen. When complete. This file displays immediately to the screen for your review. The . Messages Error occurred during process If any errors occur. the above message displays.err file. you can view the file through the Output option on the Utilities screen. Create Interference Envelope (given name) When you finish completing the input information. The process begins. and batch operating modes (see the section entitled EE Raceway Environment for information about operating modes). 14. the above message displays.msg file. The . select the Confirm button (√). Process successfully completed If no errors occurred. Select the desired operating mode. displays all processing information.

February 2003 346 ._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide .

You should also consult the appendix in this guide entitled Eden Symbol Generation . If you want to place your Eden library in a different directory._ _______________ 15.EErc file in your home directory. then edit the . Extract EDEN Symbol From Library — Extracts a specified symbol from an Eden symbol library. Eden Processes 347 . page 59 . 15. The path to the symbol library called in many of the Eden processes is defined by the variable RWAY_EDEN_LIB. Eden Processes This chapter provides detailed descriptions of available Eden processes. Eden Processes For a general description of Eden symbol generation. see Electrical Engineer (EE) Raceway Environment. For information about accessing the processes. You will use these processes to compile Eden symbols. List EDEN User Functions — Lists Eden user functions in a selected Eden symbol library. Merge EDEN Symbol Libraries — Merges the contents of two Eden symbol libraries into one library. see the PDS Eden Interface Reference Guide. Extract EDEN User Function From Library — Extracts a specified user function from an Eden symbol library. then edit the to specify the appropriate directory. exporting RWAY_EDEN_LIB to specify the appropriate directory. The delivered default symbol source file path is <current_project>/rway/tmp. manipulate the Eden symbol library. and edit the Eden symbol file. and gives you the option of placing the symbol in an Eden symbol library. You will access the Eden processes from the EDEN option found on the EE Raceway Drawing Menu. The delivered default symbol library path is win32app\eerway\eden. Delete EDEN Symbol — Deletes an Eden symbol from the Eden symbol library. The path to the extracted symbol source file called in many of the Eden processes is defined by the variable RWAY_EDEN_SRC. List EDEN Symbol Library — Lists Eden symbols in a selected Eden symbol library. Each Eden process is described in a separate section. If you want to place your source symbol files in a different directory. as follows: Compile EDEN Symbol — Compiles an Eden symbol file. Compress EDEN Symbol Library — Compresses an Eden symbol library to remove unused space left by deleted symbols.

348 .February 2003 Edit EDEN Symbol File — Uses a standard ASCII editor to edit a specified symbol source file._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide .

Enter option — Displays the default compile option (-o). and key in a new option. For information about the path to the symbol source file. Enter library name — Displays the default Eden symbol library name. To change the displayed default library name. select the field. See Eden Symbol Generation. and key in a new filename. To enter the symbol source file. and key in a new filename. select the field. The -l option simply lists the compiled Eden symbol file. Error file — Displays the file to which error messages are sent. Compile EDEN Symbol Output file — Displays the file to which process messages are sent. To change the displayed option. and key in a filename. select the field. The -o option lists the compiled Eden symbol file. 15. To change the displayed output filename. see the description at the beginning of this chapter. page 513 for information about symbol file creation. see the description at the beginning of this chapter. Eden Processes Before Using This Command You must create an Eden symbol file. and key in a new library name. select the field. 349 . select the field._ _______________ Compile EDEN Symbol This process compiles an Eden symbol file. Enter symbol source file — Displays the name of the symbol source file to compile. To change the displayed error filename. and gives you the option of placing the compiled symbol in an Eden symbol library. For information about the path to the symbol library. and then adds the symbol to the specified library.

2. Set up the form parameters to meet your specifications. Select the desired operating mode. The file displays immediately to the screen for your review. The . You can choose between foreground. You can view either file on the screen. and the Eden process begins. and batch operating modes. Messages Error occurred during process If any errors occur.err file displays immediately to the screen for your review. When you have completed the input information. page 67 . The . select Confirm (√)._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide .err file. background. page 89. For information about operating modes.msg file. The current operating mode displays in a box at the lower right of the screen. 350 . the above message displays. 3. Process successfully completed If no errors occurred.February 2003 Steps 1. an ASCII file located in the current working directory. The Compile EDEN Symbol form displays. see Output. The . Select Compile EDEN Symbol from the list. an ASCII file located in the current working directory. 4. Confirm your selections. lists all the errors that occurred during processing. contains any output from the process. and select Confirm (√). see EDEN. the message above displays.

To enter the symbol name. and key in the name. For information about the path to the symbol library. select the field. Enter library name — Displays the default Eden symbol library name. To change the displayed error filename. 15. Error file — Displays the file to which error messages are sent. To change the displayed library name. Delete EDEN Symbol Output file — Displays the file to which process messages are sent. select the field._ _______________ Delete EDEN Symbol This process deletes an Eden symbol from the Eden symbol library. select the field. and key in a new filename. For information about the path to the symbol source file. see the description at the beginning of this chapter. and key in a new library name. select the field. To change the displayed output filename. Enter symbol name — Displays the name of the symbol you intend to delete from the library. and key in a new filename. Eden Processes 351 . see the description at the beginning of this chapter.

lists all the errors that occurred during processing. the above message displays. and select Confirm (√). see Output. 352 . 3.err file. Messages Error occurred during process If any errors occur. The Delete EDEN Symbol form displays. select Confirm (√). and the Eden process begins. The current operating mode displays in a box at the lower right of the screen. the message above displays. and batch operating modes. see EDEN. Set up the form parameters to meet your specifications. contains any output from the process. The . Process successfully completed If no errors occurred. an ASCII file located in the current working directory. The .February 2003 Steps 1. When you have completed the input information. The . You can view either file on the screen. Select Delete EDEN Symbol from the list. Select the desired operating mode. The file displays immediately to the screen for your review. For information about operating modes. an ASCII file located in the current working directory. background. 4. page 67 . Confirm your selections.msg file.err file displays immediately to the screen for your review. You can choose between foreground. 2. page 89._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide .

To change the displayed library name. Eden Processes 353 . For information about the path to the symbol library. List EDEN Symbol Library Output file — Displays the file to which process messages are sent. select the field. and key in a new library name. see the description at the beginning of this chapter. and key in a new filename. To change the displayed error filename._ _______________ List EDEN Symbol Library This process lists the Eden symbols in the selected Eden library. Error file — Displays the file to which error messages are sent. To change the displayed output filename. Enter library name — Displays the default Eden symbol library name. 15. select the field. select the field. and key in a new filename.

background. lists all the errors that occurred during processing. and the Eden process begins._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . see EDEN. The . Messages Error occurred during process If any errors occur. When you have completed the input information. page 67 .February 2003 Steps 1. Process successfully completed If no errors occurred. 4. page 89.err file displays immediately to the screen for your review. 354 . For information about operating modes. select Confirm (√). Set up the form parameters to meet you specifications. The file displays immediately to the screen for your review. The . You can view either file on the screen. and batch operating modes. The .err file. an ASCII file located in the current working directory. Confirm your selections. The List EDEN Symbol Library form displays. Select List EDEN Symbol Library from the list.msg file. an ASCII file located in the current working directory. and select Confirm (√). the message above displays. The current operating mode displays in a box at the lower right of the screen. the above message displays. You can choose between foreground. contains any output from the process. see Output. 2. 3. Select the desired operating mode.

2. 15. select the field. see EDEN. To change the displayed library name. and select Confirm (√). background. Select List EDEN Symbol Library from the list. For information about operating modes. and batch operating modes. select the field. Enter library name — Displays the default Eden symbol library name. To change the displayed error filename. The current operating mode displays in a box at the lower right of the screen. and key in a new filename. page 67 . You can choose between foreground. select the field. The List EDEN User Functions form displays. Error file — Displays the file to which error messages are sent._ _______________ List EDEN User Functions This process lists the Eden user functions in the selected Eden library. 3. and key in a new filename. To change the displayed output filename. For information about the path to the symbol library. see the description at the beginning of this chapter. and key in a new library name. Steps 1. Set up the form parameters to meet you specifications. Eden Processes Select the desired operating mode. List EDEN User Functions Output file — Displays the file to which process messages are sent. 355 .

page 89.err file. When you have completed the input information. select Confirm (√). Messages Error occurred during process If any errors occur._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . see Output. contains any output from the process. Confirm your selections. You can view either file on the screen.err file displays immediately to the screen for your review. and the list will display.February 2003 4. The . 356 . an ASCII file located in the current working directory. The . The file displays immediately to the screen for your review. Process successfully completed If no errors occurred. lists all the errors that occurred during processing.msg file. The . the above message displays. an ASCII file located in the current working directory. the message above displays.

The Merge EDEN Symbol Libraries form displays. To change the displayed output filename. and key in a new filename. Select Merge EDEN Symbol Libraries from the list. select the field. select the field. and key in a name. 15. Merge from library name — Displays the name of the symbol library whose contents you will merge with first library. For information about the path to the symbol library. Merge EDEN Symbol Libraries Output file — Displays the file to which process messages are sent. and select Confirm (√). and key in a name. 357 . select the field. To change the displayed error filename. Eden Processes Steps 1. 2. Set up the form parameters to meet your specifications._ _______________ Merge EDEN Symbol Libraries This process merges two Eden symbol libraries into one. To enter a library name. To enter a library name. For information about the path to the symbol library. and key in a new filename. select the field. see the description at the beginning of this chapter. Merge into library name — Displays the name of the symbol library into which you will merge the contents of a second library. see the description at the beginning of this chapter. Error file — Displays the file to which error messages are sent.

You can view either file on the screen. lists all the errors that occurred during processing.msg file. The file displays immediately to the screen for your review. the message above displays. background. see Output. an ASCII file located in the current working directory. 4. Select the desired operating mode. page 89.err file. select Confirm (√).February 2003 3. Messages Error occurred during process If any errors occur. Confirm your selections. When you have completed the input information. contains any output from the process._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . page 67 . an ASCII file located in the current working directory. 358 . For information about operating modes. You can choose between foreground. The . The . and batch operating modes. the above message displays. and the Eden process begins.err file displays immediately to the screen for your review. The . see EDEN. The current operating mode displays in a box at the lower right of the screen. Process successfully completed If no errors occurred.

see the description at the beginning of this chapter. Select the desired operating mode. Set up the form parameters to meet your specifications. background. select the field. 3. Select Compress EDEN Symbol Library from the list. and key in the name of the library you intend to compress. page 67 . select the field. To change the displayed library name. and key in a new filename. Eden Processes 2. Error file — Displays the file to which error messages are sent. 359 . For information about operating modes. Compress EDEN Symbol Library Output file — Displays the file to which process messages are sent._ _______________ Compress EDEN Symbol Library This process compresses the selected Eden symbol library. 15. The current operating mode displays in a box at the lower right of the screen. To change the displayed error filename. For information about the path to the symbol library. and batch operating modes. You can choose between foreground. see EDEN. select the field. and key in a new filename. Enter library name — Displays the default Eden symbol library name. The Compress EDEN Symbol Library form displays. Steps 1. and select Confirm (√). To change the displayed output filename. Compressing the library removes the unused space left by deleted symbols.

page 89. an ASCII file located in the current working directory. You can view either file on the screen. select Confirm (√). and the Eden process begins. see Output. the message above displays. Confirm your selections. Messages Error occurred during process If any errors occur. lists all the errors that occurred during processing. Process successfully completed If no errors occurred. an ASCII file located in the current working directory.err file. the above message displays. The . contains any output from the process. The .msg file.February 2003 4.err file displays immediately to the screen for your review. When you have completed the input information. The . The file displays immediately to the screen for your review._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . 360 .

The path to the extracted symbol source file is defined by the variable RWAY_EDEN_SRC. To change the displayed output filename. For information about the path to the symbol library. select the field. Enter library name — Displays the default Eden symbol library name. select the field. exporting RWAY_EDEN_SRC to define the appropriate directory. 15. The delivered default source symbol path is win32app\eerway\eden. To enter the symbol name. and key in a new filename. To change the displayed library name. and key in the name. and key in a new filename. and key in a new library name. If you want to store your source symbol files in another directory. The symbol is not deleted from the library when you extract it. select the field. select the field. Eden Processes 361 ._ _______________ Extract EDEN Symbol From Library This process extracts a symbol from the selected library. To change the displayed error filename. Extract EDEN Symbol From Library Output file — Displays the file to which process messages are sent. for example). Enter symbol name — Displays the name of the symbol you intend to extract from the library. then edit the .EErc file in win32app\eenuc. Error file — Displays the file to which error messages are sent. see the description at the beginning of this chapter. The extracted symbol is the form of an ASCII file that you can edit using a standard editor (vi or emacs.

the above message displays.err file. Process successfully completed If no errors occurred. the message above displays. The . page 89. select Confirm (√). see EDEN. The . an ASCII file located in the current working directory. You can view either file on the screen. background. and select Confirm (√). 3. For information about operating modes. You can choose between foreground. When you have completed the input information. The . 362 . The file displays immediately to the screen for your review. Messages Error occurred during process If any errors occur. The current operating mode displays in a box at the lower right of the screen. 4. lists all the errors that occurred during processing._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . The Extract EDEN Symbol From Library form displays.msg file. Select the desired operating mode. contains any output from the process. see Output. an ASCII file located in the current working directory. Select Extract EDEN Symbol From Library from the list. and batch operating modes. page 67 . 2.err file displays immediately to the screen for your review. Set up the form parameters to meet your specifications. Confirm your selections. and the Eden process begins.February 2003 Steps 1.

then edit the .EErc file in win32app\eenuc. and key in a new filename. select the field. 15. for example). see the description at the beginning of this chapter. Eden Processes 363 ._ _______________ Extract EDEN User Function From Library Extract EDEN User Function From Library This process extracts a user function from the selected library. The extracted user function is the form of an ASCII file that you can edit using a standard editor (vi or emacs. select the field. and key in a new filename. Enter library name — Displays the default Eden symbol library name. The user function is not deleted from the library when you extract it. The path to the extracted user function source file is defined by the variable RWAY_EDEN_SRC. Error file — Displays the file to which error messages are sent. If you want to store your source user function files in another directory. To change the displayed output filename. exporting RWAY_EDEN_SRC to define the appropriate directory. To enter the user function name. To change the displayed library name. Output file — Displays the file to which process messages are sent. select the field. The delivered default source user function path is win32app\eerway\eden. To change the displayed error filename. and key in the name. and key in a new library name. select the field. For information about the path to the symbol library. Enter symbol name — Displays the name of the user function you intend to extract from the library.

err file displays immediately to the screen for your review.February 2003 Steps 1. Set up the form parameters to meet your specifications. select Confirm (√). and batch operating modes._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . the message above displays. page 67 . and select Confirm (√). lists all the errors that occurred during processing. For information about operating modes. Messages Error occurred during process If any errors occur. The . The current operating mode displays in a box at the lower right of the screen. 4. Select Extract EDEN User Function From Library from the list. 2. 3. When you have completed the input information.err file. background. The . Confirm your selections. Select the desired operating mode. 364 . see EDEN. The Extract EDEN User Function From Library form displays. You can choose between foreground. an ASCII file located in the current working directory. and the Eden process begins.

Eden Processes 365 . contains any output from the process._ _______________ Process successfully completed If no errors occurred. The . an ASCII file located in the current working directory. see Output. the above message displays. page 89. Extract EDEN User Function From Library 15. The file displays immediately to the screen for your review.msg file. You can view either file on the screen.

To enter a symbol filename. Error file — Displays the file to which error messages are sent. Output file — Displays the file to which process messages are sent. select the field. Enter editor — Displays the name of the default ASCII editor (vi) that you will use to edit the Eden symbol file. and key in a new filename. and key in a new filename. To change the displayed output filename. select the field. select the field. see the description at the beginning of this chapter. 366 . select the field. For information about the path to the symbol source file. To change the displayed editor._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . To change the displayed error filename. It is only available on a graphics terminal.February 2003 Edit EDEN Symbol File This process allows you to edit a symbol source file using a standard ASCII editor. and key in a new standard ASCII editor name. and key in a symbol file name. Enter symbol file name — Displays the name of the symbol file you intend to edit.

background. The . When you have completed the input information. 3. The Edit EDEN Symbol File form displays: 2. 4. Select the desired operating mode. The . Set up the form parameters to meet your specifications. see Output. Eden Processes 367 . The .err file displays immediately to the screen for your review. Steps Messages Error occurred during process If any errors occur. Process successfully completed If no errors occurred. an ASCII file located in the current working directory. Select Edit EDEN Symbol File from the list. and the Eden process begins. The current operating mode displays in a box at the lower right of the screen. You can choose between foreground. and select Confirm (√). an ASCII file located in the current working directory. select Confirm (√). page 67 .msg file. contains any output from the process._ _______________ Steps 1.err file. You can view either file on the screen. and batch operating modes. lists all the errors that occurred during processing. 15. the message above displays. see EDEN. the above message displays. For information about operating modes. page 89. The file displays immediately to the screen for your review. Confirm your selections.

February 2003 368 ._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide .

Integrated Commands The Integrated Commands are common to EE Raceway and several other PDS modules. The Integrated Commands are only available when running EE Raceway inside PDS. providing greater interoperability among the various disciplines. not when running standalone EE Raceway. and display information about the reference models attached to the current model. These commands allow you to review an element’s attributes._ _______________ 16. then selecting Palette from the resulting pull-down menu. Integrated Commands 369 . 16. review the PDS clashes in a model. Integrated Commands The Integrated Commands palette is activated by selecting Integrated Commands from the EE Raceway File Menu Bar. create a window containing a specific element.

February 2003 Using the Integrated Commands When to Use These Commands Once you have performed the necessary setups._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . and must have an existing clash in the design area. you can use these commands throughout the design session. Operating Information See individual command descriptions for specific operating information. Reference PDS Model – There are no prerequisite conditions for using this command. Before Using These Commands Review PDS Attributes – You must have an existing component in the active model or in an attached PDS reference file. Window to Named PDS Item – You must have existing items in the active model or in an attached PDS reference file. 370 . Review PDS Clash – You must first have run IFC Clash Detection. Group Workflow There is no required or suggested sequence for using the commands in this group.

_ _______________ 16. Use the MicroStation Settings > View Attributes > Turn on construction command. Integrated Commands 371 . Review PDS Attributes Parameters Attribute Name – Lists the item’s attributes. Close – Exits the Review PDS Attributes dialog box. To view pipe centerlines (to review the line segments). Value – Displays the item’s attribute value that is defined in the database. you need to display construction type elements.1 Review PDS Attributes The Review PDS Attributes command displays the database attributes of a selected component. 16. Items being reviewed can be in the active model or in an attached PDS reference file.

then. The model to attach can be from any discipline and design area in the project.February 2003 16. 372 . Select the design area which contains the model you want to attach. You must click Show Attachments and select the reference model you want to detach before clicking Detach. — Attach by Model – Displays all models in the design area so you can select which model you want to attach._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . Select the discipline which contains the model you want to attach. — Attach by Area – Attaches all model in the selected design area. You must select a Discipline and a Design Area before you can select a reference model to attach. then. Attach – Attaches a reference model. This option only displays if you are attaching a structural model. Detach – Detaches the selected reference model. click Attach. Parameters Disciplines – Lists all disciplines. click Attach. Areas – Lists all design areas defined in the active project. Area/Model – Specifies whether to attach all models in a design area or an individual model.2 Reference PDS Model The Reference PDS Model command attaches and detaches models from the PDS project to the model as reference files. Propagated/Sparse – Specify whether you want to attach the sparse model or the corresponding propagated model.

_ _______________ Show Attachments – Displays all reference models attached to the active model. Integrated Commands 373 . Reference PDS Model 16. Exit – Exits the Reference Model command.

Pipe Tag. or Pipe Support Number — Equipment Attributes – Equipment Number or Equipment and Nozzle Number — PE HVAC Attributes – System ID or Item ID — Raceway Attributes – RCP Tag. Instrument Component Number. or Equipment ID Item Name – Specify the attribute value to search for. You can search for items in the active model or in attached PDS reference files. or Raceway. Line ID. Equipment. One Line Tag. — Piping Attributes – Line Number Label. You can select: Piping. Inspection Iso ID.3 Window to Named PDS Item The Window to Named PDS Item command zooms in on an item whose attribute you identify. Options Active Model / Reference Files – Specifies whether to look for the item in the active model or in the attached reference files. Drop Point Tag. Restore View of Model – Restores the view setting. Piping Component Number. 374 . PE HVAC._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . Discipline – Specifies the discipline of the item you are looking for. Depending on which discipline you select.February 2003 16. the item attributes you can search for changes.

select the field and key in a marker number. Clash Marker – Displays the number of the current clash. or. Review Unapproved Clash / Review Approved Clash – Specifies if you want to review approved or unapproved clashes. Integrated Commands 375 . Date – Displays the date and time the clashes were detected. Review PDS Clash Parameters Project Name – Displays the active project name._ _______________ 16. Approve False Clash – Approves the clash as a false clash in the Project Control Database. Unapprove Clash – Changes the status of the clash from approved to unapproved. Select a marker number with the left and right arrows. Clash Type – Displays the clash type. Approve Real Clash – Approves the clash as a real clash in the Project Control Database. 16.4 Review PDS Clash The Review PDS Clash command edits and reviews existing clashes and approves existing clashes. Design Area – Displays the active design area name.

February 2003 Item A – Displays the model name and the corresponding design area that has the one item of the clash. The descriptions of the clashing component display below the model name and design area. 376 . Highlight Clash – Highlights the clash in the selected view. Comments – Displays existing comments about the active clash. Select View – Zooms in and updates the selected view._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . Item B – Displays the model name and the corresponding design area that has the one item of the clash. You can also select the field and type in any additional information. Click Select View then select the view you want to update. The descriptions of the clashing component display below the model name and design area.

The likely reason for the error and the recovery are listed with the error message wherever this is possible. Active Raceway type not found Reason: There is no active one-line type defined in the design file. Asid <numeric value>. Recovery: Key in an acceptable command name. Recovery: Use the Set Active One-Line Type to set an active one-line type. fitting connected to invalid oneline! Reason: The fitting is connected to a one-line that failed to load. <string> connected to invalid system! Reason: The element belongs to a system that failed to load. Asid <numeric value>. Recovery: Make corrections so that the system loads without errors. Ambiguous Command Reason: The command name you keyed in is not unique. Recovery: Make corrections so that the system loads without errors. Asid <numeric value>. fitting connected to invalid system! Reason: The fitting is attached to a one-line or RCP belonging to a system that failed to load._ _______________ Appendix A: Error Messages Appendix A Error Messages A: Error Messages This appendix has an alphabetical listing of error messages you may receive when you are running EE Raceway Modeling. 377 . Recovery: Make corrections so that the one-line loads without errors.

then the given specification does not have that part defined in its part table. Recovery: Change element annotation. <string> has invalid codelist value! Reason: Element annotation does not match with entries in a codelist table. Recovery: Change element annotation. 378 . raceway connect point connected to invalid system! Reason: The RCP belongs to a system that failed to load.February 2003 Asid <numeric value>. Asid <numeric value>. Asid <numeric value>. part could not be found for fitting! Reason: A part matching the description of the fitting could not be found in the part table. Asid <numeric value>. Recovery: Review the fitting in the design. Recovery: Make corrections to the RCP so that it loads without errors. Asid <numeric value>. If the fitting is a specification-driven part. raceway connect point has invalid codelist value! Reason: Element annotation does not match with entries in a codelist table. Asid <numeric value>._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . <string> not on valid raceway connect point! Reason: The element is attached to an RCP that failed to load. straight connected to invalid oneline! Reason: The straight is attached to a one-line that failed to load. Recovery: Make corrections so that the one-line will load without errors. Recovery: Make corrections so that the system will load without errors.

Asid:<numeric value> <string> Reason: Display the element’s asid number along with a message. Recovery: Give the correct filename or access to the file. Recovery: None. when highlighting by sector and word. Recovery: Contact Intergraph support. Bad user data on raceway element Reason: Element has been corrupted. Bad user data in design file: cannot continue! Reason: Element has been corrupted._ _______________ Appendix A: Error Messages Asid <numeric value>. 379 . Recovery: Make corrections so that the system will load without errors. straight connected to invalid system! A: Error Messages Reason: The straight is attached to a one-line belonging to a system that failed to load. Cannot access filelist <string>! Reason: The file containing the filelist is not available. Recovery: Contact Intergraph support. Recovery: Be sure the database exists and that you have privilege. Cannot attach to database Reason: The database does not exist or you do not have privilege.

Invalid olt on oneline. Recovery: Verify that a valid one-line type is active.". call Intergraph support. Recovery: Either key in another name or delete the cell from the cell library so it may be recreated. If the problem persists. the name input already exists in the attached cell library. Cannot Override <string> Reason: The field or key cannot be overridden. Recovery: The program will restore the original text. Cannot Place Cross Section. "$"._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . Reason: There is a corrupt one-line segment or the system user element has been removed. Recovery: Key in another cell name. Cell <string> not found in library Reason: The cell name you keyed in does not exist in the cell library. If the problem persists. Cannot Place Cross Section. or ". digits. Recovery: Verify that a valid system is active. and replace the one-line. Cell exists in library: <string> Reason: During cell creation.February 2003 Cannot convert to RAD50: <<string>> Reason: A key-in contains characters that cannot be converted to RAD50. Invalid sys on oneline. call Intergraph support. Recovery: Key-in in only characters. Reason: There is a corrupt one-line segment or the one-line type user element has been removed. 380 . and replace the one-line.

_ _______________ Appendix A: Error Messages Color not in range 0 to 127 Reason: The input is not within the valid range for a color. Corrupt or no informational link on raceway element Reason: Element has been corrupted. Could not find alias file Reason: The alias file containing the command names and acceptable key. Recovery: Use the Delete command to remove the associated one-lines and then replace them. Could Not Read PDS Data Element Reason: The PDS user element is not found in the design file. Recovery: Enter a new value within the range 0 to 127. Recovery: Have the system manager place the file where it belongs. Recovery: Key in another column number for the given table. Recovery: None. A: Error Messages Column does not exist Reason: The given column number is greater than the number of columns in the table. Recovery: Contact Intergraph support. Could not find a cross section on one line Reason: Cross section was removed using the Delete command. Either the element was removed externally or this design file is not a Raceway or PDS design file. 381 .ins is not in the proper location.

February 2003 Could not find EE_CURPRJ. Could not get one line type from user data. 382 . Recovery: Replace the corrupted element or call Intergraph support. Could not open <string> Reason: No permission to open file or the file does not exist._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . Recovery: Replace the corrupted element or call Intergraph support. Recovery: Add entries to appropriate tables. Reason: Corrupt user data on one-line or RCP. Recovery: Export EE_CURPRJ = <current or project directory> Could not get defaults from reference db Reason: Entries for element not found in reference database. Recovery: Check the file permissions and the existence of the file. Could not open design file Reason: No permission to open file or the file does not exist. Reason: Environment variable EE_CURPRJ needs to be exported in order to run this process from the command line. Reason: Corrupt user data on one-line or RCP. Please export this variable. Could not get one line type part table from user data. Recovery: Check the file permissions and the existence of the file.

A: Error Messages Could not open logfile <string> Reason: A number of factors may result in this error. Could not read one-line user element Reason: Rmon could not read the one-line user element. Recovery: There are various recoveries. Recovery: Check the file permissions and the existence of the file. based on cause of error. Recovery: Check to see that the design file has a type 63 element and at least 7 blocks in it. Recovery: None. Could not read system user element Reason: Rmon could not read the system user element. Could not read the PDS 2 user element Reason: The Raceway design file was not created using a PDS or EE Raceway seed file. Could not read the PDS 1 user element Reason: The Raceway design file was not created using a PDS or EE Raceway seed file. Recovery: Check to see that the design file has a type 63 element and at least 7 blocks in it. 383 ._ _______________ Appendix A: Error Messages Could not open file <string> Reason: No permission to open file or the file does not exist. Recovery: None.

Could not write to TCB. 384 . Recovery: Make sure the key is correct. Defaults do not exist for <string> key = <string> Reason: An entry in the database does not exist for the specified key. The database is case-dependent. insert it into the reference database. Recovery: Key in a new key value. Could not retrieve codelist values Reason: The value placed in the codelist column does not appear in the codelist table. Recovery: Make sure you have write access to the design file._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . Design file <string> does not exist! Reason: The referenced design file was cannot be found. Could not retrieve specifications for key <string> Reason: You key in a value for the key to the secondary table. Cutback Error at oneline <numeric value> Reason: Problems occurred in calculating the cutback from the fitting at the end of a one-line. Recovery: Enter correct filename. Recovery: Check to see that the design file has a type 63 element and at least 7 blocks in it. status = <numeric value> Reason: The process tried to write a TCB variable to the design file. If the key does not exist. Recovery: Change the value to one that appears in the codelist table.February 2003 Could not read the Raceway user element Reason: Rmon could not read the Raceway user element.

Recovery: Create a drop point cell and/or enter the correct drop point cell name in the EE Raceway defaults form. Elbow Error with cutback <numeric value> at index <numeric value>. Elbow Error: acute angle at oneline index <numeric value>. Directory <string> not found Reason: A referenced directory cannot be found. Recovery: None. Recovery: Enter correct directory name. Recovery: Enter design filename. Reason: There was inadequate room to place fitting. change the spec._ _______________ Appendix A: Error Messages Design file name <string> too long Reason: The filename you specified exceeds 128 characters. Reason: Acute bends are not supported in this release. 385 . so it will go past the previous fitting or end of linestring. or replace the one-line so that it has enough room to create the fitting. Recovery: Modify the radius or extension of the fitting. Drop point cell ‘‘<string>’’ not found in library Reason: The drop point cell does not exist in the library. Recovery: Key in a filename with fewer than 128 characters. A: Error Messages Design filename required! Reason: No filename entered.

Reason: The cross sections were not placed with the same vertical orientation. Reason: Cross section cannot be propagated around bend without being skewed. Elbow Error: contradictory horizontal directions at index <numeric value>. Recovery: Rotate the cross section or place one-line again. Reason: The cross sections were not placed with the same horizontal orientation. Recovery: Try to rotate cross sections or place one-line again.February 2003 Elbow Error: contradictory heights at index <numeric value>. Elbow Error: skewed angle at oneline index <numeric value>. Reason: Height of the cross sections must be equal. Elbow Error: contradictory vertical directions at index <numeric value>._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . Recovery: Modify cross section dimensions. Recovery: Try to rotate cross sections or place one-line again. 386 . Elbow Error: contradictory widths at index <numeric value>. Recovery: Modify cross section dimensions. Reason: Widths of the cross sections must be equal.

err did not close properly. A: Error Messages Element not found Reason: There does not exist an element with the given sector/word or asid. Reason: File pro._ _______________ Appendix A: Error Messages Element has no parent Reason: The element with the given asid has no parent element.err file and the rway/tmp directory have read/write privileges. Error building user data Reason: Could not build user data. Recovery: Enter a new asid number. Propagation status may not be recorded. Recovery: Change access to design file. Recovery: Exit the command and retry. Error could not write user element! Reason: No write access to design file. Error could not write to design file! Reason: No write access to design file. Recovery: Enter a new value. Recovery: Change access to design file. Error closing propagation log file. 387 . Recovery: Make sure the pro.

Error getting values from reference for table <string>! Reason: Values for table not found in reference database. Error getting mslinks for tables! Reason: Tables missing in project database. Recovery: Add entries to reference database. Recovery: Delete and replace element in design file. 388 . Recovery: Add privilege to database. Error getting information from <string> table! Reason: Table not found in schema._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . Recovery: Add table to schema or change schema.February 2003 Error getting annotation information for element! Reason: Element in design file is corrupt. Recovery: Add appropriate tables to project database. Error getting sheet name from design file! Reason: Title block not found or not annotated. Recovery: Place or annotate title block. Error getting column names from reference for table <string>! Reason: No privilege.

Error initializing unique table! Reason: ee_unique table missing from the reference database.EErc file. 389 . Recovery: Add privilege to database. Recovery: Correct entry. Reason: Could not open Eden symbol library. Recovery: Make sure that RWAY_EDEN_LIB and EDEN_LIB are set up properly in your ._ _______________ Appendix A: Error Messages Error in graphic bang placement. Recovery: Add mscodelist table to reference table. Recovery: Call Intergraph support. Recovery: Add the ee_unique table to the reference database. A: Error Messages Error initializing eden library ‘‘<string>’’. Error initializing validity table! Reason: Mscodelist table not found. Error loading drawing! Reason: No privilege for operation. Reason: Internal error. Error invalid column name in unique table! Reason: Incorrect entry in ee_unique table.

Error loading one-lines! Reason: No privilege for operation. 390 . Recovery: Add privilege to database. Recovery: Add privilege to database. Error loading systems! Reason: No privilege for operation. Recovery: Add privilege to database._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . Recovery: Add privilege to database. Error loading raceway connect points! Reason: No privilege for operation. Recovery: Add privilege to the database. Recovery: Add privilege to database. Error loading straights! Reason: No privilege for operation. Error loading fittings! Reason: No privilege for operation.February 2003 Error loading drop point! Reason: No privilege for this operation.

Error opening design file <string>. Error opening database! Reason: Schema not found. Recovery: Add schema or enter correct schema name. Recovery: Change annotation of element. Error No Placepoints or No Elements. Error merging annotation from design file! Reason: Element annotation columns do not match columns in project database. A: Error Messages Error marking elements for deletion! Reason: ee_to_drw column missing a table. and one element. Recovery: Add columns and try again. Recovery: Modify the Eden symbol. 391 . Recovery: Refer to Microstation documentation for recovery. Reason: The Eden symbol definition must contain at least one placepoint. one datum point. Recovery: Add privilege to the database._ _______________ Appendix A: Error Messages Error loading to equipment! Reason: No privilege for this operation. ustn returned status of <numeric value>! Reason: Microstation could not open specified design file.

Error parsing cross section Reason: An error occurred while parsing a cross section. Recovery: Add schema to database or change schema name.February 2003 Error opening project database! Reason: Schema not found. 392 . Recovery: Run the Create Database process with the rwayref. Recovery: Delete the one-line containing the RCP and place it again. Error parsing RCP Reason: An error occurred while parsing a raceway connect point (RCP). Recovery: Delete the one-line containing the RCP and place it again. Recovery: Delete the one-line and place it again. Error opening reference database! Reason: Schema not found._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide .sql file. Error parsing one-line Reason: An error occurred while parsing a one-line. Error querying ref db for mscatalog Reason: The mscatalog table does not exist or there is no connect permission. Recovery: Add schema to database or change EES_REFDB.

Recovery: Call Intergraph support._ _______________ Appendix A: Error Messages Error querying ref db for mscodelist Reason: The mscodelist table does not exist or there is no connect permission. Recovery: Call Intergraph support. Error reading database column names! Reason: No access to column names. Error reading database table names! Reason: Table name in mscatalog table invalid. Recovery: Change file list name or protection on file list. 393 . A: Error Messages Error reading TCB of design file! Reason: TCB corrupted. Recovery: Correct entry in mscatalog. Error reading file list <string>! Reason: No access to read file list.sql file. Error reading user element of design file! Reason: User element missing or corrupt in design file. Recovery: Run the Create Database process with the rwayref. Recovery: Add privileges to database.

Recovery: Enter correct sheet name. 394 . Recovery: Return to the environment and make sure you are using the correct reference schema.Design file may be corrupted Reason: Could not save the symbology to the design file. Recovery: Edit the sheet name. Error spawning server Reason: Could not open reference schema. Recovery: Add privilege.February 2003 Error saving symbology ._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . Error unloading Sheet! Reason: Sheet not found. Recovery: Add privilege to database. Recovery: Call Intergraph support. Error unloading drawing! Reason: No privilege to delete from database. Error sheet name cannot be duplicated! Reason: A drawing with the given sheet name already exists in the database. The sheet name must be unique within the database. Error unloading connect points! Reason: No privilege to delete from database.

The process creates a zero-length envelope. Recovery: Fix other errors. Errors existed during unload Reason: Errors in other procedures. Field may not contain an empty value Reason: Field cannot be left blank. Reason: Internal error. Recovery: Add privilege to database. Recovery: Key in a value. Fatal error! Vector length was negative. Recovery: None. 395 ._ _______________ Appendix A: Error Messages Error starting or stopping graphic bang. Reason: Interference detection found an item of size = 0 (length). A: Error Messages Error updating row in <string> table! Reason: No privilege to write to database. Recovery: Read previous error messages to determine cause. Recovery: Call Intergraph support. Errors occurred during interference detection process! Reason: Fatal error occurred during process.

Fitting Orientation Error at RCP asid <numeric value>. 396 . For example. Fitting Error: contradicting at RCP asid <numeric value>. Reason: There was inadequate room to place fitting. Recovery: Try rotating cross sections or replacing the one-lines._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . at a cross. Fitting Error: Illegal angle at RCP asid <numeric value>. extension or transition of the fitting. Recovery: Write over the existing file or attach new file to existing file. Fitting Cutback Error at RCP asid <numeric value>. Reason: The cross sections cannot be propagated at the fitting without being skewed. all four one-lines must be at right angles to each other. Reason: Heights of cross sections are inconsistent. Recovery: Modify cross section dimensions. Fitting Error: contradicting widths at RCP asid <numeric value>. or replace the one-line so that it has enough room to create the fitting. Reason: Widths of cross sections are inconsistent and no reducing fitting is allowed in this case. Reason: An illegal angle exists. change the spec. overwrite or append? Reason: The specified file already exists. so it will go past the previous fitting or linestring. Recovery: Modify the radius. Recovery: Replace the one-line that forms the illegal angle.February 2003 File <string> exists. Recovery: Modify cross section dimensions.

Form error could not find form file <string> Reason: The referenced form file could not be found in the path defined by EE_FORM_PATH. Form could not be displayed Reason: Once created. Form creation error Reason: The software could not create a form. Recovery: Call Intergraph support. Recovery: Fatal error. Try to exit and re-enter the software. A: Error Messages Form could not be created Reason: A form could not be created by the software. Recovery: Enter a new value within the range 0 to 255. Form error reading form file <string> Reason: I-Forms could not read the referenced form file. a form could not be displayed by the software. Recovery: Make sure the referenced form file exists in the path defined by EE_FORM_PATH which is defined in the product. Possible memory allocation problem. Recovery: Make sure the referenced form file exists in the path defined by EE_FORM_PATH which is defined in the product._ _______________ Appendix A: Error Messages Font not in range 0 to 255 Reason: The input was not within valid range for a font. 397 . Recovery: Exit and re-enter the product.

Recovery: Remove the function name from the EERWAY_LOCKED_OUT variable in the . Invalid annotation type Reason: Annotation of the wrong type was found inside the fence block annotation when trying to close a cell. Recovery: Delete the highlighted element or move it outside the fence area. Recovery: Fix problem as specified by earlier error messages.February 2003 Forms environment not initialized Reason: Fatal error. 398 . Recovery: Enter a value within the range of -2147483648 to 2147483647. Integer not in range -32768 to 32767: <string> Reason: The value entered exceeds the range or the input is corrupted./config/assign file. Integer not in range -2147483648 to 2147483647: <string> Reason: The value entered exceeds the range or the input is corrupted. Function locked out: no permission Reason: This function has been disallowed by the system manager._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . Interference Detection initialization error! Reason: Could not open design filelist or read the design file. Graphic group not found Reason: No elements found in the design file with the given graphic group. Recovery: Exit and reenter the product. Recovery: Enter a value within the range of -32768 to 32767.

Recovery: Change the criteria on the Manual Placement form or modify the symbol. Place Title Block must be given a title block cell. For example. Reason: Could not create Eden symbol with the given criteria. Invalid drop point cell: ‘‘<string>’’ Reason: The cell is not a valid drop point. Reason: The symbolname is blank. Invalid Eden Symbolname ’<string>’. Invalid Eden Processor Input. <numeric value>. Recovery: Key in a cell of the type the command is expecting._ _______________ Appendix A: Error Messages Invalid asid id Reason: An element cannot be found in the design file with the given asid id. Invalid Connection Reason: The identified RCP has a higher priority level than the identified one-line. 399 . Recovery: Make sure the priority level of the identified RCP is less than or equal to the priority level of the one-line. Recovery: Key in another asid id. Recovery: Modify the reference database to contain a symbolname for each part. A: Error Messages Invalid cell: <string> Reason: The given cell is not the type the command expected. Recovery: Create a valid drop point cell through cell creation.

Invalid integer: <string> Reason: The value entered is not a valid integer. quantity must be an integer greater than 0. Reason: The height or width is less than or equal to zero. Recovery: Key in another value. Recovery: Select another graphic group number. click on the REMOVE button to delete. Recovery: Modify reference database height/width for the active specification. If it is a cable entry. Recovery: Make the field either all text or all EDF. Invalid key in . Recovery: Key in a new value greater than 0. 400 . Invalid input Reason: You entered an incorrect value.February 2003 Invalid graphic group number Reason: The graphic group number is outside the valid range._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . For example. Recovery: Enter an integer value. Invalid mix of EDF and text: <string> Reason: Field consists of text and Enter Data Fields for the same string.quantity can not be set to 0 Reason: The value you entered is not a valid input. Invalid height/width for cross section type <string>.

Only two one-lines can be attached Reason: The RCP has more or fewer than two one-lines attached. Recovery: Re-enter a valid real number. Invalid real number: <string> Reason: The value entered must contain a decimal with a preceding number. Recovery: Turn Part Verification off OR add the elbow or straight to the database. Invalid response Reason: You entered an invalid response to a system prompt. Invalid RCP . Recovery: You can only remove an RCP with exactly two one-lines attached. Invalid RCP – No one-lines attached Reason: There are no one-lines associated with the raceway connect point (RCP). vertex <numeric value>._ _______________ Appendix A: Error Messages Invalid Part Found at RCP asid <numeric value>. Recovery: Enter a valid response. Reason: The elbow or straight at the one-line cannot be verified with the database. Recovery: Delete the RCP and place the one-line again. A: Error Messages Invalid Part Found at oneline asid <numeric value>. 401 . Reason: The fitting at the RCP cannot be verified with the database. Recovery: Turn Part Verification off OR add the fitting to the database.

Level not in range 1 to 63 Reason: The input was not within the valid range for a level. Invalid title block Reason: Not a valid title block. Recovery: Key in another title block cell name. Invalid ulink on element Reason: Not a valid ulink for the element. Recovery: Create a valid equipment pointer through cell creation. Recovery: Enter another entity/mslink. Invalid equipment pointer cell: ‘‘<string>’’ Reason: The cell is not a valid equipment pointer. Invalid sector/word values Reason: An element could not be found at the given sector/word location in the design file. Recovery: Delete the element and place it again or recreate the element. Recovery: Enter another sector/word value.February 2003 Invalid/No ris link on element Reason: An element with the given entity/mslink could not be found in the design file._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . Recovery: Enter a new value within the range of 1 to 63. 402 .

_ _______________ Appendix A: Error Messages Load initialization error! Reason: Some other initialization error procedure failed. Reason: Invalid text justification entered. Multiple annotation for column <numeric value> Reason: Only one annotation element per column is allowed. Recovery: Terminate before exceeding the max. Recovery: Delete all but one of the highlighted elements. CB. . CT. and place the element or RCP. Recovery: Delete the highlighted area. Recovery: Enter LT. LC. CC... More than one title block found! Reason: More than one title block exists in the design file. RT. Recovery: Delete all but one title block. Recovery: Fix other problems. Must be LT. or RB. LC. LB. A: Error Messages Max run angle = <numeric value>. Mismatched annotation Reason: Annotation was found that has no parent inside of the fence area. RC.or RB in the justification field. 403 . current = <numeric value> Reason: The sum of all the angles in the current one-line exceeds the maximum as defined in the one-line type.

404 . Recovery: Define an active one-line type using the Set Active One-Line Type command. Recovery: Key in a cell name to close or exit the command._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . No active system defined Reason: You did not define an active system in the design file. No active one line type defined Reason: You did not define an active one-line type in the design file.February 2003 Must enter cell name to close Reason: You tried to close a cell without keying in a name. No active group defined Reason: The selected group operation requires that you define an active group. Recovery: Specify a group to be active. No cell library attached Reason: A cell library is not attached to the design file.cel). Recovery: Attach a cell library (rc=celllibraryname. Recovery: Add the EE Raceway tables to the database. No columns available for annotation Reason: The database does not contain the EE Raceway database tables. Recovery: Define an active system using the Set Active System command.

Recovery: Modify the reference database to include A. C for the cross section type. B. No memory available! Recovery: Exit the process and re-enter and/or reboot the workstation. Recovery: Exit completely and re-enter the product. A: Error Messages No elements in fence Reason: The defined fence does not contain a valid element within its borders. Recovery: Redefine the fence to include a valid element. Recovery: Key in another name._ _______________ Appendix A: Error Messages No Duplicate Group Name Allowed Reason: The new group name matches the name of an existing group. Reason: The cross section must be of type A. Recovery: Press the Override button and key in the value again. 405 . No raceway one-line type defined Reason: You must have at least one one-line type defined from the reference database in the design file. Recovery: Define a one-line type from the reference database using the Define One-Line Type command. No memory available for form Reason: The forms software could not allocate enough memory for creation of the form. No or Illegal Cross section type <string>. B. or C in the active specification. No overrides allowed without override button on Reason: The Override button is not depressed.

No valid spec keys exist for this oneline type Reason: Problem retrieving the active specification. Recovery: Populate the database. No valid elements in group Reason: The active group does not contain any valid elements for the specified group manipulation command. No valid spec exist for this oneline type Reason: No specifications exist in the database for this one-line type. No valid dimensions exist for this oneline type Reason: The database has no parts for this specification of the one-line type. Recovery: Populate the database with parts. Recovery: Make sure the active specification is in the database through Define Raceway Parameters. 406 ._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . Recovery: Define a system from the reference database using the Define System command. Recovery: Add read/write permissions to file.February 2003 No read/write access to file <string> Reason: No permission to read and write to the specified file. No systems defined in this design file Reason: You must have at least one system defined from the reference database in the design file. Recovery: Populate the database with parts. No valid parts exist for this oneline type Reason: The database has no parts for this specification of the one-line type.

Recovery: Populate the database. One-lines do not contain same systems Recovery: Identify one-lines that contain the same systems. No write access to cell library Reason: The attached cell library is read only. Recovery: The design file must be created using the EE Raceway seed file. Not an EE RACEWAY design file Reason: The design file was not seeded with the EE Raceway seed file. A: Error Messages No valid special parts exist for this table Reason: There are no special parts defined in the active table. Recovery: Attach a cell library that has read/write permissions or assign write permission to the current cell library._ _______________ Appendix A: Error Messages No valid special part tables exist Reason: There are no special parts tables in the database. 407 . Recovery: Populate the database. Recovery: Insert the rows into the codelist table that corresponds to the column. One-line is a member of a different system Recovery: Change the active systems to that of the identified one-line. No values found in the codelist Reason: The codelist table contains no rows.

Reason: One-line type user data corrupt on one-line OR the system symbology user elements have been corrupted. Recovery: Export the variable EE_SCHEMA._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . Recovery: Modify the Eden symbol. Reason: This identifies which one-line is being projected. Projecting oneline with asid <numeric value>. Reason: The straight must be place with a length greater than 0. Recovery: None. Placing Straight Section with No Length. Recovery: Give length in the Length field on the Manual Placement form. 408 . Recovery: Select another option. Problem with shared memory! Reason: Internal error. Placepoints/Datumpoints are not defined properly.February 2003 Option not allowed Reason: The selected option is not allowed. Recovery: Call Intergraph support. Problem retrieving symbology from one line type element. Project schema not defined Reason: EE_SCHEMA has not been exported. Reason: Eden symbol must have at least one datumpoint and at least one placepoint defined.

Schema name required Reason: No schema name entered. Recovery: Specify new find criteria. Recovery: Identify one of these elements. Recovery: Enter schema name. Recovery: Create the appropriate table. Recovery: Export EES_REFDB. Reference schema table missing required columns Reason: A required column in the table for the element you are annotating is NOT in the table or in the mscolumns table. three-line. no rows found fitting the given criteria Reason: Could not find rows in the database fitting the specified find criteria. Reference schema name required! Reason: EES_REFDB has not been exported. RCP)._ _______________ Appendix A: Error Messages Raceway element not found Reason: Unable to locate a valid raceway element (one-line. A: Error Messages Raceway title block not found Reason: Unable to locate a title block in the design file. Recovery: Place a title block in the design file. title block. Select failed. The required columns’ names are prefixed with "ee_". 409 .

February 2003 Sheet Name is required Reason: No sheet name entered. Recovery: Add the missing entry into the mscatalog table by loading the mscat. Symbol file not found: <string> Reason: The symbol file EE_SYM_FILE could not be found in the symbol path EE_SYM_PATH. Recovery: Make sure EE_SYM_FILE and EE_SYM_PATH are defined in the directory. Recovery: Change sheet name. Sheet not found in database! Reason: Sheet name not in drawing table. Recovery: Identify a valid text element. 410 . Recovery: Enter a new value within the range 0 to 7. Recovery: Enter sheet name._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . Table number <numeric value> not in mscatalog Reason: The specified table number / table name entry does not exist in the reference database. Style not in range 0 to 7 Reason: The input was not within the valid range for style. Text element not found Reason: A text element could not be located.unl file or inserting a row through SQL.

Recovery: None. cannot be edited. A: Error Messages Title block placed . Rebuild cell so that the complex shape meets a line or surface at 90 degrees. Too many one-lines at RCP <numeric value> Reason: Cannot propagate with this many one lines. The system cannot calculate the height and direction of projection of this complex shape. snap to the angle. 411 . Recovery: Add privileges to the database.Some fields review only Reason: Some fields are locked once you place the title block and. Recovery: None Unload initialization error! Reason: No privilege to read table or column names. Recovery: Enter a new value greater than zero. To ensure a measure of 90 degrees. Warning Cannot calculate envelope for non-planar complex shape with Asid = <numeric value> Reason: Found a cell containing a complex shape which does not meet any lines or surfaces at a 90 degree angle. Truncated <numeric value> characters Reason: The number of characters allowed in the field has been exceeded by <numeric value> characters._ _______________ Appendix A: Error Messages The value must be greater than zero Reason: The width must be greater than zero. therefore. Recovery: Place a manual fitting. Recovery: Highlight the cell with that Asid and look to see if an envelope needs to be built for the complex shape in that cell.

Warning Drawing not valid type! Reason: The title block annotation does not match the annotation type table. not in project! Reason: The referenced column was found in the reference not the project database. Recovery: Make sure EE_FORM_PATH is defined in the . Recovery: Accept or reject the one-line type selection form._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide .February 2003 Warning Column <string> found in reference. you can add a column to the project database and copy the values over. Warning invalid form path: <string> Reason: The form path EE_FORM_PATH could not be found. Recovery: Modify the specification or parts through annotation OR modify or replace the one-lines. 412 . Warning invalid symbol path: <string> Reason: The symbol path EE_SYM_PATH could not be found. Warning must accept/reject One Line Type selection Reason: You must accept/reject the one-line type selection form before performing a group operation. Recovery: If necessary./config/assign file and that its value is a full path./config/assign file and that its value is a full path. Recovery: Change the title block annotation. Warning Fittings at oneline <numeric value> overlap Reason: Fittings at either end of the one-line overlap. Recovery: Make sure EE_SYM_PATH is defined in the .

you must key in a group name. Recovery: Enter a new value within the range of 0 to 31._ _______________ Appendix A: Error Messages Warning must accept/reject System selection Reason: You must accept/reject the system selection form before performing a group operation. 413 . Recovery: Accept or reject the system selection form. Weight not in range 0 to 31 Reason: The input was not in the valid range for weight. A: Error Messages Warning must keyin a group name Reason: When performing the selected group operation. Recovery: Key in the desired group name.

_ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide .February 2003 414 .

and printers in the EE Raceway Environment. Appendix D: Specification describes vendor specifications and how to prepare them.cmds file. B: System/App Mgmt. Appendix H: alias. Also included in this appendix are two descriptions and printouts related to customizing the alias. It attaches the panel menu. Important new procedures related to RIS and the databases are described in this section. Appendix J: Reports contains detailed descriptions of the standard and rule checks reports delivered with the product. You will need this appendix to locate files that you want to modify. Appendix L: RIS Schema Definition File describes the file that maintains all schema definitions known to RIS. Appendix G: Customizing Environment Files explains how to modify the files that list the processes. Appendix E: Eden Symbol Generation describes generation of Eden symbols and provides a sample symbol processor file.cmd file contains the alias. Appendix K: RIS Schema Manager contains a detailed description of the RIS Schema Manager utility. 415 ._ _______________ Appendix B: System/Application Manager Information Appendix B System/Application Manager Information This appendix and the following appendices outline the responsibilities for the EE Raceway system or application manager. It identifies the files that can be modified and describes some important files. rule checks. reports. Appendix F: EE File Structure contains the file structure for both EE Nucleus and EE Raceway. This file is run automatically when you enter EE Raceway.cmds contains the rway. You can modify or disable this function through the file. The key-in names for commands can be modified by editing these files. Included in these appendices are important references and procedures needed to prepare and customize the EE Raceway product: Appendix C: EE Databases describes the EE databases and contains schema descriptions for both the reference and project databases.cmd file as it is delivered. Appendix I: rway.cmd file and customizing menus.

_ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . 416 .February 2003 Appendix M: EE Manager contains a description of the EE Manager utility and its Edit Database process. Appendix N: EE Configure describes the EE environment variables and how to configure them.

EErc file (win32app\eenuc) to a different form name. Add the <one-line_type>_spec and <one-line_type>_part tables to the reference database. Adding a One-Line Type This section outlines the basic steps necessary to add a new one-line type to the reference database.cmds (all involve modifying existing text files using an editor). set the variable EE_PIFORM in the . Precision Input Form B: System/App Mgmt.unl files and database tables. ee_dimension_2 real. Several designs of the precision input form are delivered with EE Raceway. 417 . consult the appendix entitled EE Databases._ _______________ Appendix B: Customizing Customizing Some simple customization is described in the appendices entitled Customizing. 1. ee_out_width real. Form Name piform* piform_tal1 piform_tal2 piform_thn1 piform_thn2 Description default tall/thin (design 1) tall/thin (design 2) long/thin (design 1) long/thin (design 2) * The chapter entitled Precision Input Form contains a detailed illustration of the default form design (piform). alias. ee_dimension_1 real. ee_extension real. ee_out_ht_diam real not null. Refer to the MicroStation Applications Programmer’s Guide for this latter procedure.cmd. The available precision input forms (described below) reside in win32app\eerway\sym. as in the following example: create table trench_spec ( vendor integer not null. ee_units integer not null. These instructions are intended as a basic workflow. Such customization includes writing processes and user commands using the MicroStation software. and rway. More extensive customization is possible for advanced users. For detailed information about editing your . To change the form design.

unl file. ee_tl_subtype integer.unl file and a <oneline_type>_part. char(6). create table trench_part ( ee_tl_type integer. ee_description char(40) ).unl files reside in win32app\eerway\db. real. create index i_fpskey on trench_part(ee_spec_key). refer to the tray_spec and tray_part . grant all on trench_part to public. ee_spec_key char(28). ee_part_key char(28) not null. create index i_fsvendor on trench_spec(vendor).unl file which contain the required default values for the one-line type. ee_symbol char(6). Add any new vendors to the vendor table in the reference database. create unique index i_fseekey on trench_spec(ee_spec_key). ee_angle real. real._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . char(28) not null.February 2003 ee_transition ee_radius weight material ee_xs_cell ee_spec_key description real. ee_tl_qual integer. 3. create unique index i_fpeekey on fit_part(ee_part_key). ee_weight real. ee_spec2_key char(28). char(40) ).unl files that are delivered with EE Raceway. char(20). 2. For sample files. All delivered . create index i_fswidth on trench_spec(ee_out_width). or you can add the data to your vendor. create index i_fsheight on trench_spec(ee_out_ht_diam). grant all on trench_spec to public. You can add the necessary rows directly to the vendor codelist table in the database. ee_part char(20). Create a <one-line_type>_spec. 418 .

Add records to the mscatalog table (in the reference database) for both the <one-line_type>_spec and the <one-line_type>_part tables. see the appendix entitled EE Databases. Customizing 5.unl file. For information about codelists. You can accomplish this either by adding rows directly to the mscatalog table or by inserting records in the mscatref.unl files to the rwayref.unl file.unl file. consult the appendix entitled EE Databases. INSERT INTO tray_part. Add necessary rows to the mscodelist table in the reference database for any columns that are codelisted for the one-line type. For detailed information about editing your . 9. Adding a Special Fitting This section outlines the basic steps necessary to add a special fitting to the reference database. 1. 419 .cmd file. These instructions are intended as a basic workflow.unl file. You can accomplish this either by adding rows directly to the mscodelist table or by inserting records in the mscodref. in a format like the following: FILE "tray_part._ _______________ Appendix B: 4. 7.unl file and the <oneline_type>_part. Add the new one-line type to the ol_type table. You can accomplish this either by adding rows directly to the mscolumns table or by inserting records in the mscolref. Add the special fitting table to the reference database. as in the following example: create table transit ( vendor integer not null. Add records to the mscolumns table (in the reference database) for both the <one-line_type>_spec and the <one-line_type>_part tables. You can accomplish this either by adding the row directly to the ol_type table or by inserting records in the olt. 6. B: System/App Mgmt.unl files and database tables.unl" DELIMITER "|". Run the Update reference schema process to add your new one-line type to the database. 8. Add the newly-created <one-line_type>_spec.

char(28) not null. 6. Create any new Eden symbols needed to graphically display the new special fitting. char(20). 2. Add a row to the mscatalog table (in the reference database) for the special fitting table. real. char(20). or you can insert records in the vendor.unl file. grant all on transit to public.cmd file. You can add the entry directly to the tl_type table in the database. in a format like the following: FILE "pullbox. You can add rows directly to the vendor codelist table in the database. Add any new vendors to the vendor table in the reference database. create index i_tsitheight on transit(ee_out_ht_diam). For a sample special fitting . 7.unl file to the rwayref.unl" DELIMITER "|". or you add the data to your tlt.February 2003 ee_units ee_out_ht_diam ee_out_width ee_dimension_1 weight material ee_part ee_symbol ee_part_key ee_description integer not null. real. 420 . real._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . For basic information about creating Eden symbols.unl file.unl that contains the required default values for your fitting. create index i_tsitwidth on transit(ee_out_width). char(40) ).unl file. create index i_tsitdepth on transit(ee_dimension_1). INSERT INTO pullbox. 4. refer to the pullbox. see the appendix entitled Eden Symbol Generation. Add the new special fitting to the three-line type codelist table. 5. real not null. 3. create index i_tsitvendor on transit(vendor). Create a <special fitting>. Add the newly-created <special fitting>.unl file that is delivered with EE Raceway. char(6). create unique index i_tsiteekey on transit(ee_part_key).

_ _______________ Appendix B: You can accomplish this either by adding a row directly to the mscatalog table. To the right of each = is the message itself. which you can modify. Reports may also be created using the native RDBMS report writing product. Add the new special fitting entry to the manual part table. You can accomplish this either by adding a row to the manual_part table in the database. or by inserting a record in the mscatref. Delivered reports are created using the RISRPT product and are compatible with the DB Access (DBA) product. B: System/App Mgmt. 11. Reports You can create or modify standard and rule check reports. 9. The report template library is delivered in the win32app\eerway\report directory. In these files. the hard-coded error message name is to the left of each = (equal sign). Add a row to the mscolumns table (in the reference database) for the special fitting table.msg files. Use a standard text editor to modify the error.unl file.msg files in both win32app\eerway\msg and win32app\eenuc\msg. 8. You can accomplish this either by adding rows directly to the mscodelist table or by inserting records in the mscodref.unl file. see the appendix entitled EE Databases. Customizing Add necessary rows to the mscodelist table (in the reference database) for any columns that are codelisted for the special fitting.unl file. For information about codelists. or by inserting a record in the manprt.unl file. 10. You cannot change this name. Run the Update reference schema process to add your new special fitting to the database. or by inserting a record in the mscolref. Error Messages Error messages for the delivered commands are located in the error. 421 . You can accomplish this either by adding the row directly to the mscolumns table in the database.

h1". They include Microstation. These environment variables can be modified using the Start > Programs > EENUC > EE Configure command. File containing EE Raceway symbols.February 2003 EE Environment Variables This section lists and describes the environment variables that are delivered when you download EE Raceway.men. The following environment variable is defined in the win32app\eerway\bin\c400 or c100/rmonshell file: MS_CACH Sets the memory to be allocated for a design file editing session. and EE Raceway-specific variables. Sets the directory where application-/user-defined menus are to found when activated from an "am=n. "am=n.ndx) files. EE Nucleus. Sets the directory for the on-line Help files.sb" (i. Sets the directory where application executable files are found when activated from a user command TSK statement.cfg file contains detailed descriptions of the MicroStation and Umenu environment variables. 422 . or "am=n. the file MicroStation uses to save data about the attached menu.cs".e. Defines the path to the on-line Help files.sb1"). "am=ustn. Directory path to the EE Raceway symbols. Directory for the message files. The following environment variables are defined in the win32app\eerway\ee. Used as a pointer to application programs. This variable will override the user preferences setting. MS_DATA MS_TMP MS_HELPFILE MS_HELPPATH The MicroStation\Program\MicroStation\config\msconfig. Directory for the database table files Directory path to the EE Raceway forms._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . This directory is also the location of user command index (. Sets the directory that holds the menu file mgds. For EE Raceway: EERD_COMPRESS EERD_MSGS EERD_TBLS RWAY_FORM_PATH EE_SYM_PATH EE_SYM_FILE Compresses the file when you exit a design session. Sets the directory for temporary files.cfg file: For MicroStation: MS_CELL MS_APP MS_EXE MS_APPMEN Sets the directory that holds the cell libraries.

B: System/App Mgmt. MS_USERPREF MS_CMDWINDRSC MS_SYSFONTS EE_TERM ORACLE_SID Directory path and filename of user preference file. Project Database sql file. Default remote path for archive/restore. An asterisk (*) indicates that you cannot override a particular value. Directory path and filename of command window resource file. Reference Database sql file. Filename for the Eden symbol library. Directory path for data files. Directory path for EE Nucleus product. For EE Raceway: EE_RWAY* EERWAY_DAT EERWAY_SEED RWAY_CMD RWAY_SQL RWAYREF_CMD RWAYREF_SQL EDEN_LIB RWAY_EDEN_LIB EE_PIFORM Directory path for the EE Raceway product._ _______________ Appendix B: The following are the environment variables that are recognized by the EE Nucleus product. The following are the environment variables defined in the win32app\eenuc\bin\EE file. Directory path and filename of password file to enter system manager page. it must be set to "A". 423 . A variable used for ORACLE databases. An asterisk (*) indicates that you cannot override a particular value. delivered when you download the EE Nucleus product. The following are the environment variables defined in the win32app\eenuc\. Project Database cmd file. User-defined project database cmd file. delivered when you download the EE Nucleus product. Directory path for seed files. Defines the "tty" type you are running on.EErc file. Font used by MicroStation for window and menu display. MS_DIR RIS_DIR EE_NUC* ENV_MSGS EENUC_DAT Directory path for the MicroStation product. delivered with the EE Nucleus product. The following are the environment variables defined using the EE Configure command. Directory path for the RIS product. Name of the precision input form that displays during the design session. Directory path for data files. User-defined reference database sql file. Reference Database cmd file. Directory path for the Eden symbol library. Directory path and project database name. Schema name for project database. An asterisk (*) indicates that you cannot override a particular value. Directory path for message files. Default username for archive/restore. EE_CURPRJ* EE_DBS* EE_NODENAME EE_REMDIR EE_SCHEMA EE_USERNAME SYS_PASSW_FILE EE_CUSTOM_SQL EE_CUSTOM_CMD EE_CUSTOM_REFSQL EE_CUSTOM_REFCMD EE Environment Variables Directory path for current EE project. Default nodename for archive/restore. User-defined reference database cmd file. User-defined project database sql file.

Directory path for EE forms. Filename of EE symbol file. Data files for DB Access Support. EE reference database server process. Directory path for INGRES executables._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide .February 2003 DBA_SUPPORT EES_REFDB EES_REFSER EE_FORM_PATH EE_SYM_FILE EE_SYM_PATH For ORACLE databases: ORACLE_HOME For INGRES databases: II_SYSTEM For INFORMIX databases: INFORMIXDIR Directory path for INFORMIX executables. Directory path for ORACLE executables. Directory path for EE symbol file. 424 . Schema name for reference database.

Thus. You can report and query from the reference database as well as the project database. that supports it. a generic relational database interface. This section contains: Descriptions of the EE databases and the Intergraph software. Procedures that must be followed by new users of the EE product. Procedures that must be followed by existing users of the EE product. (For those familiar with EDES. The EE products attach to their relational databases through Intergraph Corporation’s Relational Interface System (RIS). The reference database is identified when you enter a project. RIS. allowing generic network access to all EE databases generated with the following RDBMS’s: Standard Engine (SE) Informix. Schema descriptions for the EE project database and the EE reference database. such as symbol and part information. The project database contains information applicable to a particular project. you are not forced to re-enter common information for each project. A project is an associated collection of drawings and their database. Most relational databases use Standard Query Language (SQL).) One reference database can be accessed by multiple project databases. C: EE Databases 425 . Processes needed in the procedures above. RIS isolates the differences in specific vendors’ Relational Database Management Systems (RDBMS). they are based on the relational data model in which a relation is a two-dimensional table comprised of rows and columns. On-line Informix. Oracle. the reference database replaces the concept of shared part entity files and active entity files. The Electrical Engineer product line is supported by two relational databases: a project database and a reference database. and Ingres. The reference database contains information applicable to multiple projects._ _______________ Appendix C: EE Databases Appendix C EE Databases All EE databases you create will be relational databases. that is.

The RIS schema identifies a unique database/user combination in a given commercial database system.February 2003 Relational Interface System (RIS) All EE products use a RIS schema. you can update schemas without knowing either the differences between RDBMS’s or the syntax of the RIS create schema statement. which you define. (See the appendix entitled RIS Schema Manager for more information on the RIS Schema Manager product. to attach to an SQL-type database. the very concept of a database differs greatly from one RDBMS to another. in fact. Through the use the RIS risschema_mgr product. Different RDBMS’s establish users in different ways.) 426 ._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide .

Access RIS Schema Manager through the Database Utilities option in the EE Environment. Check the documentation delivered with the product for information on infxcreate. that was created using RIS Schema Manager.) This process will create the risschema definition file. After you have created an empty database. (See the appendix entitled RIS Schema Manager for detailed information on using the RIS Schema Manager product. The risschema_mgr process updates and maintains the file. You can manage the risschema file in any of the following ways: — You can create and maintain your own risschema file. INFORMIX users will now have to create all databases in ANSI mode. or see INFORMIX documentation for other creation methods. The process resides locally on your machine and recognizes any RIS schema on any database. C: EE Databases 427 . You can usually locate this file in the RIS product directory. use the Update Schema option under Database Utilities (see Database Utilities. ownerships. page 50). — You can locate the risschema file from another workstation using the risschema_mgr process and access any schemas created on that machine. For more information about the risschema file. you need to populate that database with EE tables and default information. Once you have created a schema on your empty database. To do so. see the appendix entitled RIS Schema Definition File._ _______________ Appendix C: Database and RIS Procedures Database and RIS Procedures You must adhere to the procedures that follow before using EE with a relational database. but it can exist anywhere as long as the parameters file (win32app\ingr\share\RISversion\parms) points to it. and locations of all RIS schemas and databases. You should consult the individual RDBMS documentation on installation procedures. you must use the RIS Schema Manager product to create a schema. For New Users You must first create an empty database and a user name through your chosen RDBMS. using the risschema_mgr process. local or remote. The risschema file is an ASCII file that contains the names.

You should run the Update schema process from the EE Environment Project Menu.sql) file which contains the table and column structure. This is the command line syntax for the Update schema process: win32app\eenuc\bin\create_db [-v] [-q .sql file. To run it outside of the EE Environment.cmd file displays SQL commands as they are executed schema definition file command file to load schema To create a new schema. Where a table lacks a unique index.unl files to load into which tables.sql file. The process replaces the old table definition with the new table definition keeping column data where column names match._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . you can also include: — a command (.sql file -c .cmd) file that defines which .sql file.unl files that are listed in the . — load those tables having a unique index with data from the .unl file(s) which contain default information. the process will: — add new tables listed in the . 428 .sql file that has a different structure than the original .cmd files. — modify existing tables if the definition of that table has changed in the . you must have at least: — an SQL (.cmd file] schema name -v -q . — OR — Modify an existing RIS schema’s tables to conform to the structure of a given . If Update schema is used with a . you must first export the variable ENV_MSGS to win32app\ingr\eenuc\msg.sql file.February 2003 Update Schema (create_db) Process You can use this program to do the following: Update an existing empty RIS schema with EE tables and default information. and then key in the command line syntax for the process. If you want to load a schema with default information. the process loads it only if the table is empty.sql file] [-c . — AND — — the corresponding .

cmd sample_ref This will populate an empty sample_ref schema._ _______________ Appendix C: Update Schema (create_db) Process Example: $ create_db -q win32app\ingr\eerway\db\rwayref.sql -c \win32app\ingr\eerway\db\rwayref. You can use this process to execute ANY valid RIS-supported SQL statement upon an existing schema. created through the risschema_mgr process on an existing schema. with EE Raceway tables and default reference information. C: EE Databases 429 . Simply place it in a file and call that filename with the -q option.

When editing/reviewing annotation for EE Raceway elements (title blocks. Some of the columns in the reference schema tables are required and cannot be modified or deleted. fittings. drop points. one-lines.February 2003 Reference Schema . and so forth) during a design session. You will identify these keys through the Active OneLine Type Parameters form. You will access the reference database during the following procedures: 1. If the system cannot find a key for some reason. Raceway One-Line Keys A key is stored for each one-line type within a drawing. the project schema must be custom-built accordingly. But if the project schema is custom-built. Each table must contain at least a subset of the column/attribute structure as its corresponding table in the project schema. Default Attributes Some tables exist in the reference schema to support default attributes. 2. The actual column names are defined by the values of the key_columns and key_description in the mscatalog entry for the given table. Each of these keys will be the default key for all one-lines of a given one-line type unless you override the key during annotation for an individual one-line. the reference schema tables contains two additional columns: key_column and key_description. and tray_part tables. it uses the DEFAULT key attributes. The DEFAULT key is used with the seed design file using English measurements. including. RCP. straights. Keys In addition to the default attribute columns. if the reference schema is custom-built. All specification information is carried in the reference database. for example. the drawing.General Description The Electrical Engineer reference database is a multi-table relational database containing default attribute information and specification information. tray_spec. RCPs. while the METRIC DEFAULT is used with the seed design file using Metric measurements. and equipment pointers. 3. Selecting the active one-line type parameters during a design session. Reporting. For example. 430 . one-lines. The key_column field is a unique index used to identify a particular row of default attributes in the reference schema. Each of the tables is delivered with one entry called DEFAULT. raceway connect points (RCPs). the reference schema needs to be custom-built only if you want defaults for any new column to exist in the reference schema. The one-line table is delivered with both the DEFAULT and METRIC DEFAULT keys. one-line. You can establish default attributes for drawings._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide .

The key you specify will serve as the default key for all RCPs unless you override the key during annotation for an individual RCP.General Description Raceway Connect Point Keys You will identify the key for RCPs through the Raceway Defaults form. Equipment Pointer Keys You will identify the key for equipment pointers through the Raceway Defaults form. C: EE Databases 431 . The key you specify will serve as the default key for all drop points unless you override the key during annotation for an individual drop point. Text annotation overrides any default values. Text annotation overrides any default values._ _______________ Appendix C: Reference Schema . Text annotation overrides any default values. Drop Point Keys You will identify the key for drop points through the Raceway Defaults form. The key you specify will serve as the default key for all equipment pointers unless you override the key during annotation for an individual equipment pointer.

and one_line tables in the project database.February 2003 Codelists Codelists are tables in the reference database which contain all available values for a particular column of a table in the project database. the reference database codelists are matched to the annotated values. Only values in the reference database codelist tables are loaded into the project database.approved 8 . For example.approved 4 .approved 7 . You can add new approval status rows to this table._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . Approval Status Codelist Table The approv_status codelist table defines the available approval status values. COLUMN_NAME index_column index_value TYPE integer char(20) DESCRIPTION approval status index number approval status description The approval status rows delivered with EE Raceway are: index_column 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 index_value 1 .blank 2 .approved 6 .not approved 432 .approved 11 .approved 5 .approved 3 .approved 9 . The system issues you a warning if an annotated value does not match a value in the codelist.approved 10 . fitting. but you must not remove any of the existing rows. During loads of the project database. You must be familiar with the codelist tables that follow. the codelist table ol_type in the reference database will contain all possible values that can be loaded into the column ol_type in the straight.

You can add new drawing types to this table. COLUMN_NAME ee_car_num ee_cardinal TYPE integer char(20) DESCRIPTION cardinal index number cardinal description The cardinal point values delivered with EE Raceway are: ee_car_num 0 1 2 6 7 8 12 13 14 ee_cardinal TOP LEFT CENTER LEFT BOTTOM LEFT TOP CENTER CENTER CENTER BOTTOM CENTER TOP RIGHT CENTER RIGHT BOTTOM RIGHT C: EE Databases Drawing Type Codelist Table The drawing_type codelist table defines the available drawing types. The ee_rcp_ol_type column contains the index_column value for the one-line type to which the RCP is assigned._ _______________ Appendix C: Codelists Cardinal Codelist Table The cardinal codelist table defines the available cardinal point routing justification locations. which is an integer value that the software uses to uniquely identify an index value. but you must not remove the existing row. The table contains the index_column column. You must not add or remove to this table. COLUMN_NAME code unknown TYPE Char(20) unknown DESCRIPTION drawing type unknown The drawing type delivered with EE Raceway is: code RACEWAY Manual Fitting Part Codelist Table The manual_part codelist table defines the manually-placed special fittings available with the product. 433 . The table also contains the ee_part_table column which itself contains the mscatalog number of the table holding the part information.

_ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . The table also contains the ee_spec.February 2003 COLUMN_NAME index_column index_value ee_part_table ee_rcp_ol_type ee_manpart_type TYPE integer char(20) integer integer integer DESCRIPTION manual_part index number manual_part description special fitting parts table number one-line type index column number manual part type index number The special manual fittings delivered with EE Raceway are: index_column 1 2 3 index_value conduit body pullbox light fixture ee_part_table 246 249 250 ee_rcp_ol_type 3 3 3 ee_manpart_type 0 0 1 One-Line Type Codelist Table The ol_type table defines the one-line types that are available in a raceway project. and ee_rcp_part tables which define the tables containing specification information for each one-line type. COLUMN_NAME index_column index_value ee_spec_table ee_part_table ee_ol_table ee_rcp_part_table ee_max_run_angle ee_priority_level TYPE integer char(20) integer integer integer integer integer integer DESCRIPTION one-line type index number one-line type description specification table mscatalog number spec parts table mscatalog number one-line table mscatalog number special fitting parts table number maximum bends allowed per run one-line type nest level The one-line types delivered with EE Raceway are: indx_col 1 2 3 4 5 index_value TRAY WIREWAY CONDUIT AIRWAY DUCTBANK ee_spec 240 242 244 247 260 ee_part 241 243 245 248 0 ee_ol 204 204 204 204 204 rcp_part 0 0 246 0 0 run_angle 0 0 360 0 0 priority 5 5 10 10 7 434 . The ee_priority_level column defines the routing priority for each one-line type. which is an integer value the software uses to uniquely identify an index value. ee_part. ee_ol. The table contains the index_column column.

COLUMN_NAME index_column index_value TYPE integer char(20) DESCRIPTION rcp type index number rcp type description The RCP types delivered with EE Raceway are: index_column 1 2 index_value <blank> ROUTE description general raceway connect point raceway connect point and route point System Codelist Table C: EE Databases The ee_system table must be loaded in the reference database before you can create any raceway design files._ _______________ Appendix C: Codelists RCP Type Codelist Table This table defines how the EE Raceway software uses RCPs (Raceway Connect Points). remove. or update any of the systems delivered with EE Raceway. nor should you modify the index_column values. You can add. which is an integer value the software uses to uniquely identify a system name. The system table contains the system_num column. You must not add or remove rows from this table. You can modify the index_value values. which is an integer value the software uses to uniquely identify an index value. The rcp_type table contains the index_column column. COLUMN_NAME system_num system_name TYPE integer char(20) DESCRIPTION system index number system name 435 .

COLUMN_NAME index_column index_value TYPE integer char(20) DESCRIPTION three-line type index number three-line type description The three-line types delivered with EE Raceway are: index_column 1 2 3 4 11 12 14 index_value STRAIGHT ELBOW WYE CROSS PULLBOX CONDUIT BODY DROPOUT 436 . You can modify the index_value values._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide .February 2003 The systems delivered with EE Raceway are: system_num 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 system_name Control Communication High Voltage Low Voltage Alarm Instrumentation Signal Digital Analog Thermocouple RTD Medium Voltage Normal Lighting Emergency Lighting Security Fire Safety DC Power Control and Signal Three-Line Type Codelist Table The tl_type table defines the three-line types that are available with the EE Raceway product. The table contains the index_column column. You must not add or remove rows from the table. nor should you modify the index_column values. which is an integer value the software uses to uniquely identify an index value.

which is an integer value the software uses to uniquely identify an index value. You must not add or remove rows from the table. The table contains the index_column column. You can modify the index_value values. COLUMN_NAME index_column index_value TYPE integer char(20) DESCRIPTION three-line subtype index number three-line subtype description The three-line subtypes delivered with EE Raceway are: index_column 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 index_value <blank> VERTICAL INSIDE VERTICAL OUTSIDE VERTICAL HORIZONTAL LEFT HORIZONTAL RIGHT HORIZONTAL REDUCER LEFT REDUCER RIGHT REDUCER C: EE Databases Three-Line Qualifier Codelist Table The tl_qual table further defines the three-line types. nor should you modify the index_column values. The table contains the index_column column. You can modify the index_value values. nor should you modify the index_column values. COLUMN_NAME index_column index_value TYPE integer char(20) DESCRIPTION three-line qualifier index number three-line qualifier description 437 . You must not add or remove rows from the table._ _______________ Appendix C: Codelists Three_Line Subtype Codelist Table The tl_subtype table further defines the available three-line types. which is an integer value the software uses to uniquely identify an index value.

COLUMN_NAME index_column index_value TYPE integer char(20) DESCRIPTION units index number units description The units delivered with EE Raceway are: index_column 1 2 index_value English Metric Vendor Codelist Table You must have a vendor in the vendor codelist table before loading any specification tables in the database. which is an integer value the software uses to uniquely identify an index value. You must not add or remove rows from this table. You can modify the index_value values. The vendor table contains the index_column column._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . nor should you modify the index_column values. but do not remove the rows delivered with the product. The unit table contains the index_column column.February 2003 The three-line qualifiers delivered with EE Raceway are: index_column 1 2 3 4 5 index_value <blank> RIGID BENDABLE FLEXIBLE ADJUSTABLE Units Codelist Table This table (ee_unit) defines the units that are used for one-line dimension values. You can add vendors as necessary to this table. which is an integer value the software uses to uniquely identify a vendor name. COLUMN_NAME index_column index_value catalog TYPE integer char(20) char(20) DESCRIPTION vendor index number vendor name catalog 438 .

The index_value provides a more complete description of the entry. COLUMN_NAME index_column index_value TYPE char(20) not null char(20) DESCRIPTION wire/cable code index value wire/cable code description C: EE Databases The wire/cable codes delivered with EE Raceway are: index_column AC AD AG AH AM AN AP AR AS CP CQ CV CW CX index_value AC AD AG AH AM AN AP AR AS CP CQ CV CW CX 439 ._ _______________ Appendix C: The vendors delivered with EE Raceway are: index_column 1 2 3 4 index_value default sample unknown English sample catalog delivered blank delivered blank delivered blank delivered blank Codelists Wire/Cable Code Codelist Table This table (ee_pcbl_code) defines the wire/cable code that are used for selecting a Wire/Cable during the EERWAY command CONDUIT SIZING. You may add or remove rows from this table. which is an abbreviated value the software uses to uniquely identify an index value. the values of the index_column should include all the wire/cable codes represented in the data of the Wire/Cable (ee_pseudo_cable) table code column. The wire/cable code table contains the index_column column.

_ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . which is an abbreviated value the software uses to uniquely identify an index value. COLUMN_NAME index_column index_value TYPE char(20) not null char(20) DESCRIPTION wire/cable configuration index value wire/cable configuration description The wire/cable configurations delivered with EE Raceway are: index_column \C PR TR index_value single conductor "pair 2 conductors "triad" 3 conductors Wire/Cable Size Codelist Table This table (ee_pcbl_size) defines the wire/cable size that are used for selecting a Wire/Cable during the EERWAY command CONDUIT SIZING. You may add or remove rows from this table. which is an abbreviated value the software uses to uniquely identify an index value. COLUMN_NAME index_column index_value TYPE char(20) not null char(20) DESCRIPTION wire/cable size index value wire/cable size description The wire/cable sizes delivered with EE Raceway are: index_column 36 AWG 34 AWG 32 AWG 30 AWG 28 AWG 27 AWG index_value 36 AWG 34 AWG 32 AWG 30 AWG 28 AWG 27 AWG 440 . The index_value provides a more complete description of the entry. The wire/cable configuration table contains the index_column column.February 2003 Wire/Cable Configuration Codelist Table This table (ee_pcbl_config) defines the wire/cable configuration that are used for selecting a Wire/Cable during the EERWAY command CONDUIT SIZING. The wire/cable size table contains the index_column column. The index_value provides a more complete description of the entry. You may add or remove rows from this table. the values of the index_column should include all the wire/cable sizes represented in the data of the Wire/Cable (ee_pseudo_cable) table cable_size column. the values of the index_column should include all the wire/cable configurations represented in the data of the Wire/Cable (ee_pseudo_cable) table config column.

You may add or remove rows from this table. 441 . the values of the index_column should include all the wire/cable insulation colors represented in the data of the Wire/Cable (ee_pseudo_cable) table color column. The index_value provides a more complete description of the entry. The wire/cable insulation color table contains the index_column column. which is an abbreviated value the software uses to uniquely identify an index value._ _______________ Appendix C: 26 AWG 24 AWG 22 AWG 20 AWG 18 AWG 16 AWG 14 AWG 12 AWG 10 AWG 8 AWG 6 AWG 4 AWG 3 AWG 2 AWG 1 AWG 1/0 AWG 2/0 AWG 3/0 AWG 4/0 AWG 250 MCM 300 MCM 350 MCM 400 MCM 500 MCM 600 MCM 700 MCM 750 MCM 800 MCM 900 MCM 1000 MCM 1250 MCM 1500 MCM 1750 MCM 2000 MCM 26 AWG 24 AWG 22 AWG 20 AWG 18 AWG 16 AWG 14 AWG 12 AWG 10 AWG 8 AWG 6 AWG 4 AWG 3 AWG 2 AWG 1 AWG 1/0 AWG 2/0 AWG 3/0 AWG 4/0 AWG 250 MCM 300 MCM 350 MCM 400 MCM 500 MCM 600 MCM 700 MCM 750 MCM 800 MCM 900 MCM 1000 MCM 1250 MCM 1500 MCM 1750 MCM 2000 MCM Codelists C: EE Databases Wire/Cable Color Codelist Table This table (ee_pcbl_color) defines the wire/cable insulation color that are used for selecting a Wire/Cable during the EERWAY command CONDUIT SIZING.

_ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide .February 2003 COLUMN_NAME index_column index_value TYPE char(20) not null char(20) DESCRIPTION wire/cable insulation color index value wire/cable insulation color description The wire/cable insulation colors delivered with EE Raceway are: index_column BLK W R GR ORN BL W/BLK R/BLK GR/BLK ORN/BLK BL/BLK BLK/W R/W GR/W BL/W BLK/R W/R ORN/R BL/R R/GR ORN/GR BLK/W/R W/BLK/R R/BLK/W GR/BLK/W ORN/BLK/W BL/BLK/W BLK/R/GR W/R/GR R/BLK/GR GR/BLK/ORN ORN/BLK/GR BL/W/ORN BLK/W/ORN W/R/ORN ORN/W/BL W/R/BL BLK/W/GR W/BLK/GR R/W/GR GR/W/BL ORN/R/GR index_value BLACK WHITE RED GREEN ORANGE BLUE WHITE/BLACK RED/BLACK GREEN/BLACK ORANGE/BLACK BLUE/BLACK BLACK/WHITE RED/WHITE GREEN/WHITE BLUE/WHITE BLACK/RED WHITE/RED ORANGE/RED BLUE/RED RED/GREEN ORANGE/GREEN BLACK/WHITE/RED WHITE/BLACK/RED RED/BLACK/WHITE GREEN/BLACK/WHITE ORANGE/BLACK/WHITE BLUE/BLACK/WHITE BLACK/RED/GREEN WHITE/RED/GREEN RED/BLACK/GREEN GREEN/BLACK/ORANGE ORANGE/BLACK/GREEN BLUE/WHITE/ORANGE BLACK/WHITE/ORANGE WHITE/RED/ORANGE ORANGE/WHITE/BLUE WHITE/RED/BLUE BLACK/WHITE/GREEN WHITE/BLACK/GREEN RED/WHITE/GREEN GREEN/WHITE/BLUE ORANGE/RED/GREEN 442 .

The wire/cable insulation voltage rating table contains the index_column column. 4 wire system) 443 . 3 wire system) Low (Three phase. 4 wire system) Low (Three phase. 3 wire system) Medium (Three phase. 4 wire system) Medium (Three phase. C: EE Databases COLUMN_NAME index_column index_value TYPE char(20) not null char(40) DESCRIPTION wire/cable insulation voltage rating index value wire/cable insulation voltage rating description The wire/cable voltage ratings delivered with EE Raceway are: index_column 120 120/240 208Y/120 240/120 240 480Y/277 480 600 2400 4160Y/2400 4160 4800 6900 8320Y/4800 12000Y/6930 12470Y/7200 13200Y/7620 13200 13800Y/7970 index_value Low (Single phase. 4 wire system) Medium (Three phase. the values of the index_column should include all the wire/cable insulation voltage ratings represented in the data of the Wire/Cable (ee_pseudo_cable) table voltage column. 4 wire system) Medium (Three phase. 3 wire system) Low (Three phase. 3 wire system) Medium (Three phase. The index_value provides a more complete description of the entry. 4 wire system) Low (Three phase. 4 wire system) Medium (Three phase. 4 wire system) Medium (Three phase. 3 wire system) Medium (Three phase. You may add or remove rows from this table. 4 wire system) Low (Three phase. which is an abbreviated value the software uses to uniquely identify an index value._ _______________ Appendix C: BL/R/GR BLK/W/BL W/BLK/BL R/W/BL GR/ORN/R GR/R/BL BL/R/ORN BLK/ORN/R BRN Y BLUE/RED/GREEN BLACK/WHITE/BLUE WHITE/BLACK/BLUE RED/WHITE/BLUE GREEN/ORANGE/RED GREEN/RED/BLUE BLUE/RED/ORANGE BLACK/ORANGE/RED BROWN YELLOW Codelists Wire/Cable Voltage Codelist Table This table (ee_pcbl_volt) defines the wire/cable insulation voltage rating that are used for selecting a Wire/Cable during the EERWAY command CONDUIT SIZING. 3 wire system) Low (Three phase. 2 wire system) Low (Single phase. 3 wire system) Medium (Three phase. 3 wire system) Medium (Three phase. 3 wire system) Medium (Three phase.

_ _______________
EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide - February 2003 13800 20780Y/12000 22860Y/13200 23000 24940Y/14400 34500Y/19920 34500 46000 69000 Medium (Three phase, 3 wire system) Medium (Three phase, 4 wire system) Medium (Three phase, 4 wire system) Medium (Three phase, 3 wire system) Medium (Three phase, 4 wire system) Medium (Three phase, 4 wire system) Medium (Three phase, 3 wire system) Medium (Three phase, 3 wire system) Medium (Three phase, 3 wire system)

Wire/Cable Insulation Type Codelist Table
This table (ee_pcbl_insul) defines the wire/cable insulation type that are used for selecting a Wire/Cable during the EERWAY command CONDUIT SIZING. The wire/cable insulation type table contains the index_column column, which is an abbreviated value the software uses to uniquely identify an index value. You may add or remove rows from this table, the values of the index_column should include all the wire/cable insulation types represented in the data of the Wire/Cable (ee_pseudo_cable) table insulation column. The index_value provides a more complete description of the entry. COLUMN_NAME index_column index_value TYPE char(20) not null char(100) DESCRIPTION wire/cable insulation type index value wire/cable insulation type description

The wire/cable insulation types delivered with EE Raceway are: index_column A AA AI AIA A VA AVB AVL FEP FEPB MI MTW PFA PFAH RH RHH RHW SA SIS TA TBS index_value Asbestos (Without asbestos braid) Asbestos (With suitable braid material) Asbestos (Without asbestos braid) Impregnated Asbestos (With suitable braid material) Impregnated Asbestos & Varnished Cambric Impregnated Asbestos & Varnished Cambric (Flame retardant, cotton braid) Impregnated Asbestos & Varnished Cambric (AVL-lead sheath) Fluorinated Ethylene Propylene Fluorinated Ethylene Propylene (Glass braid Asbestos or other Suitable braid material) Magnesium Oxide (Copper) Flame-, Moisture-, Heat- and Oil-Resistant Thermoplastic Perfluoroalkoxy Perfluoroalkoxy Heat-Resistant Rubber (Moisture-resistant, flame- non-metallic covering) Heat-Resistant Rubber (Moisture-resistant, flame- non-metallic covering) Moisture- and Heat-Resistant Rubber (Moisture-resistant, flame-non-metallic covering) Silicone Rubber (Asbestos, glass or other suitable braid material) Heat-Resistant Rubber Thermo-plastic and Asbestos (Flame-retardant, non-metallic covering) Thermo-plastic (Flame-retardant, non-metallic covering)

444

_ _______________
Appendix C: TFE THHN THHN/THWN THW THWN TW UF USE V XHHN Z Extruded Polytetra-fluoro-ethylene Flame-, Heat-Resistant Thermoplastic (Nylon jacket or equivalent) Flame-, (Moisture-) & Heat-Resistant Thermoplastic (Nylon jacket or equivalent) Flame-, Moisture- & Heat-Resistant Thermoplastic Flame-, Moisture- & Heat-Resistant Thermoplastic (Nylon jacket or equivalent) Flame-Retardant, Moisture- and Heat-Resistant Thermoplastic Moisture-Resistant, Moisture- and Heat-Resistant (Integral with insulation) Heat- and Moisture-Resistant (Moisture-resistant non-metallic covering) Varnished Cambric (Nonmetallic covering or lead sheath) Flame-Retardant Cross-Linked Synthetic Polymer Modified Ethylene Tetrafluoro-ethylene

Codelists

Yes-No Codelist Table
The ee_yes_no codelist table defines the available positive and negative user responses. You must not add or remove rows from this table. COLUMN_NAME index_column index_value TYPE integer char(20) DESCRIPTION yes-no response index number yes-no response description

C: EE Databases

The Yes-No values delivered with EE Raceway are: index_column 0 1 index_value NO Yes

445

_ _______________
EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide - February 2003

Fitting Environment Rules
The fitting environment rules are the rules stored in the reference database table tl_fit_env that control the Place Fitting by Rule commands. The software compares the one-line environment at an RCP in the design file with the rules stored in this table to determine which fitting to place at the RCP. You can add, remove, or update any of the rules delivered with EE Raceway. The software, at least, compares the number of intersection one-lines, the one-line type, and the angles between the intersectin one-lines with the rules in the fitting environment table to find a match. If found, the symbol in the part table stored will be placed at the RCP. COLUMN_NAME ee_ol_type ee_tl_type ee_tl_subtype ee_tl_qual ee_num_ols ee_pln_angles ee_prp_angles ee_part_table ee_symbol TYPE integer integer integer integer integer char(40) char(40) integer char(6) DESCRIPTION intersecting one-line’s one-line type number intersecting one-line’s three-line type number, zero if not applicable intersecting one-line’s three-line subtype number, zero if not applicable intersecting one-line’s three-line qualifier number, zero if not applicable number of intersecting one-lines planar angles between the intersecting one-lines. Angles must be defined relative to a single one-line. non-planar angles between the intersecting one-lines. Angles must be defined relative to a single one-line. fitting mscatalog table number fitting EDEN symbol name

The fitting environment rules delivered with EE Raceway are: olt 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 tlt 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 tlst 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 tlq 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 nol 2 2 3 3 4 4 5 pln 180 90 90,180 90 90,180,270 90,180 90,180,270 prp 90 90 90 tbl 246 246 246 246 246 246 246 sym CC CLB CT CGUAM CX CGUAW CEABY

446

_ _______________
Appendix C:

Fitting Environment Rules

Intersecting Conduit One-lines Planar Angles = 90, 180, 270 Non-Planar Angle = 90

C: EE Databases

447

_ _______________
EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide - February 2003

Project Schema - General Description
The project schema contains information about the drawings that are part of a particular project. The schema stores information associated with the elements in each drawing; its one-lines, RCPs, and three-lines. Default and specification information is copied from the reference schema into the project schema when you run Load Database.

448

_ _______________
Appendix C:

Updating Schemas

Updating Schemas
Before you can update (that is, load with EE tables and default data) a schema, you must create the schemas using one of the currently-supported RDBMS’s (INFORMIX, ORACLE, INGRES). Additionally, you must use the schema creation form in RIS Schema Manager to create a valid RIS schema on the database.

Updating a Project Schema
Update the project schema from the Database Utilities menu in the Electrical Engineer environment, using the Update project schema option. The following fields accept your input for the Update schema process: Schema name This field accepts the name of the RIS schema to be updated. No paths are required, since this is a schema name, not a database name. Given the schema name, RIS will know where the appropriate database is located. Schema password This field accepts the name of the password for the specified schema, if one exists.

C: EE Databases

Sql and Cmd Files Accept the names of the sql and cmd (command) files associated with each application. The sql file contains the commands used to create tables, views, and to grant permissions within the schema, while the command file loads the schema tables with default data. These fields require a full path to the files. The application checkboxes to the left of these fields allow you to specify which EE product(s) are supplying the sql and cmd files to the process. If you select multiple applications, then Update project schema runs each application sequentially against the database.

Updating Reference Schemas
Update the reference schema from the Database Utilities menu in the Electrical Engineer environment, using the Update reference schema option. The following fields accept your input for the Update schema process: Schema name This field accepts the name of the RIS schema to be updated. No paths are required, since this is a schema name, not a database name. Given the schema name, RIS will know where the appropriate database is located. Schema password This field accepts the name of the password for the specified schema, if one exists. Sql and Cmd Files

449

_ _______________
EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide - February 2003 Accept the names of the sql and cmd (command) files associated with each application. The sql file contains the commands used to create tables, views, and to grant permissions within the schema, while the command file loads the schema tables with default data. These fields require a full path to the files. The application checkboxes to the left of these fields allow you to specify which EE product(s) are supplying the sql and cmd files to the process. If you select multiple applications, then Update reference schema runs each application sequentially against the database.

Schema Names
When creating your RIS schemas, you should use the same name as your project, since this will be the default name when you enter the project. However, you can override the default by exporting the $EE_SCHEMA variable in your $HOME/.EErc file to be your project schema name.

450

_ _______________
Appendix C:

Modifying the Reference Schema

Modifying the Reference Schema
You can customize the database schema before creating a schema or after the schema exists. To modify the database schema before schema creation, simply include the necessary changes in the .sql file before Update schema is executed. The .sql file is a series of SQL statements recognized by RIS to create your database An existing database schema can also be modified. The SQL statements in the .sql file are the input to the Update schema process. The table definitions that exist in this file determine how the tables will look when complete. Therefore, columns can be added or removed from an existing schema according to the "create table" statements in the .sql file. For example, columns are added into the .sql file for the one_line table, these columns will be added into the existing rows of the existing one_line table. When this process finds a "create table" statement for a table that exists in the schema, the following actions take place: 1. 2. 3. 4. Saves rows from existing table. Drops existing table (also drops indexes). Creates new table according to "create table" statement. Loads new table with saved row information for column names that were in previous definition.

C: EE Databases

If rows exist in the updated table, any new columns that are added will be blank in each row. The new table will have only those columns specified in the "create table" statement in the table definition. Therefore, you need only to modify the ".sql" file in order to modify a schema. The following is a list of schema modification rules for Update Schema to keep in mind. 1. You lose any columns and column information that you have not specified in the "create table" statement. If you had used the RDBMS to alter the table by adding a column and then run Update schema without making the appropriate change to the ".sql" file, you would lose any data that may have been on that column. Columns that you added into an existing loaded table would have no data stored in them. Renaming of a column is processed by removing the column and adding another. The removed column in such a case will lose its data and the added column will be blank. You can modify the size of a column, for example, from "char(10)" to "char(200)" or "smallint" to "integer", but changing from "char" to "integer" is dangerous and an illegal conversion can occur. If you modify a character column to make it smaller (resizing char(20) to be char(10), for example), then any row containing data which exceeds the new character limit will be lost. The .unl file will always be loaded into a table which has a unique index. Any duplicate rows will be counted and ignored; the unique index prevents the entry of duplicate information when updating any EE application. If a table does not have a unique index, then the .unl file will be loaded only if the table is empty.

2. 3.

4.

5.

Table names can be changed except for table names that begin with the letters "ms" and "ee_". They must also be changed appropriately in the MSCATALOG table in order for the software to run properly. Keep in mind that the columns within the tables in the reference schema must be a subset of the columns of the corresponding tables in the project schema.

451

_ _______________
EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide - February 2003 The databases are initially loaded with the *.unl files as defined in the command file. The Update schema process initiates the command file which automatically finds and loads the information in the .unl files into the database. These files can be edited by the system manager to include additional defaults, part data, and codelist values. Use caution when editing these files since they are in a format for loading sequentially into a table. Certain columns are defined in the .sql file as being non-null which means the data entered from the .unl file must not be null for that column. There are two ways to modify existing rows in the reference schema. The .unl files can be modified before the schema is updated. — OR —

You can modify the rows in the created schema through 1. the RDBMS’s interactive query product, such as INFORMIX’s ISQL or FORMS, or ORACLE’s sqlplus, or INGRES’s SQL. the RIS Interactive Query Utility (win32app\ingr\share\ris\bin\risgui.exe). DB Access’s Database Edit Utility (see the section in the appendix entitled EE Manager for more information on this utility) the EE Database Utilities (risschema_mgr utility – win32app\ingr\share\ris\bin\rismgr.exe)

2. 3.

4.

The following steps can be used as a guideline for modifying the reference schema before it is updated: 1. To see which .unl files are being loaded into the reference database, look at the command (.cmd) file you will be using. The following is a typical example of what can be contained in this file:

FILE "olt.unl" DELIMITER "|"; INSERT INTO ol_type;

These lines tell the update schema process that the file "olt.unl" is to be inserted into the ol_type table. In this case the "olt.unl" file will exist in the current directory but a full path name can be specified on this file (e.g. FILE win32app\ingr\eerway\db\olt.unl). The delimiter is one character long. It tells the process that the "|" character separates each column of data in the olt.unl file. Do not remove any lines from this file that would effect the current .unl files from being loaded. All existing .unl files must be loaded for proper product execution. 2. Edit the desired .unl file making sure the delimiter "|" is used between each field. Each line represents a row to be inserted into the database and each field represents the corresponding column in the database. The following is an example of what a line in the "olt.unl" file might look like: 1|TRAY|240|241|204|0|0|1|

452

_ _______________
Appendix C: In this example, "1" is the index_column value, "TRAY" is the index_value column value, "240" is the ee_spec_table column, etc. If in the "olt.unl" file you would like to add additional entries, you can edit this file. Make sure you line up the delimited fields with the tables’ columns. The following example demonstrates how to load a new .unl file containing your own specification information into the reference database. 1. 2. cd win32app\ingr\eerway\db Edit the command file rwayref.cmd. Insert the following lines into this file: FILE "catalog.unl" DELIMITER "|"; INSERT INTO tray_spec; 3. Create a new file in the current directory, naming it catalog.unl. Edit this file to include any tray specification information you want to load into the reference database, separating each column of data with a pipe symbol (|). For example:

Modifying the Reference Schema

1|1|4|18|18|0|0|12|10|STEEL|A|0418SHV|4x18 VENTRIB SHV| 1|1|4|24|24|0|0|12|10|STEEL|A|0424SHV|4x24 VENTRIB SHV|

C: EE Databases

4.

When you have finished editing the .unl file, run the Update reference schema process to load the specification information into the tray_spec table.

453

_ _______________
EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide - February 2003

EE Raceway Reference Database Schema Description
This section lists and describes the tables in the EE Raceway reference database schema, and includes detailed information about the columns that comprise each table. An asterisk (*) indicates that you must not modify the column name. You should not modify those column names having a prefix of "ee_".

approv_status
This codelist table defines the available approval status values: blank, approved, not approved, and so forth. See the section entitled Codelists earlier in this appendix for a detailed description of this table. Column Name index_column index_value Type integer Char(20) Index no no Null no yes

index_column: an integer value used by the software to uniquely identify an approved status description. index_value: the column that contains the name of each available approved status.

away_part
This table stores the part specification information for the one-line type AIRWAY. Column Name ee_tl_type* ee_tl_subtype* ee_tl_qual* ee_angle* ee_symbol* ee_spec_key* ee_spec2_key* ee_part_key* ee_description* Type integer integer integer real Char( 6) Char( 28) Char( 28) Char( 28) Char( 40) Index no no no no no dups no uniq no Null yes yes yes yes yes yes yes no yes

ee_tl_type: the codelisted column used to define the three-line type. ee_tl_subtype: the codelisted column used to define the three-line subtype. ee_tl_qual: the codelisted column used to define additional information about the three-line type.

454

Appendix C:

_ _______________

EE Raceway Reference Database Schema Description

ee_angle: the column used to define the airway fitting bend angle. ee_symbol: the column used to define the airway part EDEN symbol name to the EE software. ee_spec_key: the key to the appropriate airway specification table row containing general specification information. ee_spec2_key: if the current airway part is a reducer, this column is the key to the row in the other airway specification. ee_part_key: the unique key to the appropriate reference database record for the default values. ee_description: the description of the default values for each ee_part_key.

away_spec
This table stores the general specification information for the one-line type AIRWAY. EE Raceway uses airways to reserve space for the routing of cable or other raceway material, and also to maintain connectivity to a raceway system. Column Name ee_units* ee_out_ht_diam* ee_out_width* ee_extension* ee_transition* ee_radius* ee_xs_cell* ee_spec_key* ee_description Type integer real real real real real Char( 6) Char( 28) Char( 40) Index no dups no no no no no uniq no Null no no yes yes yes yes yes no yes

C: EE Databases

ee_units: the codelisted column used to define the units of measurement. ee_out_ht_diam: the column used to define the airway outside diameter or height to the EE raceway software. ee_out_width: the column used to define the airway outside width to the EE raceway software. ee_extension: the column used to define the airway fitting extension length to the EE raceway software. ee_transition: the column used to define the airway fitting transition length to the EE raceway software. ee_radius: the column used to define the airway fitting bend radius to the EE raceway software.

455

_ _______________
EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide - February 2003 ee_xs_cell: the column used to define the airway cross section graphic that is used during sketch propagation. The only valid entries are: A, B, or C. The associated shapes are shown below.

ee_spec_key: the unique key to the appropriate reference database record for the default values. ee_description: the description of the default values for each ee_spec_key.

cardinal
This codelist table defines the available cardinal point locations (top left, center left, bottom left, and so forth). Refer to the section entitled Codelists earlier in this appendix for a detailed description of this table. Column Name ee_car_num ee_cardinal Type integer Char( 20) Index uniq dups Null no yes

ee_car_num: an integer value used by the software to uniquely identify a cardinal point description. ee_cardinal: the column that contains the name of each available cardinal point.

456

weight: the column used to define the conduit body weight. ee_units: the codelisted column used to define the units of measurement. Column Name vendor ee_units* nominal_size_1 nominal_size_2 weight material ee_part* ee_symbol* ee_dimension_1* ee_dimension_2* ee_dimension_3* ee_dimension_4* ee_dimension_5* ee_dimension_6* ee_part_key* ee_description* ee_tl_type* volume style ee_pull_point C: EE Databases vendor: the codelisted column used to define the vendor of the conduit body special fitting. ee_part: the column used to define the conduit body part number. ee_dimension_2: the column used to define a conduit body dimension value to eden and the raceway reports. nominal_size_2: the column used to define a conduit body nominal size. material: the column used to define the conduit body material. nominal_size_1: the column used to define a conduit body nominal size.Appendix C: _ _______________ Type integer integer real real real Char( 20) Char( 20) Char( 6) real real real real real real Char( 28) Char( 40) integer real Char( 20) integer Index dups no no no no no no no no no no no no no uniq no no no no no Null no no yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes no yes no yes yes yes EE Raceway Reference Database Schema Description cond_body This table stores the specification information for the manual fitting CONDUIT BODY. ee_symbol: the column used to define the conduit body part EDEN symbol name to the EE software. 457 . ee_dimension_3: the column used to define a conduit body dimension value to eden and the raceway reports. ee_dimension_1: the column used to define a conduit body dimension value to eden and the raceway reports.

458 . for example NEC 1990. ee_dimension_5: the column used to define a conduit body dimension value to eden and the raceway reports. ee_pull_point: the codelisted column used to define the conduit body as a cable pull point. This calculation assumes a homogeneous mixture of either all LEAD or all NON-LEAD armor types for the cable outer jackets for the cables routed within the same conduit.February 2003 ee_dimension_4: the column used to define a conduit body dimension value to eden and the raceway reports. ee_description: the description of the default values for each ee_part_key. If the cables contained in a conduit exceed the maximum allowable conduit fill. ee_tl_type: the codelisted column used to define the three-line type._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . ee_num_cables: number of cables in the conduit. volume: the column used to define a conduit body volume. style:the column used to describe the conduit body style or type. ee_part_key: the unique key to the appropriate reference database record for the default values. cond_fill_calc This table is used to specify the maximum allowable percent fill of a conduit based on the armor type of the cable outer jackets and number of cables within the conduit. ee_jacket_armor: material type of the cable outer jacket armor. then the conduit is marked as being overfilled. ee_dimension_6: the column used to define a conduit body dimension value to eden and the raceway reports. ee_max_fill: maximum allowable percent fill. Column Name ee_rule_set ee_jacket_armor ee_num_cables ee_max_fill Type Char( 20) Char( 10) integer real Index no no no no Null yes yes no yes ee_rule_set: identification of the rule set that applies to the raceway system fill calculations.

ee_weight: the column used to define the conduit part weight. ee_description: the description of the default values for each ee_part_key. ee_part_key: the unique key to the appropriate reference database record for the default values. ee_angle: the column used to define the conduit fitting bend angle. C: EE Databases 459 . ee_spec2_key: if the current conduit part is a reducer. ee_tl_qual: the codelisted column used to define additional information about the three-line type. ee_spec_key: the key to the appropriate conduit specification table row containing general specification information. Column Name ee_tl_type* ee_tl_subtype* ee_tl_qual* ee_angle* ee_weight* ee_part* ee_symbol* ee_spec_key* ee_spec2_key* ee_part_key* ee_description* ee_tl_type: the codelisted column used to define the three-line type. this column is the key to the row in the other conduit specification. ee_symbol: the column used to define the conduit part EDEN symbol name to the EE software.Appendix C: _ _______________ Type integer integer integer real real Char( 20) Char( 6) Char( 28) Char( 28) Char( 28) Char( 40) Index no no no no no no no dups no uniq no Null no no no yes yes yes yes yes yes no yes EE Raceway Reference Database Schema Description cond_part This table stores the part specification information for the one-line type CONDUIT. ee_part: the column used to define the conduit part number. ee_tl_subtype: the codelisted column used to define the three-line subtype.

ee_extension: the column used to define the conduit fitting extension length to the EE raceway software. material: the column used to define the conduit material._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . nominal_size: the column used to define a conduit nominal size. ee_out_ht_diam: the column used to define the conduit outside diameter to the EE raceway software. ee_transition: the column used to define the conduit fitting transition length to the EE raceway software. ee_units: the codelisted column used to define the units of measurement. weight: the column used to define the conduit weight per unit length. 460 . ee_dimension_1: the column used to define a conduit dimension value to eden and the raceway reports.February 2003 cond_spec This table stores the general specification information for the one-line type CONDUIT. Column Name vendor ee_units* nominal_size ee_dimension_1* ee_out_ht_diam* ee_extension* ee_transition* ee_radius* weight material ee_const_type ee_xs_cell* ee_spec_key* ee_description Type integer integer real real real real real real real Char( 20) integer Char( 6) Char( 28) Char( 40) Index dups no no no dups no no no no no no no uniq no Null no no yes yes no yes yes yes yes yes no yes no yes vendor: the codelisted column used to define the vendor of the conduit specification. ee_const_type: the column used to define construction type. ee_radius: the column used to define the conduit fitting bend radius to the EE raceway software.

drawing_type This codelist table defines what drawing types are available for use. sheet: the column used to define the EE drawing sheet name. The associated shapes are shown below. ee_key: the unique key to the appropriate reference database record for the default values.Appendix C: _ _______________ EE Raceway Reference Database Schema Description ee_xs_cell: the column used to define the conduit cross section graphic that is used during sketch propagation. 461 . ee_description: the description of the default values for each ee_spec_key. Column Name drawing_type* sheet* ee_key* ee_description* Type Char( 20) Char( 20) Char( 28) Char( 40) Index no no uniq no Null no yes no yes C: EE Databases drawing_type: the column used to define the EE product drawing type. or C. drawing This table defines both the columns that you can annotate for title blocks and their default column values. ee_description: the description of the default values for each ee_key. B. The only valid entries are: A. Refer to the section entitled Codelists earlier in the appendix for a detailed description of this table. Column Name ee_code code_desc Type Char(20) Char(20) Index uniq no Null no yes ee_code: the column used by the software to uniquely identify a drawing type description. code_desc: the column that contains the description of each available drawing type. ee_spec_key: the unique key to the appropriate reference database record for the default values.

ee_out_width: the column used to define the ductbank outside width to the EE Raceway software. duct_spec This table stores the general specification information for the one-line type DUCTBANK. ee_out_ht_diam: the column used to define the ductbank outside height to the EE Raceway software. ee_description: the description of the default values for each ee_key.February 2003 drop_point This table defines both the columns you can annotate for drop point symbols and their default column values. Column Name ee_units ee_out_ht_diam ee_out_width material ee_xs_cell ee_spec_key ee_description Type integer real real Char( 20) Char( 6) Char( 28) Char( 40) Index no dups dups no no uniq no Null no no yes yes yes no yes ee_units: the codelisted column used to define the units of measurement. Column Name tag ee_dist_down_ol* ee_dist_to_rcp* ee_key* ee_description* Type Char(20) real real Char(28) Char(40) Index no no no unique no Null yes yes yes no yes tag: the column used to define the drop point tag. ee_dist_down_ol: the column used to define the distance along the one-line to the drop point. ee_dist_to_rcp: the column used to define the distance between the one-line and the rcp. ee_key: the unique key to the appropriate reference database record for the default values._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . material: the column used to define the ductbank material. 462 .

ee_description: the description of the default values for each ee_spec_key. 463 . B. ee_spec_key: the unique key to the appropriate reference database record for the default values. column_name: the column within table_name that cannot be posted back to the graphics. The associated shapes are shown below. Column Name nominal_size ee_dimension_1 ee_area Type real real real Index uniq no no Null no yes yes C: EE Databases nominal_size: the column used to define a conduit nominal size that corresponds to the same column in the cond_spec table. ee_graphic_only EE applications use this table to define which columns in the project database cannot be posted back to graphics through the Post Attribute process. ee_area: the column used to define the cross sectional area of the conduit of the given nominal size. ee_cond_x_area This table stores the cross sectional area of conduit identified by its nominal size. Column Name table_name column_name Type Char( 32) Char( 32) Index uniq uniq Null yes yes table_name: the name of the desired table containing a column that cannot be posted.Appendix C: _ _______________ EE Raceway Reference Database Schema Description ee_xs_cell: the column used to define the ductbank cross section graphic that is used during sketch propagation. ee_dimension_1: the column used to define a conduit dimension value that corresponds to the same column in the cond_spec table. The only valid entries are: A. or C.

Column Name index_column index_value Type Char( 20) Char( 20) Index uniq dups Null no yes index_column: an abbreviated value used by the software to uniquely identify an ee_pcbl_color description. Refer to the section entitled Codelists earlier in this appendix for a detailed description of this table.February 2003 ee_pcbl_code This codelist table defines the codes that are used in the ee_pseudo_cable table for the EERWAY Conduit Sizing command. index_value: the column that contains the description of each available ee_pcbl_color color. 464 ._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . Refer to the section entitled Codelists earlier in this appendix for a detailed description of this table. ee_pcbl_config This codelist table defines the cable configurations that are used in the ee_pseudo_cable table for the EE Raceway Conduit Sizing command. Refer to the section entitled Codelists earlier in this appendix for a detailed description of this table. index_value: the column that contains the description of each available ee_pcbl_config. Column Name index_column index_value Type Char( 20) Char( 20) Index uniq dups Null no yes index_column: an abbreviated value used by the software to uniquely identify an ee_pcbl_config description. index_value: the column that contains the description of each available ee_pcbl_code. ee_pcbl_color This codelist table defines the colors that are used in the ee_pseudo_cable table for the EE Raceway Conduit Sizing command. Column Name index_column index_value Type Char( 20) Char( 20) Index uniq dups Null no yes index_column: an abbreviated value used by the software to uniquely identify an ee_pcbl_code description.

Refer to the section entitled Codelists earlier in this appendix for a detailed description of this table. 465 . ee_pcbl_size This codelist table defines the cable/wire sizes that are used in the ee_pseudo_cable table for the EE Raceway Conduit Sizing command. Refer to the section entitled Codelists earlier in this appendix for a detailed description of this table. Column Name index_column index_value Type Char( 20) Char( 40) Index uniq dups Null no yes index_column: an abbreviated value used by the software to uniquely identify an ee_pcbl_volt description.Appendix C: _ _______________ EE Raceway Reference Database Schema Description ee_pcbl_insul This codelist table defines the insulation types that are used in the ee_pseudo_cable table for the EE Raceway Conduit Sizing command. index_value: the column that contains the description of each available ee_pcbl_volt. Column Name index_column index_value Type Char( 20) Char(100) Index uniq dups Null no yes index_column: an abbreviated value used by the software to uniquely identify an eepcbl_insul description. index_value: the column that contains the description of each available ee_pcbl_size. ee_pcbl_volt This codelisted table defines the cable/wire voltage ratings that are used in the ee_pseudo_cable table for the EE Raceway Conduit Sizing command. index_value: the column that contains the description of each available ee_pcbl_insul. Column Name index_column index_value Type Char( 20) Char( 20) Index uniq dups Null no yes C: EE Databases index_column: an abbreviated value used by the software to uniquely identify an ee_pcbl_size description.

ee_units: the codelisted column used to define the units of measurement. Column Name ee_code config cable_size ee_color voltage insulation item_no ee_area ee_units ee_code: the cable code of the cable. Type Char( 20) Char( 20) Char( 20) Char( 20) Char( 20) Char( 20) Char( 20) real integer Index no no no no no no uniq no no Null yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes no ee_system This codelist table defines the systems that are available to contain EE Raceway graphics._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . system_name: the column that contains the name of each available system. insulation: the insulation type of the wire/cable. config: the cable configuration of the cable. 466 . cable_size: the size of the wire/cable. ee_color: the insulation color of the wire/cable. Column Name system_num system_name Type integer Char( 20) Index uniq dups Null no yes system_num: an integer value used by the software to uniquely identify a system name. ee_area: the cross sectional area of the wire/cable. Refer to the section entitled Codelists earlier in the appendix for a detailed description of this table.February 2003 ee_pseudo_cable This table defines the cable/wires that are used in the EE Raceway Conduit Sizing command. voltage: the insulation voltage rating of the wire/cable. item_no: the unique identifier for each wire/cable.

this column is used to further describe what would make an entry unique. If not. then a blank column value would cause the EE processes to create a new row in the database. Column Name index_column* index_value* Type integer Char( 20) Index uniq dups Null yes yes index_column: an integer value used by the software to uniquely identify the ’yes/no’ response. Multiple rows in the database could contain the same table name if multiple columns are required to make an entry unique. 467 . Column Name index_column* index_value* index_column: an integer value used by the software to uniquely identify an ee_unit description. Column Name table_name column_name ee_comp_type* blank_allowed Type Char( 32) Char( 32) Char( 10) integer Index uniq uniq uniq no Null yes yes yes yes C: EE Databases table_name: the name of the table that requires single data entry. blank_allowed: is used to define whether or not the column in column_name is allowed to be blank. Refer to the section entitled Codelists earlier in this appendix for a detailed description of this table.Appendix C: _ _______________ Type integer Char( 20) Index uniq dups Null no yes EE Raceway Reference Database Schema Description ee_units This codelist table defines the units that are used for one-line dimension values. column_name: the name of the column in table_name that makes an entry unique. ee_comp_type: is used by the EE processors to define what product will use the entry. ee_yes_no This codelist table defines the possible column values for a ’yes/no’ question in a table column. Refer to the section entitled Codelists earlier in the appendix for a detailed description of this table. If a table is not represented in the ee_unique table. where the information crosses products. In some entries. a row will be loaded into the appropriate table for each graphic element. index_value: the column that contains the description of each available ee_unit. ee_unique EE applications use this table to define which columns make a row in a table unique for single data entry.

EE Raceway uses space envelopes to reserve blocks of space for raceway without maintaining connectivity to any raceway system.February 2003 index_value: the column that contains the ’yes/no’ column value. 468 . ee_key: the unique key to the appropriate reference database record for the default values. ee_description: the description of the default values for each ee_key. Space envelopes are not available with EE Raceway at the time of this printing._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . envelope This table defines both the columns you can annotate for space envelopes and their default column values. Column Name tag ee_key* ee_description* Type Char( 20) Char( 28) Char( 40) Index no uniq no Null yes no yes tag: the column used to define the space envelope tag.

ee_part_key: the unique key to appropriate reference database record for the default values. 469 . ee_dimension_3: the column used to define a light fixture dimension value to EDEN and the raceway reports. voltage: the column used to define the light fixture’s voltage. ee_dimension_1: the column used to define a light fixture dimension value to EDEN and the raceway reports.Appendix C: _ _______________ Type Char( 6) integer real real real Char( 28) real real real real Char( 40) Char( 3) real real real Char( 20) integer Char( 4) integer real Char( 6) integer Char( 32) Char( 32) Char( 32) Char( 32) integer integer Index no no no no no uniq no no no no no no no no no no dups no no no no no no no no no no no Null yes yes yes yes yes no yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes no yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes no yes EE Raceway Reference Database Schema Description light_fixture This table stores the specification information for the manually placed equipment LIGHT_FIXTURE. Column Name ee_symbol voltage ee_dimension_1 ee_dimension_2 ee_dimension_3 ee_part_key fl_amps ee_dimension_4 ee_dimension_5 ee_dimension_6 ee_description item_type ee_dimension_7 ee_dimension_8 ee_dimension_9 item_code_num vendor num_wires num_phase_wires power_factor area_class oper_temp_deg_c text_1 text_2 text_3 text_4 ee_units ee_pull_point C: EE Databases ee_symbol: the column used to define the light fixture EDEN symbol name to the EE software. ee_dimension_2: the column used to define a light fixture dimension value to EDEN and the raceway reports.

text_2: the column used to describe characteristics about the light fixture. text_4: the column used to describe characteristics about the light fixture. ee_description: the description of the default values for each ee_part_key item_type: the column used to define a light fixture’s item type. 470 ._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . area_class: the column used to define a light fixture’s area class. num_phase_wires: the column used to define the number of phase wires in a light fixture. ee_dimension_6: the column used to define a light fixture dimension value to EDEN and the raceway reports. power_factor: the column used to define a light fixture’s power factor. num_wires: the column used to define the number of wires in a light fixture. oper_temp_deg_c: the column used to define a light fixture’s operating temperature. ee_units: the codelisted column used to define the units of measurement. text_3: the column used to describe characteristics about the light fixture. item_code_num: the column used to define a light fixture’s item code number. ee_dimension_9: the column used to define a light fixture dimension value to EDEN and the raceway reports. ee_dimension_5: the column used to define a light fixture dimension value to EDEN and the raceway reports. ee_pull_point: the codelisted column used to define a light fixture as a cable pull point.February 2003 fl_amps: the column used to define a light fixture’s full load amps. ee_dimension_7: the column used to define a light fixture dimension value to EDEN and the raceway reports. text_1: the column used to describe characteristics about the light fixture. vendor: the codelisted column used to define the vendor of the equipment light fixture. ee_dimension_8: the column used to define a light fixture dimension value to EDEN and the raceway reports. ee_dimension_4: the column used to define a light fixture dimension value to EDEN and the raceway reports.

Appendix C: _ _______________ Type integer Char( 20) integer integer integer Index uniq dups no no no Null no yes yes yes yes EE Raceway Reference Database Schema Description manual_part This codelist table defines the available manually-placed special fittings (conduit body. C: EE Databases ee_manpart_type: the column used to tell the load processor to load the manual part into either the project database "fitting" table or the "panel" table. 471 . Refer to the section entitled Codelists earlier in the appendix for a detailed description of this table. It must exactly match the name of the desired table. mscatalog Microstation 32 requires that every database used in graphics contain a table called mscatalog. In general. Column Name tablename entitynum screenform reporttable sqlreview fencefilter dastable alias_name key_columns key_description Type Char( 32) integer Char( 64) Char( 64) Char(240) Char(240) Char(32) Char( 64) Char( 80) Char( 32) Index no uniq no no no no no no no no Null no no yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes tablename: the name of the table in the database. there will be one row in mscatalog for each database table that is linked to graphic elements. This table holds the entity numbers for all other tables in the database. Column Name index_column* index_value* ee_part_table* ee_rcp_ol_type* ee_manpart_type index_column: an integer value used by the software to uniquely identify a manual_part description. index_value: the column that contains the description of each available manual_part. ee_part_table: an mscatalog number of the table containing special fitting part specification information. pullbox). Both DBAccess and RISRPT (RIS Report Writer) use this table. Any table not directly linked to graphics/EE elements does not need to appear in mscatalog. ee_rcp_ol_type: the index_column number from the one-line type codelist table for the EE raceway connect point of the special fitting.

key_columns: a column containing the column_name which uniquely identifies a particular row in the table. Column Name table_name column_name join_table code_column text_column index_column* index_value* Type Char( 32) Char( 32) Char( 32) Char( 32) Char( 32) Char( 32) integer Index uniq uniq no no no no no Null no no no no no yes yes table_name: the name of the desired table containing a column with codelist values. column_name: the column within table_name which contains codelist values. alias_name: a column used by EE that contains the descriptive alias of tablename. RISRPT. The MicroStation 32 database interface places the entity number of a table in the linkage it creates between a graphics element and a table row. mscodelist This table provides limited support for DMRS-like codelists. EE places the entity number in the EE header linkage of annotation in order to identify which table the text is linked to. screenform: not currently used by MicroStation 32. 472 . The entity number uniquely identifies a particular table in the database. It must be a positive integer in the range of 1 to 65535._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . key_description: the descriptive alias for key_columns.February 2003 entitynum: the entity number assigned to a table. sqlreview: an sql select statement that MicroStation 32 uses to review rows and columns. reporttable: a temporary table used by MicroStation 32. MicroStation 32. EE uses key_columns as the correlation key. A codelist is a data structure that represents a character string which is then represented in the database by integer or character codes. The codelist approach minimizes storage requirements and simplifies database administration. and DBAccess all support this table. EE uses this table to restrict input for a particular column to a pre-defined set of values. Is is created for each table having graphic linkages within a fence. dastable: specifies the name of the table that maps displayable attribute types to the sql select statements used by MicroStation 32 for loading text into displayable attributes. fencefilter: an sql select statement that MicroStation 32 uses to restrict elements during fence operations.

index_column: a column name that. access_flag: the column containing a code used to identify the accessibility of a particular column by an EE user. will impose additional conditions to allow multiple codelists to be represented in the same database table. In general. there is one row in mscolumns for each column in an attribute table (for those attributes that exist in annotation). This column can be thought of as a filter which restricts the display of certain attributes depending on the mode of work the user is performing. mscolumns This table specifies column-specific data for EE tables.Appendix C: _ _______________ EE Raceway Reference Database Schema Description join_table: the codelist table. while a value of 1 indicates that it allows read/write access. EE uses the mscolumns information to control display of column information during annotation. A value of 0 indicates that the column is read_only. A column that does not exist as annotation linked to a graphics/EE element does not need to appear in mscolumns. C: EE Databases Column Name entitynum attrnum column_name alias_name access_flag work_mode ee_column_order Type integer integer Char( 32) Char( 32) smallint smallint smallint Index uniq uniq no no no no no Null no no no yes no no no entitynum: the entity number assigned to the table whose columns are being described. The order in which attributes appear on the annotation form is determined by the value in the column ee_column_order. work_mode: the column containing the code that identifies the use of a particular column by the EE software. code_column: the column in join_table that contains the code values. 473 . if not NULL. index_value: the column that provides the index to a specific list within a multiple codelist table. It must exactly match the column name in the database. attrnum: the attribute number assigned to a particular column within a table. alias_name: the column containing the descriptive alias of column_name. the work_mode value is set to zero. Since all EE Raceway column values are displayed on the primary form. column_name: the name of a column in the database. Entity numbers between mscatalog and mscolumns must be consistent. text_column: the column that contains the actual values represented by the corresponding code value in code_column.

ee_part_table: an mscatalog number of the table containing the part specification information. and so forth). ee_spec_table: an mscatalog number of the table containing general specification information. ee_ol_table: an mscatalog number of the table containing general one-line information. wireway. 474 .February 2003 ee_column_order: the column used to determine the order in which to display attributes on the annotation form. Column Name index_column* index_value* ee_spec_table* ee_part_table* ee_ol_table* ee_rcp_part_table* ee_max_run_angle* ee_priority_level* Type integer Char( 20) integer integer integer integer integer integer Index uniq dups no no no no no no Null no yes yes yes yes yes yes yes index_column: an integer value used by the software to uniquely identify an ol_type description. index_value: the column that contains the description of each available ol_type. ee_max_run_angle: an integer containing the maximum allowed value of the sum of all bend angles in a run. This value is used to determine whether one one-line type can break or attach to another one-line type. conduit. A value of zero states that the sum of all bend angles in a run is unlimited. ee_priority_level: an integer value used to define the routing priority level of the one-line type. ol_type This codelist table defines the available one-line types (tray. Refer to the section entitled Codelists earlier in the appendix for a detailed description of this table. ee_rcp_part_table: an mscatalog number of the table containing special fitting part specification information._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide .

panel_descrip: the column which defines the panel/equipment description. Column Name tag add_weight ee_ol_length* ee_spec_key* ee_key* ee_description* tag: the column used to define the one-line tag. add_weight: the column used to define an additional weight per unit length. ee_description: the description of the default values for each ee_key. C: EE Databases ee_key: the unique key to the appropriate reference database record for the default values.Appendix C: _ _______________ Type Char( 20) real real Char( 28) Char( 28) Char( 40) Index no no no no uniq no Null yes yes yes no no yes EE Raceway Reference Database Schema Description one_line This table defines both the columns you can annotate for raceway one-lines and their default column values. Column Name panel panel_descrip ee_approv_status ee_approv_date ee_create_date ee_last_rev_dat ee_key ee_description Type Char( 20) Char( 20) integer Char( 40) Char( 40) Char( 40) Char( 28) Char( 40) Index no no no no no no uniq no Null yes yes yes yes yes yes no yes panel: the column which defines the panel/equipment name. ee_approv_status: the codelisted column used to define the approval status. ee_ol_length: the column used to define the weight per unit length. ee_spec_key: the key to the appropriate reference database record for the general specification information on the three-line elements. panel This table defines both the columns you can annotate for panels/equipment and their default column values. 475 .

ee_create_date: the column used to define the date the panel/equipment was created._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . ee_key: this column contains the EE Reference database key. 476 . ee_last_rev_dat: the column used to define the date the panel/equipment was last revised. prj_rule_set: this column contains the project rule set. Column Name prj_number prj_name location prj_rule_set base_rule_set ee_key ee_description Type char(20) char(60) char(60) char(20) char(20) char(28) char(60) Index dups no no no no uniq no Null yes yes yes yes yes no yes prj_number: this column contains the project number. ee_key: the unique key to the appropriate reference database record for the default values. location: this column contains the location. ee_description:this column contains the key description. ee_description: the description of the default values for each ee_key project This table stores information for the project.February 2003 ee_approv_date: the column used to define the date the approval status was changed. prj_name: this column contains the project name. base_rule_set: this column contains the base rule set.

C: EE Databases 477 . ee_units: the codelisted column used to define the untis of measurement. ee_pull_point: the codelisted column used to define a pullbox as a cable pull point. ee_out_width: the column used to define the pullbox outside width to the EERWAY software . Column Name vendor ee_units* ee_out_ht_diam* ee_out_width* ee_dimension_1 weight material ee_part* ee_symbol* ee_part_key* ee_description ee_tl_type ee_pull_point vendor: the codelisted column used to define the pullbox vendor. ee_out_ht_diam: the column used to define the pullbox outside height to the EERWAY software. material: the column used to define the pullbox weight material. weight: the column used to define the pullbox weight.Appendix C: _ _______________ Type integer integer real real real real char(20) char(20) char(6) char(28) char(40) integer integer Index dups no dups dups dups no no no no uniq no no no Null no no no yes yes yes yes yes yes no yes no yes EE Raceway Reference Database Schema Description pullbox This table stores the specification information for the manual fitting PULLBOX. ee_tl_type: the codelisted column used to define the three-line type. ee_symbol: the column used to define the pullbox part Eden symbol name to the EE software. ee_part: the column used to define the pullbox part number. ee_description: the description of the default values for each ee_part_key. ee_part_key: the unique key to the appropriate reference database record for the default values. ee_dimension_1: the column used to define the pullbox dimension value to Eden and the raceway reports.

_ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . Column Name index_column* index_value* Type integer Char( 20) Index uniq dups Null no yes index_column: an integer value used by the software to uniquely identify a rcp_type description.February 2003 rcp This table defines both the columns you can annotate for raceway connect points (RCPs) and their default column values. 478 . ee_description: the description of the default values for each ee_key. ee_extension: the column used to define the raceway connect point fitting extension length. ee_rcp_type: the codelisted column used to define the raceway connect point type. rcp_type This codelist table defines additional information about EE Raceway connect points (RCPs). ee_radius: the column used to define the raceway connect point fitting bend radius. ee_transition: the column used to define the raceway connect point fitting transition length. ee_key: the unique key to the appropriate reference database record for the default values. Refer to the section entitled Codelists earlier in the appendix for a detailed description of this table. Column Name tag ee_rcp_type* ee_extension* ee_transition* ee_radius* ee_part_key* ee_key* ee_description* Type Char( 20) integer real real real Char( 28) Char( 28) Char( 40) Index no no no no no no uniq no Null yes yes yes yes yes yes no yes tag: the column used to define the raceway connect point tag. ee_part_key: the key to the appropriate reference database record for the values on the manually placed fitting. index_value: the column that contains the description of each available rcp_type.

ee_pln_angles: the column that contains the planar angles between the intersecting one-lines. Column Name ee_ol_type ee_tl_type ee_tl_subtype ee_tl_qual ee_num_ols ee_pln_angles ee_prp_angles ee_part_table ee_symbol ee_ol_type: the index_column number from the one-line type codelist table of the intersecting onelines. ee_part_table: an mscatalog number of the table containing the fitting to be placed at the RCP.Appendix C: _ _______________ Type integer integer integer integer integer Char( 40) Char( 40) integer Char( 6) Index uniq no no no uniq uniq uniq no dups Null no no no no yes yes yes yes yes EE Raceway Reference Database Schema Description tl_fit_env This table is used by the manual fitting command to determine which fitting to place at an RCP based on the intersecting one-lines and the fitting environment rules listed in this table. Angles must be defined relative from a single one-line. Angles must be defined relative from a single one-line. ee_symbol: the column used to define the fitting EDEN symbol name to the EE software. Zero if no check is to be performed. Zero if no check is to be performed. ee_num_ols: the column that contains the number of intersecting one-lines. ee_tl_qual: the index_column number from the three_line qualifier codelist table of the fitting to be placed at the RCP. ee_tl_type: the index_column number from the three_line type codelist table of the fitting to be placed at the RCP. C: EE Databases ee_tl_subtype: the index_column number from the three_line subtype codelist table of the fitting to be placed at the RCP. ee_prp_angles: the column that contains the non-planar angles between the intersecting one-lines. 479 . Zero if no check is to be performed.

Column Name index_column* index_value* Type integer Char( 20) Index uniq dups Null no yes index_column: an integer value used by the software to uniquely identify a tl_subtype description.February 2003 tl_qual This codelist table defines additional information about the available three-line types (rigid. tl_subtype This codelist table defines the available three-line subtypes (vertical. reducer. Refer to the section entitled Codelists earlier in the appendix for a detailed description of this table. elbow. wye. Column Name index_column* index_value* Type integer Char( 20) Index uniq dups Null no yes index_column: an integer value used by the software to uniquely identify a tl_type description. flexible. tl_type This codelist table defines the available three-line types (straight. index_value: the column that contains the description of each available tl_type._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . Refer to the section entitled Codelists earlier in the appendix for a detailed description of this table. bendable. and so forth). index_value: the column that contains the description of each available tl_subtype. and so forth). index_value: the column that contains the description of each available tl_qual. cross. Refer to the section entitled Codelists earlier in the appendix for a detailed description of this table. horizontal. and so forth). Column Name index_column* index_value* Type integer Char( 20) Index uniq dups Null no yes index_column: an integer value used by the software to uniquely identify a tl_qual description. 480 .

to_support This table defines both the columns you can annotate for support equipment symbols and their default column values. Column Name tag ee_key* ee_description* Type Char( 20) Char( 28) Char( 40) Index no uniq no Null yes no yes C: EE Databases tag: the column used to define the support pointer tag. ee_part_key: the key to the appropriate reference database record for the values on the equipment. ee_description: the description of the default values for each ee_key. ee_eqp_key: the unique key to the appropriate reference database record for the default values. ee_description: the description of the default values for each ee_key. ee_key: the unique key to the appropriate reference database record for the default values. to_support symbols are not available with EE Raceway at the time of this printing. Column Name ee_eqp_table ee_part_key ee_eqp_key* ee_description* ee_eqp_table: the name of the reference database table containing the equipment specification information. 481 .Appendix C: _ _______________ Type Char( 32) Char( 28) Char( 28) Char( 40) Index no no uniq no Null yes yes no yes EE Raceway Reference Database Schema Description to_equip This table defines both the columns that you can annotate for equipment pointer symbols and their default column values.

_ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . this column is the key to the row in the other tray specification. ee_spec_key: the key to the appropriate tray specification table row containing general specification information.February 2003 tray_part This table stores the part specification information for the one-line type TRAY. 482 . Column Name ee_tl_type* ee_tl_subtype* ee_tl_qual* ee_angle* ee_weight* ee_part* ee_symbol* ee_spec_key* ee_spec2_key* ee_part_key* ee_description* Type integer integer integer real real Char( 20) Char( 6) Char( 28) Char( 28) Char( 28) Char( 40) Index no no no no no no no dups no uniq no Null no no no yes yes yes yes yes yes no yes ee_tl_type: the codelisted column used to define the three-line type. ee_tl_qual: the codelisted column used to define additional information about the three-line type. ee_spec2_key: if the current tray part is a reducer. ee_tl_subtype: the codelisted column used to define the three-line subtype. ee_angle: the column used to define the tray fitting bend angle. ee_part: the column used to define the tray part number. ee_weight: the column used to define the tray part weight. ee_symbol: the column used to define the tray part EDEN symbol name to the EE software. ee_part_key: the unique key to the appropriate reference database record for the default values. ee_description: the description of the default values for each ee_part_key.

ee_out_width: the column used to define the tray outside width to the EE raceway software. ee_out_ht_diam: the column used to define the tray outside height to the EE raceway software. ee_radius: the column used to define the tray fitting bend radius to the EE raceway software. ee_units: the codelisted column used to define the units of measurement. material: the column used to define the tray material. ee_dimension_1: the column used to define a tray dimension value to eden and the raceway reports. ee_extension: the column used to define the tray fitting extension length to the EE raceway software. ee_dimension_2: the column used to define a tray dimension value to eden and the raceway reports. Column Name vendor ee_units* ee_dimension_1* ee_out_ht_diam* ee_dimension_2* ee_out_width* ee_extension* ee_transition* ee_radius* weight material ee_const_type ee_xs_cell* ee_spec_key* ee_description vendor: the codelisted column used to define the vendor of the tray specification.Appendix C: _ _______________ Type integer integer real real real real real real real real Char( 20) integer Char( 6) Char( 28) Char( 40) Index dups no no dups no dups no no no no no no no uniq no Null no no yes no yes yes yes yes yes yes yes no yes no yes EE Raceway Reference Database Schema Description tray_spec This table stores the general specification information for the one-line type TRAY. ee_const_type: the column used to define construction type. weight: the column used to define the tray weight per unit length. C: EE Databases 483 . ee_transition: the column used to define the tray fitting transition length to the EE raceway software.

wway_part This table stores the part specification information for the one-line type WIREWAY. 484 ._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . catalog: the column that contains catalog information. B. ee_description: the description of the default values for each ee_spec_key. Column Name ee_tl_type* ee_tl_subtype* ee_tl_qual* ee_angle* ee_weight* ee_part* ee_symbol* ee_spec_key* ee_spec2_key* ee_part_key* ee_description* Type integer integer integer real real Char( 20) Char( 6) Char( 28) Char( 28) Char( 28) Char( 40) Index no no no no no no no dups no uniq no Null yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes no yes ee_tl_type: the codelisted column used to define the three-line type. ee_spec_key: the unique key to the appropriate reference database record for the default values. Refer to the section entitled Codelists earlier in the appendix for a detailed description of this table. or C. The associated shapes are shown below. vendor This codelist table defines the vendors that are available for specifications. Column Name index_column* index_value* catalog Type integer Char( 20) char(20) Index uniq dups no Null no yes yea index_column: an integer value used by the software to uniquely identify a vendor name. index_value: the column that contains the name of each available vendor. The only valid entries are: A.February 2003 ee_xs_cell: the column used to define the tray cross section graphic that is used during sketch propagation.

this column is the key to the row in the other wireway specification. Column Name vendor ee_units* ee_dimension_1* ee_out_ht_diam* ee_dimension_2* ee_out_width* ee_extension* ee_transition* ee_radius* weight material ee_const_type ee_xs_cell* ee_spec_key* ee_description Type integer integer real real real real real real real real Char( 20) integer Char( 6) Char( 28) Char( 40) Index dups no no dups no dups no no no no no no no uniq no Null no no yes no yes yes yes yes yes yes yes no yes no yes vendor: the codelisted column used to define the vendor of the wireway specification. C: EE Databases wway_spec This table stores the general specification information for the one-line type WIREWAY. 485 . ee_spec2_key: if the current wireway part is a reducer. ee_description: the description of the default values for each ee_part_key. ee_angle: the column used to define the wireway fitting bend angle. ee_spec_key: the key to the appropriate wireway specification table row containing general specification information. ee_part: the column used to define the wireway part number. ee_tl_qual: the codelisted column used to define additional information about the three-line type.Appendix C: _ _______________ EE Raceway Reference Database Schema Description ee_tl_subtype: the codelisted column used to define the three-line subtype. ee_dimension_1: the column used to define a wireway dimension value to eden and the raceway reports. ee_part_key: the unique key to the appropriate reference database record for the default values. ee_weight: the column used to define the wireway part weight. ee_units: the codelisted column used to define the units of measurement. ee_symbol: the column used to define the wireway part EDEN symbol name to the EE software.

_ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . ee_extension: the column used to define the wireway fitting extension length to the EE raceway software. The only valid entries are: A. ee_spec_key: the unique key to the appropriate reference database record for the default values. 486 . ee_out_width: the column used to define the wireway outside width to the EE raceway software. material: the column used to define the wireway material. ee_description: the description of the default values for each ee_spec_key. ee_transition: the column used to define the wireway fitting transition length to the EE raceway software. ee_radius: the column used to define the wireway fitting bend radius to the EE raceway software. The associated shapes are shown below.February 2003 ee_out_ht_diam: the column used to define the wireway outside height to the EE raceway software. weight: the column used to define the wireway weight per unit length. ee_xs_cell: the column used to define the wireway cross section graphic that is used during sketch propagation. or C. ee_dimension_2: the column used to define a wireway dimension value to eden and the raceway reports. ee_const_type: the column used to define construction type. B.

_ _______________
Appendix C:

EE Raceway Project Database Schema Description

EE Raceway Project Database Schema Description
This section lists and describes the tables in the EE Raceway project database schema, and includes detailed information about the columns that comprise each table. An asterisk (*) indicates that you must not modify the column name. You should not modify those column names having a prefix of "ee_".

cabsch_spec
This table contains information about the cable schedule for underground cable design. Column Name revision_numb cable_numb numb_cables numb_conductor conductor_size cable_type_code service_voltage undgrnd_length abvgrnd_length from_equi_numb from_detail not_used plan_assem_dwg to_equi_numb to_detail to_plan_drw_num cont_sta_type quan_term_kits ol_diagram_numb not_used2 remarks drawing_numb drawing_rev Type Char( 3) Char( 8) integer Char( 5) Char( 8) Char( 6) Char( 7) real real Char( 15) Char( 8) Char( 6) Char( 20) Char( 15) Char( 8) Char( 20) Char( 4) Char( 6) Char( 20) Char( 8) Char( 38) Char( 20) Char( 2) Index no uniq no no no no no no no no no no no no no no no no no no no uniq no Null yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes

C: EE Databases

revision_numb: the column containing the revision number. cable_numb: the column containing the area number, cable number, and cable number ID. numb_cables: the column containing the number of cables. numb_conductor: the column containing the number of conductors.

487

_ _______________
EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide - February 2003 conductor_size: the column containing the conductor size. cable_type_code: the column containing the cable type. service_voltage: the column containing the service voltage. undgrnd_length: the column containing the underground length. abvgrnd_length: the column containing the above ground length. from_equi_numb: the column containing the From Equipment Number. from_detail: the column containing the From Detail Number. not_used: this column is reserved for later use. plan_assem_dwg: the column containing plan drawings or standard assembly drawing number. to_equi_numb: the column containing the To Equipment Number. to_detail: the column containing the To Detail Number. to_plan_drw_num: the column containing the To Plan drawing number. cont_sta_type: the column containing the control station type. quan_term_kits: the column containing the quantity of term. ol_diagram_numb: the column containing the one-line diagram number. not_used2: this column is reserved for later use. remarks: the column containing the remarks for cable schedule. drawing_numb: the column containing the drawing number. drawing_rev: the column containing the drawing revision. drawing_numb can have duplicate values but the combination of drawing_numb and cable_numb should be unique.

488

_ _______________
Appendix C:

EE Raceway Project Database Schema Description

cndsch_spec
This table contains information about conduit schedule for underground conduit design. Column Name revision_numb conduit_numb conduit_for cnd_from_where cnd_to_where undgrnd_cnd_size undgrnd_cnd_type undgrnd_cnd_length abvgrnd_cnd_size abvgrnd_cnd_type abvgrnd_cnd_length cnd_detail_numb detail_drw_numb cnd_ac_dimension cnd_station pow_conduct_volt pow_conduct_numb pow_conduct_size pow_conduct_type pow_conduct_length con_conduct_numb con_conduct_size con_conduct_type con_conduct_length grnd_wire_size grnd_wire_type grnd_wire_length ol_diagram_numb remarks drawing_numb drawing_rev Type Char( 2) Char( 10) Char( 12) Char( 20) Char( 20) Char( 6) Char( 5) real Char( 6) Char( 4) real Char( 7) Char( 12) Char( 12) Char( 6) Char( 5) integer Char( 7) Char( 4) real integer Char( 7) Char( 4) real Char( 6) Char( 4) real Char( 10) Char( 16) Char( 20) Char( 2) Index no uniq no no no no no no no no no no no no no no no no no no no no no no no no no no no uniq no Null yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes

C: EE Databases

revision_numb: the column containing the conduit schedule revision number. conduit_numb: the column containing the area number, conduit number, and conduit number ID. drawing_numb can have duplicate values, but the combination of drawing_numb and conduit_numb should be unique. conduit_for: the column defines the purpose of the conduit, for example power, control, and so forth. cnd_from_where: the column containing the location name where the conduit starts from. cnd_to_where: the column containing the location name where the conduit goes to.

489

_ _______________
EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide - February 2003 undgrnd_cnd_siz: the column containing the underground conduit size. undgrnd_cnd_typ: the column containing the underground conduit type. undgrnd_cnd_len: the column containing the length of the underground conduit. abvgrnd_cnd_siz: the column containing the above ground conduit size. abvgrnd_cnd_typ: the column containing the above ground conduit type. abvgrnd_cnd_len: the column containing the length of the above ground conduit. cnd_detail_numb: the column containing the conduit detail number. detail_drw_numb: the column containing the detail drawing number. cnd_ac_dimensio: the column containing the data for AC DIM. cnd_station: the column containing the information for control station. pow_conduct_vol: the column containing the power conductor voltage. pow_conduct_num: the column containing the power conductor number. pow_conduct_siz: the column containing the power conductor size. pow_conduct_typ: the column containing the power conductor type code. pow_conduct_len: the column containing the power conductor length. con_conduct_num: the column containing the control conductor number. con_conduct_siz: the column containing the control conductor size. con_conduct_typ: the column containing the control conductor type code. con_conduct_len: the column containing the control conductor length. grnd_wire_size: the column containing the ground wire size. grnd_wire_type: the column containing the ground wire type code. grnd_wire_lengt: the column containing the ground wire length. ol_diagram_numb: the column containing the one-line diagram number. remarks: the column containing remarks for the conduit schedule. drawing_numb: the column containing the drawing number.

490

_ _______________
Appendix C: drawing_rev: the column containing the drawing revision.

EE Raceway Project Database Schema Description

drawing
This table, used by all EE products, contains general information about each EE design file. Column Name mslink* drawing_type* ee_filename* sheet* load_date* ref_db* Type integer Char( 20) Char( 80) Char( 20) Char( 26) Char( 80) Index uniq no no uniq no no Null no no no no no no

mslink: a unique integer value used by the software to identify a row in the drawing table. drawing_type: the column used to define the type of EE drawing. ee_filename: the column containing the drawing file name and path.

C: EE Databases

sheet: the column used to contain the drawing sheet name. load_date: the column containing the date that the load processor loaded the drawing into the project database. ref_db: the column containing the schema name of the EE reference database.

drop_point
This table associates a row in the rcp table with a row in the one-line table. Column Name mslink* ee_to_drw* ee_to_ol* ee_to_rcp* ee_dist_down_ol* ee_dist_to_rcp* tag Type integer integer integer integer real real Char( 20) Index uniq no dups dups no no no Null no no yes yes yes yes yes

mslink: a unique integer value used by the software to identify a row in the drop_point table. ee_to_drw: the column containing the mslink of a row in the drawing table. ee_to_ol: the column containing the mslink of a row in the one_line table.

491

_ _______________
EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide - February 2003 ee_to_rcp: the column containing the mslink of a row in the rcp table. ee_dist_down_ol: the column containing the distance along the one-line to the drop point. ee_dist_to_rcp: the column containing the distance between the one-line and the rcp. tag: the column that contains the name of the drop point.

duct_fill
This table defines the cable/conduit that are placed in a duct one-line. Column Name ee_to_ol ee_to_drw ee_duct_cc_row ee_duct_cc_col ee_duct_cc_numb ee_drawing_numb Type integer integer integer integer Char( 12) Char( 20) Index dups dups no no no no Null yes yes yes yes yes yes

ee_to_ol: the column containing the mslink of a row in the one-line table. ee_to_drw: the column containing the mslink of a row in the drawing table. ee_duct_cc_row: the row index of the conduit/cable. ee_duct_cc_col: the column index of the conduit/cable. ee_duct_cc_numb: cable/conduit area number, cable number, and cable number number ID. ee_drawing_numb: detail drawing number of the conduit/cable schedule.

ee_pseudo_cable
This table defines the wires/cables that fill conduit. This is performed with the EE Raceway Conduit Sizing command. Column Name mslink ee_to_ol ee_to_drw ee_quantity item_no Type integer integer integer integer Char( 20) Index uniq no no no dups Null no no no yes yes

mslink: a unique integer value used by the software to identify a row in the ee_pseudo_cable table. ee_to_ol: the column containing the mslink of a row in the one-line table.

492

_ _______________
Appendix C: ee_to_drw: the column containing the mslink of a row in the drawing table. ee_quantity: the number of wires/cables associated with the given one-line of a given item_no. item_no: the column containing the unique key to the ee_pseudo_cable table of the reference schema.

EE Raceway Project Database Schema Description

ee_system
This table contains the names of all systems from every EE Raceway drawing loaded into the project database. Column Name mslink* system_name Type integer Char( 20) Index uniq dups Null no yes

mslink: a unique integer value used by the software to identify a row in the ee_system table. system_name: the column that contains the names of the systems.

envelope
This table contains information about the raceway envelopes found in the drawing. Column Name mslink* ee_to_drw* tag Type integer integer Char( 20) Index uniq no dups Null no no yes

C: EE Databases

mslink: a unique integer value used by the software to identify a row in the envelope table. ee_to_drw: the column containing the mslink of a row in the drawing table. tag: the column that contains the envelope tag. Space envelopes are not available at time of printing.

493

_ _______________
EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide - February 2003

fitting
This table contains information about the raceway fittings found in the drawing. Column Name mslink* ee_to_drw* ee_to_ol* ee_to_rcp* ee_out_ht_diam* ee_out_width* ee_out_width2 ee_dimension_1* ee_angle* ee_weight* cab_weight pds_east* pds_north* pds_elev* vendor ee_units* ee_tl_type* ee_tl_subtype* ee_tl_qual* ee_ol_type* ee_part* ee_description Type integer integer integer integer real real real real real real real real real real Char( 20) Char( 20) Char( 20) Char( 20) Char( 20) Char( 20) Char( 20) Char( 40) Index uniq no dups dups no no no no no no no no no no no no no no no no dups no Null no no yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes

mslink: a unique integer value used by the software to identify a row in the fitting table. ee_to_drw: the column containing the mslink of a row in the drawing table. ee_to_ol: the column containing the mslink of a row in the one-line table. ee_to_rcp: the column containing the mslink of a row in the rcp table. ee_out_ht_diam: the column containing the outside height or diameter of the fitting. ee_out_width: the column containing the outside width of the fitting. ee_out_width2: the column containing the outside width of the reducer. ee_dimension_1: the column containing a dimension of the fitting. ee_angle: the column containing the fitting bend angle. ee_weight: the column containing the fitting weight per unit length.

494

_ _______________
Appendix C: cab_weight: the column containing the cable weight per unit length. pds_north: the column containing the PDS north coordinate of the fitting (calculated by Load Database). pds_elev: the column containing the PDS elevation coordinate of the fitting (calculated by Load Database). vendor: the column containing the codelist value of the vendor of the one-line type specification. ee_units: the column containing the codelist value of the design file units. ee_tl_type: the column containing the codelist value of the three-line type. ee_tl_subtype: the column containing the codelist value of the three-line subtype. ee_tl_qual: the column containing the codelist value of the three-line qualifier. ee_ol_type: the column containing the codelist value of the one-line type. ee_part: the column containing the straight section part number. ee_description: the column containing the fitting part description.

EE Raceway Project Database Schema Description

pds_east: the column containing the PDS east coordinate of the fitting (calculated by Load Database).

C: EE Databases

fit_to_sys
This table links a fitting to each system of which it is a member. Column Name ee_to_fit* ee_to_sys* ee_percent* Type integer integer real Index dups dups no Null no no yes

ee_to_fit: the column containing the mslink of a row in the fitting table. ee_to_sys: the column containing the mslink of a row in the ee_system table. ee_percent: the column containing the percent amount of the fitting is contained in the system identified by the mslink stored in ee_to_sys.

495

_ _______________
EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide - February 2003

mscatalog
This table contains the entity (table) numbers for all the tables in the EE Raceway project database. There will be one row in the mscatalog for each database table. Column Name tablename entitynum screenform reporttable sqlreview fencefilter dastable alias_name key_columns key_description Type Char( 32) integer Char( 64) Char( 64) Char(240) Char(240) Char(32) Char(32) Char( 80) Char( 32) Index no uniq no no no no no no no no Null no no yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes

tablename: the name of the table in the database. It must exactly match the name of the desired table. entitynum: The entity number assigned to a table. It must be a positive integer in the range of 1 to 65535. The entity number uniquely identifies a particular table in the database. screenform: not currently used by MicroStation 32. reporttable: a temporary table used by MicroStation 32. Is is created for each table having graphic linkages within a fence. sqlreview: an sql select satement that MicroStation 32 uses to review rows and columns. fencefilter: an sql select statement that MicroStation 32 uses to restrict elements during fence operations. dastable: specifies the name of the table that maps displayable attribute types to the sql select statements used by MicroStation 32 for loading text into displayable attributes. alias_name: a column used by EE that contains the descriptive alias of tablename. key_columns: a column containing the column_name which uniquely identifies a particular row in the table. EE uses key_columns as the correlation key. key_description: the descriptive alias for key_columns.

496

_ _______________
Appendix C:

EE Raceway Project Database Schema Description

mscolumns
This table specifies column-specific data for EE tables. There is one row in mscolumns for each column in an attribute table. RISRPT and DBAccess use this table for reports. Currently, there are no EE processors using this table. Column Name entitynum attrnum column_name alias_name access_flag work_mode ee_column_order* Type uniq integer Char( 32) Char( 64) smallint smallint smallint Index uniq uniq no no no no no Null no no no yes no no no

entitynum: the entity number assigned to the table whose columns are being described. Entity numbers between mscatalog and mscolumns must be consistent. attrnum: the attribute number assigned to a particular column within a table. column_name: the name of a column in the database. It must exactly match the column name in the database. alias_name: the column containing the descriptive alias of column_name. access_flag: the column containing a code used to identify the accessibility of a particular column by an EE user. A value of 0 indicates that the column is read_only, while a value of 1 indicates that it allows read/write access. work_mode: the column containing the code that identifies the use of a particular column by an EE user. This column can also be thought of as a filter. Display of certain attributes can be restricted depending on the mode of work the user is performing. Since all EE Raceway column values are displayed on the primary form, the work_mode value is set to zero. ee_column_order: the column used to determine the order to display the attributes on the annotation form.

C: EE Databases

497

_ _______________
EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide - February 2003

ol_to_sys
This table links a one-line to each system of which it is a member. Column Name ee_to_ol* ee_to_sys* ee_percent* prj_rule_applied Type integer integer real integer Index dups dups no no Null no no yes yes

ee_to_ol: the column containing the mslink of a row in the one-line table. ee_to_sys: the column containing the mslink of a row in the ee_system table. ee_percent: the column containing the percent amount of the straight section is contained in the system identified by the mslink stored in ee_to_sys. prj_rule_applied: the column containing the applied project rule.

one_line
This table contains information about the raceway one-lines found in the drawing. Column Name mslink* ee_to_drw* ee_to_rcp1* ee_to_rcp2* ee_out_ht_diam* ee_out_width* ee_dimension_1* ee_dimension_2* ee_ol_length* weight cab_weight vendor ee_units* ee_ol_type* ee_spec_key* tag ee_radius ee_const_type Type integer integer integer integer real real real real real real real Char( 20) Char( 20) Char( 20) Char( 28) Char( 20) real char Index uniq no dups dups no no no no no no no dups no no dups dups no no Null no no no no yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes

mslink: a unique integer value used by the software to identify a row in the one_line table.

498

_ _______________
Appendix C: ee_to_drw: the column containing the mslink of a row in the drawing table. ee_to_rcp2: the column containing the mslink of the rcp placed at the end of the one-line in the design file. ee_out_ht_diam: the column containing the outside height or diameter of the one-line type. ee_out_width: the column containing the outside width of the one-line type. ee_dimension_1: the column containing a dimension of the one-line type. ee_dimension_2: the column containing a dimension of the one-line type. ee_ol_length: the column containing the run length of the one-line. weight: the column containing the one-line type weight per unit length. cab_weight: the column containing the cable weight per unit length. vendor: the column containing the codelist value of the vendor of the one-line type specification. ee_units: the column containing the codelist value of the design file units. ee_ol_type: the column containing the codelist value of the one-line type. ee_spec_key: the column containing the unique key to the one-line type specification table. tag: the column that contains the name of the one-line. ee_radius: the column that contains the fitting bend radius of the three-line type specification. ee_const_type: the column that contains the construction type.

EE Raceway Project Database Schema Description

ee_to_rcp1: the column containing the mslink of the rcp placed at the start of the one-line in the design file.

C: EE Databases

499

ee_last_rev_dat: the column containing the date the panel/equipment was last revised. ee_approv_status: the column containing the approval status of the panel/equipment.February 2003 panel This table contains information about all panels/equipment found in the drawing. Column Name mslink panel panel_descrip ee_approv_status ee_approv_date ee_create_date ee_last_rev_dat ee_eqp_table ee_part_key Type integer Char( 20) Char( 20) integer Char( 26) Char( 26) Char( 26) Char( 32) Char( 28) Index uniq dups no no no no no no no Null no yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes mslink: a unique integer value used by the software to identify a row in the panel table. ee_eqp_table: the column containing the name of the reference database table that contains additional equipment information. project This table contains specification information for the project._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . ee_approv_date: the column containing the date when the approval status changed. panel: the column containing the panel/equipment name panel_descrip: the column containing the panel/equipment description. ee_create_date: the column containing the panel/equipment creation date. Column Name mslink prj_number prj_name location prj_rule_set base_rule_set Type integer Char( 20) Char( 40) Char( 60) Char( 20) Char( 20) Index uniq uniq uniq no no no Null no yes no no no yes 500 . ee_part_key: the column containing the unique key to the appropriate record of equipment information in the reference database table.

Column Name mslink* ee_rcp_type* tag ee_radius Type integer Char( 10) Char( 20) real Index uniq no no no Null no yes yes no mslink: a unique integer value used by the software to identify a row in the rcp table._ _______________ Appendix C: mslink: a unique integer value used by the software to identify a row in the panel table. rcp This table contains information about all raceway connect points (RCPs) found in the drawing. location: the column containing location. prl_rule_set: the column containing the project rule set. ee_to_drw: the column containing the mslink of a row in the drawing table. ee_to_rcp: the column containing the mslink of a row in the RCP table. base_rule_set: column containing the base rule set. 501 . ee_status: the column containing the revision status of the panel element in the design file (used by the Load Database process). Column Name ee_to_panel ee_asid ee_to_drw ee_to_rcp ee_status Type integer integer integer integer integer Index dups no dups dups no Null no no no yes no C: EE Databases ee_to_panel: the column containing the mslink of a row in the panel table. ee_asid: the column containing the asid number of the panel/equipment element in the design file identified by the mslink stored in ee_to_drw. EE Raceway Project Database Schema Description panel_to_drw This table links a panel/equipment to each drawing in which it exists. prj_number: the column containing the project number prj_name: the column containing the project name description.

February 2003 ee_rcp_type: the column containing the codelist value of the type of rcp._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . pds_east: the column containing the PDS east coordinate of the rcp (calculated by Load Database). Column Name ee_to_rcp* ee_to_sys* ee_percent* Type integer integer real Index dups dups no Null no no yes ee_to_rcp: the column containing the mslink of a row in the rcp table. pds_elev: the column containing the PDS elevation coordinate of the rcp (calculated by Load Database). rcp_to_drw This table links an rcp to each drawing in which it exists. tag: the column that contains the name of the rcp. Column Name ee_to_rcp* ee_asid* ee_to_drw* pds_east* pds_north* pds_elev* Type integer integer integer real real real Index dups no dups no no no Null no no no yes yes yes ee_to_rcp: the column containing the mslink of a row in the rcp table. ee_to_sys: the column containing the mslink of a row in the ee_system table. ee_to_drw: the column containing the mslink of a row in the drawing table. pds_north: the column containing the PDS north coordinate of the rcp (calculated by Load Database). ee_radius: the column containing the fitting bend radius. 502 . rcp_to_sys This table links an rcp to each system of which it is a member. ee_asid: the column containing the asid number of the rcp element in the drawing identified by the mslink stored in ee_to_drw.

ee_tl_length: the column containing the length of the straight section._ _______________ Appendix C: ee_percent: the column containing the percent amount of the fitting is contained in the system identified by the mslink stored in ee_to_sys. ee_dimension_1: the column containing a dimension of the straight section. ee_weight: the column containing the straight section weight per unit length. ee_out_width: the column containing the outside width of the straight section. 503 . ee_to_drw: the column containing the mslink of a row in the drawing table. ee_dimension_2: the column containing a dimension of the straight section. EE Raceway Project Database Schema Description straight This table contains information about the raceway straight sections found in the drawing. ee_to_ol: the column containing the mslink of a row in the one-line table. ee_out_ht_diam: the column containing the outside height or diameter of the straight section. Column Name mslink* ee_to_drw* ee_to_ol* ee_out_ht_diam* ee_out_width* ee_tl_length* ee_dimension_1* ee_dimension_2* ee_weight* cab_weight pds_east* pds_north* pds_elev* vendor ee_units* ee_ol_type* ee_spec_key* ee_part* material ee_description Type integer integer integer real real real real real real real real real real Char( 20) Char( 20) Char( 20) Char( 28) Char( 20) Char( 20) Char( 40) Index uniq no dups no no no no no no no no no no dups no no dups no no no Null no no no yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes C: EE Databases mslink: a unique integer value used by the software to identify a row in the straight table.

material: the column containing the straight section material. ee_ol_type: the column containing the codelist value of the one-line type. vendor: the column containing the codelist value of the vendor of the one-line type specification. ee_percent: the column containing the percent amount of the straight section is contained in the system identified by the mslink stored in ee_to_sys. ee_units: the column containing the codelist value of the design file units. Column Name ee_to_str* ee_to_sys* ee_percent* Type integer integer real Index dups dups no Null no no yes ee_to_str: the column containing the mslink of a row in the straight table. pds_east: the column containing the PDS east coordinate of the straight section (calculated by Load Database). str_to_sys This table links a straight section to each system of which it is a member. ee_part: the column containing the straight section part number.February 2003 cab_weight: the column containing the cable weight per unit length. ee_description: the column containing the straight section part description. ee_to_sys: the column containing the mslink of a row in the ee_system table. pds_north: the column containing the PDS north coordinate of the straight section (calculated by Load Database). pds_elev: the column containing the PDS elevation coordinate of the straight section (calculated by Load Database). ee_spec_key: the column containing the unique key to the one-line type specification table. 504 ._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide .

ee_ol_coord: the column containing the distance along the one-line to the support. ee_to_drw: the column containing the mslink of a row in the drawing table. tag: the column that contains the support tag. to_support This table links the raceway one-line with a support._ _______________ Appendix C: EE Raceway Project Database Schema Description sys_to_drw This table links a system name to each drawing in which the system exists. ee_asid: the column containing the asid number of the system element in the drawing identified by the mslink stored in ee_to_drw. Column Name mslink* ee_to_drw* ee_to_ol* ee_ol_coord* tag Type integer integer integer real Char( 20) Index uniq no no no dups Null no no no yes yes C: EE Databases mslink: a unique integer value used by the software to identify a row in the to_support table. 505 . ee_to_drw: the column containing the mslink of a row in the drawing table. ee_to_ol: the column containing the mslink of a row in the one-line table. to_support symbols are not available at time of printing. Column Name ee_to_sys* ee_asid* ee_to_drw* Type integer integer integer Index dups no dups Null no no no ee_to_sys: the column containing the mslink of a row in the ee_system table.

_ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide .February 2003 506 .

unl to a file called <one-line type>_spec. The first step in this preparation is to create two ASCII data files (<one-line type>_part. and conduit. Preparing the Specifications Preparing the specifications is one of the first tasks the system manager performs when setting up the EE Raceway product. These tables contain all attribute information for the available one-line types. SPEC Process The SPEC process resides in the win32app\eerway\bin directory.sav before running the process. If you intend to add records to an existing . If you answer n to the prompt.unl and <one-line type>_spec. The specifications available at the time of printing are for tray.sav file. For special fittings like conduit bodies and pullboxes._ _______________ Appendix D: Specification Appendix D Specification Your reference database contains the specification tables (<one-line type>_part and <one-line type>_spec) that drive the EE Raceway product. while the <one-line type>_part table contains the relevant data for each of the fittings within a specification. Enter your reference schema name and the appropriate table name.sav extension to the specified table name. The following information displays to the screen: Enter schema name: Enter table name: Is this a restart (y/n) Respond to the prompts according to your requirements. This process allows you to add records to an existing . The system will attach a . key in SPEC at the command prompt. copy the appropriate <one-line type>_spec. You can edit these files manually using a standard ASCII editor or you can use the SPEC process delivered with EE Raceway. Indicate whether or not you are adding records to an existing file (Is this a restart (y/n). The <one-line type>_spec table contains all specifications. The two special fittings delivered by default with EE Raceway are conduit body and pullbox.unl file. The process will then write all records to this .unl file or to create a new .unl) to contain all the relevant data from the vendor catalogs.sav file. and will then write all records to that file.unl file easily and efficiently. airway. the reference database contains one table for each fitting type. To initiate the process. D: Specs 507 . the system will overwrite any records already existing in the specified . wireway.

Continue this process as long as you wish to add records to your .unl file to keep the records you have added. in a format similar to the following example (for tray_spec): vendor <code list> () ee_units <code list> () ee_dimension_1 <real> () ee_out_ht_diam <real> () ee_dimension_2 <real> () ee_out_width <real> () ee_extension <real> () ee_transition <real> () ee_radius <real> () weight <real> () material <char-20> () ee_xs_cell <char-6> () ee_spec_key <char-28> () ee_description <char-40> () Key in values to the right of the () for each column value.sav file. For subsequent records. Once you enter the final value for the displayed table. and then displays the column values for the table name you specified. 508 . Each value is verified according to the parameters defined inside the < >.sav file and redisplays the column names. You can exit the process at any point by pressing CTRL -C. Copy the . press <RETURN> to accept the displayed values (in ()) or key in new values as necessary.sav file back to the corresponding . It also displays the column values you entered for the previous record.February 2003 The system processes the information. the system writes the information to the ._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide .

unl files you will load into your reference database tables.unl Files Sample ._ _______________ Appendix D: Sample . tray_spec.unl 2|1|0|50|0|600|0|0|600|0|HOT DIP STEEL|A|6060SHV|VENTRIB SHV A 2|1|0|50|0|600|0|0|300|0|HOT DIP STEEL|A|6030SHV|VENTRIB SHV A 2|1|0|50|0|450|0|0|600|0|HOT DIP STEEL|A|4560SHV|VENTRIB SHV A 2|1|0|50|0|450|0|0|300|0|HOT DIP STEEL|A|4530SHV|VENTRIB SHV A 2|1|0|50|0|300|0|0|600|0|HOT DIP STEEL|A|3060SHV|VENTRIB SHV A 2|1|0|50|0|300|0|0|300|0|HOT DIP STEEL|A|3030SHV|VENTRIB SHV A 2|1|0|50|0|150|0|0|600|0|HOT DIP STEEL|A|1560SHV|VENTRIB SHV A 2|1|0|50|0|150|0|0|300|0|HOT DIP STEEL|A|1530SHV|VENTRIB SHV A 2|1|0|85|0|600|0|0|600|0|HOT DIP STEEL|A|6060SV|VENTRIB SV C1 2|1|0|85|0|600|0|0|300|0|HOT DIP STEEL|A|6030SV|VENTRIB SV C1 2|1|0|85|0|450|0|0|600|0|HOT DIP STEEL|A|4560SV|VENTRIB SV C1 2|1|0|85|0|450|0|0|300|0|HOT DIP STEEL|A|4530SV|VENTRIB SV C1 2|1|0|85|0|300|0|0|600|0|HOT DIP STEEL|A|3060SV|VENTRIB SV C1 2|1|0|85|0|300|0|0|300|0|HOT DIP STEEL|A|3030SV|VENTRIB SV C1 2|1|0|85|0|150|0|0|600|0|HOT DIP STEEL|A|1560SV|VENTRIB SV C1 2|1|0|85|0|150|0|0|300|0|HOT DIP STEEL|A|1530SV|VENTRIB SV C1 2|1|0|50|0|600|0|0|600|0|ALUMINUM|A|6060AHV|VENTRIB AHV A 2|1|0|50|0|600|0|0|300|0|ALUMINUM|A|6030AHV|VENTRIB AHV A 2|1|0|50|0|450|0|0|600|0|ALUMINUM|A|4560AHV|VENTRIB AHV A 2|1|0|50|0|450|0|0|300|0|ALUMINUM|A|4530AHV|VENTRIB AHV A 2|1|0|50|0|300|0|0|600|0|ALUMINUM|A|3060AHV|VENTRIB AHV A D: Specs 509 . Note that the | serves as a delimiter between column values.unl Files The following are examples of .

tray_spec table Column Name vendor* ee_units* ee_dimension_1 ee_out_ht_diam ee_dimension_2 ee_out_width ee_extension Description the index_column (codelist) value from the vendor table. the spec table contains all specifications.unl files are input to the Update Reference Schema process which loads information in the <one-line type>_part and <one-line type>_spec tables. the fitting extension. the .February 2003 tray_part.unl 2|2|5|90|0|A-15VA|VEL|1530AS| |A-15VA|Vertical Adjustable Elbow 2|2|5|90|0|A-30VA|VEL|3030AS| |A-30VA|Vertical Adjustable Elbow 2|2|5|90|0|A-45VA|VEL|4530AS| |A-45VA|Vertical Adjustable Elbow 2|2|5|90|0|A-60VA|VEL|6030AS| |A-60VA|Vertical Adjustable Elbow 2|2|5|90|0|AD-15VA|VEL|1530ADS| |AD-15VA|Vertical Adjustable Elbow 2|2|5|90|0|AD-30VA|VEL|3030ADS| |AD-30VA|Vertical Adjustable Elbow 2|2|5|90|0|AD-45VA|VEL|4530ADS| |AD-45VA|Vertical Adjustable Elbow 2|2|5|90|0|AD-60VA|VEL|6030ADS| |AD-60VA|Vertical Adjustable Elbow 4|5|1|90|0|ADL-15X-90|HRC|1590ADL| |ADL-15X-90|Horizontal Cross 1|8|1|0|0|ADL-30R15|CR|1560ADL|3060ADL|ADL-30R15-60|Concentric Reducer 1|8|1|0|0|ADL-30R15|CR|1590ADL|3090ADL|ADL-30R15-90|Concentric Reducer 1|9|1|0|0|ADL-30RL15|LR|1560ADL|3060ADL|ADL-30RL15-60|Left Reducer 1|9|1|0|0|ADL-30RL15|LR|1590ADL|3090ADL|ADL-30RL15-90|Left Reducer 1|10|1|0|0|ADL-30RR15|RR|1560ADL|3060ADL|ADL-30RR15-60|Right Reducer 1|10|1|0|0|ADL-30RR15|RR|1590ADL|3090ADL|ADL-30RR15-90|Right Reducer 1|1|1|0|0|ADL-30ST|STS|3060ADL| |ADL-30ST-60|Straight Section 1|1|1|0|0|ADL-30ST|STS|3090ADL| |ADL-30ST-90|Straight Section 3|5|1|90|0|ADL-30T-60|HRT|3060ADL| |ADL-30T-60|Horizontal Tee 3|5|1|90|0|ADL-30T-90|HRT|3090ADL| |ADL-30T-90|Horizontal Tee Update Reference Schema Once created. a dimension variable used by Eden. while the part table contains the relevant data for each of the fittings within a specification. As described previously. tray_spec and tray_part. Sample Specification Tables This section describes the required column names of sample specification tables. For information about running Update Reference Schema. the outside width dimension in sub-units. see Update Reference Schema in the section entitled Electrical Engineer (EE) Environment._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . 510 . the index_column (codelist) value from the ee_units table. a dimension variable used by Eden. the outside height dimension in sub-units.

the tray specification key. the unique tray part key. see the appendix entitled EE Databases . the index_column value from the tl_subtype table. * For information about the codelist values. the fitting turn angle. the tray specification description. the unique tray specification key. the secondary tray specification key for reducers. the tray part weight. the tray part description. the tray material. the Eden symbol. the fitting bend radius. the tray part catalog number. Sample . the construction type.unl Files tray_part table Column Name ee_tl_type* ee_tl_subtype* ee_tl_qual* ee_angle ee_weight ee_part ee_symbol ee_spec_key ee_spec2_key ee_key ee_description Description the index_column value from the tl_type table._ _______________ Appendix D: ee_transition ee_radius weight material ee_const_type ee_xs_cell ee_spec_key ee_description the fitting transition length. the index_column value from the tl_qual table. the weight per unit length of the run. the cross section symbol. D: Specs 511 .

90.60.45._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide .90.45.February 2003 Available Fittings The following is a list of the fittings currently supported by the EE Raceway Modeling product: FITTING Straight Elbow Elbow Elbow Wye Wye Wye Cross Cross Reducer Reducer Reducer Conduit body Pullbox TYPE ANGLE Horizontal Inside Vertical Outside Vertical Horizontal Vertical Reducer Horizontal Vertical Left Horizontal Right Horizontal Concentric 30. and Adjustable 30. and Adjustable 90.45. and Adjustable 30.45 left and 45 right 90 90 90 90 512 .90.60.60.

fittings. To review or modify the symbols in this library. you should be familiar with a standard ASCII editor like vi or emacs._ _______________ Appendix E: Eden Symbol Generation Appendix E Eden Symbol Generation Eden is a high-level symbol definition language (modeled after the FORTRAN programming language) that allows you to design your own symbols for raceway straight sections. and special parts. The delivered symbol library is called eden. draw_arc. use the delivered Eden processes. However.lib and resides in win32app\eerway\eden. For additional information about the Eden symbol language. You do not need a programming background to write Eden programs.) Every Raceway symbol must contain a symbol processor definition and at least one of each of the following: Placepoint (EE attachment point) Datum point (EE RCP point) Graphical element E: Eden Symbols 513 . Symbol Processor File A symbol processor file is the controlling function or logic used to produce the raceway straight sections. and special parts (conduit bodies.). Primitives allow you to construct complex symbols by using a combination of simple commands (place_line. etc. pullboxes. (See the chapter entitled Eden Processes for more information about running these processes. fittings. The library and its path are defined using the EE Configure command. see the PDS Eden Interface Reference Guide. You can write Eden code using whatever case conventions make it easiest for you to read. Eden provides drawing commands called primitives.). etc.

or.February 2003 The best way to explain how a symbol processor file works is to show an example: Before creating an Eden symbol processor file. val4._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide .0 DIMENSION[23] DIMENSION[25] NUMPTS = 4 If ( halfwid . angle . angle height halfwid extension radius ORG BND1 BND2 EXT1 EXT2 ARC = = = = = = 19 20 21 22 23 24 = = = = = DIMENSION[4] DIMENSION[21] DIMENSION[22] / 2.or. extension. val2. ! ========================================================================= SYMBOL_PROCESSOR ’HEL’ #DESC = Tray Horizontal Elbow r8 halfwid.0 . val5. val6 ! ! ! Get Dimensions Required to create the horizontal elbow. ========================================================================= ! ! Symbol Name: HEL ! ! Description: Horizontal Tray Elbow.0 . val1.eq. angle.eq. 0. you should have consulted the PDS Eden Interface Reference Guide or have taken a course in Eden symbol generation. 0. height . with or without extensions. radius. height.0) then Call ABORT ( 0 ) Endif Call Begin ( NOHOLE ) Call Begin ( SURFACE ) ! ! ! Add dimension of tray to radius radius = radius + halfwid ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! Calculate distances distance variables val1 val2 val3 val4 val5 val6 = = = = = = bendpoint on primary oneline primary distance to bendpoint on bent oneline secondary distance to bendpoint on bent oneline extension point on primary oneline primary distance to extpoint on bent oneline secondary distance to extpoint on bent oneline 514 .eq. 0. val3.

0. 0. Point[BND2] ) Call Define_Placepoint ( PP1. 1 Call Draw_Line ( Point[i]. (Point[2]. 0. 0. 0 ) Do i = 1. -val4. -val1. Point[ARC] ) Call Rotate_Orientation( 180. Point[0]. Point[NUMPTS+i] ) Enddo Call Draw_Complex_Surface ( -99. 0 ) Endif 515 . (Point[3]. 0. 0. NUMPTS.0. Point[0] ) Call Define_Active_Point ( Point[EXT1] ) Call Define_Orientation_By_Points ( Point[BND1]. Point[0] ) ! ! ! Define cross section points Call Define_Active_Point ( Point[BND1] ) Call Call Call Call ! ! ! Define_Point Define_Point Define_Point Define_Point (Point[1]. 0. Define_Point ( Point[EXT2]. val3. Define_Point ( Point[BND1]. 0 0 0 0 0 0 ) ) ) ) ) ) Define Placepoints Call Define_Active_Point ( Point[EXT2] ) Call Define_Orientation_By_Points ( Point[ORG]. 0 ) then Do i = 1. 0 ) Call Draw_Line_String ( NUMPTS. Point[ORG]. Point[i]. Point[0]. -val1. 1 Call Define_Point( Point[NUMPTS+i]. val6. Point[0]. val5. 0. radius._ _______________ Appendix E: radius val1 = val2 = val3 = val4 = val5 = val6 = ! ! ! Call Call Call Call Call Call Call ! ! ! = radius + halfwid radius * DTAND( angle / 2.ne. Define_Point ( Point[ORG]. Point[1] ) Call Draw_Line_String ( NUMPTS. 0 ) 0. (Point[4]. Point[0]. 0. 0. Define_Point ( Point[EXT1]. Define_Point ( Point[BND2]. Point[0]. height. height. 0. val2. halfwid.0 ) val1 * DSIND( angle ) val1 * DCOSD( angle ) val1 + extension val4 * DSIND( angle ) val4 * DCOSD( angle ) Eden Symbol Generation Define bendpoints (point2 and point3) and bend origin (point4) Define_Datum_Point( DP[1]. Point[BND2]. 0. Point[NUMPTS+1] ) Call Draw_Complex_Surface ( -4.-extension. Point[0]. NORMAL ) Call Define_Placepoint ( PP2. 0 ) Draw First Extension E: Eden Symbols If ( extension . 0. -halfwid. 0. halfwid. Point[0] ) Point[0]. 0 ) 0. NUMPTS. 0. Define_Point ( Point[ARC]. 0 ) 0. Point[0]. -halfwid. 0) Enddo Call Draw_Complex_Surface ( 1. Point[0]. Point[0].

516 . (Point[2]. NUMPTS. 0) Enddo Call Call Call Call Draw_Complex_Surface ( 1. -angle.Point[3]) Call Define_Active_Point ( Point[ARC] ) Call Draw_Revolved_Shape ( EL_LINESTR. (Point[4]. Point[NUMPTS+1] ) Draw_Complex_Surface ( -4. halfwid.Point[ARC]) Call Call Call Call Define_Point Define_Point Define_Point Define_Point (Point[1]. extension. height. 0 ) 0. 0 ) then Call Define_Active_Point ( Point[BND2] ) Call Define_Orientation_By_Points(Point[ORG]. 1 Call Define_Point(Point[NUMPTS+i]. When defining parts in the reference database. 0. halfwid. Point[i]. For more information see the description of databases in the Workflow and Procedures chapter. 0 ) 0. 0. Point[0]. NUMPTS. 0 ) Endif Stop End The first line of this file should always be: SYMBOL_PROCESSOR ’<name>’ The last two lines of the file should always be: Stop End This line defines the symbol name.Point[2]. 0. Point[NUMPTS+i] ) Enddo Call Draw_Complex_Surface ( -99._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide .Point[BND2]. -halfwid.February 2003 ! ! ! Draw revolved shape Call Define_Orientation_By_Points(Point[1].ne. 1 Call Draw_Line ( Point[i]. 0 ) Draw_Line_String ( NUMPTS. Point[0]. Point[1]. -halfwid. 0 ) 0. height. NUMPTS. 0 ) Do i = 1. 1. 0 ) Do i = 1. (Point[3]. Point[0]. 0. 0 ) ! ! ! Draw Second Extension If ( extension . the name of the symbol should correspond with the ee_symbol in the part table. Point[0]. Point[1] ) Draw_Line_String ( NUMPTS. 0.

.... If the fitting has extensions.ee_dimension_1 Spec Table . and radius from the global array DIMENSION... while other critical points are defined relative to the origin..ee_dimension_2 . ... It uses Placepoints to define the point by which you can place a fitting using manual placement. Dimension 25 Spec Table .... Eden Symbol Generation DIMENSIONS The DIMENSION structure contains specific information that has been extracted from the database and passed through to Eden..ee_dimension_25 E: Eden Symbols These are from the secondary specification (if one exists): 51 52 53 Height_2 Width_2 Extension_2 Spec Table ... EE Raceway fills the DIMENSION array with values extracted from the reference database... For specification-driven parts.. ... 50 Height Width Extension Transition Radius Dimension 1 Dimension 2 ..... Then the placepoints are defined at either end of the elbow.. Spec Table .ee_out_ht_diam Spec Table .ee_extension 517 . The elbow is drawn as a surface of revolution.. the structure is as follows: Dimension 1 2 3 4 11 What Three Line Type Three Line Subtype Three Line Qualifier Angle Length From Manual Placement Form or Calculated Manual Placement Form or Calculated Manual Placement Form or Calculated Manual Placement Form or Calculated Manual Placement Form or Calculated These are from the specification table: 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 .ee_out_ht_diam Spec Table .... The RCP is defined in the active location with the active orientation.. EE Raceway uses a Datum Point to define the location of the RCP relative to the symbol... see the table immediately following this description.. .... The symbol derives the values for angle..ee_extension Spec Table .ee_out_wid Spec Table .ee_transition Spec Table ...........ee_radius Spec Table ._ _______________ Appendix E: The symbol in the example defines the symbol name as Tray Horizontal Elbow. The creation of the horizontal elbow symbol is fairly straightforward given a knowledge of Eden primitives.... .ee_out_wid Spec Table .. width. the one-line will pass through a placepoint on the symbol and will terminate at the RCP.. they are drawn as a surface of projection of a line string.... . height.. For a description of which database columns are associated with what dimensions. In general. extension. .....

........... ..February 2003 54 55 56 57 ......ee_transition Spec Table ...._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide ..... .. . Dimension 25 Spec Table ..... Dimension 60 From Part Table . . .. .ee_dimension_2 .ee_dimension_60 518 ..... ........... ... 80 What Dimension 1 Dimension 2 ...... Spec Table .. 80 Transition_2 Radius_2 Dimension 1 Dimension 2 ...ee_dimension_2 ..ee_radius Spec Table .......ee_dimension_1 Part Table ...... Part Table .......... .............ee_dimension_1 Spec Table .............. ... ..... ..ee_dimension_25 The following structure is used for special parts: Dimension 26 27 ..............

_ _______________ Appendix F: EE File Structure Appendix F EE File Structure F: File Structure This section describes the file structure for EE Nucleus and EE Raceway. The directory tree for EENUC and EERWAY is shown below. By default. It identifies those files you can modify. 519 . It also describes the contents of directories and some files. the PDS Component Loader delivers these files to \win32app\ingr.

/usr/ip32/eenuc: /usr/ip32/eenuc/bin: /usr/ip32/eenuc/bin/c100: /usr/ip32/eenuc/config: /usr/ip32/eenuc/data: /usr/ip32/eenuc/db: 520 . The product may reside on any file system. The list may differ slightly depending on which options are selected during installation. EE Nucleus will reside under the /usr#/ip32/eenuc directory./eenuc directory: Any file followed by a slash (name/) is a directory. Any file followed by an asterisk (*) is an executable. The following files exist under the ._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide ..February 2003 EE Nucleus File Structure EE Nucleus (EE Nuc) is the core product for the EE product line.

INFORMIX. and EE WPD.def – product definition file. problems. and then invokes the EE environment. — product. The EE shell script sets up variables specifying the location of MicroStation 32. — legend – copyright notice file. C100 for C100 executables or C400 for C400 executables.EErc – File containing global symbol definitions. 521 .sh – shell script used by the remove utility in deltools used to remove EE Nucleus from the machine. — EEnotice.txt – File containing release notices. — remove. — . eenuc/ — README – file containing description of product features and any fixes._ _______________ Appendix F: /usr/ip32/eenuc/doc: /usr/ip32/eenuc/forms: EE Nucleus File Structure F: File Structure /usr/ip32/eenuc/msg: /usr/ip32/eenuc/sym: The following list gives a brief description of some of the files. comments. etc. The files are grouped by directory. EE Nucleus. bin/ – contains the EE shell script and the environment process.

— infx_ol – file used for compression of on-line INFORMIX databases. — create_db – create database process. — reeprj – remote environment process.February 2003 — background – process that reports the exit status of a process run in the background. — EE – Electrical Engineer environment shell script. — EEmgr – Electrical Enginner manager environment shell script. — batch – process that reports the exit status of a process run in batch mode. — risql – EE reporting utility. 522 . — clip – clears interprocess communication left after a process finishes. — eemgr – system manager environment process. — eeprj – environment process. — dba_rpt – DBAccess report process. and product variables. This file can be edited. — eeqpr – script to print 132 column reports to the laser printer. — mount – supports less disk installation. The file assigns MicroStation 32 variables. — eeconfig – file that maintains EE product configuration for workstation/server._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . — infxcompress – file used for compression of standard engine databases. — print.dat – ASCII file for output file management. — 132_header – file to allow printing in 132 column format.sh – shell script to create mscolumns table for reference database. config/ – Contains the file that assigns and exports any required variables. — mscrecol. data/ – Contains the ASCII files used to control certain environment procedures. — menu_shell – shell executed around eemgr to run the Edit Database process. — assign – shell script that assigns and exports any required variables. Also kills stray processes. — dba_shell – shell executed around dba_rpt. INFORMIX variables.

txt – EE project setup information.txt – less disk information.dat – ASCII file for manager function management. sym/ – contains EE symbol files. doc/ – directory that contains documentation. — eepsp. — ustn_tsk – DB Access file. forms/ – directory that contains all the environment forms. msg/ – contains EE Nucleus message files. — dba* files – DB Access files. db/ – directory that contains the DB Access menu library (mgrdba_lib). — lessd. EE Nucleus File Structure F: File Structure 523 . Required DBAccess files are also delivered in this directory._ _______________ Appendix F: — manager.

February 2003 EE Raceway File Structure This section lists and describes the directories and files delivered with EE Raceway. /usr/ip32/eerway: /usr/ip32/eerway/bin: /usr/ip32/eerway/bin/c100: /usr/ip32/eerway/cfg: /usr/ip32/eerway/config: /usr/ip32/eerway/data: 524 ._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide .

_ _______________ Appendix F: /usr/ip32/eerway/db: EE Raceway File Structure F: File Structure /usr/ip32/eerway/dgn: /usr/ip32/eerway/dgn/seed: /usr/ip32/eerway/doc: /usr/ip32/eerway/eden: /usr/ip32/eerway/help_source: 525 .

_ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide .February 2003 /usr/ip32/eerway/help_source/help_graphics: /usr/ip32/eerway/mdlapps: /usr/ip32/eerway/menus: /usr/ip32/eerway/msg: /usr/ip32/eerway/report: 526 .

_ _______________ Appendix F: /usr/ip32/eerway/sym: EE Raceway File Structure F: File Structure /usr/ip32/eerway/tmp: delivered empty The following list gives a brief description of some of the files. These files can be modified. — remove.cfg – EE Raceway menu configuration file. — load – processor to load the project database. cfg/ – Contains the application menu configuration files. The files are grouped by directory. — menu. — product. — rmon – Controlling processor for interactive manipulations. 527 . bin/ – contains all process delivered with the EE Raceway product.def – product definition file. config/ – Contains the file that defines and exports all variables required by EE Raceway and those MicroStation 32 variables required by EE Raceway. etc. — idet – Interference Detection Envelope File Creation process. comments. — assign – shell script that defines and exports any required variables.sh – shell script used by the remove utility in deltools used to remove EE Raceway from the machine. unload_cln – contains the unload sheet. eerway/ — README – file containing a description of the product features and any fixes. problems. data/ – Contains the ASCII files used to control process and report management for the EE Raceway product. and clean database processes. unload drawing.

— report. Also contains all symbol and icon files required to support delivered menus.dat – controls process management. You can supply additional menu files. available cell libraries.unl files for bulk loading reference database tables are also provided. help_source/ – contains the text and source files required to support on-line Help. — mstr_rway. Attaches the function bar menu.dat – controls standard report management. — help_graphics – contains the graphics used in on-line Help. — rway.dat – controls rule check report management. and cell library.unl files required for bulk loading special tables and the mscatalog table in the project database. 528 . — seed/ – contains the available seed design files.hp – master help pointer file containing pointers to both MicroStation 32 and EE Raceway Help.s – help source file. dgn/ – Contains the seed file directory. — rway_bar – bar menu for schematic commands. db/ – Contains the delivered sql files for the project and reference database. — process.dgn – delivered English drawing seed file. Also contains .dgn – delivered metric drawing seed file. — eden.February 2003 — eden.dat – controls Eden processes. — mstr_rway._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide .s – master help source file.hp – help pointer file. — rule_chk. Sample . menus/ – Contains the all menus (panel and bar) supporting the product. function key menu. — help_rway. and any design files delivered with the product.cmds – command file for EE commands invoked by MicroMenu. – – seed. eden/ – contains the Eden symbol library. msseed. doc/ – contains documentation information on EE Raceway including README files from previous releases. This may be customized.lib – the Eden symbol library file. This may be customized. — help_rway.

— command.ace)and compiled (. and logo. These messages can be edited but messages can not be added. EE Raceway File Structure F: File Structure msg/ – Contains EE Raceway message files and the file to correlate key-ins to EE Raceway commands.tbl – file containing the entity numbers for the project database tables. 529 .msg – message file containing all messages for the prompt field. The software requires this directory. — rway_pnl/ – contains the rway_pnl binary menu files.arc file for each report listed below. These messages can be edited but messages can not be added. tmp/ – Holds any temporary files. — rway_prj. — alias.pnl – panel menu source file.msg – message file containing messages for status field. — prompt.msg – message file containing all messages for the command field. – merge_pnl – panel menu file.arc) SQL files for all delivered sch reports. – rway_pnl – panel menu palette file. These messages can be edited but messages can not be added. — rway. — rwaydba_lib – DB Access template library.tbl – file containing the entity numbers for the reference database tables. sym/ – Contains all symbol files for EE Raceway menus. report/ – Contains the source (. prompting messages. — rway_ref. — error. — status. There is an . This file can be extended.cmd – file used to correlate key-ins to commands.sym – symbol file for the panel menu. — annot_form – form file for annotation.ace and an . — rwaybar. — rway.sym – symbol file for the bar menu. These messages can be edited but messages can not be added. — rwaypnl._ _______________ Appendix F: — merge_pnl/ – directory containing the merged panel menu consisting of EE Raceway and MicroStation. The source files may be edited by the user. This directory also contains the available precision input forms.msg – message file containing all error messages for the error field.bar – bar menu source file.

February 2003 530 ._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide .

and print..dat..dat. # The ’\’ is the line continuation character.dat report.-O. Rule. # # The first field is the title which will appear on the scrolling list.. . # # eden. Report. # # The third field and each subsequent field will contain three sub-fields # using the comma (. rule_chk. # # The first column for a comment line must be the ’#’ character.. Report. # Any of the sub-fields in the third field can be omitted # # Change History: # Added the ability to list/extract user functions 31-May-95 # Compile EDEN Symbol | %EE_RWAY%\bin\eden. .Path. reports or rule checks or change their names from what is delivered.dat rule_chk.._ _______________ Appendix G: Customizing Environment Files Appendix G Customizing Environment Files This appendix contains printouts of the following files as they are delivered with EE Raceway: File eden.dat process.dat Location win32app\ingr\eerway\data win32app\ingr\eerway\data win32app\ingr\eerway\data win32app\ingr\eerway\data win32app\ingr\eenuc\data win32app\ingr\eenuc\data G: Customizing Environment process. # The syntax of this data file is : # # Title | Command Line | Prompt. respectively.%EDEN_LIB%.\ | Enter option (-l=list or -o=insert). The manager.dat.dat # This file is stored under the %EE_RWAY%\data directory.dat file controls the scrolling list for the options available through the system manager menu.Default.dat print.dat manager.Switch # The default can be a global symbol or file. report. and Output.dat 13. You can add defaults to this screen by modifying the file.Default.dat #ident "@(#)Eden processes:eden.) as the delimeter # # They are : # Prompt.Switch | .bat -c \ | Enter library name . Rule. You may want to write your own processes.1 0.Path. # # The second field is a command line containing the name of the executable. This section describes the syntax needed to modify the scrolling list for the Process. and Output menus. # 531 . eden.0 (EE Raceway) 12/14/93" # # Note: No blanks lines allowed in this file. \ | Enter symbol source file ..dat control the scrolling lists for the Process.

%EDEN_LIB%..bat -s \ | Enter library name .. # # | E n t e r e d | Enter symbol file name.bat -m \ | Merge into library name . \ a t | Enter symbol name . # # # Compress EDEN Symbol Library | %EE_RWAY%\bin\eden..%EDEN_LIB%....%EDEN_LIB%. # # #Create Parameteric Help Library | %EE_RWAY%\bin\eden.bat -C \ # | Enter library name .bat -eu \ b | Enter library name .bat -d\ | Enter library name ..bat -e \ n | Enter library name .. Extract EDEN User Function From Library| %EE_RWAY%\bin\eden. # # # Merge EDEN Symbol Libraries | %EE_RWAY%\bin\eden.notepad...February 2003 # # Delete EDEN Symbol | %EE_RWAY%\bin\eden.%EDEN_LIB%. 532 .._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . # # # Extract EDEN Symbol From Library| %EE_RWAY%\bin\eden.... # # E Edit EDEN Symbol File | %EE_RWAY% tor.%EDEN_LIB%.. \ | Merge from library name .. \ \ | Enter symbol name . d # e n # .bat -u \ | Enter library name . # # # List EDEN Symbol Library | %EE_RWAY%\bin\eden.%EDEN_LIB%. \ | Enter symbol name . # # # List EDEN User Functions | %EE_RWAY%\bin\eden....bat -l \ | Enter library name .%EDEN_LIB%..

. # # The third field and each subsequent field will contain three sub-fields # using the comma (.dat 13.exe -s \ | Enter sheet.-f # # # Unload Design | %EE_RWAY%\bin\unld_cln.Path.exe \ | Enter design name.<password> if a password is keyed in on the project form._ _______________ Appendix G: process. %EE_CURPRJ%\rway\dgn.dat # This file is stored under the %EE_SCH%\data directory.dat process.. %EE_CURPRJ%\rway\dgn.dat #ident "@(#)data:process.-F # # Unload Sheet | %EE_RWAY%\bin\unld_cln.%RWAY_DGN%. # So. # # Cleanup database | %EE_RWAY%\bin\unld_cln.-e G: Customizing Environment 533 .-f \ | Enter envelope name.. The symbol is exported as # <schema_name>. This was # done to handle schema passwords.Default..%RWAY_DGN%.%RWAY_DGN%.. # # Load Database | %EE_RWAY%\bin\load.%RWAY_DGN%. # The ’\’ is the line continuation character.) as the delimeter # # They are : # Prompt. # # The second field is a command line containing the name of the executable.0 (EE Raceway) 12/14/93" # # Note: No blanks lines allowed in this file. any customized processes written should read these symbols in the # process instead of passing them on the command line..1 0. # The syntax of this data file is : # # Title | Command Line | Prompt. # # The first field is the title which will appear on the scrolling list. The password will # have to be handled accordingly. .Switch # The default can be a global symbol or file.Switch | . %EE_CURPRJ%\rway\dgn. # # The first column for a comment line must be the ’#’ character.exe # # Create Interference Envelope (default name) | %EE_RWAY%\bin\idet. # Two environment symbols have been set up for these schemas: EE_SCHEMA # for the project schema and EES_REFDB for the reference.-f # # Create Interference Envelope (given name) | %EE_RWAY%\bin\idet.exe \ | Enter one design name.Path. These symbols # are exported by the EE environment when a project is entered.exe \ | Enter design name. # Any of the sub-fields in the third field can be omitted # # NOTE: Many processes run off the project or reference schema (or both)..Default. # # process.exe \ | Enter design name. %EE_CURPRJ%\rway\dgn.

# The second field is the command field._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . .. # The third field is the name of the report which can be a global symbol # or a file name. .dat #ident "@(#)data:report. # # The first field is the title which will appear on the scrolling list.cmd %EE_RPTNAM% %EE_RPTDB% %EE_RWAY%\report\rwaydba_lib %EE_RPTDB% dummy \ | rway_bom_v \ | Enter project schema. # The fourth field and each subsequent field will contain two sub-fields # using the comma (.cmd %EE_RPTNAM% %EE_RPTDB% %EE_RWAY%\report\rwaydba_lib %EE_RPTDB% dummy \ | rway_bom \ | Enter project schema.%EE_SCHEMA% \ | Enter low range (PDS coordinates: east north elev) \ | Enter high range (PDS coordinates: east north elev) # # Raceway Conduit Body report| %EE_NUC%\bin\dbashell. # # They are: # Prompt.%EE_SCHEMA% # # Material takeoff report | %EE_NUC%\bin\dbashell. # # Project drawing list | %EE_NUC%\bin\dbashell.) as the delimeter.Default | .dat # The syntax of this data file : # Title | Command Line | Report Name | Prompt.Default # The default can be a global symbol or file.cmd %EE_RPTNAM% %EE_RPTDB% %EE_RWAY%\report\rwaydba_lib %EE_RPTDB% dummy \ | mto_rpt \ | Enter project schema. # # report.1 0.cmd %EE_RPTNAM% %EE_RPTDB% %EE_RWAY%\report\rwaydba_lib dummy %EE_RPTDB% \ | cond_body \ | Enter Reference schema.dat 7.0 (EE Raceway) 6/1/92" # # Note: No blanks lines allowed in this file.%EE_SCHEMA% # # Raceway bill of materials by volume| %EE_NUC%\bin\dbashell.%EE_SCHEMA% # # Raceway bill of materials report| %EE_NUC%\bin\dbashell.%EES_REFDB% # # 534 .February 2003 report.cmd %EE_RPTNAM% %EE_RPTDB% %EE_RWAY%\report\rwaydba_lib %EE_RPTDB% dummy \ | drwlst \ | Enter project schema.. # Any of the sub_fields in the third field can be omitted.

# # The first field is the title which will appear on the scrolling list. # The fourth field and each subsequent field will contain two sub-fields # using the comma (. # The third field is the report name which can be a global symbol or file.0 (EE Raceway) 12/14/93" # # Note: No blanks lines allowed in this file.. # The second field is the command field. # # rule_chk.dat # The syntax of this data file is : # Title | Command Line | Report Name | Prompt.dat rule_chk. . Default | .dat 13..1 0. # Any of the sub_fields in the third field can be omitted. .cmd %EE_RPTNAM% %EE_RPTDB% %EE_RWAY%\report\rwaydba_lib %EE_RPTDB% dummy \ | blank_ids \ | Enter project schema.dat #ident "@(#)data:rule_chk.) as the delimiter # # They are: Prompt.Default # The default can be a global symbol or file._ _______________ Appendix G: rule_chk. # # Material takeoff blank part ID’s | %EE_NUC%\bin\dbashell.%EE_SCHEMA% # # G: Customizing Environment 535 .

default. # # print..0 (EE Schematic) 3/9/94" # # Note: No blanks lines allowed in this file. The command "vaxprint" # could be a shell script or an exported shell function.SWITCH.dat #ident "@(#)env_data:print.path and switch.dat 21..dat # This file is stored under %EE_NUC%\data directory..February 2003 print. # The third field is made up of four parts: prompt. # #VAX Line Printer| vaxprint # 536 . This field should be used to pass # information to the command. # The titles are the messages on the scrolling list.. # (The path is not relevant). A file name is automatically appended to # the command as the last parameter. # The first column of comment line must be #._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . # The command can be any command to output a file. # The syntax of this data file is : # TITLE | COMMAND | PROMPT..PATH.-q # Laser Printer 132 columns | %EE_NUC%\bin\eeqpr \ | Enter queue name. # # This is an example of a way to print to a VAX. # TO SCREEN| SCREEN # # Local line printer # Local Printer| lp # # NQS print command to print to a laser printer # Laser Printer 80 columns | qpr -t text\ | Enter queue name.1 0.DEFAULT..

# The ’\’ is the line continuation character.INFORMIX Online | vterm -x %EE_NUC%\bin\infx_ol -T compress d # Create mscolumns table | %EE_NUC%\bin\mscrecol. # # The first column for a comment line must be the ’#’ character. # # manager. .Switch | ..cmd \ |Enter schema name.Switch a # The default can be a global symbol or file.. -s e # # m #Compress database . Edit database | %EE_NUC%etnt -l %EE_NUC%\db\mgrdba_lib \ | Enter x schema name.Default.dat #ident "@(#)env:manager. # # The first field is the title which will appear on the scrolling list.0 (EE Nucleus) 3/9/94" # # Note: No blanks lines allowed in this file. _ # Any of the sub-fields r the third field can be omitted in p # t # ..1 0.Default.. .Path._ _______________ Appendix G: manager. # # The second field is a command line containing the name of the executable... # # The third field and each subsequent field will contain three sub-fields # using the comma (.Path. # The syntax of this data file is : # # Title | Command Line | Prompt.INFORMIX SE | vterm -x %EE_NUC%\bin\infxcompress -T compress # d # b e #Compress database .dat manager.dat # This file is stored under the %EE_NUC%\data directory.dat 21. G: Customizing Environment 537 .) as the delimeter n # # They are : b # Prompt.

_ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide .February 2003 538 .

cmd file explains how to create an alias for a particular command. if the sample alias entry (in the file below) were added to alias.cmd file Appendix H alias.cmd file This appendix contains a description and printout of the alias.cmd file.cmd file contains instructions for adding an entry. the format of such an entry.cmd file (the # symbols indicate comment lines): #ident "@(#)rdmsg:alias. If you were to add this example to the alias. just as would the key-in EERWAY Delete Element. The fixed (hard-coded) command name is to the right of the equal sign. To the left of the equal sign (=) in this example is the user-definable alias key-in name. and a list of EE Raceway command names and the hard-code for each command.0 (EE Raceway) 12/14/93" To create an alias for an EE Raceway command add an entry to this file consisting of the alas and the hardcode for that command in the following format: <alias> = <hardcode> The list of possible hardcodes follows: Command Name ———— EERWAY Active OLT Parameters EERWAY Add System Group EERWAY Annotate Element EERWAY Annotate Group EERWAY Annotate Title Block EERWAY Clone Element EERWAY Clone Group EERWAY Conduit Sizing EERWAY Copy Element EERWAY Copy Group EERWAY Create Cell EERWAY Delete Coincident RCPs EERWAY Define Duct Cross Section Hardcode ——– rwp addsysg annotate anntgrp anntblk clone cloneg rtwform cpele cpeleg crecell coinrcp ductform 539 . You can use any text editor to modify the file. For example.cmd file is an ASCII file located in win32app\ingr\eerway\msg. The alias.cmd # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # 13. The example in the alias. H: alias. any alias you add to this file must not match any of the command name key-ins or hard-coded names listed below. a sample entry.1 0. you would need only to key in r e to invoke the command. the command name key-ins in the file will invoke the commands to which they correspond. then the key-in EERWAY Remove Element would invoke the command EERWAY Delete Element.cmd. Since the EE Raceway software has a reserved set of names for each Raceway command which are hard-coded into the EE Raceway software.cmd file.cmd file.cmd file The following is a print-out of the alias. The alias. You do not need to add entries to the alias. You need to key in just enough of the key-in name to make it unique._ _______________ Appendix H: alias.

_ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide .February 2003 # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # EERWAY EERWAY EERWAY EERWAY EERWAY EERWAY EERWAY EERWAY EERWAY EERWAY EERWAY EERWAY EERWAY EERWAY EERWAY EERWAY EERWAY EERWAY EERWAY EERWAY EERWAY EERWAY EERWAY EERWAY EERWAY EERWAY EERWAY EERWAY EERWAY EERWAY EERWAY EERWAY EERWAY EERWAY EERWAY EERWAY EERWAY EERWAY EERWAY EERWAY EERWAY EERWAY EERWAY EERWAY EERWAY EERWAY EERWAY EERWAY EERWAY EERWAY EERWAY EERWAY EERWAY EERWAY EERWAY EERWAY EERWAY EERWAY EERWAY EERWAY EERWAY Delete Duplicate One Lines Delete Element Delete Group Delete Title Block Design Parameters Display Element Info Display Entity and Mslink Display Fitting Info Display Run Info Display Sector and Word Display System and OLT Display Type and Asid Edit Manual Fitting Exit Fitting Environment Element Fitting Environment Group Group Control Highlight Asid Highlight Entity and Mslink Highlight Graphic Group Highlight Propagation Errors Highlight Sector and Word Highlight System Elements Insert One Line Vertex Insert RCP Levels Control Load Database Minimize Joints Minimize Joints Group Modify One Line Move Element Move One Line Segment Move One Line Vertex Move Title Block OLT Definition Place Drop Point Place Equipment Pointer Place Manual Fitting Place One Line Place Title Block Propagate Element Propagate Group Propagation Control Remove Fitting Remove One Line Vertex Remove RCP Replace System Group Rotate Cross Section Route Around Vessel Run Reports Run Rule Checks Set Active OLT Set Active OLT Parameters Set Active Point Set Active System Set Conduit Sizing Attributes Set Symbology Control Symbology Control System Definition Text Defaults Toggle Spider Display dupols dltele dlteleg dlttblk ueleform eleinfo prtrlnk tlfinfo runinfo prtsw prtsysol prtasid manedit rexit rulefit rulefitg grpform hiasid hirlnk higg hiprerr hisw hisys insolvert addrcp levels loaddb minjnt minjntg modol mvele mvolseg mvolvert mvtblk oltdef plcdpnt plctoeqp manform plcol plctblk prjele prjeleg propform rmfit rmolvert rmrcp repsysg rotcs rtvess runrpt runrul actolt setact actpnt actsys setcsa setgsc symbform sysdef txtdef togspider 540 .

cmd file 541 ._ _______________ Appendix H: # # example: EERWAY Remove Element = dltele alias.cmd file H: alias.

February 2003 542 ._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide .

This file is located in the directory path win32app\eerway\db and activates the rway.cfg active mmenus ee_rway:rway.amm m. The rway. MicroStation reads this file and processes the commands as if keyed in by the user.cmds 543 .cmd file to be executed._ _______________ Appendix I: rway. add mmenus ee_rway:menu.pr I: rway.cmd file may also be edited by the user.ammfile.. you can comment out the export variable RWAY_CMD using the EE Configure command. You can disable any of these features by commenting out the line(s) that enable the feature.cmd Appendix I rway. If you do not want the rway..prAttaching EE Raceway Menus.cmd The file rway. It is run automatically when you enter the EE Raceway environment. (Place a pound sign (#) in front of any line you do not want executed.cmd is the MicroMenu (umenu) command file that is used to attach the EE Raceway menus.) Below is the file as it is delivered in the product directory: m.

February 2003 544 ._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide .

layout. in some cases.. either local or remote. The name of the report you wish to run from your report template library. RIS Report Processing A report processor is provided with EE Raceway to run RIS-based reports. Used to restrict the report output to a certain type of condition. Created through DB Access. both. This is the library of templates created to run reports from.[wtr_p5] [-?] -s <schema name> Returns a usage statement like the one listed above. RIS Dataview or RIS Report Writer are all supported by this processor. Usage: dba_rpt [-?] -s <schema> -l<template library> [-t<template>|-M<menu template>] -w<where clause> -o<output file> -S<schema list> [-F<database find>] [wtr_p0]. Report templates created through DB Access. Project Dataview. and the RIS Report-Writer Reference Guide. and print conditions._ _______________ Appendix J: Reports Appendix J Reports This section describes each report delivered with EE Raceway. is supported. It specifies the attributes used in the report and describes some of the internal operation behind report generation. "where name = ’joe smith’ and number = 32". This is the name of any current RIS schema. The EE Raceway reports report on the project database.. Any RISsupported relational database. the Project Data View Reference Guide. It doesn’t have to be the schema your report is running off of. Documentation explaining how to create and compile customized reports with RIS-DB ACCESS is available in the DB ACCESS Reference Guide. It is used as a "default" schema to enter DB Access. the reference database and. All EE Raceway reports are compatible for use with either RIS Report-Writer (RISRPT) or DB Access (DBA). This information will be helpful if you want to use a delivered report as a template for a customized report. All EE Raceway reports are currently written for RIS-DBACCESS.e. i. The name of the menu you wish to run from your menu template library. or RIS Report-Writer this is your report source code. J: Reports -l <template library> -t <report template> -M <menu template> -w <where clause> 545 .

_ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . RIS Dataview or RIS Report-Writer to create or alter existing templates. They are: DBA_SCHEMA (the "-s schema". Thus. (The current standard is that the output filename be the same as the template name. and use a schema from the schema list. Certain variables may be exported. "select value_a from table_b where. If you wish to override this name... whatever that schema’s position was in that list (first.[wtr_p5] When you create a template. since all EE Raceway reports were developed with the project schema listed first and the reference schema listed second. The first parameter is read into wtr_p0. and referenced by the literal string "wtr_p0".. * selects one character string from the database based on the select statement entered (i. Example: "-S prj_schema ref_schema".rpt" added to the end. with a ".) the report template will look at the schema in that same position when it is executed.e.. etc. default file name that they write to.) 546 . third. The correct order is <project schema> <reference schema>. and will be picked up as defaults if switches are not used. be careful of how your list looks before you develop a report template.) This is the list of schemas your report actually runs through. etc. second.February 2003 -o <output filename> All reports have a hardcoded.") and places the result into the third parameter (wtr_p2)) These are parameters that can be passed to a report template.. the "-o" option can be used. -S <schema list> -F <database find> [wtr_p0]. A default schema used to enter RIS) DBA_SCHEMA_LIST (schema list the report runs off of) * DBA_LIB (the report template library) It is useful to export these variables before entering DB Access. up to a maximum of six parameters (wtr_p5)... * (The schemas in this list need to be in the same order as they were in DBA_SCHEMA_LIST when the report was originally developed.

2. ref_db. Formats information into readable form. Sorted by (Highest to lowest priority) drawing. found in $EE_NUC/bin. dba_rpt . used to execute the $EE_RWAY/report/rwaydba_lib drwlst template. Information Output: Drawing. filename. and sorts them by sheet name._ _______________ Appendix J: Project Drawing List (drwlst) Project Drawing List (drwlst) This report lists all drawings currently loaded in the project database. J: Reports 547 . drawing_type. sheet.a template in the $EE_RWAY/report/rwaydba_lib template library data file. 3.sheet Associated Software/Files 1. load_date. Selects the desired columns from those tables. This file: Selects the desired database tables. Project Database drwlst (RIS) .the RIS process. Sorts the information according to given sort parameters and.

a template in the $EE_RWAY/report/rwaydba_lib template library data file. ee_tl_subtype. ee_out_ht_diam. and outputs the related system name for the particular straight or fitting. dba_rpt . ee_ol_type. description Fitting. 548 . ee_out_ht_diam. 2. This file: Selects the desired database tables. Sorts the information according to given sort parameters and. found in $EE_NUC/bin.February 2003 Material Takeoff Report (mto_rpt) This report outputs information from both the straight and the fitting tables. used to execute the $EE_RWAY/report/rwaydba_lib mto_rpt template. ee_tl_type. ee_part. Selects the desired columns from those tables.the RIS process. ee_out_width. Information Output: System. system_name Straight. ee_tl_length. 3._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . ee_part Associated Software/Files 1. ee_ol_type. Formats information into readable form. ee_out_width. Project Database mto_rpt .

the RIS process. ee_out_width. Sorts the information according to given sort parameters and. ee_ol_type. ee_tl_type. description Fitting. ee_out_width. ee_part. 2. ee_part Associated Software/Files 1._ _______________ Appendix J: Raceway Bill of Materials Report (rway_bom) Raceway Bill of Materials Report (rway_bom) This report adds the length of the straight sections for each part ID. ee_out_ht_diam. For flexible conduit elbow fittings. used to execute the $EE_RWAY/report/rwaydba_lib rway_bom template. and outputs the number of fittings for each part ID. dba_rpt . Information Output: Straight. 3. ee_tl_length. the length of the elbows is added to the straight sections. Selects the desired columns from those tables. This file: Selects the desired database tables. ee_ol_type. found in $EE_NUC/bin. ee_tl_subtype. J: Reports 549 . Project Database rway_bom .a template in the $EE_RWAY/report/rwaydba_lib template library data file. Formats information into readable form. ee_out_ht_diam.

234 532 34 It should be understood that westing and southing coordinates must be the negative of their opposite directional coordinate. and a southing coordinate of 3000 should be keyed in as a value of -3000 in the northing direction. You can find the coordinates you want to use by using the active point coordinate display on the precision input form. These low and high ranges define a cubic volume from which the report is pulled. Any Raceway component extending outside the clipping volume defined by the High and Low Range Coordinates will not be included in the report output. 550 .February 2003 Raceway Bill of Materials by Volume Report (rway_bom_vol) This report adds the length of the straight sections for each part ID. the length of the elbows is added to the straight sections. and outputs the number of fittings for each part ID. a westing coordinate of 100 should be keyed in as a value of -100 in the easting direction. The output is only for a specified volume from the input parameters. The coordinate values need to be in subunits and entered in the form field with a space between the coordinates: easting northing elevation For example. you are required to define a low and high range in PDS coordinates. A Special Note for Bill of Materials by Volume When running a Bill of Materials by Volume report. For instance._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . For flexible conduit elbow fittings.

description Fitting. ee_part Associated Software/Files 1. Sorts the information according to given sort parameters and.a template in the $EE_RWAY/report/rwaydba_lib template library data file. ee_out_width. Project Database rway_bom_vol . ee_ol_type. dba_rpt . found in $EE_NUC/bin. ee_tl_type. Selects the desired columns from those tables. ee_out_width.Appendix J: _ _______________ Raceway Bill of Materials by Volume Report (rway_bom_vol) Information Output: Straight. ee_ol_type. ee_out_ht_diam. Formats information into readable form. J: Reports 551 . ee_tl_length. This file: Selects the desired database tables.the RIS process. ee_tl_subtype. 3. used to execute the $EE_RWAY/report/rwaydba_lib rway_bom_vol template. ee_out_ht_diam. 2. ee_part.

system_name Straight. ee_ol_type. ee_tl_length. ee_out_width. 3. found in $EE_NUC/bin. ee_part Associated Software/Files 1. description Fitting. ee_tl_subtype. 552 . ee_out_width._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . This file: Selects the desired database tables. ee_out_ht_diam. ee_tl_type. Selects the desired columns from those tables.a template in the $EE_RWAY/report/rwaydba_lib template library data file. and outputs the related system name for the particular straight or fitting. ee_ol_type. Information Output: System. ee_part. used to execute the $EE_RWAY/report/rwaydba_lib blank_ids template. Project Database blank_ids . dba_rpt . ee_out_ht_diam. Formats information into readable form. Sorts the information according to given sort parameters and.February 2003 Raceway Blank Part IDs (blank_ids) This report outputs information from both the straight and the fitting tables whose part id (ee_part) information is blank. 2.the RIS process.

any active secondary forms are erased. This form consists of a list of all the schemas known to RIS and several buttons corresponding to the actions of the Schema Manager. RIS Schema Manager terminates. If you select any of the buttons. RIS initiates that particular action by displaying one of the forms defined below. When you select Reset. For more detailed information on the RIS Schema Manager. refer to the Relational Interface System (RIS) Reference Guide._ _______________ Appendix K: RIS Schema Manager Appendix K RIS Schema Manager K: RIS Schema Mgr. 553 . If you select one of the schemas in the list. and dropping RIS schemas. changing. It can also be used to display information about any existing schemas. You can access RIS Schema Manager from EE Database Utilities or by clicking Start > Programs > RIS version number > RIS Schema Manager. The RIS Schema Manager is a stand-alone utility for creating. When you select Cancel (X). and the RIS Schema Manager rereads the risschema file. then information about that schema is displayed.

with the exception of the Schema Name field. You can specify a schema in two ways: either by keying in the schema name in the Schema Name field. 554 . a read only form._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . or by choosing a schema from the list on the RIS Schema Manager form.February 2003 Schema Information Form This form is. Selecting Cancel (X) exits the Schema Information form. It reads information about existing schemas.

Select an existing schema on the RIS Schema Manager form. You can enter database-specific information on the Create Schema form using one of three methods: 1. If you select one of the databases. input fields for that information display. select Run to create the schema. To change the order of the Network Protocol fields. If the selected database type requires additional information. The value you selected originally moves to the bottom of the list. information about that database is entered into the Create Schema input fields. its value will be replaced with the value of the field below it. This method is particularly convenient when creating additional schemas for a database. Selecting the Force button forces the system to create the schema despite corrupted data or other errors it may encounter. and corresponds directly to the RIS create schema statement. Once you have entered all necessary information. 555 . select one of the Network Protocol fields. A form listing all the known RIS databases is displayed. 3. Key in all information in the input fields. Selecting Reset clears all input fields on the form. The database-specific information about that schema is entered in the Create Schema input fields. Selecting the Local Machine button fills the Node Address field with the addresses of the local machine._ _______________ Appendix K: Create Schema Form Create Schema Form K: RIS Schema Mgr. Selecting Cancel (X) exits the form. This form creates new RIS schemas. 2. This is your only alternative if the schema is created on a database which is unknown to RIS. Select the Display Databases button.

Alter Schema Form This form performs three functions: it modifies the schema password. This action can also be used to change the order of the fields or to change the order of the protocols. the user password. Selecting Cancel (X) exits the form. When you select one of these options. only those gadgets associated with the action are enabled. either enter the schema name in the Schema Name field. When you have entered all necessary information. You must enter both the original and new passwords to modify the schema password.February 2003 Drop Schema Form This form drops RIS schemas. To modify the user password. Selecting Cancel (X) exits the form. and the schema node. or select a schema from the list on the RIS Schema Manager form. To select the schema to be altered. 556 . enter the new addresses in the Node Address fields._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . you need only to enter the new password. Selecting Reset clears all the fields on the form. Selecting Run drops the schema. either enter the schema name in the Schema Name field. or select a schema from the list on the RIS Schema Manager form. select Run to alter the schema. To select a schema to drop. while selecting Reset clears all the fields on the form. To modify the schema node.

Selecting any of these buttons initiates an action. Selecting Cancel (X) exits the Table Information form. and whether or not nulls are allowed in the column are displayed for each column in the table. 557 . Selecting Reset cancels any subforms. A field to search for a specific column is also provided. Table Information Form This form displays the definition of the specified table. Selecting Cancel (X) exits the Data Definition form. The column position. or by choosing the table from the list on the Data Definition form. The form buttons represent the data definition actions of the Schema Manager. and indexes defined for the schema specified in the schema name field. and displays one of the subforms defined in following sections. You can specify a table either by keying in the table name in the Table Name field. views. and Alter Table) will accept input._ _______________ Appendix K: Data Definition Form Data Definition Form K: RIS Schema Mgr. Drop Table. then you must enter it before the subforms (Create Table. column type. This form consists of a list of all the tables. If the selected schema requires a password. column name. and clears the list.

February 2003 Create Table Form This form creates tables in the schema specified on the Data Definition form. and Modify Column. column definitions can be modified. select Run to create the table. Select the Mode Run button to modify the column. columns can be dropped from the table definition. Select Reset to clear the form. Select the Mode Run button to insert the column. If a column is chosen in the table definition list. in the upper right corner of the form. In Insert Column Mode. This can be useful when creating several similar tables. Selecting the Mode Reset button clears the form mode. In Drop Column Mode. Select the Mode Run button to drop the column. Then there is the second set._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . The ability to load existing table definitions into the form exists just to provide a template or starting point for a new table. or by selecting the column in the table definition list. The column to be dropped must be specified by keying in the column name in the Column Name Search field. Select Cancel (X) to exit the form. referred to as the Mode Control buttons. The Create Table operates in three modes which are represented by the three buttons: Insert Column. The Create Table form is used only to create new tables. Once the table definition is complete. the definition of that table will be loaded into the Create Table form. which is used to execute and reset the different modes of the form. In Modify Column Mode. The column to be modified must be specified by keying in the column name in the Column Name Search field. while choosing the Mode Run button actually causes the action to take place. new columns can be added to the table definition. Otherwise the new column is appended to the list. which behaves as expected. 558 . These three buttons place the form in a particular mode. or chosen from the list on the Data Definition form. Drop Column. the new column is inserted in front of the chosen column. If the name of an existing table is entered into the Table Name field. This form has two sets of Control buttons. or by selecting the column in the table definition list. There is the usual set. It cannot be used to modify existing tables.

Alter Table Form This form alters existing tables in the schema specified on the Data Definition form._ _______________ Appendix K: Create Table Form Drop Table Form This form drops tables in the schema specified on the Data Definition form. 559 . Selecting Reset clears the form. select Run to alter the table. Selecting Cancel (X) exits the form. Once the new column is defined. It can only append one new column to an existing table. The table to be dropped can be specified by keying in the table name in the Table Name field or by selecting the table from the list on the Data Definition form. This form behaves in the same way as the RIS Alter Table command. Selecting Cancel (X) exits the form. Selecting Reset clears the form. K: RIS Schema Mgr. Selecting Run drops the table.

560 . an error-checking mechanism that ensures that the data EE reads from a remote risschema file is correct.February 2003 Schema File Form This form locates the risschema file that you are using on the network. Selecting Reset clears the form. Additionally. Selecting Cancel (X) exits the form. Selecting Reset clears the form settings._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . and it also allows you to specify which RDBMS(s) your schemas can use. it provides a Checksum Schema File option. Set Form This form allows you to toggle the database mode ANSI setting on and off. Selecting Cancel (X) exits the form.

a unique key to identify the database The database type. The parameters file describes the network address and filename of the schema definition file. The schema file is accessible only if the schema lock file exists. The locate schfile command in the interactive utility can be used to put the appropriate entry in the parameters file. the schema lock file is not replaced as it should be. The values found in the create schema option clause. This file is the schema lock file. I for Ingres. not a name) The name of the schema The database user name The database user password (encrypted) L: Schema Definition NETADDR SCHNAME USR USRPASS 561 . If there is no network address given. Access to the schema file is controlled by the presence of another file. Multiple files often result in a large number of inconsistencies. L for LU6.2 The network address (must be an address.LCK extension. and D for DB2 The database name as in the create schema statement. O for Oracle. the schema definition file will be created or used on the local machine. The schema definition file consists of database and schema entries which are associated by a DBID (database ID) key value. the lock file must be replaced manually. currently supported values are X for Informix. The parameters file is shipped with a default schema definition file specification. A line separates entries. T for TCP/IP. It is stored in a central location on the network and is used by all RIS client programs to ensure that all RIS clients use the same set of schema definitions. In these cases._ _______________ Appendix L: RIS Schema Definition File Appendix L RIS Schema Definition File The RIS schema definition file maintains all schema definitions known to RIS. Currently supported values are X for XNS. The communication protocol to be used to communicate with the database. Sometimes when RIS is abnormally terminated. it is still advisable to use only one schema file. The name of the schema lock file is the same as the schema file with the addition of the . The location of the schema definition file must be in the ris/parameters file on the client machine. There can be multiple schema entries for each database entry. Here is a description of the fields in the schema definition file: DBID DTYPE DBNAME PARMS PROTOCOL The database ID. It must be a name or pathname as required by the dbms. If the filename is not a full pathname. then the schema file is in use. referencing the file risschema in the directory where RIS was installed. D for DNP (DECnet). RIS will look for the file in the directory where RIS was installed on the given machine. If the lock file does not exist. Although you can use multiple files.

142.155 PROTOCOL= NETADDR= PROTOCOL= NETADDR= DIR=/usr/informix SQLEXEC= DBTEMP= TBCONFIG= ——————————————————————————– DBID=1 DTYPE=X DBNAME=/usr/ee/sample PROTOCOL=X NETADDR=0001349b. The valid value is cics and the default value is cics. This value is case-sensitive. the CICS transaction name._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide .142. The valid value is s370 and the default value is s370. The valid value is lu6.08-00-36-32-e4-00 PROTOCOL=T NETADDR=129. The name the IBM System Administrator called the RIS server when it was installed on the IBM. All users must be able to create and delete files in the directory where the schema file is located. This value is case-sensitive.2. The operating system that the RIS/DBMS uses. This value is case-sensitive. This value is case-sensitive. The environment that the RIS/DBMS uses. There are two logical units.155 PROTOCOL= 562 . The LU names are generated when RIS is installed. the other on the IBM. The valid value is mvs and the default value is mvs. one on the Clipper. The name the Clipper System Administrator assigned to the mode that allows communication to the RIS program on the IBM machine. Following is a sample schema definition file: CHECKSUM:1249378903 TIMESTAMP:728930074 ——————————————————————————– DBID=2 DTYPE=X DBNAME=/usr/ee/sample_ref PROTOCOL=X NETADDR=0001349b.135.135.February 2003 ARCH OS ENV The system architecture that the RIS/DBMS runs on. This value is case-sensitive.2 and the default value is lu6. The network protocol that RIS uses to get to the IBM machine where the DBMS resides. the name of the Clipper System Administrator assigned to the logical unit that allows communication to the RIS program on the IBM machine.08-00-36-32-e4-00 PROTOCOL=T NETADDR=129. NET_PROTOCOL RIS_LU or HOST_LU MODE HOST_PROGRAM A schema file must be readable and writable by all users.

This allows for additional protocols in the future. Currently. All these entries are created by the create schema statement. 563 . only the first protocol in the list will be used.H:. If the file is corrupted or removed.zW%wU5yg)U:IeK9tGB6R@Ezn:˜>’k BEGIN_GRANTEES END_GRANTEES DBID=1 RIS Schema Definition File L: Schema Definition Note that there is a list of protocols in the database entry._ _______________ Appendix L: NETADDR= PROTOCOL= NETADDR= DIR=/usr/informix SQLEXEC= DBTEMP= TBCONFIG= ——————————————————————————– SCHNAME=sample_ref USR=ee USRPASS=pz_-!=%#oa/#@?%qHt%h&jXJ2vj(tyeY%i)pV BEGIN_GRANTEES END_GRANTEES DBID=2 ——————————————————————————– SCHNAME=sample USR=ee USRPASS=’<j8. they can be recreated by reissuing the create schema statements.

February 2003 564 ._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide .

SYS_PASSW_FILE=d:\users\EEpasswd where \users is the path and \EEpasswd is the password file name. double click on the EE Manager icon to display the Verify Password form. will prompt you to re-enter the password for verification. the EE Manager form displays: 565 . Make sure the directory path to the password file exists. M: EE Manager EE Manager will prompt you for a password and. It is a process separate from the EE environment and should only be run by a system manager or by someone who has a working knowledge of the overall EE system. To run EE Manager._ _______________ Appendix M: EE Manager Appendix M EE Manager EE Manager is an environment created specifically for system manager functions. The password file will be created the first time you enter EE Manager using the file name you specified. Once you have successfully entered your password. if you are entering the environment for the first time. Once SYS_PASSW_FILE is set. see Appendix N. For detailed information on setting environment variables. the environment variable SYS_PASSW_FILE must be set to a complete path of a password file.

and update rows. In this Appendix Edit Database edits any schema that exists in the RIS dictionary._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . 566 . It uses DB Access to query and edit tables.February 2003 The password can be a maximum of 8 characters and is not case sensitive. delete rows.

Release the mouse button to display the row. which shows the current find criteria. this command finds all rows in the current table. save the current find criteria as a file to the attached library. Edit Query — Displays the Edit Query screen. A universe is located by selecting Process Query in the Database Edit environment. M: EE Manager Buttons at the bottom of the Database Edit form provide functions for manipulating the attached relational database. If no find criteria exist. which allow you to search the database._ _______________ Appendix M: Database Edit Functions Database Edit Functions To enter the Database Edit environment. From this screen you can edit the current find criteria. Current Row — Controls the display of rows in the current universe. or edit the value displayed in the field. and functions which enable you to change. delete. Field Descriptions Initialize Query — Initializes (clears) the current find criteria. The number on the button changes to reflect the row. 567 . or load find criteria from a file in the attached library. Select the arrows to move forward and backward through the rows in the universe. select and confirm the Edit database option from the System Manager menu. place the screen cursor on the slide bar button. Process Query — Searches the database to find all rows of the current table that meet the find criteria. A group of rows that match the current "query" criteria is called a universe. You can place the screen cursor at any point along the slide bar and press <D> to move the slide bar button directly to a new row. To go directly to a certain row. These buttons include various Query functions. press and hold the middle button on the mouse and drag the button. and insert a row or group of rows.

568 . Fields with these key-in modes are placed only when you customize a screen menu.February 2003 Review — Generates a formatted column-by-column listing of the current universe. The field under the AND/OR toggle lets you edit the active relational operator. As long as this command is active. Change All — Changes the value for one or multiple columns for all rows in the current universe. Delete All — Deletes all rows in the current universe from the database upon user verification. Multiple column searches are processed in order. By default. OR finds any row that contains either the previous find criteria or any current column value you specify. You can generate a review for all rows with database linkages to graphic elements within a fenced area in a design file. Change Row — Activates the Change Row mode. with logical AND having precedence over logical OR. You can toggle individual fields ON or OFF by selecting the field’s corresponding column name on the Database Edit screen. You can select a relational operator from the list to make it the active relational operator. When you select Update Active. Add Query — Used with the AND/OR toggle and relational operators to establish find criteria. Insert Row will not create a new row if a column is a SERIAL column (INFORMIX) or if it has a UNIQUE INDEX and a displayed column value duplicates the value for an existing row. You can also use the Update Active command to enter information for a new row when attaching new linkages in graphics. You can either edit the displayed value or select the right side of the field (a small box with dashes). Insert Row — Inserts a new row based on the column values for the displayed row. you can use the Insert Row command to add the displayed data as a row to the database. Relational Operators let you search for ranges of column values such as greater than and less than. Update Active — Lets you enter data without changing the displayed row in the database._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . The following are the available relational operators: = != < > <= >= !! : equal to (default) : not equal to : less than : greater than : less than or equal to : greater than or equal to : substring search The AND/OR toggle lets you establish either a logical AND or OR operation. Fields On/Off — Toggles all column fields ON or OFF. you can enter data on the displayed row without changing the database. A box containing a list of the various relational operators displays. and Update Active fields. When you are certain the data is correct. Add Query columns. any key-in in the screen menu is added as find criteria and is NOT made as a change in the database. the Database Edit screen has only Change Row fields. AND finds any rows that contain both the previous find criteria and any current column value you specify. Selecting Add Query puts the screen in Add Query mode. You can use the Update Active command to enter the column values you want for a row and then Insert Row to create a row with the displayed information. which overrides the key-in mode for Key Columns.

Database Edit Functions M: EE Manager 569 ._ _______________ Appendix M: Delete Row — Deletes the displayed row from the database upon user verification.

February 2003 570 ._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide .

_ _______________ Appendix N: EE Configure Appendix N EE Configure EE Configure is a process created specifically for setting environment variables for EE Raceway on a Windows NT platform. Field Descriptions Enter the EE File Name — The field below this label contains the complete path and filename where the current configuration file ee.cfg file. Variable — The field next to this label displays the Environment Variable name when any row is selected in the list menu. Set — The Set button writes the corresponding variable and its value to the list. 571 . Double-click on the EE Config icon to display the Configure EE Environment form.cfg is located. N: EE Configure User Environment Variables — The list below this label contains the list of all the environment variables along with their path. Value — The field next to this label displays the value of the Environment Variable when any row is selected in the list menu.cfg file to the list. This process is separate from EE Environment and allows changes to the value of a variable in the ee. Delete — The Delete button deletes the corresponding variable and its value from the list. Reset — The Reset button writes the contents of the ee. Descrip — The field next to this label displays the description associated with the selected Environment Variable.

The corresponding value of the environment variable appears in the Value field. 5. When complete. Double click on the EE Configure icon. Click on the Set button to accept the new value. 4. the Configure EE Environment form displays the list of user environment variables and their corresponding value. 3. if any. The User Environment Variables list now contains the new value for this variable. Edit the entry in the Value field. continue the same process as above.cfg file. The description. Select the environment variable you want to change from the User Environment Variables list. 8. The name of the environment variable appears in the Variable field. Click on Cancel to disregard any changes. To delete the variable.February 2003 Browse — The Browse button lets you select the required ee. click on OK to accept the changes and to overwrite the ee. 572 . The variable will no longer appear in the User Environment Variables list. 2. 7. click on the Delete button.cfg file. appears in the Descrip field. This same field can be used to add a new variable. To edit the values of other variables. Steps 1. 6._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide .

A branch point allows for placement of branch components. active depth Glossary active process application software batch processing batch queue branch point cancel button N: EE Configure cell A permanent association of elements that can be stored and placed as a group. See also path name and relative path name. NFS. unlike system software which runs other software. A group of columns defines a table in a database. the menus. a node which accesses data or performs a function on the remote resource (usually a server). An attribute of a database table. Instructions from the user to perform a function on specified data. A batch queue handles scheduling for processes submitted through the Batch options screen menu. The process which is displayed in the Process ID field. Software designed to meet specific needs. The plane in a 3-D design upon which you can place elements and perform manipulations. A column data type that stores alphanumeric character data. All network operations (database. A method of processing data which collects a series of operations into a group (or ‘‘batch’’) and executes the group in a continuous stream without user intervention. it controls the message fields._ _______________ Glossary absolute path name The sequence of directories. and then manipulated as individual elements. A button that appears in the upper right corner of a form and contains a green check mark or the word confirm. The active process has a highlighted window icon strip. Select the confirm button to initiate a specified option. or channel for moving requests. character client column command confirm button 573 . Select the cancel button to exit the form or option. beginning with the root directory (/) that locates a file. In network operations. A queue. and the keyboard. created through NQS. NQS) between two or more nodes establish a client/server relationship. A point on a pipeline which separates piping segments so that they can be assigned different segment parameters. The button located in the upper right corner of a form containing a red X or the word cancel.

or Z axis. for example._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . and user-generated quit signals. For example. identify and accept elements. though this is not required. Also known as key-in field. The field on a screen used to accept user-supplied data. An ordered set of absolute or relative data values that specify a location in a coordinate system. A point placed by pressing the data button on the mouse. illegal instructions. To remove. destroy. A collection of comprehensive informational files having predetermined structure and organization that can then be communicated. Normally.0. bus errors. Data points select commands from the panel menus and Menu Bar. place elements. and Z axes of the design cube. disk drive. tape drive. a character or sequence of contiguous characters that mark the end of a string of characters. The part of the database that is made of rows and columns and contains information about the project and design elements. Other coordinate systems are used to more easily express the coordinates of specific geometric entities. and activate windows and perform window manipulations. The image files written by System V for a number of reasons. A separating mark or space. a component onto which a user cannot log. that is. interpreted. whereby points are located by traversing the X. to accept previously selected elements.February 2003 coordinate coordinate system The location of a point along the X. The pointer that the user moves on the screen to indicate an item or area. the most common of which are memory violations. Y. Y. and to select commands from forms and menus. The mouse button used to place data points and tentative points.0. coordinates core files cursor data button data entry field data point database database table default delete delimiter device 574 . or erase. and you can use a cylindrical coordinate system to help define points on a cylinder. or processed by a specific program. coordinate systems have their origin defined as 0. you can use a spherical coordinate system to help define points on a sphere. A nonaddressable component of a network. eliminate. The predetermined value of a parameter that is automatically supplied by the system or program whenever a value is not specified by the user. The most common coordinate system is the rectangular coordinate system. and floppy disk. A geometric relation used to denote the location of points in the design cube.

difference in longitude. or positive. A pictorial representation or image. you must have the FORMS_S product on your workstation. Because many of the screen menus in the application software are built with I/FORMS. Gadgets can display default values or act as data entry areas. a list of the data available for that field is displayed.) of interest about which information is stored. a field. The name of the entire path or directory hierarchy to a file. When selected. that responds to information. and so forth. Input can then be selected from the list with a data point instead of keying in the information. See interference envelope. a relational database table. including the file name. The set of acceptable values for a value within a component. such as a button. A classified structure with superiors (roots) and subordinates (dependents) for grouping files or commands. a symbol that graphically identifies a command. Another term for the dynamic function that attaches the cursor to an element so you can see it move. header hierarchy icon Informix Ingres interference envelope 575 . element. An equipment modeling primitive or parametric component that is used in conjunction with or instead of model graphics for interference checking. See also relative path name. A relational database management system supported by RIS. or a checklist. The first items of information in a file which precede any actual data. domain dragging easting entity envelope file file specification filename form full path name N: EE Configure gadget A portion of a form. An interface or screen menu designed with the I/FORMS product. A path name that tells the system where to locate a file. Interference envelopes are given different levels and display symbology to distinguish them from primitives. drawing. A relational database management system supported by RIS. A user-defined name given to an interactively created file. A term used in plane surveying that describes an east. Glossary A small box with horizontal dashes located at the end of a form key-in field. An object (project._ _______________ directory display-list box A file that contains the names of other files. The header contains information on the structure and contents of the file. The name should be relevant to the contents of the file.

to which you can snap._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . The strip at the top of the screen that contains icons for selecting commands. the Current Command field. The term network can mean the devices that connect the system. The hard-wired Ethernet address assigned to each node when it is manufactured. or alias. The network enables the connected nodes to share data and system control. A point on an element. the system that provides access to data that is distributed among machines through an interconnection of host computers and workstations.February 2003 invert elevation isometric The lowest point on the internal diameter of the pipe. Also known as a data entry field. that can be assigned to the node address of a device on a network. key key-in field keypoint keyword menubar message area model network NFS node node address node name northing 576 . Relating to or being a drafting system characterized by three equal axes at right angles. and the Key-in field. An interconnection of host computers and workstations that enables them to share data and control. A name. It is necessary for each node to identify and communicate with another node in the network. NFS is usually used to access centralized data on a server. The area that appears in the MicroStation Command Window when you are working in a design file. NFS allows you to mount a remote resource to your local workstation so you can access the data as though it were local. or it can mean the connected system. a view in which the horizontal lines of an element are drawn at an angle to the horizontal and all verticals are projected at an angle from the base. A word recognized by the software that provides access to a certain function. An attribute (column) in a table which is chosen as the access vehicle to individual rows of the table. A graphic representation or schema. A term used to describe a north coordinate location in the plant coordinate system. including vertices. Any addressable device (such as a workstation or a server) that is connected to a network. It is divided into the Command Status field. Network File System. the Prompt field. The field on a screen used to accept user-supplied data.

label descriptions. the software package that allows you to define network-wide batch and device queues. Use of NQS involves setting up local resource queues on the system(s) where the resources reside and setting up ‘‘pipe queues’’ on the systems that are to have access to the resources. A relational database management system supported by RIS. and is three-dimensional. A property whose value determines the characteristics or behavior of something. See also absolute path name and relative path name._ _______________ nozzle A special equipment modeling primitive that contains the connection point to piping. The point at which the coordinate system is placed. but rather represents the face-of-flange coordinate. RDB reference database relative path name rotate 577 . The sequence of directories leading from the current directory to a particular file. A view which is a projection of the model onto a plane along lines which are orthogonal to the plane. This point does NOT include a gasket allowance. job specifications. In coordinate geometry. y. and z-axes intersect. having no elevations or depressions. vendor’s catalog data. Network Queuing System. to transform by revolution about a specific axis. path name PDS pipe queue N: EE Configure place data point plane To identify a specific element. NQS Glossary Oracle origin origin point orthogonal view parameter path A sequence of directories leading to a file or a sequence of menus leading to a command. The sequence of directories leading to a file. A spatial element in geometry that may or may not have a boundary. the point where the x. A collection of reference data containing information relative to industry design codes. or indicate a specific point in the design file. See also path name and absolute path name. Reference Database. report formats and other information of a similar manner. Plant Design System A controlled channel for moving requests to batch or device queues on remote systems and for receiving status and/or data in response. commodity libraries. To turn. but is level. graphics symbology. to change the angular orientation.

The display style of an element. dash-dot. rubberbanding schema schema file server Structured Query Language SQL style surface symbology table toggle user name values variable vector view virtual memory 578 . and weight. A name that provides access to an account on the system. A collection of data for quick reference. The defined area of vision on a screen. Because the internal processing memory stores a minimal amount of data. to change between two alternatives. A quantity that may assume any one of a set of values. either stored in sequential locations in memory or printed as an array of rows and columns of data items of the same type. NQS) between two or more nodes establish a client/server relationship. including color. See also active depth. the node which maintains common data or performs a common task needed by clients. generally represented as a line. Data. solid. A view allows you to see a prescribed volume of the design cube. Language developed by IBM for creating. and querying relational databases.February 2003 row A unit of related information in a table. The view axes maintain this relationship regardless of the rotation with respect to the design cube. modifying.y plane of the view is parallel to the screen. This means that unneeded files and data. The x. while the z-axis can be thought of as coming straight out of the view towards you. A file that outlines the overall logical structure of a rule base or a database. In network operations. stay on the disk until they are called for. The skin of a three-dimensional geometric element. NFS. External memory for a computer that can be used as if it were an extension of the computer’s internal memory. To switch. One collection of column values for a table. that are stored in an attribute.z). The software uses virtual memory to store data. A quantity possessing both magnitude and direction. All network operations (database. either entered by the user or determined by the software. the software can perform processing more quickly._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . The symbology of an element such as continuous dashes. The animation dynamic that enables you to specify the position of a data point while the element changes as you move the cursor. style. A description of the overall structure of the rulebase or database.y. and so forth. Vectors can be manipulated geometrically and are represented as a coordinate triple (x. Views are created with their own x. and z axes. y.

Glossary N: EE Configure 579 ._ _______________ working directory The directory from which you are accessing files.

_ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide .February 2003 580 .

539 alter schema form 556 table form 559 angle active 256 annotate element 178 access column 179. 234 by group 233 clear button 180. 109. 550 bin/ 521. 234. 234 override button 180. 234 list column 179. 527 attributes default 430 setting raceway 256 automatic fit 151 propagation 298 size 151 B background 522 bar commands palette 98 basic concepts database 115 drawing 108 propagation 113 setup 27._ _______________ Index A access column 179. 235 source column 179. 235 override keys 179. 425 approval status codelist 432 archive form 46 option 86 archive project network protocol TCP/XNS 46 remote node name/address 46 asid id display 316 highlight 309 assign 522. 235 display toggle 179. 415. 234 select button 180. 527 blank part ids 552 C cable code codelist 439 color codelist 441 configuration codelist 440 insulation type codelist 444 Index N: EE Configure 581 . 327. 234 model 285 one-line 178.cmd 529. 290 activate design volume coordinate system 320 plant coordinate system 320 active angle 256 one-line type parameters access column 290 clear 291 display toggle 290 list column 290 override 291 save to memory 289 select 290 parameters 146 point coordinates display 121 define 145 active coordinate system 320 add query 568 systems 245 airway place 132 alias. 233 RCP 178 annot_form 529 application manager information 27. 110 workstation skills 26 batch 522 bill of materials 549 by volume 72.

msg 529 commands construct point 123 extend/reduce run 125 midpoint on segment 123 Commands Integrated 368 compile eden symbol 349 compress eden symbol library 359 conduit place 132 place stub up 167 seamless tubing 114 sizing 155 attributes 268 config/ 522. 271 cfg/ 527 change all 568 row 568 change system parameters 221 changing one-line type 294 parameters one-line type 289 propagation 297 raceway 256 symbology 264 system 295 cleanup database 340 clear annotate element 180. 278._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . 527 construct point 123 construction class display 306 control number 165 set symbology 262 symbology 264 coordinate system design volume 320 plant 320 show active 320 coordinate system 320 coordinates display 121 copy clone element 188 by group 239 element 184 by group 231 menu 43 option 78 582 .February 2003 cable (continued) size codelist 440 voltage codelist 443 cardinal point codelist 433 cell create commands 269 drop point 277. 235 one-line type parameters 291 clip 522 clone element 188 by group 239 codelists 432 approval status 432 cardinal point 433 drawing type 433 manual fitting 433 one-line type 434 RCP type 435 system 435 three-line qualifier 437 subtype 437 type 436 units 438 vendor 438 wire/cable code 439 color 441 configuration 440 insulation type 444 voltage 443 codelists (continued) wire/cable size 440 yes/no 445 coincident RCP checks 209 color parameters 256 combine coincident RCPs 209 command palettes 97 command. 276 model 271 library 269. 279 equipment pointer 274. 275.

276 model 271 menu 39 option 61 schema form 555 tables 558 drop mode 558 insert mode 558 modify mode 558 three-lines 194 create_db 428. 522 cross section ductbank definition 164 rotate 140 rotation angle 256 scale factor 256 crosses 195 cutback mode 150 D data definition form 557 files 522. 279 equipment pointer 274. 275. 425 cleanup 340 edit 567 add query 568 change all 568 change row 568 current row box 567 delete all 568 edit query 567 initialize query 567 insert row 568 process query 567 review 568 toggle 568 update active 568 load 323. 527 database 321. 528 dba_rpt 522 dba_shell 522 DbEdit 567 defaults attributes 430 raceway 256 RCP key 257 text 266 define active point 145 duct cross section 164 group 226 one-line type 260 parameters 146 raceway defaults 256 system 258 delete all 568 duplicate one-lines 211 eden symbol 351 element 212 by group 251 fitting 216 menu 44 one-line vertex 217 option 79 RCP 214 design commands 129 conduit sizing 155 define duct cross section 164 file command menu bar 96 insert one-line vertex 160 insert RCP 138 option 63 palette 99 place drop point 142 equipment pointer 144 manual fitting 147 one-line 132 rotate cross section 140 route around vessel 135 set Index N: EE Configure 583 . 278. 332 batch file 335 palette 102 procedures 427 project 115 reference 115 relational 427 report 326 rule checks 329 setup 33 database (continued) utilities 50 RIS schema utilities 51 update project schema 52 update reference schema 55 db/ 523._ _______________ create cell 269 drop point 277.

234 one-line type parameters 290 document organization 19 outline 25 purpose 19 downloading 29 drawing process 108 setup 110 type codelist table 433 drop point create cell 277. 279 keys 431 place 142 schema form 556 table form 559 ductbank cross section definition 164 place 132 duplicate one-line checking 211 DVCS 320 E eden/ 528 eden example 514 list functions 355 mode 113 eden (continued) option 67 batch mode 69 operating modes 68 processes 347 compile symbol 349 compress symbol library 359 delete symbol 351 edit symbol file 366 extract symbol 361 extract user function 363 list symbol library 353 list user functions 355 merge symbol libraries 357 symbol compile 349 compress library 359 delete 351 edit file 366 extract 361 generation 513 list library 353 merge libraries 357 processor file 513 user function extract 363 eden.February 2003 design (continued) set (continued) active parameters 146 unload 336 design volume coordinate system 320 dgn/ 528 directory structure 520 display annotation 306 asid id 316 construction class 306 element information 301 element type 316 field 121 link 317 one-line type 318 screen 93 sector/word 315 system 318 toggle annotate element 179. 278.dat 528 edit eden symbol file 366 manual fitting 198 model annotation 285 query 567 EE configure 571 databases 425 environment 35 forms archive 46 restore 48 manager 565 menus 36 copy 43 create 39 database utilities 50 delete 44 enter 40 product menu 42 nucleus file structure 520 raceway file structure 524 584 ._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide .

87. 82.msg 529 errors messages 377 propagation 314 extend/reduce run 125 extract eden symbol from library 361 eden user function from library 363 F field routed raceway 161 filename highlight asid id 309 highlight link 312 files data 522. 80. 527 eden symbol processor 513 password 565 purge 81 rway. 79. 89 palette 97 palettes 97 elbows 195 elements annotate 178 by group 233 clone 188 by group 239 copy 184 by group 231 delete 212 by group 251 display information 301 highlight by asid id 309 by link 312 by sector/word 307 identifying 103 modify commands 173 modifying 175 move 186 placing 129 propagate 194 by group 241 type display 316 engineering units 267 enter menu 40 environment EE 35 EE Raceway 59 variables 422 environment rules for fittings 446 environments graphics palettes 97 equipment pointer create 274. 81. 86. 512 delete 216 edit/insert manual fitting 198 environment rules 446 place by rule 207 by group 243 place manual fitting 147 floppy/network toggle 86 Index N: EE Configure 585 . 275. 84.bar 529 eeconfig 522 eemgr 522 eeprj 522 eeqpr 522 EERWAY command menu bar 96 environment 59 create 61 design 63 eden 67 batch mode 69 operating modes 68 processes 64 batch mode 66 operating modes 65 reports 70 rule checks 73 utilities 75. 78._ _______________ ee.cmd 543 seed English 528 metric 528 structure EE nucleus 520 EE raceway 524 fittings 195. 276 keys 431 place 144 error. 83.

February 2003 force 555 forms/ 523 forms maximize/minimize 120 precision input customizing 417 function eden library 355 G graphic symbology 262. 332 batch file 335 lock model 282 M main form EE archive 46 restore 48 586 . 567 input precision 119 insert one-line vertex 160 RCP 138 row 568 installation 27 databases 33 downloading 29 Integrated Commands 368 palette 97 Using 369 interference detection 118. 359. 264. 357. 290 eden symbol library 353 user functions 355 load 527 database 323. 266 graphics environment palettes 97 group annotate 233 copy 231 define 226 delete 251 minimize joints 248 propagate 241 H help_graphics 528 help_rway. 361 eden user function 363 eden user functions 355 link display 317 highlight 312 list column 179. 234.s 528 help_source/ 528 highlight element by asid id 309 by link 312 by sector/word 307 propagation errors 314 horizontal spacing 165 I identifying elements 103 IGDS toggle 83 increase size only 157 increase/decrease size 157 information about elements 301 initialize query 157. 344 introduction 25 J joints minimize 219 by group 248 K key-ins precision 104.hp 528 help_rway. 271 eden symbol 353._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . 119 keys 430 drop point 431 equipment pointer 431 one-line 430 override 115 RCP 431 L levels set active 299 library cell 269. 342.

_ _______________ main menu EE 36 copy 43 create 39 database utilities 50 delete 44 enter 40 product menu 42 EERWAY create 61 design 63 eden 67 processes 64 report 70 rule checks 73 utilities 75 manual fitting edit/insert 198 part codelist table 433 place 147 material takeoff 548 maximize form 120 menu. 529 mslink display 317 highlight 312 Index N: EE Configure 587 .cfg 527 menus 91 command menu bar 96 directory 528 EERWAY command menu bar 96 menu_shell 522 merge eden symbol libraries 357 merge_pnl/ 529 merge_pnl 529 messages display fields 93 error 377 MicroMenu umenu 543 midpoint on segment 123 minimize form 120 minimize joints 219 by group 248 model annotate 285 move annotation 283 commands 280 using 281 create model cell 271 lock 282 unlock 284 model commands palette 101 modify 173 add systems by group 245 annotate element 178 by group 233 clone element 188 by group 239 combine coincident RCPs 209 copy element 184 by group 231 define group 226 delete duplicate one-lines 211 element 212 by group 251 fitting 216 one-line vertex 217 RCP 214 edit/insert manual fitting 198 elements 175 group commands 223 define group 226 minimize joints 219 by group 248 move element 186 one-line segment 190 one-line vertex 192 one-line route 204 palette 99 place fitting by rule 207 by group 243 propagate element 194 by group 241 reference schema 451 remove RCP 214 replace systems by group 246 modify element palette 98 modify group palette 100 move element 186 model annotation 283 move/move to toggle 121 one-line segment 190 one-line vertex 192 mscrecol.sh 522 msg/ 523.

52. 289 part verification 297 password echo toggle 46. 179.dgn 528 mstr_rway. 233 delete duplicates 211 vertex 217 insert vertex 160 keys 430 modify route 204 move segment 190 move vertex 192 place 132 route around vessel 135 type codelist table 434 define 260 display 318 parameters 289 access column 290 clear 291 display toggle 290 list column 290 override 291 override keys 290 save to memory 289 select 290 priority 434 set active 294 types 110 output option 89 override button annotate element 180. 55 file 565 PCS 320 PDS reference model from 372 review attributes 371 review clash 375 window to named PDS item 374 percent fill 157 percentage of raceway changing 221 place drop point 142 equipment pointer 144 field routed raceway 161 fitting by rule 207 by group 243 manual fitting 147 588 .February 2003 msseed._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . 48. 235 keys 115.hp 528 mstr_rway. 290 one-line type parameters 291 setting 263 P palettes bar commands 98 database 102 design 99 EERWAY 97 Integrated Commands 97 MicroStation commands 98 model commands 101 modify 99 modify element 98 modify group 100 runtime setup 101 setup commands 100 utilities 102 parameters active 111 active angle 256 color 256 one-line type 289 access column 290 clear 291 display toggle 290 list column 290 override 291 override keys 290 save to memory 289 select 290 propagation 297 raceway 256 set active 146.s 528 N network/floppy toggle 86 new users database preparation 427 nucleus file structure 520 O one-line annotate 233 changing sizes 178. 234.

527 project database 115 schema description 487 drawing list 547 schema general description 448 update 449 prompt. 536 priority 434 procedures 107 process query 157. 132 RCP 138 stub up 167 placepoint 150 plant coordinate system 320 precision input 119 active point coordinates display 121 construct point 123 customizing 417 display fields 121 extend/reduce run 125 midpoint on segment 123 move/move to toggle 121 key-ins 104 prerequisite 26 print. 533 processes 331 cleanup database 340 eden 347 interference detection 342. 55. 567 process. 297 parameters 111 part verification 297 setup 297 style 297 purge option 81 Q query add 568 edit 567 initialize 567 process 567 R raceway defaults set 256 field routed 161 processes 331 RCPs 112 combine coincident RCPs 209 default key 257 delete 214 insert 138 keys 431 type codelist table 435 weight 257 README 521. 527 product. 344 load database 332 batch file 335 option 64 batch mode 66 operating modes 65 unload design 336 sheet 338 processing toggle 53.dat 528. 297 sketch 113.dat 522.msg 529 propagate 113 automatic propagation 298 element 194 by group 241 fittings 195 highlight errors 314 modes 297 eden 113._ _______________ place (continued) one-line 112.def 521. 65 processor file 513 product menu 42 removal 521. 527 receive option 84 reduce run 125 reducers 195 reeprj 522 reference database 115 schema description 454 guide 25 schema 510 description 430 modifying 451 updating 449 Index N: EE Configure 589 .

cmds 528 rwayh_pnl 529 rway.sym 529 rway. 550 blank part ids 552 database 326 directory 529 material takeoff 548 option 70 project drawing list 547 templates 546 restore form 48 option 87 restore project from archive TCP/XNS toggle 48 XNS/TCP toggle 48 review PDS attributes 371 PDS clash 375 RIS 115. 545 bill of materials 549 by volume 72.tbl 529 rway_ref.cmd file 543 rway. 534 reports 117.dat 528.dat 528. 426 procedures 427 schema manager 553 alter schema form 556 alter table form 559 create schema form 555 create table form 558 data definition form 557 RIS (continued) schema manager (continued) drop schema form 556 drop table form 559 force 555 schema file form 560 schema information form 554 set form 560 table information form 557 schema utilities 51 rotate cross section 140 orientation 151 rotation angle cross section 256 rule checks database 329 option 73 templates 546 rule_chk. 327. 535 runs 112 runtime setup 287 display element information 301 palette 101 propagation setup 297 set active levels 299 one-line type 294 one-line type parameters 289 system 295 rway_bar 528 rwaybar.pnl 529 rwaypnl. 487 drop 556 file 560 590 ._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide .tbl 529 S save to memory 289 scale factor cross section 256 schema 115 create 555 definition file 561 fields 561 description 454. 527 rename option 82 replace systems by group 246 report.sym 529 rway_prj.February 2003 reference PDS model 372 relational databases 427 interface system (RIS) 426 report processing 545 relational interface system (RIS) alter schema 556 alter table 559 data definition 557 drop schema 556 drop table 559 schema creation 555 schema file 560 set 560 table creation 558 table information 557 remove one-line vertex 217 RCP 214 script 521.

dgn 528 select button annotate element 180. 529 symbol eden compile 349 compress 359 delete 351 extract 361 list library 353 merge libraries 357 file edit eden 366 generation 513 example 514 processor file 513 symbology 110 changing 264 control 264 Index N: EE Configure 591 .msg 529 straights 195 structure EE Raceway 524 file 520 stub up 167 subsystems 295 sym/ 523. 234 SPEC process 507 specification 507 specification tables 510 start-up sequence 92 status. 233 sizing conduit 155 sizing attributes 268 sketch mode 113 skills workstation 26 software downloading 29 source column 179. 109 unlock model 284 setup commands palette 100 sheet unload 338 show active coordinate system 320 size changing one-line size 178. 449 project 449 reference 449 utilities 51 screen display 93 seamless tubing 114 sector/word display 315 highlight 307 seed/ 528 seed._ _______________ schema (continued) information form 554 modifying reference 451 names 450 project 448 reference 430 update 428. 235 one-line type parameters 290 send option 83 set 560 active levels 299 one-line type 294 one-line type parameters 289 parameters 146 point 145 system 295 conduit sizing attributes 268 defaults 256 symbology control 262 text defaults 266 setup commands 253 conduit sizing attributes 268 create cell 269 define one-line type 260 system 258 lock model 282 model 280 model annotation 285 move 283 propagation 297 set raceway defaults 256 symbology control 262 setup (continued) set (continued) text defaults 266 symbology control 264 system manager 27.

109._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . 52. 48. 449 reference 55. 55 processing 53. 55. 295 add 245 codelist table 435 define 258 display 318 manager information 27. 415. 425 replace systems group 246 set active 295 system percentage changing 221 T tables codelists 432 information form 557 TCP/XNS protocol archive project 46 TCP/XNS toggle restore project from archive 48 templates reports 546 rule checks 546 text defaults 266 set 266 text nodes 266 text strings 266 nodes 266 strings 266 three-line codelist table 436 create 194 qualifier codelist table 437 subtype codelist table 437 tmp/ 529 toggle construction display on/off 306 IGDS 83 network/floppy 86 password echo 46.unl files 509 unload 527 design 336 sheet 338 unlock model 284 update active 568 schema 428. 449 project 52. 449 upgrading workstation 28 user function eden extract 363 utilities 303 display element type and asid id 316 link 317 sector/word 315 system and one-line type 318 highlight by asid id 309 by link 312 by sector/word 307 propagation errors 314 option 75 archive 86 copy 78 delete 79 output 89 purge 81 receive 84 rename 82 restore 87 send 83 undelete 80 palette 102 reference PDS model 372 review PDS attributes 371 592 .February 2003 symbology (continued) control (continued) set 262 system 110. 65 tools reference PDS model 372 review PDS attributes 371 review PDS clash 375 window to named PDS item 374 tray place 132 tray_part table 511 tray_spec table 510 typefaces 21 U umenu 543 undelete 80 units codelist table 438 engineering 267 working 104 .

550 W weight RCP 257 window to named PDS item 374 wire code codelist 439 color codelist 441 configuration codelist 440 insulation type codelist 444 size codelist 440 voltage codelist 443 wireway place 132 workflow 107 databases 115 drawing process 108 drawing setup 110 eden symbol generation 513 one-line types 110 parameters 111 place one-line 112 propagation 113 propagation parameters 111 reports 117 setup 109. 110 symbology 110 systems 110 working units 104 workstation skills 26 upgrading 28 wyes 195 X XNS/TCP toggle archive project 46 Index N: EE Configure 593 . 327._ _______________ utilities (continued) review PDS clash 375 schema 51 toggle construction display on/off 306 window to named PDS item 374 V vendor codelist table 438 specification 507 vertical spacing 165 vessel routing around 135 volume bill of materials 72.

February 2003 594 ._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide .

02.00.EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide Addendum February 2003 DPDS3-PB-200005C For PDS version 07.** This document supplements DPDS3-PB-200005B. .

......................................... 607 Rotate Element......................................... 609 Rotate Copy Element.................4)........................................................................................................................EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide Addendum – February 2003 Table of Contents PDS Electrical Raceway Environment ........ 601 Palettes in the EE Raceway Graphics Environment (replaces 5............................ 619 Rotate Copy Group ........................... 633 EE Nucleus File Structure ... 615 Modify Group Commands (replaces 9............................................................................................................................................... 597 Modeling............................................ 625 Move Group................. 634 EE Raceway File Structure.................................................................................................2)........................ 628 Reference PDS Model (replaces 16............................. 627 Annotate Model.................. 598 Load Reference Schema ....................................................................................... 611 Mirror Element ............................... 623 Mirror Copy Group...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................3) ................................................................................. 613 Mirror Copy Element......................................................... 599 Utilities ...................................................................................................................................................................................................... 621 Mirror Group ................................................................................................................. 631 EE File Structure (replaces Appendix F) .............................................................................................. 629 EE Raceway Project Database Schema Description (replaces panel) .................2) ............................................................. 617 Rotate Group............................ 602 Modify Element Commands (replaces 9................................................................................ 637 596 ......................................................................................................................................

reporting. Load Reference Schema – Allows you to update the Raceway reference schema.PDS Electrical Raceway Environment When you select the Electrical Raceway Environment command on the PD_Shell form. Utilities – Allows you to access EE Raceway commands for EE Raceway processes. 597 . the EE Raceway Environment form displays. EDEN symbols. Commands Modeling – Allows you to open a design file in the PDS Raceway modeling environment. and rule checks.

Select a design area from the list. Steps 1. Select a model from the list.EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide Addendum – February 2003 Modeling This option allows you to select a design file to open in the modeling environment. 4. The selected model displays in MicroStation. 3. 2. 598 . The Raceway Designer form displays. Click Accept. Click Accept.

the process loads it only if the table is empty. 599 . the command makes the following changes: — Adds new tables listed in the . or to modify the tables in an existing RIS schema to conform to the structure of a given .cmd files.sql file.unl files that are listed in the . — Modifies existing tables if the definition of that table has changed in the . SQL File Network Address – Specifies the network address of the SQL file containing the correct table and column structure. SQL Filename – Specifies the file name of the SQL file containing the correct table and column structure. The process replaces the old table definition with the new table definition.sql file that has a different structure from the original . keeping column data where column names match.sql file.Load Reference Schema This option allows you to update the reference schema for the active project. If a table lacks a unique index.unl files to load into which tables.sql file.sql file. SQL File Path – Specifies the file path of the SQL file containing the correct table and column structure. If you update the schema with a . — Load those tables that have unique index numbers with data from the . Field Descriptions Reference Schema – Specifies the reference schema for the active project. You can use this command to update an existing empty RIS schema with EE tables and default information. CMD File Network Address – Specifies the network address of the CMD file that defines which .

600 . CMD Filename – Specifies the file name of the CMD file that defines which .unl files to load into which tables.EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide Addendum – February 2003 CMD File Path – Specifies the file path of the CMD file that defines which .unl files to load into which tables.

and Rule commands. These reports contain information on the project and reference databases. Refer to section 5 and Appendix J for more information on this command. EDEN – This command allows you to design and maintain your own symbols for Raceway elements. These processes allow you to manipulate drawings and the project database. EDEN. These rule checks are reports that identify violations of certain design rules by working on the project database. Commands Process – This command accesses all available EE Raceway processes. Report – This command accesses the standard EE Raceway reports. Refer to section 4 and Appendix J of the EE Raceway Reference Guide for more information on this command. Refer to sections 4 and 14 of the EE Raceway Reference Guide for more information on this command.Utilities This option accesses the EE Raceway Process. Refer to sections 4 and 15 of the EE Raceway Reference Guide for more information on this command. Rule – This command accesses the standard EE Raceway Rule Checks. 601 . Report.

You should become familiar with the name and functionality of each command on each palette.4) Note: The information in this section supersedes the information in the corresponding section of previous versions of the EE Raceway Reference Guide (pp 103-108 in the PDS 7. 602 . Mirror. Palettes are groups of commands that are accessible from the EERWAY command menu bar on the MicroStation command window. then selecting Integrated Commands > Palette from the resulting menu. The following information has been modified: Rotate. Integrated Commands This palette is activated by selecting File from the MicroStation command window. then selecting EERWAY from the resulting menu. Each command is described in full in later sections of this text. Next to each icon is the name of the form or command it represents.EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide Addendum – February 2003 Palettes in the EE Raceway Graphics Environment (replaces 5. This section presents the palettes in the order that they are accessible if you look at each menu going from left to right across the EERWAY command menu bar on the MicroStation command window. and Mirror Copy commands on the Modify Element and Modify Group palettes • Move Group command on the Modify Group palette See the following text for details.1 version of the document). Rotate Copy. • This section presents the palettes that are used in the EE Raceway graphics environment. EERWAY This palette is activated by selecting File from the MicroStation command window.

603 .Bar Commands This palette is activated by selecting File from the MicroStation command window. then selecting Bar Commands from the resulting menu. Modify Element This palette is activated by selecting Modify Element from the EERWAY palette. then selecting Modify Element Commands from Modify menu. then selecting Palette. This palette can also be activated by selecting Modify from the MicroStation command window. or it can be activated by selecting Modify Element from the Modify palette as shown later in this section. This palette contains the MicroStation commands as discussed in the MicroStation documentation.

604 . then selecting Modify from the resulting menu. then selecting Palette from the resulting menu. Modify This palette is activated by selecting Design from the MicroStation command window.EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide Addendum – February 2003 Design This palette is activated by selecting Design from the MicroStation command window.

then selecting Palette.Modify Group This palette is activated by selecting Modify Group from the Modify Palette. then selecting Modify Group Commands. Setup Commands This palette is activated by selecting Setup from the MicroStation command window. then selecting Palette. You can also activate this palette by selecting Modify from the MicroStation command window. 605 .

EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide Addendum – February 2003 Model Commands This palette is activated by selecting Model Commands from the Setup Commands palette. Runtime Setup This palette is activated by selecting Runtime from the MicroStation command window. then selecting Palette. 606 .

Mirror. Clone Element — Copies an element multiple times in the same direction. • The Modify Element palette is activated by selecting the Modify Element command from the Modify palette. Note: Do not use MicroStation commands to manipulate or modify EE Raceway elements (one-line. and edits intelligent annotation for raceway elements. Annotate Element — Places.2) Note: The information in this section supersedes the information in the corresponding section of previous versions of the EE Raceway Reference Guide (pp 181-182 in the PDS 7. The Modify Element commands manipulate individual elements. and delete specified elements. including RCPs. annotation. then selecting Palette.1 version of the document).Modify Element Commands (replaces 9. Modify Element commands also allow you to propagate one-lines in your raceway model. Doing so will cause serious problems and/or destroy the EE Raceway model. Copy Element — Copies an element as specified within the design file. The following information has been modified: Rotate. Move Element — Moves an element to a specified location in the design file. and Mirror Copy commands See the following text for details. You can use individual commands to move. then selecting Modify Element Commands. within the design file. Rotate Copy. and so forth). Use only these EE Raceway modify commands to manipulate EE Raceway elements. or by selecting Modify from the EERWAY Command Menu Bar. three-lines. and three-lines. reviews. and to check for duplicate one-lines and coincident RCPs in the design file. 607 . onelines. copy. to review or edit element annotation.

608 . Change System Parameters — Changes the system percentage and the project rule for a selected element. Place Fitting by Rule — Places a non-standard fitting at an RCP using a set of rules defined in the reference database. Edit/Insert Manual Fitting — Modifies fittings that were manually placed in the model. Propagate Element — Expands one-line elements into three-dimensional elements. Mirror Element — Flips an element about a specified point in the design file. Delete Fitting — Removes fittings from the design file. Check Duplicate One-lines — Checks for duplicate or overlapping one-lines in the design file. Modify One-Line — Modifies the route of an existing one-line element. Remove RCP — Deletes a specified RCP (raceway connect point) from the design file. Rotate Element — Rotates an element to a specified location in the design file. Minimize Joints — Reduces the number of vertices in an identified one-line to a minimum.EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide Addendum – February 2003 Move One-Line Segment — Moves a one-line segment while maintaining connectivity to existing elements. Mirror Copy Element — Copies an element and flips the copy about a specified point in the design file. Delete Element — Removes a valid raceway element. Rotate Copy Element — Copies an element and rotates the copy to a specified location in the design file. Move One-Line Vertex — Moves an internal one-line vertex. from the design file. Check Coincident RCPs — Checks for coincident RCPs in the design file. Remove One-Line Vertex — Deletes an internal vertex from an existing one-line. and elements associated with it.

For detailed information about precision input. The selected elements are rotated about the up-down axis passing through the rotation point. all attached one-lines will be rerouted to the new position of the RCP. see Precision Input Form. drop points. and equipment pointers will also be moved. and exit a command. All associated annotation. RCPs. three-line fittings. reset a command action. and annotation. Field Descriptions Rotation Point – Displays the location of the rotation point.Rotate Element This command rotates individual raceway elements as specified within the design file. If a one-line is rotated. Plan View – Specifies the angle at which to rotate the element on the plan view plane. Before Using This Command You can enter all values for the placement of points through a precision input form. all attached RCPs will be moved and all attached one-lines will be rerouted to the new one-line position. All associated annotation. three-line fittings. click the button for the plane and type the angle in the Angle field. and equipment pointers will also be moved. Using the form. equipment pointers. North Elevation – Specifies the angle at which to rotate the element on the north elevation plane. You must be familiar with precision input and its functions before using this command. The selected elements are rotated about the east-west axis passing through the rotation point. To change the angle. route one-lines. accept input. you can locate elements. The selected elements are rotated about the north-south axis passing through the rotation point. You can use this command to move one-lines. Angle – Key-in field used to specify the angle for each plane. reject input. East Elevation – Specifies the angle at which to rotate the element on the east elevation plane. 609 . If an RCP is rotated.

EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide Addendum – February 2003 At any point during this operating sequence. The system highlights the specified element. the system displays the message Element not found. 5. The element rotates to the specified position. The Rotate Element precision input form displays. 4. To reset a command action by one step or to reject a highlighted element. you can exit the command session either by pressing <Esc> or by selecting Cancel (X) on the precision input form. Identify the element you intend to rotate and accept it with <D>. If you do not locate an acceptable element. The Specify Rotation form displays. Specify the planes and angles at which to rotate the element. The message disappears when you identify a valid element. Steps 1. 610 . Click Accept. 3. 2. Specify the point around which to rotate the element. press <R> or select Reject on the precision input form. Select the Rotate Element command.

At any point during this operating sequence. The selected elements are rotated about the north-south axis passing through the rotation point. North Elevation – Specifies the angle at which to rotate the element on the north elevation plane. reset a command action. You can use this command to copy and rotate one-lines and their associated elements. reject input. 611 . Before Using This Command You can enter all values for the placement of points through a precision input form. You must be familiar with precision input and its functions before using this command. Using the form. accept input. The selected elements are rotated about the east-west axis passing through the rotation point. press <R> or select Reject on the precision input form. click the button for the plane and type the angle in the Angle field. Angle – Key-in field used to specify the angle for each plane. East Elevation – Specifies the angle at which to rotate the element on the east elevation plane. For detailed information about precision input. you can exit the command session either by pressing <Esc> or by selecting Cancel (X) on the precision input form. To reset a command action by one step or to reject a highlighted element. see Precision Input Form. you can locate elements. route one-lines. To change the angle. The selected elements are rotated about the up-down axis passing through the rotation point.Rotate Copy Element This command creates rotated copies of individual raceway elements as specified within the design file. and exit a command. Field Descriptions Rotation Point – Displays the location of the rotation point. Plan View – Specifies the angle at which to rotate the element on the plan view plane.

The Specify Rotation form displays. Identify the element you intend to rotate and copy and accept it with <D>. Click Accept. 3. The element copy displays at the specified position. The system highlights the specified element. 612 . The message disappears when you identify a valid element. The Rotate Copy Element precision input form displays. 2. Select the Rotate Copy Element command. If you do not locate an acceptable element. the system displays the message Element not found. Specify the point around which to rotate the element. Specify the planes and angles at which to rotate the element. 5.EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide Addendum – February 2003 Steps 1. 4.

If an RCP is rotated. Using the form.Mirror Element This command flips individual raceway elements about a point as specified within the design file. All associated annotation. reset a command action. At any point during this operating sequence. and annotation. equipment pointers. and equipment pointers will also be moved. route one-lines. Field Descriptions Mirror Point – Displays the location of the specified mirror point. The elements are rotated about the plane formed by the secondary and the normal. toggle among the three axes (Primary. I Button – Reorients the orientation tee along the identity matrix. see Precision Input Form. and the Normal axis with the positive Z axis. all attached RCPs will be moved and all attached one-lines will be rerouted to the new one-line position. You must be familiar with precision input and its functions before using this command. all attached one-lines will be rerouted to the new position of the RCP. Normal) until the appropriate axis displays. To change the displayed angle. drop points. About – Specifies the axis about which to rotate the orientation tee. you can locate elements. If a one-line is mirrored. you can exit the command session either by pressing <Esc> or by selecting Cancel (X) on the precision input form. Secondary. It realigns the Primary axis with the positive X axis. For detailed information about precision input. accept input. You can use this command to mirror one-lines. reject input. Angle – Specifies the angle by which to rotate the orientation tee. three-line fittings. Before Using This Command You can enter all values for the placement of points through a precision input form. To reset a 613 . and equipment pointers will also be moved. To change the displayed axis. select the field and type a new angle. RCPs. three-line fittings. The primary vector of the orientation tee denotes the mirror plane’s normal vector. All associated annotation. the Secondary axis with the positive Y axis. and exit a command.

The element rotates to the specified position. The primary vector of the orientation tee denotes the mirror plane’s normal vector. the system displays the message Element not found. If you do not locate an acceptable element.EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide Addendum – February 2003 command action by one step or to reject a highlighted element. Specify the mirror plane on which to mirror the element. Click Accept. 614 . Specify the point about which to mirror the element. Select the Mirror Element command. The Orient Mirror form displays. The system highlights the specified element. The Mirror Element precision input form displays. 4. Steps 1. The message disappears when you identify a valid element. press <R> or select Reject on the precision input form. Identify the element you intend to mirror and accept it with <D>. 3. 5. 2.

Normal) until the appropriate axis displays. route one-lines.Mirror Copy Element This command creates mirrored copies of individual raceway elements as specified within the design file. You can use this command to copy and mirror one-lines and their associated elements. You must be familiar with precision input and its functions before using this command. I Button – Reorients the orientation tee along the identity matrix. The Mirror Copy Element precision input form displays. Secondary. toggle among the three axes (Primary. select the field and type a new angle. press <R> or select Reject on the precision input form. The elements are rotated about the plane formed by the secondary and the normal. you can locate elements. Steps 1. 615 . Select the Mirror Copy Element command. At any point during this operating sequence. Field Descriptions Mirror Point – Displays the location of the specified mirror point. Angle – Specifies the angle by which to rotate the orientation tee. It realigns the Primary axis with the positive X axis. To change the displayed axis. To reset a command action by one step or to reject a highlighted element. reset a command action. reject input. the Secondary axis with the positive Y axis. and exit a command. Using the form. you can exit the command session either by pressing <Esc> or by selecting Cancel (X) on the precision input form. and the Normal axis with the positive Z axis. see Precision Input Form. For detailed information about precision input. accept input. The primary vector of the orientation tee denotes the mirror plane’s normal vector. About – Specifies the axis about which to rotate the orientation tee. To change the displayed angle. Before Using This Command You can enter all values for the placement of points through a precision input form.

EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide Addendum – February 2003 2. 3. The Orient Mirror form displays. 616 . Specify the plane on which to mirror the element. 4. The element copy displays at the specified position. Specify the point around which to mirror the element. The system highlights the specified element. the system displays the message Element not found. Identify the element you intend to mirror and copy and accept it with <D>. The primary vector of the orientation tee denotes the mirror plane’s normal vector. If you do not locate an acceptable element. 5. The message disappears when you identify a valid element. Click Accept.

then selecting Modify Group Commands. and to review or edit element annotation. Use only these EE Raceway modify commands to manipulate EE Raceway elements. 617 . Mirror Copy. The following information has been modified: Rotate. You can use individual Modify Group commands to move. • The Modify Group commands define and manipulate groups within a design file. Groups are temporary associations of Raceway and other elements in your model.Modify Group Commands (replaces 9. You can also propagate onelines in a particular group using these commands.3) Note: The information in this section supersedes the information in the corresponding section of previous versions of the EE Raceway Reference Guide (pp 229-230 in the PDS 7. Doing so will cause serious problems and/or destroy the EE Raceway model.1 version of the document). Rotate Copy. Note: Do not use MicroStation commands to manipulate or modify EE Raceway elements (one-line. and so forth). The Modify Group commands allow you first to define a group of elements and then to manipulate the group in part or as a whole. Mirror. and Move Group commands See the following text for details. then selecting Palette. and delete elements of specified groups. annotation. or by selecting Modify from the EERWAY Command Menu Bar. The Modify Group palette is activated by selecting the Modify Group command from the Modify palette. copy. three-lines.

reviews. Propagate Element by Group — Expands some or all one-line elements of a specified group into three-dimensional elements. 618 . Mirror Copy Group – Copies and mirrors some or all elements from a specified group to a new location in the design file. Rotate Group – Rotates some or all elements of a specified group to a new location in the design file. and edits intelligent annotation for raceway elements within a specified group.EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide Addendum – February 2003 Topics Define Group — Identifies raceway elements for inclusion in a particular group. Annotate Element by Group — Places. Minimize Joints by Group — Reduces to a minimum the number of vertices of some or all one-lines in a specified group. Place Fitting by Rule Group — Places non-standard fittings using a set of rules defined in the reference database. Mirror Group – Mirrors some or all elements from a specified group to a new location in the design file. Delete Element by Group — Removes from the design file some or all elements of a specified group. Rotate Copy Group – Copies and rotates some or all elements from a specified group to a new location in the design file. Move Group – Moves some or all elements from a specified group to a new location in the design file. Replace Systems Group — Changes the defined active system type of a one-line. Copy Element by Group — Copies within the design file some or all elements of a specified group. Add Systems Group — Defines multiple systems for a single one-line. Clone Group — Copies a group multiple times in the same direction.

drop points. route one-lines. click the button for the plane and type the angle in the Angle field. all attached one-lines will be rerouted to the new position of the RCP. The selected elements are rotated about the east-west axis passing through the rotation point. accept input. East Elevation – Specifies the angle at which to rotate the group on the east elevation plane. All associated annotation. Field Descriptions Rotation Point – Displays the location of the rotation point. For detailed information about precision input. RCPs. North Elevation – Specifies the angle at which to rotate the group on the north elevation plane. If an RCP is rotated. and equipment pointers will also be moved. reject input. 619 . You can use this command to move one-lines. Plan View – Specifies the angle at which to rotate the group on the plan view plane. The selected elements are rotated about the north-south axis passing through the rotation point. three-line fittings.Rotate Group This command rotates a group of raceway elements as specified within the design file. You must be familiar with precision input and its functions before using this command. The selected elements are rotated about the up-down axis passing through the rotation point. Angle – Key-in field used to specify the angle for each plane. To change the angle. reset a command action. three-line fittings. see Precision Input Form. Before Using This Command You can enter all values for the placement of points through a precision input form. and exit a command. If a one-line is rotated. equipment pointers. Using the form. and annotation. all attached RCPs will be moved and all attached one-lines will be rerouted to the new one-line position. and equipment pointers will also be moved. you can locate elements. All associated annotation.

5. you can accept or reject constituent elements and set the rotation point and planes for each accepted element. If you do not locate an acceptable group. Click Accept. Note: These steps are applicable for groups in Entire Group mode. 2. Select the Rotate Group command. the system displays the message Group not found. you can exit the command session either by pressing <Esc> or by selecting Cancel (X) on the precision input form. 620 .EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide Addendum – February 2003 At any point during this operating sequence. Steps 1. The Rotate Group precision input form displays. The group rotates to the specified position. For groups in Single Element mode. The system highlights the specified group. Specify the point around which to rotate the group. 4. Specify the planes and angles at which to rotate the group. To reset a command action by one step or to reject a highlighted element. Identify the group you intend to rotate and accept it with <D>. press <R> or select Reject on the precision input form. The message disappears when you identify a valid group. 3. The Specify Rotation form displays.

reset a command action. see Precision Input Form. Using the form. accept input. reject input. you can exit the command session either by pressing <Esc> or by selecting Cancel (X) on the precision input form. click the button for the plane and type the angle in the Angle field. Steps 1. Plan View – Specifies the angle at which to rotate the group on the plan view plane. North Elevation – Specifies the angle at which to rotate the group on the north elevation plane. route one-lines. The selected elements are rotated about the east-west axis passing through the rotation point. Select the Rotate Copy Group command. and exit a command. Field Descriptions Rotation Point – Displays the location of the rotation point. The selected elements are rotated about the north-south axis passing through the rotation point. For detailed information about precision input. you can locate elements. To change the angle. press <R> or select Reject on the precision input form. You must be familiar with precision input and its functions before using this command.Rotate Copy Group This command creates a rotated copy of a group of raceway elements as specified within the design file. To reset a command action by one step or to reject a highlighted element. Angle – Key-in field used to specify the angle for each plane. East Elevation – Specifies the angle at which to rotate the group on the east elevation plane. Before Using This Command You can enter all values for the placement of points through a precision input form. 621 . At any point during this operating sequence. The selected elements are rotated about the up-down axis passing through the rotation point.

Identify the group you intend to rotate and copy and accept it with <D>. Specify the planes and angles at which to rotate the group. Click Accept. The group copy displays at the specified position. If you do not locate an acceptable group. Note: These steps are applicable for groups in Entire Group mode. you can accept or reject constituent elements and set the rotation point and planes for each accepted element. The Specify Rotation form displays. 3. 4. For groups in Single Element mode. The message disappears when you identify a valid group. Specify the point around which to rotate the group. 2. 5.EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide Addendum – February 2003 The Rotate Copy Group precision input form displays. 622 . The system highlights the specified group. the system displays the message Group not found.

toggle among the three axes (Primary. Before Using This Command You can enter all values for the placement of points through a precision input form. you can locate elements. reject input. the Secondary axis with the positive Y axis.Mirror Group This command flips a group of raceway elements about a point as specified within the design file. Using the form. Angle – Specifies the angle by which to rotate the orientation tee. All associated annotation. If one-lines are mirrored. All associated annotation. To change the displayed axis. Field Descriptions Mirror Point – Displays the location of the specified mirror point. The elements are rotated about the plane formed by the secondary and the normal. route one-lines. To change the displayed angle. three-line fittings. and exit a command. see Precision Input Form. The primary vector of the orientation tee denotes the mirror plane’s normal vector. and equipment pointers will also be moved. all attached RCPs will be moved and all attached one-lines will be rerouted to the new one-line position. three-line fittings. select the field and type a new angle. all attached one-lines will be rerouted to the new position of the RCP. At any point during this operating sequence. reset a command action. About – Specifies the axis about which to rotate the orientation tee. You must be familiar with precision input and its functions before using this command. For detailed information about precision input. Secondary. To reset a 623 . If an RCP is rotated. you can exit the command session either by pressing <Esc> or by selecting Cancel (X) on the precision input form. Normal) until the appropriate axis displays. It realigns the Primary axis with the positive X axis. and the Normal axis with the positive Z axis. accept input. I Button – Reorients the orientation tee along the identity matrix. and equipment pointers will also be moved.

EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide Addendum – February 2003 command action by one step or to reject a highlighted element. Note: These steps are applicable for groups in Entire Group mode. 5. Steps 1. Select the Mirror Group command. Specify the point about which to mirror the group. The system highlights the specified group. The Orient Mirror form displays. If you do not locate an acceptable group. For groups in Single Element mode. 624 . The Mirror Group precision input form displays. you can accept or reject constituent elements and set the mirror point and mirror plane for each accepted element. 2. 4. Specify the mirror plane on which to mirror the group. The message disappears when you identify a valid group. The group moves to the specified position. Identify the group you intend to mirror and accept it with <D>. press <R> or select Reject on the precision input form. 3. the system displays the message Group not found. Click Accept.

The elements are rotated about the plane formed by the secondary and the normal. you can exit the command session either by pressing <Esc> or by selecting Cancel (X) on the precision input form. Angle – Specifies the angle by which to rotate the orientation tee. Normal) until the appropriate axis displays. Select the Mirror Copy Group command. Steps 1. For detailed information about precision input. reset a command action. I Button – Reorients the orientation tee along the identity matrix. It realigns the Primary axis with the positive X axis. see Precision Input Form. you can locate elements. and exit a command. press <R> or select Reject on the precision input form. The primary vector of the orientation tee denotes the mirror plane’s normal vector. route one-lines. About – Specifies the axis about which to rotate the orientation tee. To change the displayed angle. the Secondary axis with the positive Y axis. Before Using This Command You can enter all values for the placement of points through a precision input form. reject input. Field Descriptions Mirror Point – Displays the location of the specified mirror point. accept input. You must be familiar with precision input and its functions before using this command. To change the displayed axis. toggle among the three axes (Primary. At any point during this operating sequence. The Mirror Copy Group precision input form displays. To reset a command action by one step or to reject a highlighted element. 625 . select the field and type a new angle. Using the form.Mirror Copy Group This command creates a mirrored copy of a group of raceway elements as specified within the design file. Secondary. and the Normal axis with the positive Z axis.

Click Accept. you can accept or reject constituent elements and set the mirror point and mirror plane for each accepted element. The message disappears when you identify a valid group. 626 . Note: These steps are applicable for groups in Entire Group mode. The system highlights the specified group. If you do not locate an acceptable group. the system displays the message Group not found. Specify the point around which to mirror the group. Identify the group you intend to mirror and copy and accept it with <D>.EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide Addendum – February 2003 2. For groups in Single Element mode. The Orient Mirror form displays. Specify the plane on which to mirror the group. 4. The group copy displays at the specified position. 5. 3.

If you do not locate an acceptable group. accept input. you can locate elements. you can exit the command session either by pressing <Esc> or by selecting Cancel (X) on the precision input form. reset a command action. Steps 1. The message disappears when you identify a valid group. The system highlights the specified group. Using the form. and exit a command. For detailed information about precision input. Specify an origin point from which to move the group. At any point during this operating sequence. reject input. Before Using This Command You can enter all values for the placement of points through a precision input form. To reset a command action by one step or to reject a highlighted element. You must be familiar with precision input and its functions before using this command. Select the Move Group command. the system displays the message Group not found. The Move Group precision input form displays. see Precision Input Form. Specify a placement point to which to move the group. route one-lines. The group moves to the specified position. 2. press <R> or select Reject on the precision input form. 3. Identify the group you intend to move and accept it with <D>.Move Group This command moves a group of raceway elements to a new location in the design file. 4. 627 .

The sheet number should be unique for each drawing. 628 . —OR — Select Cancel (X) to exit the command without saving your changes. The Load Database process. If you toggled Display to On. toggle the Display fields in the form to On. If you want to display the annotation in the model. The following information has been modified: Automatic sheet number See the following text for details. Select the Annotate Model command. 4. This command cannot prevent the duplication of sheet numbers within a project. Select the Column value field for sheet on the form and key in a new sheet number.EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide Addendum – February 2003 Annotate Model Note: The information in this section supersedes the information in the corresponding section of previous versions of the EE Raceway Reference Guide (p. 285 in the PDS 7.dgn file name of the raceway model. 3. will prevent such duplication. you are prompted to place the annotation in the model. the sheet number is automatically set to match the . Steps 1. Select Confirm to accept the new annotation. however. • This command adds or changes the annotation for the model.1 version of the document). The Annotate Element form displays. 2. If the user does not specify a sheet number.

Propagated/Sparse – Specify whether you want to attach the sparse model or the corresponding propagated model.1 version of the document). — Attach by Area – Attaches all model in the selected design area. 629 . click Attach. Parameters Disciplines – Lists all disciplines. Area/Model – Specifies whether to attach all models in a design area or an individual model. Areas – Lists all design areas defined in the active project. — Attach by Model – Displays all models in the design area so you can select which model you want to attach. click Attach. then. Select the discipline that contains the model you want to attach. Display Toggle – Specify whether to display the reference model in the active model views. then. Select the design area that contains the model you want to attach. and Locate toggles See the following text for details. This option only displays if you are attaching a structural model.2) Note: The information in this section supersedes the information in the corresponding section of previous versions of the EE Raceway Reference Guide (pp 372-373 in the PDS 7. Snap Toggle –Allows you to snap to any segment in the reference file.Reference PDS Model (replaces 16. Snap. The following information has been modified: Display. The model to attach can be from any discipline and design area in the project. • The Reference PDS Model command attaches and detaches models from the PDS project to the model as reference files.

Apply To Discipline – Defines the settings for the Display. Apply To All – Defines the settings for the Display. or Locate toggles for all the attached models in all disciplines. 630 . or Locate toggles for the all attached models in the discipline of the selected model. Snap. You must select a Discipline and a Design Area before you can select a reference model to attach. Snap.EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide Addendum – February 2003 Locate Toggle – Allows you to data point to any component in the reference file. Show Attachments – Displays all reference models attached to the active model. Exit – Exits the Reference Model command. You must click Show Attachments and select the reference model you want to detach before clicking Detach. Detach – Detaches the selected reference model. Attach – Attaches a reference model.

Note: For project databases created with EE Raceway versions prior to 7. PROJECT_LOCATION. Column Name mslink panel panel_descrip ee_approv_status ee_approv_date ee_create_date ee_last_rev_dat ee_eqp_table ee_part_key Type integer Char( 20) Char( 20) integer Char( 26) Char( 26) Char( 26) Char( 32) Char( 28) Index uniq dups no no no no no no no Null no yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes 631 . • This section lists and describes the tables in the EE Raceway project database schema. Note: An asterisk (*) indicates that you must not modify the column name. it is necessary to use the ee72upg. You should not modify those column names having a prefix of "ee_". panel This table contains information about all panels/equipment found in the drawing. Before running the upgrade utility.exe utility in the \eenuc\bin folder to add the new pds_east. pds_north. and EE_SCHEMA. and includes detailed information about the columns that comprise each table. use EE Configure to verify that values are set for EERD_TBLS.exe file See the following text for details.1 version of the document). The following information has been modified: PDS coordinates in Panel table • Note about ee72upg. and pds_elev columns to the panel and msconfig tables of the existing project database.EE Raceway Project Database Schema Description (replaces panel) Note: The information in this section supersedes the information in the corresponding section of previous versions of the EE Raceway Reference Guide (pp 487 and 500 in the PDS 7.2.

ee_eqp_table: the column containing the name of the reference database table that contains additional equipment information. pds_north: the column containing the PDS north coordinate of the panel (calculated by Load Database). ee_last_rev_dat: the column containing the date the panel/equipment was last revised. ee_approv_status: the column containing the approval status of the panel/equipment. 632 . panel: the column containing the panel/equipment name panel_descrip: the column containing the panel/equipment description. pds_elev: the column containing the PDS elevation coordinate of the panel (calculated by Load Database). ee_create_date: the column containing the panel/equipment creation date. ee_part_key: the column containing the unique key to the appropriate record of equipment information in the reference database table. pds_east: the column containing the PDS east coordinate of the panel (calculated by Load Database).EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide Addendum – February 2003 pds_east pds_north pds_elev real real real no no no yes yes yes mslink: a unique integer value used by the software to identify a row in the panel table. ee_approv_date: the column containing the date when the approval status changed.

EE File Structure (replaces Appendix F) Note: The information in this section supersedes the information in the corresponding section of previous versions of the EE Raceway Reference Guide (pp 529-540 in the PDS 7. The directory tree for EENUC and EERWAY is shown below. It also describes the contents of directories and some files. It identifies those files you can modify. By default. the PDS Component Loader delivers these files to /win32app/ingr/. • This section describes the file structure for EE Nucleus and EE Raceway.1 version of the document). The following information has been modified: Windows folder listings replace CLIX directory structure See the following text for details. 633 .

\eenuc directory: \eenuc \eenuc\bin \eenuc\data \eenuc\db \eenuc\doc \eenuc\font \eenuc\forms 634 . The product may reside on any file system. The following files exist under the .EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide Addendum – February 2003 EE Nucleus File Structure EE Nucleus (EE Nuc) is the core product for the EE product line.. The list may differ slightly depending on which options are selected during installation. EE Nucleus will reside under the win32app\ingr\eenuc directory.

EErc – File containing global symbol definitions. eenuc — readme. — batch – process that reports the exit status of a process run in batch mode. problems. and EE Raceway.\eenuc\help \eenuc\msg \eenuc\share \eenuc\sym The following list gives a brief description of some of the files. and then invokes the EE environment. INFORMIX. The files are grouped by directory.txt – file containing description of product features and any fixes.exe – command used to remove EE Nucleus from the machine. The EE executable files set up variables specifying the location of MicroStation. — background – process that reports the exit status of a process run in the background. — remove.txt – File containing release notices. comments. — . 635 . bin – contains the EE executable files and the environment process. — license. EE Nucleus. etc.txt– copyright notice file. — dba_shell. — create_db – create database process. — dba_rpt – DBAccess report process.cmd – command executed around dba_rpt. — EEnotice.

— Eemgr. Required DBAccess files are also delivered in this directory.exe – executable command that updates the EE Raceway Project Database. — mscrecol. — menu_shel.cmd – command to create mscolumns table for reference database.dat – ASCII file for output file management. forms – directory that contains all the environment forms. db – directory that contains the DB Access menu library (mgrdba_lib). data – Contains the ASCII files used to control certain environment procedures. — eeprj.bat – batch file to print 132 column reports to the laser printer. doc – directory that contains documentation.cmd – command executed around eemgr to run the Edit Database process.EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide Addendum – February 2003 — ee72upg. — eeqpr.dat – ASCII file for manager function management. — print.exe – environment process.exe – Electrical Engineer manager environment executable. — reeprj – remote environment process. 636 . help msg – contains EE Nucleus message files. share sym – contains EE symbol files. — manager. — eeconfig – file that maintains EE product configuration for workstation/server. — dba* files – DB Access files.

\eerway \eerway\bin \eerway\data \eerway\db \eerway\dgn 637 .EE Raceway File Structure This section lists and describes the directories and files delivered with EE Raceway.

txt – file containing a description of the product features and any fixes. eerway — readme.EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide Addendum – February 2003 \eerway\doc \eerway\eden \eerway\mdlapps \eerway\msg \eerway\report \eerway\sym \eerway\tmp Delivered empty The following list gives a brief description of some of the files. comments. 638 . etc. The files are grouped by directory. problems.

— remove.unl files required for bulk loading special tables and the mscatalog table in the project database. Also contains .exe – executable file used to remove EE Raceway from the machine. bin – contains all process delivered with the EE Raceway product. Sample . available cell libraries. dgn – Contains the seed file directory.dat – controls Eden processes.dat – controls standard report management. and clean database processes. — report. These files can be modified. — eden. — rway_schma. — rule_chk. — idet – Interference Detection Envelope File Creation process.dat – controls rule check report management. data – Contains the ASCII files used to control process and report management for the EE Raceway product. and any design files delivered with the product. unload drawing. — process. — load – processor to load the project database. — rmon – Controlling processor for interactive manipulations.dgn – displays the structure of the EE Schema. 639 .unl files for bulk loading reference database tables are also provided. db – Contains the delivered sql files for the project and reference database. — unload_cln – contains the unload sheet.dat – controls process management.

640 .dgn – explains the structure of the Raceway views.EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide Addendum – February 2003 — rway_view.

These messages can be edited but messages cannot be added. doc – contains documentation information on EE Raceway including README files from previous releases. — error. — prompt. These messages can be edited but messages cannot be added. — eden.dgn – delivered metric drawing seed file. mdlapps msg – Contains EE Raceway message files and the file to correlate key-ins to EE Raceway commands. eden – contains the Eden symbol library. This may be customized. — msseed.msg – message file containing all messages for the command field. This may be customized.cmd – file used to correlate key-ins to commands. This file can be extended.lib – the Eden symbol library file. — alias. — command.— seed – contains the available seed design files.msg – message file containing all error messages for the error field. These messages can be edited but messages cannot be added.dgn – delivered English drawing seed file. 641 . — seed.msg – message file containing all messages for the prompt field.

arc file for each report listed below.EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide Addendum – February 2003 — rway_prj. 642 .sym – symbol file for the bar menu.sym – symbol file for the panel menu.tbl – file containing the entity numbers for the project database tables. This directory also contains the available precision input forms. and logo.ace and an . These messages can be edited but messages cannot be added. — rwaybar. There is an .ace)and compiled (. tmp – Holds any temporary files.tbl – file containing the entity numbers for the reference database tables. The software requires this directory. — status. sym – Contains all symbol files for EE Raceway menus. The source files may be edited by the user.arc) SQL files for all delivered sch reports.msg – message file containing messages for status field. — rway_ref. report – Contains the source (. — rwaydba_lib – DB Access template library. prompting messages. — rwaypnl.

635 EE Raceway.Index annotate model. 629 EE file structure. 624 model annotate. 622 Rotate Element command. 602 Intergrated Commands. 630 reference schema load. 630 Load Reference Schema command. 604 design. 626 Mirror Element command. 602 EERway. 605 modify element. 605 EE Raceway. 616 Mirror Copy Group command. 610 Rotate Group command. 616 modify. 618 move. 606. 635 Raceway file structure. 634 EE Nucleus. 608 Modify Group commands. 620 rotate copy. 602 model commands. 612 Rotate Copy Group command. 614 Mirror Group command. 630 Reference PDS Model command. 634 Nucleus file structure. 599 Mirror Copy Element command. 618 runtime setup. 610. 601 643 . 629 Modify Element commands. 620 schema load reference. 622 intergrated commands Reference PDS Model. 607 modify. 608 rotate copy. 604. 638 group mirror. 629 Annotate Model command. 624 mirror copy. 608 modify group. 612 file structure EE. 599 utilities. 626 modify. 628 rotate. 614 mirror copy. 638 element mirror. 618 Move Group command. 628 palettes bar commands. 599 Rotate Copy Element command. 606 PDS reference model. 607 setup.

03.00. .** This document supplements DPDS3-PB-200005C.EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide Addendum October 2004 DPDS3-PB-200005D For PDS version 07.

...........................................652 645 ........647 Reference PDS Model (replaces 16..............650 Appendix A Error Messages.......................................................................................................................646 Using the Integrated Commands ...................................................648 Area Volume Graphics...........................................................................................................Table of Contents Integrated Commands (replaces 16) .......................................................2)...........

646 . providing greater interoperability among the various disciplines. These commands allow you to review an element’s attributes. display information about the reference models attached to the current model. Note: The Integrated Commands are only available when running EE Raceway inside PDS. and view the area volume graphics for clash and design areas. not when running standalone EE Raceway. review the PDS clashes in a model. create a window containing a specific element. The following information has been modified: Area Volume Graphics command See the following text for details. then selecting Palette from the resulting pull-down menu. The Integrated Commands palette is activated by selecting Integrated Commands from the EE Raceway File Menu Bar. • The Integrated Commands are common to EE Raceway and several other PDS modules.1 version of the document).EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide Addendum – October 2004 Integrated Commands (replaces 16) Note: The information in this section supersedes the information in the corresponding section of previous versions of the EE Raceway Reference Guide (pp 369-370 in the PDS 7.

Review PDS Clash – You must first have run IFC Clash Detection. 647 . Group Workflow There is no required or suggested sequence for using the commands in this group. you can use these commands throughout the design session. Area Volume Graphics – You must turn Construction Graphics on in MicroStation. Operating Information See individual command descriptions for specific operating information. Before Using These Commands Review PDS Attributes – You must have an existing component in the active model or in an attached PDS reference file. and must have an existing clash in the design area. Window to Named PDS Item – You must have existing items in the active model or in an attached PDS reference file. See the command description for more details.Using the Integrated Commands When to Use These Commands Once you have performed the necessary setups. Reference PDS Model – There are no prerequisite conditions for using this command.

click Attach. — Attach by Area – Attaches all model in the selected design area. Parameters Disciplines – Lists all disciplines. Select the design area that contains the model you want to attach. Display Toggle – Specify whether to display the reference model in the active model views. • The Reference PDS Model command attaches and detaches models from the PDS project to the model as reference files. then. The default value for this toggle is Propagated.EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide Addendum – October 2004 Reference PDS Model (replaces 16. Select the discipline that contains the model you want to attach.2) Note: The information in this section supersedes the information in the corresponding section of previous versions of the EE Raceway Reference Guide (pp 629-630 in the PDS 7. Propagated/Sparse – Specify whether you want to attach the sparse model or the corresponding propagated model. The model to attach can be from any discipline and design area in the project. Area/Model – Specifies whether to attach all models in a design area or an individual model. This option only displays if you are attaching a structural model. The following information has been modified: Added default value for Sparse/Propagated toggle. Snap Toggle –Allows you to snap to any segment in the reference file. click Attach. — Attach by Model – Displays all models in the design area so you can select which model you want to attach. Locate Toggle – Allows you to data point to any component in the reference file.2 version of the document). Areas – Lists all design areas defined in the active project. 648 . then. See the following text for details.

Detach – Detaches the selected reference model. You must click Show Attachments and select the reference model you want to detach before clicking Detach. or Locate toggles for all the attached models in all disciplines. Apply To All – Defines the settings for the Display. You must select a Discipline and a Design Area before you can select a reference model to attach. 649 . or Locate toggles for the all attached models in the discipline of the selected model. Attach – Attaches a reference model. Snap. Show Attachments – Displays all reference models attached to the active model.Apply To Discipline – Defines the settings for the Display. Exit – Exits the Reference Model command. Snap.

the following system environment variables must be defined to control the symbology and level of the volumes in the Piping. 650 . you must turn on the Constructions view attribute. Hilite Graphics . double-click the desired discipline. In addition. Please refer to the Project Administrator Reference Guide for information on changing the volume graphic symbology. click Add/Revise Graphics. and FrameWorks Plus environments.EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide Addendum – October 2004 Area Volume Graphics The Area Volume Graphics command displays the interference checking and design areas in the model so that you can see their location.Highlights the area in the model. and double-click the desired area name. Raceway. you can control the symbology of the volume graphics using the PDS Drawing Annotation Category Data option in the Project Data Manager in Project Administrator.Updates areas that are already displayed in the model. You can activate the View Attributes dialog box by pressing CTRL+B. Commands Place Diagonal Lines . Raceway. Equipment. and FrameWorks Plus environments: AREA_VOLUME_GRAPHICS_COLOR AREA_VOLUME_GRAPHICS_WEIGHT AREA_VOLUME_GRAPHICS_STYLE AREA_VOLUME_GRAPHICS_LEVEL Please refer to the Project Setup Technical Reference for more information on setting environment variables. Update Graphics . To add graphics. PE_HVAC. For the Drawing Graphics environment. Before you can see the volumes in the Equipment. Remove Graphics .Removes the selected area from the model. Add/Revise Graphics – Adds design area volume graphics to the model. PE_HVAC. Use this command if the boundaries of the area are changed.Displays diagonal lines within the volume marker for easier identification in the model.

Can be used to exit any of the other commands on this dialog box at any stage.Closes the dialog box and exits the command.Show – Displays all the design areas attached to the model. 651 . Exit .

Recovery: Make corrections so that the system loads without errors. Asid <numeric value>. fitting connected to invalid system! Reason: The fitting is attached to a one-line or RCP belonging to a system that failed to load. <string> connected to invalid system! Reason: The element belongs to a system that failed to load. The likely reason for the error and the recovery are listed with the error message wherever this is possible. Recovery: Use the Set Active One-Line Type to set an active one-line type. Active Raceway type not found Reason: There is no active one-line type defined in the design file. Ambiguous Command Reason: The command name you keyed in is not unique. Recovery: Key in an acceptable command name. 652 .1 version of the document).EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide Addendum – October 2004 Appendix A Error Messages Note: The information in this section supersedes the information in the corresponding section of previous versions of the EE Raceway Reference Guide (pp 377-414 in the PDS 7. See the following text for details. • This appendix has an alphabetical listing of error messages you may receive when you are running EE Raceway Modeling. The following information has been modified: Changed color range from 0-127 to 0-255 in Color error message. fitting connected to invalid oneline! Reason: The fitting is connected to a one-line that failed to load. Recovery: Make corrections so that the system loads without errors. Recovery: Make corrections so that the one-line loads without errors. Asid <numeric value>. Asid <numeric value>.

Recovery: Make corrections so that the system will load without errors. Recovery: Change element annotation. Asid <numeric value>. <string> has invalid codelist value! Reason: Element annotation does not match with entries in a codelist table. Recovery: Make corrections to the RCP so that it loads without errors.Asid <numeric value>. Asid <numeric value>. raceway connect point connected to invalid system! Reason: The RCP belongs to a system that failed to load. then the given specification does not have that part defined in its part table. Recovery: Review the fitting in the design. Recovery: Make corrections so that the system will load without errors. Asid <numeric value>. Asid:<numeric value> <string> 653 . Recovery: Make corrections so that the one-line will load without errors. raceway connect point has invalid codelist value! Reason: Element annotation does not match with entries in a codelist table. If the fitting is a specification-driven part. straight connected to invalid oneline! Reason: The straight is attached to a one-line that failed to load. part could not be found for fitting! Reason: A part matching the description of the fitting could not be found in the part table. <string> not on valid raceway connect point! Reason: The element is attached to an RCP that failed to load. Asid <numeric value>. Asid <numeric value>. Asid <numeric value>. Recovery: Change element annotation. straight connected to invalid system! Reason: The straight is attached to a one-line belonging to a system that failed to load.

digits. Reason: There is a corrupt one-line segment or the system user element has been removed. If the problem persists. 654 . Bad user data in design file: cannot continue! Reason: Element has been corrupted. Cannot attach to database Reason: The database does not exist or you do not have privilege. or ". Invalid olt on oneline. Recovery: Contact Intergraph support. Cannot Override <string> Reason: The field or key cannot be overridden. "$". Cannot convert to RAD50: <<string>> Reason: A key-in contains characters that cannot be converted to RAD50. Cannot Place Cross Section. Recovery: Give the correct filename or access to the file. Recovery: None. call Intergraph support. Bad user data on raceway element Reason: Element has been corrupted. Invalid sys on oneline. Recovery: The program will restore the original text.EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide Addendum – October 2004 Reason: Display the element’s asid number along with a message. Cannot Place Cross Section. Cannot access filelist <string>! Reason: The file containing the filelist is not available. Recovery: Be sure the database exists and that you have privilege. Recovery: Key-in in only characters.". when highlighting by sector and word. Recovery: Contact Intergraph support. Reason: There is a corrupt one-line segment or the one-line type user element has been removed. Recovery: Verify that a valid one-line type is active. and replace the one-line.

Recovery: Key in another column number for the given table. Recovery: None. Column does not exist Reason: The given column number is greater than the number of columns in the table.ins is not in the proper location. Recovery: Have the system manager place the file where it belongs. Recovery: Use the Delete command to remove the associated one-lines and then replace them. call Intergraph support. Either the element was removed externally or this design file is not a Raceway or PDS design file. Could Not Read PDS Data Element Reason: The PDS user element is not found in the design file. Recovery: Enter a new value within the range 0 to 255. If the problem persists. Recovery: Either key in another name or delete the cell from the cell library so it may be recreated. Recovery: Contact Intergraph support. and replace the one-line. Could not find alias file Reason: The alias file containing the command names and acceptable key. Could not find a cross section on one line Reason: Cross section was removed using the Delete command. Color not in range 0 to 255 Reason: The input is not within the valid range for a color. Cell exists in library: <string> Reason: During cell creation. Cell <string> not found in library Reason: The cell name you keyed in does not exist in the cell library.Recovery: Verify that a valid system is active. 655 . Corrupt or no informational link on raceway element Reason: Element has been corrupted. the name input already exists in the attached cell library. Recovery: Key in another cell name.

Recovery: Export EE_CURPRJ = <current or project directory> Could not get defaults from reference db Reason: Entries for element not found in reference database. Could not get one line type from user data. Could not open logfile <string> Reason: A number of factors may result in this error.EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide Addendum – October 2004 Could not find EE_CURPRJ. Could not open file <string> Reason: No permission to open file or the file does not exist. Reason: Corrupt user data on one-line or RCP. Could not open <string> Reason: No permission to open file or the file does not exist. Could not get one line type part table from user data. Recovery: Check the file permissions and the existence of the file. Reason: Environment variable EE_CURPRJ needs to be exported in order to run this process from the command line. Please export this variable. Could not read one-line user element Reason: Rmon could not read the one-line user element. 656 . Recovery: Replace the corrupted element or call Intergraph support. Recovery: There are various recoveries. Could not open design file Reason: No permission to open file or the file does not exist. Reason: Corrupt user data on one-line or RCP. Recovery: Check the file permissions and the existence of the file. Recovery: Replace the corrupted element or call Intergraph support. based on cause of error. Recovery: Add entries to appropriate tables. Recovery: Check the file permissions and the existence of the file.

Could not read the PDS 2 user element Reason: The Raceway design file was not created using a PDS or EE Raceway seed file. Could not read the PDS 1 user element Reason: The Raceway design file was not created using a PDS or EE Raceway seed file. Defaults do not exist for <string> key = <string> 657 . Recovery: Check to see that the design file has a type 63 element and at least 7 blocks in it. Cutback Error at oneline <numeric value> Reason: Problems occurred in calculating the cutback from the fitting at the end of a oneline. Could not read system user element Reason: Rmon could not read the system user element. Recovery: None. Could not write to TCB. status = <numeric value> Reason: The process tried to write a TCB variable to the design file. Recovery: Change the value to one that appears in the codelist table. Recovery: None. Could not retrieve specifications for key <string> Reason: You key in a value for the key to the secondary table.Recovery: Check to see that the design file has a type 63 element and at least 7 blocks in it. Could not retrieve codelist values Reason: The value placed in the codelist column does not appear in the codelist table. Recovery: Check to see that the design file has a type 63 element and at least 7 blocks in it. Recovery: Make sure you have write access to the design file. Could not read the Raceway user element Reason: Rmon could not read the Raceway user element. Recovery: Key in a new key value.

Elbow Error with cutback <numeric value> at index <numeric value>.EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide Addendum – October 2004 Reason: An entry in the database does not exist for the specified key. The database is case-dependent. Recovery: Enter design filename. insert it into the reference database. so it will go past the previous fitting or end of linestring. 658 . Reason: Acute bends are not supported in this release. Design file <string> does not exist! Reason: The referenced design file was cannot be found. Drop point cell ‘‘<string>’’ not found in library Reason: The drop point cell does not exist in the library. Reason: There was inadequate room to place fitting. Recovery: Enter correct filename. or replace the one-line so that it has enough room to create the fitting. change the spec. Recovery: Modify the radius or extension of the fitting. Recovery: Enter correct directory name. Design filename required! Reason: No filename entered. Recovery: Create a drop point cell and/or enter the correct drop point cell name in the EE Raceway defaults form. Recovery: Make sure the key is correct. Elbow Error: acute angle at oneline index <numeric value>. Recovery: Key in a filename with fewer than 128 characters. A: Error Messages Design file name <string> too long Reason: The filename you specified exceeds 128 characters. Directory <string> not found Reason: A referenced directory cannot be found. If the key does not exist.

Elbow Error: contradictory vertical directions at index <numeric value>. Element has no parent Reason: The element with the given asid has no parent element. Recovery: Enter a new asid number. Recovery: Try to rotate cross sections or place one-line again.Recovery: None. Reason: Cross section cannot be propagated around bend without being skewed. Element not found Reason: There does not exist an element with the given sector/word or asid. Elbow Error: contradictory widths at index <numeric value>. Elbow Error: skewed angle at oneline index <numeric value>. Elbow Error: contradictory heights at index <numeric value>. Recovery: Enter a new value. Recovery: Try to rotate cross sections or place one-line again. Recovery: Rotate the cross section or place one-line again. Recovery: Modify cross section dimensions. Recovery: Modify cross section dimensions. 659 . Reason: Height of the cross sections must be equal. Elbow Error: contradictory horizontal directions at index <numeric value>. Error building user data Reason: Could not build user data. Reason: The cross sections were not placed with the same vertical orientation. Reason: The cross sections were not placed with the same horizontal orientation. Reason: Widths of the cross sections must be equal.

Error could not write to design file! Reason: No write access to design file. Error closing propagation log file. Recovery: Place or annotate title block. Recovery: Make sure the pro. Recovery: Add privilege to database. Recovery: Add appropriate tables to project database. Error getting annotation information for element! Reason: Element in design file is corrupt.err file and the rway/tmp directory have read/write privileges. Propagation status may not be recorded. Recovery: Delete and replace element in design file. Error getting column names from reference for table <string>! Reason: No privilege.EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide Addendum – October 2004 Recovery: Exit the command and retry. Recovery: Add table to schema or change schema. Error could not write user element! Reason: No write access to design file. Recovery: Change access to design file. Error getting sheet name from design file! Reason: Title block not found or not annotated. Recovery: Change access to design file.err did not close properly. Error getting information from <string> table! Reason: Table not found in schema. Error getting mslinks for tables! Reason: Tables missing in project database. Error getting values from reference for table <string>! 660 . Reason: File pro.

Reason: Internal error. Recovery: Add the ee_unique table to the reference database. Error loading drawing! Reason: No privilege for operation. Recovery: Add mscodelist table to reference table.EErc file. Error initializing validity table! Reason: Mscodelist table not found. Recovery: Call Intergraph support.Reason: Values for table not found in reference database. Error initializing eden library ‘‘<string>’’. Recovery: Add entries to reference database. Error in graphic bang placement. Recovery: Correct entry. Error loading fittings! Reason: No privilege for operation. Recovery: Add privilege to database. Error invalid column name in unique table! Reason: Incorrect entry in ee_unique table. Error loading one-lines! 661 . Error loading drop point! Reason: No privilege for this operation. Recovery: Add privilege to database. Reason: Could not open Eden symbol library. Recovery: Make sure that RWAY_EDEN_LIB and EDEN_LIB are set up properly in your . Error initializing unique table! Reason: ee_unique table missing from the reference database. Recovery: Add privilege to the database.

EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide Addendum – October 2004 Reason: No privilege for operation. Recovery: Add privilege to database. Error opening database! Reason: Schema not found. Recovery: Add schema or enter correct schema name. Recovery: Add privilege to database. Recovery: Change annotation of element. one datum point. Recovery: Modify the Eden symbol. Error loading raceway connect points! Reason: No privilege for operation. 662 . Recovery: Add privilege to database. Error marking elements for deletion! Reason: ee_to_drw column missing a table. Error loading systems! Reason: No privilege for operation. Error No Placepoints or No Elements. Error loading straights! Reason: No privilege for operation. and one element. Recovery: Add columns and try again. Recovery: Add privilege to the database. Error merging annotation from design file! Reason: Element annotation columns do not match columns in project database. Recovery: Add privilege to database. Reason: The Eden symbol definition must contain at least one placepoint. Error loading to equipment! Reason: No privilege for this operation.

Recovery: Run the Create Database process with the rwayref. Recovery: Call Intergraph support.sql file. Recovery: Add schema to database or change EES_REFDB. Error parsing one-line Reason: An error occurred while parsing a one-line. Error parsing cross section Reason: An error occurred while parsing a cross section. 663 . Error opening reference database! Reason: Schema not found. ustn returned status of <numeric value>! Reason: Microstation could not open specified design file. Error parsing RCP Reason: An error occurred while parsing a raceway connect point (RCP). Recovery: Delete the one-line and place it again. Recovery: Delete the one-line containing the RCP and place it again. Recovery: Run the Create Database process with the rwayref. Error opening project database! Reason: Schema not found. Recovery: Delete the one-line containing the RCP and place it again. Recovery: Add schema to database or change schema name. Error reading TCB of design file! Reason: TCB corrupted. Recovery: Refer to Microstation documentation for recovery. Error querying ref db for mscodelist Reason: The mscodelist table does not exist or there is no connect permission.sql file.Error opening design file <string>. Error querying ref db for mscatalog Reason: The mscatalog table does not exist or there is no connect permission.

Recovery: Add privileges to database.Design file may be corrupted Reason: Could not save the symbology to the design file. Recovery: Call Intergraph support. Error reading user element of design file! Reason: User element missing or corrupt in design file. Error unloading Sheet! Reason: Sheet not found. Recovery: Add privilege. Error reading database table names! Reason: Table name in mscatalog table invalid. Error saving symbology . Recovery: Call Intergraph support. Recovery: Change file list name or protection on file list.EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide Addendum – October 2004 Error reading database column names! Reason: No access to column names. Error spawning server Reason: Could not open reference schema. Error sheet name cannot be duplicated! Reason: A drawing with the given sheet name already exists in the database. 664 . Error unloading connect points! Reason: No privilege to delete from database. The sheet name must be unique within the database. Recovery: Correct entry in mscatalog. Recovery: Enter correct sheet name. Recovery: Return to the environment and make sure you are using the correct reference schema. Recovery: Edit the sheet name. Error reading file list <string>! Reason: No access to read file list.

Recovery: Call Intergraph support.Error unloading drawing! Reason: No privilege to delete from database. Errors occurred during interference detection process! Reason: Fatal error occurred during process. Fatal error! Vector length was negative. Recovery: Read previous error messages to determine cause. Recovery: Write over the existing file or attach new file to existing file. Recovery: Add privilege to database. overwrite or append? Reason: The specified file already exists. Reason: Interference detection found an item of size = 0 (length). Reason: There was inadequate room to place fitting. File <string> exists. Recovery: None. Recovery: Add privilege to database. Errors existed during unload Reason: Errors in other procedures. Error updating row in <string> table! Reason: No privilege to write to database. The process creates a zero-length envelope. Error starting or stopping graphic bang. 665 . so it will go past the previous fitting or linestring. Fitting Cutback Error at RCP asid <numeric value>. Field may not contain an empty value Reason: Field cannot be left blank. Reason: Internal error. Recovery: Key in a value. Recovery: Fix other errors.

EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide Addendum – October 2004 Recovery: Modify the radius. Recovery: Modify cross section dimensions. or replace the one-line so that it has enough room to create the fitting. Form could not be displayed Reason: Once created. Font not in range 0 to 255 Reason: The input was not within valid range for a font. Reason: An illegal angle exists. change the spec. Try to exit and re-enter the software. Reason: Widths of cross sections are inconsistent and no reducing fitting is allowed in this case. Fitting Error: Illegal angle at RCP asid <numeric value>. Recovery: Replace the one-line that forms the illegal angle. Fitting Error: contradicting at RCP asid <numeric value>. Recovery: Call Intergraph support. at a cross. Possible memory allocation problem. Fitting Error: contradicting widths at RCP asid <numeric value>. a form could not be displayed by the software. Reason: Heights of cross sections are inconsistent. Recovery: Modify cross section dimensions. Form creation error Reason: The software could not create a form. all four one-lines must be at right angles to each other. Recovery: Try rotating cross sections or replacing the one-lines. Reason: The cross sections cannot be propagated at the fitting without being skewed. Fitting Orientation Error at RCP asid <numeric value>. Form could not be created Reason: A form could not be created by the software. For example. extension or transition of the fitting. Recovery: Fatal error. Recovery: Enter a new value within the range 0 to 255. 666 .

Form error could not find form file <string> Reason: The referenced form file could not be found in the path defined by EE_FORM_PATH. Form error reading form file <string> Reason: I-Forms could not read the referenced form file. Recovery: Remove the function name from the EERWAY_LOCKED_OUT variable in the . Recovery: Make sure the referenced form file exists in the path defined by EE_FORM_PATH which is defined in the product.Recovery: Exit and re-enter the product. Recovery: Exit and reenter the product. Forms environment not initialized Reason: Fatal error. Recovery: Enter a value within the range of -2147483648 to 2147483647. Recovery: Fix problem as specified by earlier error messages. Function locked out: no permission Reason: This function has been disallowed by the system manager. 667 ./config/assign file. Graphic group not found Reason: No elements found in the design file with the given graphic group. Recovery: Enter a value within the range of -32768 to 32767. Integer not in range -32768 to 32767: <string> Reason: The value entered exceeds the range or the input is corrupted. Integer not in range -2147483648 to 2147483647: <string> Reason: The value entered exceeds the range or the input is corrupted. Interference Detection initialization error! Reason: Could not open design filelist or read the design file. Recovery: Make sure the referenced form file exists in the path defined by EE_FORM_PATH which is defined in the product.

Recovery: Modify the reference database to contain a symbolname for each part. 668 . Reason: Could not create Eden symbol with the given criteria. For example.EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide Addendum – October 2004 Invalid annotation type Reason: Annotation of the wrong type was found inside the fence block annotation when trying to close a cell. Invalid Connection Reason: The identified RCP has a higher priority level than the identified one-line. Recovery: Change the criteria on the Manual Placement form or modify the symbol. Recovery: Key in another asid id. Invalid asid id Reason: An element cannot be found in the design file with the given asid id. Invalid drop point cell: ‘‘<string>’’ Reason: The cell is not a valid drop point. Place Title Block must be given a title block cell. <numeric value>. Recovery: Make sure the priority level of the identified RCP is less than or equal to the priority level of the one-line. Recovery: Delete the highlighted element or move it outside the fence area. Invalid Eden Processor Input. Invalid graphic group number Reason: The graphic group number is outside the valid range. Invalid cell: <string> Reason: The given cell is not the type the command expected. Reason: The symbolname is blank. Invalid height/width for cross section type <string>. Recovery: Key in a cell of the type the command is expecting. Invalid Eden Symbolname ’<string>’. Recovery: Select another graphic group number. Recovery: Create a valid drop point cell through cell creation. Reason: The height or width is less than or equal to zero.

Recovery: Key in another value. Invalid Part Found at oneline asid <numeric value>. click on the REMOVE button to delete. Invalid RCP – No one-lines attached Reason: There are no one-lines associated with the raceway connect point (RCP). Invalid mix of EDF and text: <string> Reason: Field consists of text and Enter Data Fields for the same string. Reason: The fitting at the RCP cannot be verified with the database. Invalid Part Found at RCP asid <numeric value>.quantity can not be set to 0 Reason: The value you entered is not a valid input. Recovery: You can only remove an RCP with exactly two one-lines attached. quantity must be an integer greater than 0. Recovery: Enter an integer value. Recovery: Key in a new value greater than 0. Invalid integer: <string> Reason: The value entered is not a valid integer. Recovery: Turn Part Verification off OR add the fitting to the database. Invalid RCP . If it is a cable entry. Invalid input Reason: You entered an incorrect value.Only two one-lines can be attached Reason: The RCP has more or fewer than two one-lines attached. Invalid real number: <string> 669 . For example. Recovery: Delete the RCP and place the one-line again. Invalid key in .Recovery: Modify reference database height/width for the active specification. Recovery: Make the field either all text or all EDF. Recovery: Turn Part Verification off OR add the elbow or straight to the database. vertex <numeric value>. Reason: The elbow or straight at the one-line cannot be verified with the database.

Recovery: Re-enter a valid real number. Load initialization error! Reason: Some other initialization error procedure failed. Invalid title block Reason: Not a valid title block. Recovery: Key in another title block cell name. Recovery: Enter a new value within the range of 1 to 63. Invalid ulink on element Reason: Not a valid ulink for the element.EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide Addendum – October 2004 Reason: The value entered must contain a decimal with a preceding number. Invalid response Reason: You entered an invalid response to a system prompt. Recovery: Enter a valid response. Level not in range 1 to 63 Reason: The input was not within the valid range for a level. 670 . Recovery: Delete the element and place it again or recreate the element. Invalid/No ris link on element Reason: An element with the given entity/mslink could not be found in the design file. Invalid equipment pointer cell: ‘‘<string>’’ Reason: The cell is not a valid equipment pointer. Invalid sector/word values Reason: An element could not be found at the given sector/word location in the design file. Recovery: Enter another sector/word value. Recovery: Fix other problems. Recovery: Create a valid equipment pointer through cell creation. Recovery: Enter another entity/mslink.

Must enter cell name to close Reason: You tried to close a cell without keying in a name. or RB. Recovery: Delete the highlighted area.Max run angle = <numeric value>. Mismatched annotation Reason: Annotation was found that has no parent inside of the fence area. No active one line type defined Reason: You did not define an active one-line type in the design file. CC.or RB in the justification field. Recovery: Enter LT.. current = <numeric value> Reason: The sum of all the angles in the current one-line exceeds the maximum as defined in the one-line type. Recovery: Terminate before exceeding the max. Must be LT. Recovery: Define an active one-line type using the Set Active One-Line Type command. 671 . LB. LC. More than one title block found! Reason: More than one title block exists in the design file. Multiple annotation for column <numeric value> Reason: Only one annotation element per column is allowed. Recovery: Specify a group to be active. and place the element or RCP. Reason: Invalid text justification entered. RT. CT. No active system defined Reason: You did not define an active system in the design file. No active group defined Reason: The selected group operation requires that you define an active group. Recovery: Key in a cell name to close or exit the command. CB. LC. RC. Recovery: Delete all but one of the highlighted elements.. . Recovery: Delete all but one title block.

No overrides allowed without override button on Reason: The Override button is not depressed. Recovery: Exit completely and re-enter the product. No raceway one-line type defined Reason: You must have at least one one-line type defined from the reference database in the design file. No memory available for form Reason: The forms software could not allocate enough memory for creation of the form. B. No cell library attached Reason: A cell library is not attached to the design file. No elements in fence Reason: The defined fence does not contain a valid element within its borders. Recovery: Redefine the fence to include a valid element. Recovery: Attach a cell library (rc=celllibraryname. No Duplicate Group Name Allowed Reason: The new group name matches the name of an existing group. No memory available! Recovery: Exit the process and re-enter and/or reboot the workstation. Recovery: Press the Override button and key in the value again. or C in the active specification. Reason: The cross section must be of type A.cel). Recovery: Key in another name. Recovery: Add the EE Raceway tables to the database. B.EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide Addendum – October 2004 Recovery: Define an active system using the Set Active System command. C for the cross section type. No columns available for annotation Reason: The database does not contain the EE Raceway database tables. Recovery: Modify the reference database to include A. 672 . No or Illegal Cross section type <string>.

Recovery: Add read/write permissions to file. Recovery: Populate the database. Recovery: Populate the database with parts. No valid special part tables exist Reason: There are no special parts tables in the database. No read/write access to file <string> Reason: No permission to read and write to the specified file. No valid elements in group Reason: The active group does not contain any valid elements for the specified group manipulation command. Recovery: Populate the database with parts. Recovery: Define a system from the reference database using the Define System command. No valid parts exist for this oneline type Reason: The database has no parts for this specification of the one-line type. Recovery: Make sure the active specification is in the database through Define Raceway Parameters. No valid spec keys exist for this oneline type Reason: Problem retrieving the active specification. Recovery: Populate the database. No valid spec exist for this oneline type Reason: No specifications exist in the database for this one-line type. No valid dimensions exist for this oneline type Reason: The database has no parts for this specification of the one-line type. No systems defined in this design file Reason: You must have at least one system defined from the reference database in the design file. No valid special parts exist for this table 673 .Recovery: Define a one-line type from the reference database using the Define One-Line Type command.

Not an EE RACEWAY design file Reason: The design file was not seeded with the EE Raceway seed file. One-lines do not contain same systems Recovery: Identify one-lines that contain the same systems. Reason: Eden symbol must have at least one datumpoint and at least one placepoint defined. Recovery: The design file must be created using the EE Raceway seed file. Placepoints/Datumpoints are not defined properly.EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide Addendum – October 2004 Reason: There are no special parts defined in the active table. Recovery: Populate the database. No write access to cell library Reason: The attached cell library is read only. Reason: The straight must be place with a length greater than 0. Problem retrieving symbology from one line type element. Recovery: Give length in the Length field on the Manual Placement form. Recovery: Insert the rows into the codelist table that corresponds to the column. One-line is a member of a different system Recovery: Change the active systems to that of the identified one-line. Recovery: Select another option. No values found in the codelist Reason: The codelist table contains no rows. Recovery: Attach a cell library that has read/write permissions or assign write permission to the current cell library. Placing Straight Section with No Length. 674 . Option not allowed Reason: The selected option is not allowed. Recovery: Modify the Eden symbol.

Recovery: Export EES_REFDB. Projecting oneline with asid <numeric value>. Raceway title block not found Reason: Unable to locate a title block in the design file. title block. Reference schema table missing required columns Reason: A required column in the table for the element you are annotating is NOT in the table or in the mscolumns table. Recovery: None. Recovery: Enter schema name. no rows found fitting the given criteria 675 . Recovery: Export the variable EE_SCHEMA. Recovery: Place a title block in the design file. RCP).Reason: One-line type user data corrupt on one-line OR the system symbology user elements have been corrupted. Recovery: Call Intergraph support. three-line. Raceway element not found Reason: Unable to locate a valid raceway element (one-line. Reason: This identifies which one-line is being projected. Schema name required Reason: No schema name entered. Recovery: Create the appropriate table. The required columns’ names are prefixed with "ee_". Select failed. Problem with shared memory! Reason: Internal error. Recovery: Identify one of these elements. Project schema not defined Reason: EE_SCHEMA has not been exported. Reference schema name required! Reason: EES_REFDB has not been exported.

Some fields review only Reason: Some fields are locked once you place the title block and. Text element not found Reason: A text element could not be located. therefore. Sheet Name is required Reason: No sheet name entered. Recovery: Add the missing entry into the mscatalog table by loading the mscat. 676 . Recovery: Identify a valid text element.EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide Addendum – October 2004 Reason: Could not find rows in the database fitting the specified find criteria. Sheet not found in database! Reason: Sheet name not in drawing table. Title block placed . Recovery: Specify new find criteria. Recovery: Change sheet name. Recovery: Make sure EE_SYM_FILE and EE_SYM_PATH are defined in the directory. Table number <numeric value> not in mscatalog Reason: The specified table number / table name entry does not exist in the reference database. The value must be greater than zero Reason: The width must be greater than zero. Symbol file not found: <string> Reason: The symbol file EE_SYM_FILE could not be found in the symbol path EE_SYM_PATH.unl file or inserting a row through SQL. Recovery: Enter a new value greater than zero. Recovery: Enter a new value within the range 0 to 7. Style not in range 0 to 7 Reason: The input was not within the valid range for style. cannot be edited. Recovery: Enter sheet name.

Warning Fittings at oneline <numeric value> overlap Reason: Fittings at either end of the one-line overlap. 677 . snap to the angle. Recovery: Add privileges to the database. Warning Column <string> found in reference. Recovery: None Unload initialization error! Reason: No privilege to read table or column names. not in project! Reason: The referenced column was found in the reference not the project database. Warning Drawing not valid type! Reason: The title block annotation does not match the annotation type table. Too many one-lines at RCP <numeric value> Reason: Cannot propagate with this many one lines. The system cannot calculate the height and direction of projection of this complex shape. Recovery: Place a manual fitting. Recovery: Highlight the cell with that Asid and look to see if an envelope needs to be built for the complex shape in that cell. Recovery: Modify the specification or parts through annotation OR modify or replace the one-lines. To ensure a measure of 90 degrees. Rebuild cell so that the complex shape meets a line or surface at 90 degrees. Recovery: Change the title block annotation. Truncated <numeric value> characters Reason: The number of characters allowed in the field has been exceeded by <numeric value> characters. Recovery: If necessary. you can add a column to the project database and copy the values over. Warning Cannot calculate envelope for non-planar complex shape with Asid = <numeric value> Reason: Found a cell containing a complex shape which does not meet any lines or surfaces at a 90 degree angle.Recovery: None.

you must key in a group name. Recovery: Accept or reject the system selection form. Recovery: Make sure EE_SYM_PATH is defined in the ./config/assign file and that its value is a full path. Recovery: Key in the desired group name.EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide Addendum – October 2004 Warning invalid form path: <string> Reason: The form path EE_FORM_PATH could not be found. Warning must keyin a group name Reason: When performing the selected group operation. 678 ./config/assign file and that its value is a full path. Warning must accept/reject System selection Reason: You must accept/reject the system selection form before performing a group operation. Weight not in range 0 to 31 Reason: The input was not in the valid range for weight. Recovery: Enter a new value within the range of 0 to 31. Recovery: Make sure EE_FORM_PATH is defined in the . Recovery: Accept or reject the one-line type selection form. Warning must accept/reject One Line Type selection Reason: You must accept/reject the one-line type selection form before performing a group operation. Warning invalid symbol path: <string> Reason: The symbol path EE_SYM_PATH could not be found.

.........650 error messages ................................................................................648 PDS reference model ....................646 Area Volume Graphics .............................................. 648 Reference PDS Model command............. 650 679 .............Index Area Volume Graphics command ......................652 integrated commands...........650 Reference PDS Model .............. 648 volume graphics displaying ..................................................

Sign up to vote on this title
UsefulNot useful